,ΡΟ 258 
 
 .064 
 
 1828 
 ,Copy 1 
 
 Pi 
 
Glass J2A&£& 
 
 * 
 

 • 
 
 Γ 
 
 φ-• t 
 
eu* 
 
 < Aft* sr /'</!£ 
 
 
(.OODRKH s GREEK GRAMMAB 
 
 Tl< if intended I , a convoi.Hiit Μ 
 
 the yni 11 
 more advanced, in their enquiriei into t 
 anomalies of the lan_ For 1 1 j ♦ - οοητοιι f the 
 
 former, 
 
 l. The leading principles which arefiratto nit- 
 
 ted to memory, are staled in very \». -, and an 
 
 dicated bj being put in a larger typ 
 
 td exceptione immediately follow tb 
 to which tiny belong, in a smaller character-; ϋ 
 being consigned to the margin or to endix, where 
 
 they rarely attract the notice of the pupil. 
 
 ^tensions of Nouns are reduced on tin• German 
 plan, to three f corresponding to the three tir>t declensions 
 in Latin. Hut contract nouns of the third declension are 
 ranged under fire form* ending to tb 
 
 sions of contract! en on th< ih plan. Ti. 
 
 vantages of both modes of classification are thus unit• 
 
 4. The Paradigm of the Verb is reduced to a tabular 
 form ; making it more easy of reference, and presenting at 
 asin_'l•' new the analogies of all the Moods and Τ 
 
 5. The Syntax is made as comprehensive and complete 
 as possible ; and those rules which are common to the 
 Latin and Greek languages, are stated in the exact t< 
 
 of Adam's Latin Grammar, as being already familiar to the 
 learner. 
 
 G. Very full tables are given of the various forms of Ad- 
 jectives and Participles, of Irregular verbs in μι, of Anom- 
 alous verbs, and of the changes to which the verb is subject- 
 ed in conjugation. 
 
 For the use of more advanced students, extended articl 
 are introduced in their proper places, on the principles 
 which control the change of letter- in syllabication, on the 
 of contraction in Nouns and Verbs, on the distinctive 
 sense of the middle voice, the use and seqtu the 
 
 several .Mood-, the signification of each of the the 
 
 distinction between the use of the Infinitive and the Parti- 
 ciple, the general principles which decide the adoption of 
 the genitive, Ihe dative, or the accusative after Verbs, the 
 nature and uses of the Article, the laws which regulate 
 the collocation of the accents, and the desthlCtive mean: 
 of the most important Part lined bv . en. 
 
 These articles are intended to comprize every thing on 
 these sul» itained in the Grammar of Butlmann ; and 
 
 to present, within a narrow compass, the leading conclu- 
 sions at which Matthke has arrived ι ύ hundred pages 
 of his larger Grammar. 
 
Prom the American Journal of Education. 
 
 We feel free to speak of this book, after considerable ex- 
 perience in the use of it, as well as of the Gloucester and 
 the Eton Greek Grammars, and that of Valpy. We have 
 found it better adapted than any one of these singly, to the 
 course of Greek usually pursued in Schools and Colleges 
 in this country. We would not prescribe our own experi- 
 ence as a guide to other teachers. But we think it due to 
 the compilation of Professor Goodrich to intimate that our 
 opinion of it was not formed theoretically or at random. Stu- 
 dents and teachers who have not made use of this work, 
 we would refer to the unusually full and satisfactory view of 
 ' voice/ * mood* and • tense/ for proof that the book is not 
 compiled merely as a convenient compend ; and the com- 
 pleteness of the syntax will be found a great aid to the tho- 
 rough instruction of young scholars. In the last mention- 
 ed department as well as in the scheme of inflection, the 
 author corresponds as far as analogy will permit, to the ar- 
 rangement of l<atin Grammar, and in particular to the work 
 of Dr. Adam, so generally used in our classical schools. — 
 In the order in which instruction is now given, — that is to 
 say, commencing with Latin, this course will facilitate the 
 progress of pupils, and connect more pleasure than is other- 
 wise wont to be felt, with their application to Greek. 
 
 We would leave this work with our readers, as the best 
 that we have yet seen for the actual purposes of instruction 
 in preparatory schools. 
 
 Certificate of President Day and Professor Kingsly, of 
 
 Yale College. 
 Candidates for admission into this college, are examined 
 in Goodrich's Greek Grammar ; and it is used as a text 
 book, in the instruction of the class. 
 
 JEREMIAH DAY, President 
 
 The fourth edition of Goodrich's Greek Grammar has 
 received in my opinion, important improvements on the 
 editions which have preceded it. 
 
 J. L•. KINGSLY, Prof, of Languages. 
 Yale College, March 4th, 1828. 
 
 Certificate of Prof Humphreys, of Washington College. 
 Professor Goodrich's Greek Grammar, with the impor- 
 tant additions and improvements, appearing in the fourth 
 edition, I cordially recommend to Students in the preparar 
 tory course for Washington College. 
 
 HECTOR HUMPHREYS, Prof of An. Languages. 
 February 13, 1828. 
 
ELEMENTS 
 
 OF 
 
 GREEK GRAMMAR. 
 
 By CIIAUNCEY A. GOODRICH 
 
 USED IN TALE COLLEGE. 
 
 HERETOFORE PUBLISHED AS THE GRAMMAR OF 
 
 CASPAR FREDERIC HACUENBERG. 
 FOURTH EDITION, 
 
 LARGED AND IMPROVED. 
 
 fEiartf ortt : 
 
 PUBLISHED BY OLIVER D. COOKE &, CO. 
 Sold αιλο bt h. howe, new havln — j. w. bi'rditt, and richard?on 
 
 AND LORD, BO- χ ORD— WHIPPLE AND LAWftl 
 ΙΠΙΜ | I. HECKW1TH, PROVIDENCE C. HARRIS, 1 J. J. 
 
 rum and oo., bellows fah?-c ooomuch, iubj r, — s. 
 
 B. I ID O. AND C. CARTILL, NEW-YORK — O. S J 
 
 WILLIAM WILLIAM-, OTKA — UMB ANB CO., 
 
 . ROf HESTER — R. H. SMALL, AMDCARfT, I Μ AM) t tftlY, ΠΒ1 LDEI HHU 
 
 — E. J. lOVl b, BALTIMORE — R. PATTERN- 
 
 1828. 
 
^» 
 
 l 
 
 
 DISTRICT OF CONNECTICUT, ss. ' 
 
 Be it remembered, That on the fifth day of December, 
 in the fifty-second year of the Independence of the United States 
 of America, Chauncey Allen Goodrich, of the said district, 
 hath deposited in this office the title of a Book, the right whereof 
 he claims as Author, in the words following, to wit : 
 
 " Elements of Greek Grammar ; By Chauncey A. Goodrich. 
 Used in Yale College.'' 
 
 In conformity to the act of Congress of the United States, en- 
 titled, " An act for the encouragement of learning, by securing 
 the copies of Maps, Charts and Books, to the authors and propri- 
 etors of such copies, during the times therein mentioned.'' — and 
 also to the act, entitled, " An act supplementary to an act, enti- 
 tled ' An act for the encouragement of learning, by securing the 
 copies of maps, charts, and books, to the authors and proprietor 
 of such copies during the times therein mentioned,' and extending 
 the benefits thereof to the arts of designing, engraving, and etch- 
 ing historical and other prints. " 
 
 CHAS. A. INGERSOLL, 
 Clerk of the District of Connecticut. 
 A true copy of Itecord, examined and sealed by me, 
 
 CHAS. A. INGERSOLL, 
 Clerk of the District of Connecticut. 
 
 ΪΙ5 
 
 ' - '00 
 
ADVERTISEMENT. 
 
 The materials for the first edition of this work, w< 
 derived chiefly from the Grammar of Hachenberg. Nu- 
 merous additions were made, however, from other 
 sources, and the plan entirely pew-modelled, in con- 
 formity to the 4 existing modes of instruction in this coun- 
 try. In its progress through three editions, it has re-_ 
 ceived accessions οί valuable matter from the later 
 German Grammarians ; and, in the present edition, the 
 articles on the Middle Voice, Tenses, Moods, the con- 
 struction of the Infinitive and of Participles, and Gen- 
 eral Principles of Government, have been re-written 
 and enlarged ; the Paradigms of the Irregular Verbs 
 in fAffhave been made more complete ; a new article has 
 been added on the Particles, and difficult forms of con- 
 struction ; the Accents have been introduced, and fuller 
 rules given for Oxytones and Paroxytones, than are or- 
 dinarily to be met with, in works of this kind. \ By these 
 successive changes, the work has lost its original char- 
 acter of a compilation from Hachenberg, and the name 
 of that Author, therefore, appears no longer on the title 
 page. 
 
 The plan of Adam's Latin Grammar has been follow- 
 ed, as far as the nature of the case would admit. The 
 leading principles of Etymology and Syntax, designed to 
 be committed to memory, are printed in a larger type. 
 Remarks and exceptions follow, under each head, in a 
 smaller character. Those rules of Syntax, which are 
 common to the Latin and Greek languages, are, in most 
 cases, stated in the exact terms of Adam's Grammar, 
 as being already familiar to the learner. 
 
 In a system of rules and annotations adapted to the 
 capacity of the youngerclassofstudents.it would be 
 out of place to enter into the theory of the langu, 
 or to trace the nice shades of distinction in the form 
 construction. An attempt has been made, however, to 
 guide the enquiries of more advanced students on these 
 subjects, in the introductory articles on the Middle 
 
ιν Advertisement, 
 
 Voice, Tenses, Moods, construction of the Infinitive 
 and of Participles, and General Principles of Govern- 
 ment. Within a narrow compass are here given the 
 principal conclusions, at which Matthiae has arrived, 
 in several hundred pages of his larger Grammar; 
 though, of course, with the omission of uncommon 
 forms of construction, and with that imperfection of 
 statement, which must necessarily attend every attempt 
 to compress so great a mass of matter, within such lim- 
 its. In accordance with the same plan, the abstract of 
 Middleton's Treatise on the Article, which was placed 
 under the head of Syntax in the first edition, is retained 
 in the Appendix. It has been hoped, that Instructors 
 would find, in the general views of the language thus 
 presented, important principles, which may be illustra- 
 ted and explained from time to time, with great advan- 
 tage to the pupil. 
 
 To the larger Grammar of Matthiae, the author is in- 
 debted for most of the improvements made in this work. 
 When Buttmann has been consulted, the eighth Berlin 
 edition printed in 1818, has been used. The article on 
 Dialects was taken, with but little alteration, from the 
 Glocester Grammar ; the list of Anomalous Verbs was 
 formed, with additions and corrections, on that of Valpy; 
 and a late Grammar of Ε wing, has furnished a part of 
 the remarks on Prosody. 
 
 A considerable number of typographical errors have 
 been detected in the two preceding editions, which were 
 printed at a distance from the author, and beyond the 
 reach of his inspection. The present edition, it is hop- 
 ed, will be found more correct. 
 
 As to occasional errors in the accents, he is confident 
 of indulgence from those at least, who have been taught 
 by experience, the difficulty of securing entire accura- 
 cy in this respect, with workmen not regularly educa- 
 ted to their use. 
 
 New Haven, Dec. 1st, 1827. 
 
 Ν. B. The rule for putting the Relative, by Attraction, in the 
 same case with the Antecedent, was accidentally omitted onpage 
 119 during the Author's absence from town. 
 
ORTHOGRAPHY 
 
 
 — »•@ 
 
 ©— 
 
 
 
 THE ALPHABET. 
 
 
 THE 
 
 GREEK LETTERS ARE -FOUR 
 
 
 FIGl'Ri:. 
 
 NAME 
 
 . 
 
 TOWER. 
 
 Α α 
 
 "Αλφα 
 
 alpha 
 
 a 
 
 Ββξ 
 
 βήτα 
 
 beta 
 
 b 
 
 Γγί 
 
 γίμμα 
 
 gamma 
 
 ghard 
 
 δ5 
 
 <5έλτα 
 
 delta 
 
 d 
 
 Ε ε 
 
 ε ψιλόν 
 
 epsilon 
 
 e short. 
 
 ζζξ 
 
 £ητα 
 
 zeta 
 
 ζ 
 
 Ηη 
 
 ^τα 
 
 eta 
 
 e long. 
 
 Θ6$ 
 
 βήτα 
 
 theta 
 
 th 
 
 Ι ι 
 
 'ιώτα 
 
 iota 
 
 i 
 
 Κ χ 
 
 χάίΤ'Τα 
 
 kappa 
 
 k 
 
 Λ λ 
 
 λάμ§<5α 
 
 lambda 
 
 I 
 
 Μ μ 
 
 μυ 
 
 mu 
 
 m 
 
 Χ ν 
 
 ν υ 
 
 nu 
 
 n 
 
 *Ζ 
 
 F 
 
 xi 
 
 X 
 
 Οο 
 
 ο μικρόν 
 
 omicron 
 
 ο short. 
 
 Πα * 
 
 νϊ 
 
 Ρ 1 
 
 Ρ 
 
 ρ ?ξ 
 
 ρ 
 
 rho 
 
 r 
 
 xC's 
 
 (ίίγμα 
 
 sigma 
 
 s 
 
 Ττ7 
 
 ταυ 
 
 tau 
 
 t. 
 
 Τα 
 
 ύ ψιλό ν 
 
 upsilon 
 
 υ 
 
 Φ φ 
 
 φΤ 
 
 phi 
 
 ph 
 
 χχ 
 
 Χ 7 
 
 chi 
 
 ch aspira 
 
 τψ 
 
 ¥ 
 
 psi 
 
 ps [ ted 
 
 Ω ω 
 
 ώ μίγα 
 
 1 
 
 omega 
 
 ο long. 
 
2 Letters. 
 
 SIXTEEN letters, viz. α, s, ι. ο, u, /8, y, J, κ, λ, μ, ν, 
 . (Γ. τ, were introduced from Phenicia into Greece, by 
 Cadmus, fifteen hundred years before Christ. Their form 
 was originally that of the Phenician characters, and was 
 gradually changed to the present.* Eight were afterwards 
 added, viz. η, ω, φ, χ. &, ζ, g, ψ, in the fifth or the sixth 
 century before Christ. These, being merely substitutes 
 for existing letters, came slowly into use. 
 
 They were first used by the Ionics ; and afterwards 
 by the Attics, though not in public records till 403 A. C. 
 Hence the new alphabet of twenty-four letters was called 
 Ιωνικά γράμματα ; and the old alphabet of sixteen letters, 
 Αττικά γράμματα, which continued in use among the Co- 
 lics. 
 
 Greek was originally written in capitals without spaces 
 between the words ; as, ΕΝΑΡΧΗΗΝΟΛΟΓΟΣΚΑΙΟΛΟΓΟΣ 
 ΗΛΠΡΟΣΤΟΝΘΕΟΝ. Έν αςχγϊ ψ δ Αόγος.κώο Αόγος ν^ν ητρος 
 τον Θεόν. The smaller characters were formed from the 
 larger, between the seventh and ninth centuries, for con- 
 venience in writing. The lines of Manuscripts were called 
 στίχοι, and the contents often estimated by their number.! 
 Thus, γραπτον εν ΰτίγοις ίη, (end of the Epistle to the Philip- 
 pians,) denotes that the manuscript had 208 ατίχοι or lines. 
 
 To the letters may be added the rough breathing ['] 
 or English Η ; as, Όμηρος, Homeros; Ίξω, hexo. 
 
 1. The aspirate, or English H, was originally a letter 
 among the Greeks. In the old inscriptions, HEKATON is 
 written for εκατόν ; and ΠΗ for φ ; KH for χ, Lc. It was 
 afterwards divided into two parts, l• ί. The former re- 
 taining the original sound, was called the rough breathing. 
 The latter was called the smooth breathing; and denoted 
 that slight emission of breath, which naturally precedes all 
 the vowels at the commencement of a syllable, when not as- 
 pirated. These characters I I were gradually rounded 
 into their present form, ['] rough breathing, ['] smooth 
 breathing. 
 
 2. When υ or ρ begin a word they have always the rough 
 breathing ; as ί,'δωρ. 'Ρήτωρ. In the middle of a word, if ρ 
 be doubled, the first has the smooth, and the second the 
 rough breathing ; as, α££ην. 
 
 3. The Attics frequently use the rough breathing when 
 
 *Vide ShuckforcTs Connexions, vol. i. p. 256. 
 tVido Marsh's Miehaelis, vol. ii. p. 526\ 
 
I 
 
 Ί f . •; 
 
 Ihe I 
 
 some words• as ■ 
 
 1 
 
 ilv written «>n th< 
 
 into Mtu'v Lkjui 
 
 Th< £, «% φ, μ., a 
 
 by Γ 
 
 
 , 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •Ί 
 
 
 Mid /9, 
 
 
 
 
 
4 Syllables. 
 
 There are four Liquids ; λ, μ, ν, ρ, to which <f is some- 
 times added. 
 
 There are three Double Consonants. £, ξ, ψ. 
 
 ζ represents δΰ* 
 
 Ι χς< γς> χ?. 
 
 Ψ ^> βς, φς- 
 
 Hence, when these letters are thus joined, the double 
 letter is substituted. 
 
 1. This may be particularly remarked in declension and 
 conjugation ; as, "Α^αψι for "Α^αβοΊ, from v Afa/3g ; λέξω for 
 \έγ(Τω, from λέ/ω ; <ϊ\ζξω for ίτλε'κο'ω, from #λε'κω $ 'αλείψω for 
 -'αλείφο'ω, from 'αλείφω. 
 
 2. Among the JSolics, who never used the double con- 
 sonants, (fS was put for ζ, transposing the letters, because δ 
 never immediately precedes tf.j 
 
 Γ, before κ, y, χ, g, has the sound of ng ; as, αyyελo^ 
 anggelos. 
 
 The letters v 5 p, tf, |, ψ, are called final consonants, 
 because words not derived from foreign languages, end 
 in no others. 
 
 Except ε'κ, ix 9 and *χ, supposed to be derived from eg and 
 ίχί. 
 
 SYLLABLES. 
 
 General Rules in the Formation of Syllables. 
 
 1. When mutes come together, the smooth must be uni- 
 ted with smooth, middle with middle, and rough with rough ; 
 hence if one is determined, the other is made to correspond ; 
 as έτύφ&ψ for £τύιτ6φ ; λε'λεχβε for λέλεκ^ε ; from γράφω, by 
 adding <rog, γραπτός ; by adding δφ, γράβδφ. 
 
 Exception 1 . A rough mute cannot be doubled ; but the 
 first is changed into its cognate smooth one ; as, Σαπφώ for 
 Σαφφω ; Βάκχος for Βάχχο£ ; ς-ιτ&ός for τι66ός. 
 
 2. The preposition εκ may be followed by a letter of any 
 kind ; as, έκ,βάλλω, εκ#λιψΐ£. 
 
 II. Two successive syllables, in the same word, do not 
 begin with a rough letter ; lest they should occasion too great 
 
 *It cannot be too strongly impressed on the mind of the learner, 
 that ψ and ξ are mere representatives of the letters against them, and 
 may always be resolved into them. 
 Vide Rule IV. p. 5: 
 
tablet. 6 
 
 a harshness of langu;• 
 
 as, 
 
 and 
 
 111 
 
 l\ re <J\ as άρ- 
 
 , from ί>γ* Ίζω ; 
 
 unchanged 
 
 ). ^nd 
 
 in ι as δαίμ ' ΡΚ> 
 
 with the 
 
 tff eitf&J fi 
 
 Th< 
 
 but » ι- I 
 
 as *έφαχχα. 
 In' *j^/pu•. 
 
 μ. ρ, into ti 
 
 /f> and 
 
 as fvpucrcj. 
 
 XiXfyfAcu for Xi /^χ. 
 
 1* 
 
Syllables. 
 
 Except ακμή, όνχμός, and a few others* 
 
 VII. A letter is sometimes inserted between two other 
 letters, to prevent an unpleasant concurrence of sounds : 
 Particularly when μ precedes λ, or g , the letter β is often in- 
 serted ; as μείΤημ/^ ία, from μέαΌ£ and faiga ; με'μβληκα for 
 μεμέληκα. 
 
 When ν precedes g , the letter δ is frequently inserted ; as, 
 ανδρός for avigog. From the same attention to harmony, we 
 find, άμβροτος for <x/3po<ro£, &c. 
 
 From a regard to sound, τ in the preposition κατά is fre- 
 quently changed into # and κ, before φ and χ ; as, κακχε^α* 
 for καταχεί<Ται ; and into β. 7, 5, * , λ, μ, ν, f , before those 
 letters respectively ; as, κά^οον for κατά^οον, &c. 
 
 Ν. B. The preceding rules are very important for the 
 resolution of anomalies, in the inflections of nouns and 
 verbs. 
 
 VIII. The letter ν is annexed to datives plural in 1, and to 
 all third persons of verbs ending in ε or 1, when the next word 
 begins with a vowel ;* as, γονεΰύιν αυτών $ έ'ίωκεν αύτοΐς. 
 
 1. Εί'κοοΊ takes ν after it ; as, εϊκοΛν avdgsg ; also tfuvratfarft 
 and some others. 
 
 g^. The poets sometimes add ν when the next word begins 
 ^roh a consonant. The Ionics omit the ν even before a 
 vowel. 
 
 On the Change, Increase, and Retrenchment of Syllables. 
 
 1. Metathesis is the transposition of letters and syllables ; 
 as xagrsgog for xgarsgog. This often extends to the breath- 
 ings ; as, κι0ών for χιτών ; όαχίων for ταχίων, from τάγυς. 
 
 2. Prosthesis is the prefixing of one or more letters to a 
 word ; as εείκοοΊ for εϊκο<7Ί. 
 
 3. Epenthesis is the insertion of one or more letters with- 
 in a word ; as, <χου\ύς for #ο\ύς. 
 
 4. Paragoge is the annexing of one letter or more to a 
 word ; as, Xoyoitfi for "Κογοις. 
 
 5. Apheresis is the cutting off of letters from the begin- 
 ning of a word ;• as, (trsgonrr) for afasgonri). 
 
 6. Syncope is taking from the middle of a word ; as, 
 ^X^ov for η\υ&ον. 
 
 * Called Ν ίφελκυσηκόν, and used to avoid a concurrence of vowels. 
 
m is Ukil 
 
 6 and In, b y a poet' 
 
 λ ay• used win ••, aapecia 
 
 mgn are - y apostrophe 
 
 ' ; aa, 
 
 ι f>rm a 
 diphthong ; 
 
 1 1 to a diphthong ; as, 
 
 5 I v>P8. 
 - 
 
 - 
 r point at 
 ■•! or full 
 
 KTYMOLOCJY 
 
 ■ 
 
 
δ Article. 
 
 Noun, Adjective, Pronoun, Verb, Participle, Adverb, 
 Preposition, Conjunction. 
 
 Interjections are included among Adverbs. 
 
 There are three* Numbers ; the Singular, which de- 
 notes one ; the Plural, which denotes more than one ; 
 and the Dual, which denotes two or a pair. 
 
 The dual is not found in the New Testament, nor in the 
 iEolic dialect, it was used chiefly by the Attic and Ionic 
 writers, and not even by them in the earlier periods. 
 
 The Genders are three ; Masculine, Feminine, and 
 Neuter. 
 
 The Cases are five ; Nominative, Genitive, Dative, 
 Accusative, and Vocative. 
 
 ARTICLE. 
 The Article is a word prefixed to a noun, for the pur- 
 pose of designation or distinction : as, δ ccvfy^os, the 
 man. It corresponds, (though not exactly,) to the 
 English definite article, and is thus declined.* 
 
 e S < illg *, 
 
 N. 6, 7J, TO. 
 
 G. tS, »%, τχ. 
 D. τω, r£, τω. 
 
 Α. τάν,την,το. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Ν. Α. τώ, τά, τώ. 
 G. D. τοΓν, ταίν, τοΓν. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Ν, οί, αϊ, τά. 
 G. των, Twy. των. 
 D. τοις, ταΓ$, <τοϊς. 
 Α. τζς,τάς, τά. 
 
 1 . The Article has no vocative ; its place is supplied by 
 the adverb ώ. 
 
 2. When δε or γε is annexed to the article, it has the force 
 of a demonstrative pronoun, as δδε, ηδε, Ηδε. this, that. For 
 οδε the Attics use δδί. 
 
 3. The article was originally tg$, τη. <ro ; hence the τοί of 
 the Dorics and Ionics ; and τ in oblique cases, and in the 
 neuter. 
 
 * LA the young student decline each gender of the Article by it- 
 self. The Feminine h will give him (with a slight variation) the ter- 
 minations of the first Declension of Nouns. The Masculine 6, and the 
 Neuter τό give the terminations of the second Declension. 
 
m — First Declension. 
 
 I V 
 
 ι hree declen 
 
 .(I has two. c;. »v, which 
 
 ων. 
 The third lias nine, «, ι, ν, ω, ν, ρ, <r, g, ψ. 
 
 Genera/ Rules of Declension. 
 
 i. The nominative, accusative, and ι 
 dual, and of neuters, are alike ; and in tl Λ of 
 
 IK Ut 1 in a. 
 
 Tlic dative singular ends always in ι.* 
 
 3. ' mtive plural end- in ων. 
 
 ve is always tike Ihe nominative, in the 
 plural, and usually in the singular. 
 
 Th plural seems originally to ha 
 
 be deck•: and the genitive plural usual!;. 
 
 or α 
 
 FIRST DECLENSION. 
 Xouns of the first dec] have four terminate 
 
 α, η. feminine ; a;, .\c, masculine. 
 
 The terminatioi . are thought to have be• 
 
 ed from «and η, by adding £. 
 
 Nouns in r t and «, are thus declined. 
 
 em 
 
 I). : 
 V. { 
 
 I). 7/ μ 
 
 ΐ'-αν, 
 
 Dual. 
 
 \. A. V. τά Clflr*a, 
 
 (j . 1). raii τ; α- αΓν. 
 
 Dual. 
 \. Λ. V. 7<< al'tf-a, 
 (i. Ι), raw ffctftf- 
 
 Plural. 
 
 ru. 
 
 Phi 
 
 1). ru 
 
 * Ln tli t second di scrip'. 
 
10 
 
 First Declension. 
 
 Nouns ending in pa, a pure,* and α contracted, have 
 the genitive in as, and the dative in α ;t as, 
 
 , Sing. 
 N. r { φίλί-α, . 
 G. της φι\ί-ας, 
 D. ry φιλί- a, 
 Α την φιλί-αν, 
 V. ώ φιλ/-α- 
 
 Dual. 
 Ν. Α. V. τάφιλί-α, 
 G. D. ταΓν φιλί-αιν. 
 
 Plural. 
 Ν. α/ φιλί-αι, 
 G. των φίλιων, 
 D. τα,ΐς φιλί-αΐ£, 
 Α. τας φΐλί-α£., 
 V. ώ φιλί-αι. 
 
 So likewise αλαλά, and some proper names as, Λήδα. 
 Nouns in ας are thus declined : 
 
 Sing. 
 Ν δ τααι-α£, 
 G. rk τα,αί-», 
 D. τωταμι'-α, 
 
 Α. τον τα,αι-αν, 
 V. ώ ταμ,ί -ot. 
 
 Dual. 
 Ν. Α. V. τώταμί α, 
 G. D. τοΓν ταμί-αιν. 
 
 Plural. 
 Ν. οι τα,αί-αι, 
 G των ταμιών, 
 D. τοΓ ΰ - ταμ -aic, 
 Α. τ*£ταμι-α£, 
 V. ώ ταμι-αι. 
 
 Nouns in as, especially proper names, sometimes make 
 the gen.tive in a, after the Doric form ; as, Σατανάς, G. α ; 
 particularly in Attic writers. Soph. Electra 137. 
 Some have both a and α ; as, 'Αρχύτας, Ά^χιίτ*, and Ά^χίτα.• 
 
 Nouns ending in η$ are thus declined 
 
 Sing. 
 Ν. δτελών-η£, 
 G. τ* τελών-*, 
 D. τφ τελών-ΐ), 
 
 Α. τον τελών-ην, 
 V. ώ τελών -η. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Ν. Α. V. τώ τελών-α, 
 G. D. τοΓν τελών-αιν. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Ν. οί τελών-αι, 
 G. των τελων-ων, 
 D . τοΊς τελών-«ί^, 
 Α. τ<-£ τελών- ας, 
 V. ώ τελών-αι. 
 
 Nouns in <ττη£ make the vocative in η or α. All nouns in 
 της, poetical nouns in tf?jc, national denominations in ης, and 
 compounds of <7Τολω, μετ^ΰ, and τξίβω, make the vocative in 
 
 * A vowel is called pwre, when it is preceded by another vowel with 
 which it uoes not form a diphthong ; as the a in φιλία. 
 
 t The ancient Latins followed this method of making the genitive in 
 ας ; thus, Gen. Sing, terras, escas, for term, esece. Paterjamilias cen- 
 times in use. 
 
ision. 
 
 
 ■ - ft. Λ ; as, 
 
 ■ 
 
 II. Β. 1 
 NTRACTH ' 
 
 of this (1. 
 
 lination, 
 
 <l in §ας } 
 ;,αα, ρεα, οη, αας. 
 
 RUI Ε. 
 
 Drop tl r oftbe ι μνάα, μνα ; *ρ£α, 
 
 ■ 
 ifnol preceded by ρ or a towel, is chai «j^; 
 
 as, ι 
 
 After the nominative ha^ been thus contracted, it is regu- 
 larly declined, according to the examples already given. 
 
 The second <]< w has two terminations o<: and 
 
 ov; which are lengthened by the and ων. 
 
 By contraction, ι ;, and sv. 
 
 ν ov % 
 V.. u/ ;,-€. 
 
 Bing. 
 
 \ ov, 
 
 D. f 
 
 • ov, 
 
 ov. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 \ 
 
 G. D. τοΓν Xoy -οιν. 
 
 Dual. 
 Ν. Λ. Υ 
 
 G. D. τοΓν ξ.'λ-οίν. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 -01, 
 
 1). τοΐς λ 
 V. ί. 
 Phiral. 
 
 \. 7 
 I). Γ0 
 
 Ι 
 
 and •*, are neater : th< >n<l 
 
 . sometimes feminhx 
 . >n 
 
12 
 
 Second Declension — Attic Form. 
 
 1. Many nouns in ος are feminine ; some from a refer- 
 ence to a noun of that gender, understood ; as, ε£ημο$, a de- 
 sert, i. e. 5ξγ ( μοςγγι, desert land. 
 
 2. Some substantives in ος are common ; as, δ, ή ανύρΜος. 
 
 3. Nouns in ως are masculine, except names of cities and 
 islands, which are feminine ; together with these three, εως, 
 aurora ; γάΚως, a brother's wife ; αΚως, a threshing floor ; 
 χρώ£, a debt, is neuter. 
 
 ATTIC FORM. 
 
 This was an ancient form of declension, and is retained 
 in a few words only. 
 
 It is made by lengthening the last vowel or diphthong into 
 ω, and subscribing ι ; as, Καγως for Καγός ; Xayw for Kays, 
 Kay ω for Kayoi. 
 
 If a long precede o$, it is changed into ε ; as, Κεως for 
 Καός ; and ανώσεων for άνωγαιον. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Ν. δ Κε-ως 9 
 G. tS λε-ώ, 
 D. τω λε-ω, 
 Α. τον λε-ών, 
 V. ώ Κε-ύς. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Ν. <τδ άνωγε-ων, 
 G. τ* άνώ^ε-ω, 
 D. τω άνώ^ε-ωγ 
 Α. το άνώ^ε-ων, 
 V. ώ άνώ^ε-ων. 
 
 Dual. 
 Ν. Α. V. τώλε-ώ, 
 G. D. τοίν λε-φν. 
 
 Dual. 
 Ν. Α. V. τω άνώ)/ε-ω, 
 G. D. roTv άνώ^ε-ων. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Ν. οί λε ω, 
 G. των λε-ων, 
 D. τοϊςΚε-άς, 
 Α. τ*£ λε-ώ£, 
 V. ώ λε-ω. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Ν. τά άνώ^ε-ω, 
 G. των άνώ^ε-ων, 
 D. τοΪ£ άνωγε-ως 9 
 Α. τά άνώ^ε-ω, 
 V. ώ άνώ^ε-ω. 
 
 1. The vocative is like the nominative ; and hence nouns 
 in o£, of th«! common form, often have the vocative like the 
 nominative, after the Attic form ; as, φίΚος ώ Μενέλαε, II. δ. 
 189. 
 
 2. The Attics often reject ν in the accusative of this de- 
 clension, and almost always in the following words : 'Αύως, 
 ΆιΐόΧΚως, εως, Κως, Καγως. Sometimes in the neuter of 
 adjectives ; as, τδ άγηρω for ά^ήρων ; in the accusative plu- 
 ral, τας άλω for άλω£. The Attics frequently decline nouns 
 of the third declension, according to this form ; as, ^ελων, 
 (Eurip. Ion. 1191.) for γεΚωτα from γύΚως. 
 
Second I)• on — Contractions* 
 
 13 
 
 CONTRACTIONS. 
 
 The terminations ους and ouv are contracted from *of, ι 
 
 cOV. 
 
 t 
 
 RULES 
 
 1 . If the two laet vowels are short, change them int 
 as, o(f7c'ov, o(f75v : but Ss makes η ; as, άόελφίδεε, άδελφιόη. 
 
 2. If not, omit the former one ; as, οΥ7&, 6<f75 ; odlia, 
 •<τ7ά ; άτίλόα, άατλα. 
 
 s ! ng \ 
 
 \ >r7-cov, Sv, 
 G. o<r7-c's, s, 
 l> 'tfl -έω, ω, 
 Α. οΥΪ-ε ν, Sv, 
 V . ;<fl -sov, av. 
 
 Sing. 
 Ν. *~ίος,ζς, 
 
 G. V-OS, 5, 
 
 D. ν-όω, ω, 
 Λ. v-oov, Sv, 
 V. ν-όε, 2. 
 
 Dual. 
 Ν. Α. V. •<τ1-έω, 8, • 
 G. D. odl-soiVy οΓν. 
 
 Dual. 
 Ν. Α. V. ν-όω, υ, 
 G. D. ν-όοιν, οΓν. 
 
 Plura). 
 
 Ν. o<f7-sa, α, 
 G. όόΊ-έων, ων, 
 D. oYi-ioi£, οΓ$, 
 Α. oVJ -εα, ά, 
 V. idl-idyoL 
 
 Plural. 
 Ν. ν-όοι, οΓ, 
 G. ν-όων, ων, 
 D. ν•όοι$, οκτ, 
 Α. ν-όκ£, *£, 
 V. ν-όοι, οΐ. 
 
 So its Compounds εί>νοο£, άνοο$, &c. Also, £oo£, jp 
 «*λόο£, χρόο$, with their compounds.* Some contracts in *s 
 take the form of the third declension ; as, v*s, G. νοός, I). 
 
 Ίη<τ2£ and diminutives in υς are thus declined. 
 
 Sin, 
 
 Ν. Ίη(Τ^, 
 G. Ίη<Τ-5, 
 
 Ι). Ί*#-ί β 
 
 Α. Ίη(Τ-5ν, 
 V. Ίη<Τ-ί. 
 
 Sing : 
 
 Ν. Δίον ϋ£, 
 G. Διον-υ, 
 D. Διον-υ, 
 Α. Διον-υν, 
 V. Λιον-υ. 
 
 * The Compounds of νόος and £<5 e $ are not contracted in the nomin- 
 ative and om in the genitive plural ; as, ctv*« 
 «αλΙ^οβ, not rtvi, καλι{φά. G. ιύ*ό«κ, seldom tvv<5>. 
 
 2 
 
14 
 
 Third Declension. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 The terminations of this Declension are nine, viz. 
 
 «, h w, ω, ν, ρ, tf, ξ, ψ. # 
 
 Sing. 
 .Ν. δτι7άν, 
 G. τ2 τι7άνο$, 
 D. τω τ«7ανι, 
 Α. τον τ*7ανα, 
 V. ώ τι7άν. 
 
 Sing.^ 
 
 Ν. το (Τωμα, 
 G. τκ <ίώμ,αΊος 9 
 D. τω (ίώμα7ι, 
 Α. το <7ώμα, 
 V. ώ (ίωμα. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Ν. Α. V. τώ τ*7ανε, 
 G. D. τοίν τιτάνο/ν. 
 
 Dual. 
 Ν. Α. V. τώ 0•ώμα7ε, 
 G. D. τοΓν <ίωμά7οιν. 
 
 . Plural. 
 
 Ν. oi τύανες 9 
 G. των <π7ανων, 
 D. τοΓ$ <π7αο"ι, 
 Α. τ^£ τιτάνας, 
 V. ώ τ*7ανε$. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Ν. τά δώματα, 
 G. των #ωμά7ων, 
 D. τοΓ$ <7ώμαο% 
 Α. τά 0'ώμα7α, 
 V. ώ #ώμα7α. 
 
 GENDER. 
 
 I. All nouns ending in ευ$, or having the genitive in vtos, 
 are masculine ; as, Ι βαόι'Κζύς, &c. The only exceptions 
 are some names of cities. 
 
 The following are Masculine with few exceptions. 
 Those ending in εφ, ηρ, ωρ, up, ην, ως, xg, ψ, α$~αντο£, ων- 
 ωνο£. 
 
 II. Nouns ending in ας-αδος, <τγ\ς-τητος, αυς, ω, and \ς ver- 
 bal, are always feminine ; as, ή λαμπάς, &c. 
 
 The following are Feminine, with few exceptions. 
 Those ending in αις, εΐ£, ιν, ΐ£,λ$, v$, ρς,υς, (G. uoj, υδος, υ0ο$) 
 ων-ονο£. 
 
 Some are common ; as, δ, ή ^είτων, &c. 
 
 III. Nouns ending in α, η,ι, υ, ωρ,* ο£-εο£, ap-apo£, ορ-ορο£, 
 ας-ατος and αο£, are neuter ; as, το α'ωμα, &c. 
 
 GENITIVE. 
 
 The Genitive Singular ends in ος ; as, τιτάν, τ/ταν-ο£; 
 σ'ωμα, <ίωματ-ο£ j λαμ^ά^, λαμ<ττα5-ο£ ; opv<£, opvi0-o£. If the 
 
 If not personal denominations. 
 
Third Declension. 16 
 
 last Syllable of the Nominative contains a ! 
 
 usually chan β short one in the genitive, and ι and 
 
 U into I ; as, τοιμήν, *α 
 
 It is probable that all nonns of tins declension ended ori- 
 ginally in ς ; and that the genitive was formed bj the in- 
 
 tion οϊ ο before c. as is >t ill the case with a lar_• 
 of them >»-ος ; μΰς, μυ-ό-ς ; ν Αρα ; :?ς, ( 9/ Apo 
 
 "Αρα ίήρυχ -o-f. 
 
 1. * Terminations in . fe, νς. dropped the first 
 
 Iett« ι iXtfis for ύ\ιήος-ίδος ; χάρις for χάριτς-ίτος ; φως 
 
 ωτός ; ϋδας for υ<5ατς-ατος ; όρνις for ορνι0ς-ι£ος ; άναξ 
 for «ναχτς, άναχτος. 
 
 - the preceding vowel was lengthened ;J as, 
 srotfc for «ττόδς οίος ; κτδίς for κτε'νς ενός. 
 
 the last letter was dropped ; as, vs'xrap for 
 νέκταρς-αρος ; £ίν for ξίνς, £ινός. In this case, the preceding 
 vowel was commonly lengthened ; as, ιτοιμήν for ποηχένς-ενος $ 
 λιμήν for λιμένς-ενος ; άξων for αξονς-ονος ; aCrrjp for ά<Ττερς- 
 ^ρος. 
 
 3. Sometimes both letters were dropped ; as, <7ωμα for 
 ββματς-ατος ; μέλι for μίλιτς-ιτος ; /αλα for '/oiXaf, from 70c- 
 λαχτς. 
 
 ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 The Accusative singular of nouns not neuter, is formed 
 from the genitive, by changing ος into α ; as, τιτάν τιτάν-ος, 
 Λ. τιτάν-α. 
 
 Exception 1. Nouns in ις § tg, αυς, and ους, whose geni- 
 ti\e is in ος pure, change ς of the nominative, into ν : 
 
 ;, οριος, Α. οφιν ; /3ότρυς-υος, βοτρυν ; ναί/ς, ναός, ναυν ; /3ους, 
 £?οός,/3ουν. 
 
 To these add, λάας, λας, ; Accus. λααν, λαν. 
 ^The poets often violate this rule ; as, βότρυα, for jSo'rpuv -; 
 νηα for νάυν. 
 
 .Many nouns in ! \ς and υς, whose genitive is not in ος 
 pure, have both α and ν ; as, χόρυς, χόρτος, xopufa or χ 
 
 • These changes are given &s probable, rather than certain, 
 t By rule iv. page 5. 
 X Vide rule v. page 5. 
 b Except dlfc Αιός, Ace. Δία, Jupiter. 
 
 II f ' t syllable ha» no accent ; when it is accented, til• 
 
 accusative ίβ α only ; as, πατρίς, irarplier. 
 
16 Third Declension. 
 
 Χάρις has χαριτα, and χάριν. To these add compounds of, 
 
 #ov£ ; as, ωχύπτους, ώχύιτοδα or otauVouv. 
 
 VOCATIVE. 
 
 The Vocative is, for the most part, like the nominative ; 
 as, wav, V. nrav. 
 
 But the short vowel of the genitive, from the long vowel 
 Of the nominative, remains in the vocative ; as, 
 Nom. Gen. Voc. 
 
 *'ατήρ, ιΐατερος, πάτερ. 
 
 "Εκτωρ, "Εκτορο$, β/ Εκτορ. 
 
 So likewise <ίΖτερ 9 "Α^τολλον and IloVsiiov, whose geni- 
 tives have a long vowel. 
 
 Nouns, (except those in γς and o$,) whose genitive is in 
 os pure, drop $ of the nominative, to form the vocative ; 
 as, 
 
 Nom. Gen. Voc. 
 
 βασιΧ-ευς, -έος, βαόιΚεΰ. 
 
 βοΰς> βοόζ, βου. 
 
 βότρυς, βότρυος, βότρν. 
 
 νους, νοος, νου. 
 
 So, παις, tfai&fc, <xcu. 
 
 χ\είς > χΚειδος, χΚει or κΚεΐς. 
 
 "Avaf has for its vocative, ανα ; ^υνή, yyvai ; «n%, «sv ; 
 οδχς, odkv. 
 
 Certain nouns in εις and as, especially proper names, 
 which were originally adjectives or participles, have the vo- 
 cative like the nominative neuter of the primitive ; as, 
 Α7α£-Α'/αν, V. Α /αν. 
 
 Jin proper names, the poets often reject the ν ; as, Afa for 
 A/av ; Θοα for Θοαν. 
 
 Nouns in ως> and ω -oos, have the vocative in 01 ; as, aU 
 δώζ, V. αϊδοϊ ; ήχω, V. ήχοΓ. 
 
 DATIVE PXURAL. 
 
 The dative plural is formed from the dative singular, by 
 changing the last syllable into tii ; as, έωμα-τι, σωμα-οΊ ; 
 «ίχε-ι, τε\γε-4\ ; φλογ-ί, (φλο^-σί) φλο|ί ; "Αρα/3-ι, ("Αρα/3- 
 
Third Declension — ( Hens. 17 
 
 tfi) "Apa>j,i. If ν 
 
 as, nrdv-i, <nra-r ( and if ε or ο 
 
 ν, they are (; diphthongs s* 
 
 an• Aiov-Ti, Xi*-<Ti Γ-Λ. 
 
 Ν ι tiding in <r, pr I by ι diphthong* mimi ι to 
 
 the nominative ; as, pifc /3*<ri j ^ι ; ναύ$, 
 
 ^vncopated nouns in ηρ| have the dative in α(Τί ; as, *a- 
 . ΑΓατράύΊ ; So, cufrijp, atfrpatfi ; αρήν, άρνό^, αρνάκι ; 
 Ufl« 
 
 X^tfi is from the obsolete χ?ρ$, and μαρτίνι from μάρτυς. 
 
 CONTRACTIONS. 
 
 Many nouns of this declension are contracted. 
 
 1. Two vowels are contracted into a single vowel 01 
 diphthong ; as, τεί-χεα, re ίχη ; τείγεος, τείχχς. 
 
 2. By dropping a consonant, two vowels are brought to- 
 iler, which are aferwards contracted ; ra, xs'paa, 
 
 <εροί. 
 
 3. A vowel is sometimes dropped entirely ; as, Ατατήρ, 
 rtfpof % wrpfc ; xsvsujv, κενών. 
 
 Some nouns are contracted in all the cases, and some in 
 a part only. 
 
 In the oblique cases, there it no contraction, unless the 
 former vowel is short, or a doubtful vowel used as short. 
 
 l• should be remembered by the learner, that 
 The short vowels are, 
 
 Which have their corresponding long ones, - η, ω. 
 
 And tlieir corresponding diphthongs, - - ει, ου. 
 
 The following are the rules of contraction for this decler, 
 sion, and likewise for all contracted Verbs. 
 
 1. When a short vowel is doubled, it is changed into Ut 
 corresponding diphthong ; but εε of the dual commonly be- 
 comes η ; as, βαύιΧέες, βαόι'ΚεΥς ; Δη* ; t A - ■:. In verbs, 
 \εφί\εε % ε φιλεΓ ; όηλόομ^ν, iqXttfftfv. In the dual, Διφ 
 •ΛημοΟ^νη. 
 
 The dual sometimes follows the rule ; as, ric&ffj fa 
 
 £. When both the short vowels meet, they are contra' 
 
 p. 5. 
 ΐ Except yacrr'p, γαϊτήρσι. 
 
 t Λπ cxampl is given, for the use of the student when he 
 
 reaches the Contract Verbs. 
 
18 
 
 Third Declension. 
 
 ed into s ; as, τείχεο^, τείγχς ; βόες, βχς. In verbs, Φιλε'β- 
 μεν, Φιλχμεν ; όηλόετε, όηλ'^τε. 
 
 3. A short vowel before α is changed into its correspond- 
 ing long one,* and α is dropped ; as, έ'αρ, •ζρ ; Λητόα,Λητω ; 
 τ^τατεαι, τυτϊτΎΐ. But εα pure becomes a ; as, χρε'εα, χρεα. 
 
 4. A short vowel before ι forms a diphthong with it ; as, 
 τείχεϊ.,.τείχει ; Λητόϊ, ΛητοΓ. 
 
 5. Ε before a long vowel or diphthong is dropped ; as, 
 Ήρακλέη£, Ηρακλή ; τειχε'ων, τειχών. In verbs, φιλέω, 
 φιλώ. 
 
 6. t Ο before a long vowel is (with the vowel) contract- 
 ed into ω ; as, δηλόω, όηλώ ; όηλόητε, όηλώτε. 
 
 Ο before a diphthong unites with the second vowel of the 
 diphthong; as, όηλόοι, όηλοί ; όηλόει, SrfkoT ; όηλο'77, όηλοΓ ; 
 όηλόου, όηλχ. But in the termination οειν, ι being rejected, 
 it is contracted into s ; as, δηλόειν. όηλ2ν. 
 
 7. When α precedes ο, οι, χ or ω the contraction is into 
 ω ; when otherwise, into α ; as, /Soaatfi, /3οωοΊ ; (Taos. tfGJ£ ; 
 τιμάομεν, τιμωμεν ; τι'μαε, τίμα. In diphthongs, ι is subscrib- 
 ed ; as, τιμάει, τίμα ; τιμάτ}, τίμα ; δράοιτο. δρωτο. 
 
 8. Neuters in ας pure and ρα£, reject τ in the oblique 
 cases, to produce a concurrence of vowels ; as, κε'ρατα, κε'- 
 ραα. κέρα. 
 
 9. If the former vowel be long, or ι or υ, strike out the 
 other ; as, ημηεν, τιμψ ; οφιες, οφΐς ; tfivfaria, οΊνή^ι ; /3οτ- 
 ρυες, βατρΰς. 
 
 FIRST FORM OF CONTRACTS; 
 
 Two terminations ; ος neuter ; *£ feminine, except 
 names of men. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Ν. ή τριήρης, 
 G. τ% τριήρ-εοί:, χς, 
 D. τη τριήρ-ει, ει, 
 Α. την τριήρ-εα, η, 
 V . ώ τριήρ-ε^. 
 
 Dual. 
 Ν. Α. V. 
 
 τάτριήρ-εε, η, 
 
 G. D. 
 
 ταΓντριηρ-εοιν,οΤν. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Ν. αι τριήρ-εε^, εις, 
 G. των τριηρ-εων, ων, 
 D. ταΪ£ τριήρ-ε(ΤΊ, 
 Α. τα£ τριηρ-εα^, εις, 
 V. ώ τριήρ-εε$, εΐ£. 
 
 * Or, as in one case, into its corresponding diphthong ί as, άληθίας* 
 α\ηθε7ς. 
 
 f This rule applies only to verbs. 
 
Third Declension — Second Form of Contracts. 19 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Ν. το τδΓχ-ο£, 
 (i. π rfijj εος, as, 
 
 1). r£ r ./- , ei, 
 
 V. ώ τείχος. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Ν. Λ. V. 
 τώτείχ -ss, η, 
 
 <;. D. 
 
 τοΓν τειχ-έοιν, οΓν. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 V r - ./- 
 
 Α. Τ" 
 
 V. ω Ts»^ ία, η. 
 
 1. Proper names in χΚετ,ς are, bj the Attics, contracted 
 into τ,ς ; as, Ήραχλίη^, 'HpaxXSfrig. The Ionics retain the 
 uncontracted form. 
 
 In some nouns ending in εος, the ε is entirely dropjx 
 as, (fzsiog, G. tffftffof, <rttf*£. Sometimes they are otherv 
 contracted ; as, tfirffi, erstfji, Da. Pi. ανήεοΌΊ. 
 
 3. Tlie Attics often change εα, when preceded by a vow- 
 el into α ; as, Xpfatj χρΞα from χρ=ο£. 
 
 I. Proper names in -ης-εος, and compounds of : roc, a year, 
 often take the form of the first declension, in the accusa- 
 tive and vocative singular, and the nominative and accusa- 
 tive plural ; as, 
 
 ο Δημο#£;'νη£, 
 τόν Δημ#ο<Τ0£νην 
 §i Δημ40*0εναι, 
 
 τον ετΰΊα£]ψ, 
 
 rk Δημοό^εν^, 
 ώ Δημόο^. 
 fif Λ^μοΑ^'να^. 
 ο) έ*τ7αέ7αι, t^c: ιΊ 
 
 SECOND FORM OF CONTRACTS. 
 
 Two terminations, κ feminine, a few masculine* and 
 common ; ι neuter. 
 
 Ν. ΟφΙ£, 
 
 ( i. ri ίφ -ftg, εω$, 
 
 \. rii ,ριν, 
 
 Dual. 
 \. Λ . V. rcJ . 
 
 G. D. τοΓν οφε'οιν, οφεΊ»ν. 
 
 riural. 
 
 ;:*jv, 
 pert, 
 I 
 V. ώ lp-t 
 
 * Masculine, <?A0cf, fyij, λίί-λ/ο* *Λτ, pa. . -^if, irpurawf, τρ{*6ις, 
 
 ιχις. Comni, λίίτρίί, κασ($, κόρις, Ορνις, Ηγψις % 
 
20 Third Declension — Third Form of Contract». 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Ν. 0Ί'νη#ι. 
 
 G. οΊνήπ'-ίοέ, εως, 
 
 D. tfjVTjtf-ll, ι, εΓ ; 
 
 ' A. tfivyjtf/, 
 V. αΊ'νη^ι. 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. ΛνηΑΤίε. 
 G. D. tfivqtf-ioiv, εφν. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. βΊν?ρηα, 
 
 G. σ'ίνηιτ-ίων, εων, 
 
 D. <flVY)tfl<fl, 
 
 Α. βΊνήαΊα, 
 V. (Ανήλια. 
 
 The terminations εω£, εΓ, ε&ν, είς, belong to the Attics, and 
 are most in use ; the other to the Ionics, who used the 
 form io£, or εο$ indifferently, but commonly ει in thedative. 
 For the accusative in ν, α is sometimes found. 
 
 THIRD FORM OF CONTRACTS. 
 
 Three terminations, svg, vg, masculine ; υ neuter. 
 
 Sing. 
 Ν. δ βαόιΧ-έυς, 
 G. τχ βα4ίΚ-έος 9 (έως) 
 D. τφ /3ααΊλ-ε7, εΓ, 
 Α. τον /3α<Λλ-εα, 
 V. ώ /3αο"ίλ-ευ. 
 
 Ν. 
 G. 
 D 
 Α, 
 V. 
 
 ^ Sing. 
 
 δ tfsXsx-vg, 
 rx #ελε'κ-εω£, 
 τφ #ελε'κ-εϊ, εΓ, 
 τον «ττε'λεκ-υν, 
 ω #ε'λεκ-υ. 
 
 Sing. 
 Ν. τό ά(Τ7-υ, 
 G. τχ α<?7-εο£, (εω$>) 
 D. τω αο^-εϊ, εΓ, 
 Α. τδ ααΊ-υ, 
 V. ώ atf7-u. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Ν. Α. V. 
 τώ /3ασΊλ-εε, η, 
 
 G. D. 
 
 τοΓν /3ασΊλ-ε'οιν. 
 
 Dual. 
 Ν. Α. V. 
 
 τώ Ατελεκ-εε, η, 
 
 G.D. 
 
 τοΓν «τελεκ-ε'οιν. 
 
 Dual. 
 , Ν. Α. V. 
 
 τώ α(Γ7-εε, η, 
 
 G.D. 
 
 τοΓν άσΐ-ε'οιν. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Ν. οι βαύίλ-εες, s7g, 
 G. των βασΊλ-ε'ων, 
 D. τοί$ βαβΊλ-ευβΊ, 
 Α. τ*£ βα0Ίλ-έα£,εΓ£, 
 V. ω βαόιΧ-έεζ, €ΐς. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Ν. ο! *ελεκ-εε£, ε/£, 
 G. των «ττελεκ-εων, 
 D. το?£ «τελεκ-εοΊ, 
 Α. τ£$ <ελέκ-εα£, εΓ$, 
 V. ω ιτελε'κ-εε^ ε?£, 
 
 Ν. τά άόΐ-εα, η, 
 G. των αίΤ7-εων, 
 D. τοΓ$ α<τ7-εοΊ, 
 Α. τά άί/Ι-εα, 5), 
 V. ώ αο"7-εα, η. 
 
 1. The Attic genitive in εω^ίβ most in use. Sometimes, 
 though rarely, the accusative singular is in ΐ; as, Βασίλη, 
 and among the older Attics, the nominative plural is in 
 yjg ; as, Βαο*Ίλη£. 
 
 2. Nouns in bus pure, contract εω£, into tig ; and εα, into 
 a ; as, χοε^, Gen. %os'w$, χοω$ ; Ace. χοεα, χοα» 
 
Third Declension — Atk and 5th Form of Contracts 
 
 Some nouns in us, make the genitive in uo^, dati 
 nominative and accusative plural υς ; as, ΙχΜς, ίος } ύι, Ν 
 and Λ. Pi. ΙχΜες,ιχΑυς. 
 
 FOURTH FORM OF CONTRACTS. 
 
 Two terminations, ως, ω, feminine. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 \. r, φει5-ώ, 
 G. ττ,ς φειδ-όος, ους, 
 D. τη φειδ-όϊ, οΓ, 
 Α. <τήν φειδ-όα, ώ, 
 V. ώ φ$ιδ-οΐ. 
 
 Dual. 
 Ν. Α. V. ι*ά φειί-ώ, 
 G. D. ταΓν φειδ-οΓν. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Ν 
 
 G. των φετ 
 
 D. ταΓ^ φα6-ο7ς } 
 
 Α. τά^φβί' 
 
 V. ώ φειό-οί. 
 
 1. There are only two nouns in ως of this form, αϊδως and 
 ήω£, which are rarely found out of the singular. 
 
 The dual and plural have the form of the second de- 
 clension. 
 
 FIFTH FORM OF CONTRACTS. 
 
 Two terminations, ας pure, and pas, neuter gender. 
 
 Singular. 
 Ν . τό χέρας, 
 
 G. rx χύρατος, χϊραος, χϊρω£. 
 
 D. Tutxspalij Χίραϊ, xt'pa. 
 
 Α. το xs'pas, 
 V. ω χίρας. 
 
 Dual. 
 Ν. Α. V. τώ Xfc'pa7e, xipa*, xipa. 
 
 G. D. τοΓν χεραϊοίν, xtpaoiv, χερών. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Ν. τα χέρα! a. xs'paa, «pa. 
 
 G. ruv χβρά7ων, xtpawv, xfpwv. 
 
 D. rofc xspatfi. 
 
 Α. τά xipala, χε'ραα, xspa. 
 
 V. ω xspa7a, xe'paa, xspa. 
 
 Some nouns arc contracted by the omission of a 
 vow< I 
 ι tn every c*a κιν<ι*,χ&βν. 
 
Third Declension — Contractions. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 εων. 
 Sing. 
 Ν. κεν-εών, gjv. 
 G. κεν-εώνο£, ωνο$, &c. 
 
 εαρ. 
 Ν. lap, ηρ. 
 G. εαρο$, 'ήρος, &c. 
 
 αα$. 
 Sing. 
 Ν. λαα£, λα£. 
 G. "Κάαοζ,Χοοζ, &q. 
 
 afe. 
 
 Ν. όαΐ$, ό\χ£. 
 
 G. δαϊδος, δάδος, &6. 
 
 2. In part of the cases ; as, βυγάτηρ, Δημήτηρ, άν^ρ,* 
 5Τατήρ ? μήτ^ρ } yaCTT/p.t 
 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Ν. duyaJ-^p, 
 
 
 Ν. ύυγαΊ-έρες, ρε$, 
 
 G. όυ^αΐ-έροέ, ρ<>£, 
 
 Ν.Α.ν.^α7-ερε, ρε, 
 
 G. ^υ^α7-ε , ρων,ρό3ν, 
 
 D. όυγαΊ-έρι, ρ/, 
 
 
 D. -Ouya7-patfi, 
 
 Α. ύυγαΐ-ερα, ρα, 
 
 G.D.^uya7-cpoiv 3 ροΓν. 
 
 Α. βυγαΐ-έρας, ρας, 
 
 V. Myct7-sp. 
 
 
 V. όυ^ατ-ερε^, ρε$. 
 
 Μ , Sing * 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Ν. αν ήρ, 
 
 
 Ν. άν έρε£. δρες, 
 G. άν-ερών, ορών, 
 
 G. άν-ε'ρο£, όρος, 
 
 Ν. Α. V. άν-ερε, £ρε, 
 
 D. άν-ερι, δρί, 
 Α. άν-ερα, όρα, 
 
 
 D. άν•δράοΊ, 
 
 G. D. άν-εροΓν ? <5ροΓν. 
 
 Α. άν-ε'ρα£. #ρα£, 
 
 V. αν-ερ. 
 
 - 
 
 V. άν-ερε^, δρες. 
 
 Sing, 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Ν. ^α7 ήρ, 
 
 
 Ν. «ττα7-έρε^, 
 
 G. ΑΤα7-έρο£, ρό$, 
 
 Ν. Α. V. #α7-έρε, ρε, 
 
 G. ^τα7-έρων, 
 
 D. <τα7-έρι, ρί, 
 
 
 D. #α7-ρα0Ί, 
 
 Α. #α7-ερα, 
 
 G. D. #α7-εροιν, ροΓν. 
 
 Α. #α7 έρα£, 
 
 V. ιτά7-ερ. 
 
 
 V. #α7-έρε£. 
 
 * ' Avtfp inserts 6, because ν never immediately precedes p. 
 
 t irartfp, μήτηρ, γαντήρ, have no contraction in tie accusative singu- 
 lar, or in the plural, to distinguish them from nafpa, μήτρα, γάστρα, ©ί 
 the first declension. 
 
I isular Nouns. 
 
 23 
 
 Γα<τΊήρ differs from - d μν>;ρ, bj l 
 
 live | kffa 
 
 - ae noun* I only in the nominative 
 
 plural. 
 
 
 Ν. χλ 
 
 * i 
 
 ( j j . , 1 1 : . 
 
 Plu r 
 
 Ν . χλ 
 Α.κλ 
 Υ.χλ- 
 
 
 1 
 
 \. χάλΉ-ιδες 
 Λ. χάλ-κτ-ί 
 V . χάΧ-α- 
 
 
 Ν*. 
 
 
 ■ιίε$, J 
 
 
 
 Ν./3' . 
 G.j8oo ff , 
 
 IIC. 
 
 Plural 
 
 \ . 
 \ ι 
 
 
 Α. βοϊξ< 
 ν.βοίξ-υες. ) 
 
 Ν./3- 
 Α. β~όας, 
 
 y 
 
 **. 
 
 'Έ^ιίε^, κΧει^ί^, seem to liavo been contract- 
 
 ed to avoid the unpleasant concurrence of the letters 
 ός* which were not sufficiently separated by the ii 
 short rowel. This could not be done with t! • 
 »(5o£, οξνώος, Ιξώος> because it would d< 
 characteristic. 
 
 [RREGULAR M»r\ 
 
 Irregular Nouns are either defective or redundant 
 
 DEFECT l 
 
 are alto<'ether indeclinable. 
 
 : Vide rmle iv. p. 5. 
 
24 Irregular Nouns. 
 
 1. Names of letters ; as, το άλφα ; τ£ άλφα. 
 
 2. Cardinal numbers from tfsv7s to έκα7ο'ν. 
 
 3. Poetic nouns which have lost the last syllable by apo- 
 cope ; as, το δω for όωμα. 
 
 4. Proper names derived from other languages ; as, δ 
 "Ιακώβ, τ* 'Ιακώβ. Feminines are sometimes declined ; and 
 those which have taken Greek terminations ; as, δ Ιάκ- 
 ωβος. 
 
 Some have only one case ; as, Ν δως, a gift, V. ω 
 τάν, friend.^ Dual, oWs, eyes. Plu. G. έάων, of good 
 things. V. ω IIoVoi, Ο Gods. 
 
 Some have two cases ; as, Ν. φ&οΐΒςοτ φ&οΐς } cakes ; A. 
 φ$οΓα£. 
 
 Some neuters have the same word in three cases ; as, 
 N. A. V. οναρ, δέμας, όφελος βρείας, &,c. 
 
 Some have the singular only ; as, γη, ά-ηξ , akg, irvg. 
 
 Some have only the plural ; as, names of festivals and 
 some cities. Διονυσία, Bacchanalia $ ? Αθήναι, Athens. 
 
 REDUNDANT. 
 
 I. In the nominative, 
 
 j. Of the same declension ; as, 
 
 '/} άνΊίδϋΊος τθ άν7ί5ο7ον, an antidote, 
 
 δ ζνγός, a yoke ; τδ ζνγόν, a balance. 
 δ tf7a<5io£, το <τ7άδιον, stadium, &c. 
 
 In the plural of the second declension ; as, 
 δ δεόμίς, a bond ; οι <$ε<ίμοί, τα δεσ'μά. 
 δ κύκλος, a circle ; οι κύκλοι, τα κύκλα. 
 δ \ύγνος, a candle ; 01 λύχνοι, τα λύχνα. 
 
 Names of Gods and men, being much in use, are more 
 redundant than others. Jupiter is reckoned to have had 
 
 ten ; Ζευς, Αεύς, Βδεός, Ζάς, Ζης, Αίς, Ζψ, Ζάν, Δήν, Δαν. 
 These, however, differ only in dialect, and may be reduced 
 totwo^fc,* andZ^v, which alone are declined. 
 
 N. G. D. A. V. 
 
 Αίς, ) Αιός, Διί, Δία, 
 
 Ζευς, ) Ζεΰ. 
 Ζήν, Ζψός, Ζηνί, Ζηνα, 
 
 * Δ/ί has become obsolete. 
 
irregular Λ 
 
 as, 
 
 I throw. 
 
 ι 
 
 ιχη, ΤΟ 1 ., 
 
 ο νοΓ -. mind. 
 
 II. Redundant in the oblique cases, while the nomina- 
 
 N. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 ( til. 
 
 
 
 "Ay ιό \ 
 
 . 
 
 ι* 
 
 "A^loc;, "Afcoc. Mars 
 
 
 -Xif, 
 
 -wef, a mushroom. 
 
 
 
 εξωΊος, love. kc. 
 
 From these redundant nouns must be distinguished those 
 which, with different terminations, have different meanings ; 
 _rain ; το rirov, food. 
 
 Some nouns are peculiar to dialects ; Bfi . a gate. 
 
 Poet \ Ionic. 
 
 N8 DERIVED FROM OTHERS FOR DISTINCTION OF SEX. 
 
 Nouns are often derived from other nouns, for distinc- 
 tion of sex. 
 
 1. In the first declension, the feminine is formed by 
 changing ijf, into if-i&f, and ττ,ς into <π£-<π£ο£, νρς-τρώος or 
 r -ια. 
 
 Masc. Fern. 
 
 Scythian. r, Sxuoig-iJof, a Scythian woman. 
 . a prophet. 4 *ρ•φη7ι$-7ι<$ο£, a pro]»! 
 ο auXrjTn^, a pip< η αυλ7]7ρί£-7ρι<5ο£, a female }>iper. 
 
 ο ψάλΐη^, a singer. ή ψάλ7ρια, a female einger. 
 
 A few are formed from ας ; as, τ, vtavif, from 6 v£aviot£, a 
 young man. 
 
 lecond declen ; is changed into a ui 
 
 and sometimes into ις-ώος and ι 
 
 ra. 
 ό fci/Xaff, a no η io.'> .>;. a maid servant, 
 
 ι God 
 
 δ ay 
 
 •:α;να ; a wolf. 
 
%$ Patronymics. 
 
 In the third declension, ων is changed into α/να ; ν&, ξ, ψ. 
 into <f<fa ; εως, into εια, i£, or iCtfa ; υς, into utftfa ; ηρ, and ωρ, 
 into ειρα ; ως, into ωΐς, ωϊνη or ας, 
 
 6 λέων, a lion. ^ λε'αίνα, a lioness. 
 
 δ Kgfe, a Cretan. ^ KpSjotfa, a Cretan woman. 
 
 ο Κίλιξ, a Cilician. ^ KiXietfa, a Cilician woman. 
 
 6 βαϋιΚεύς, a king. ή βασίλεια, a queen. 
 
 δ (fuHy ξ. 7} (fu/Js^a, a Saviour. 
 
 1. Some masculines have many feminines ; as, b θεός, lj eia,f) θέαινα. 
 b βασιλεύς, king. ^ βαοΐΚεια, βασίλισσα, βασιΚίς, βασίλιννα, queen. 
 
 2. Anciently the same word was used in both genders ; as, b, ή 
 Θεός, b, ϊ^ατρός, b, ή τύραννος, b, ή δεσπότης. 
 
 3. Some of these derivatives differ in signification; as, iraiprf, a 
 friend ; itaipa, or εταίρις, a concubine. 
 
 PATRONYMICS. 
 
 Masculine patronymics are formed from the primitive* by 
 changing the termination of its genitive into αδη$, ιαδη£, and 
 ιδτ,ς. 
 
 1. Nouns of the first declension, and log of the second, 
 change the genitive s into αδη£. Bopscc^, Βορε'-*, Βορε-άδη£, 
 the son of Boreas ; "HXios-^HXi-x, Ήλι-άδη$. 
 
 2. Other nouns change the termination of the genitive 
 into ίδης ; as, Kpovos-s. Κρον-ιδτ;£. Α'ίαξ, G. Αϊαχ -os, Αι'αχ-ίδη£. 
 'ΝεόΊωρ-ΝέόΊοξ-ος, Νε<τ1ο£-ίδη£. 
 
 3. But in αΖΖ nouns which have the penult of the geni- 
 tive long, the change is into ιαδης ; as, ΑκερΊης-χ, Λαερ7-ιάδη£. 
 "ΑΊΧας-ανΊος, ΆΊΧανΊ-ιάδης. 
 
 The Ionics form their Patronymics in ίων ; as, Κρανίων for Κρονίδης*. 
 from Kpovc?. The JEolics, in άδιος ; as, Ύρράδιος for Ύρράδης. 
 
 Feminine patronymics end in fe, as, ivrj, or ωνη. 
 
 1 . Those in ις and as are formed from their masculines, 
 by casting off δη ; as, Nstrtopfe, daughter of Nestor, from 
 ΝεαΊορί-δη?, son of Nestor ; Ήλιά^ from "ΗΧιάδ-ης, 
 
 2. Those in Ύ\1ς are formed by changing the nominative of 
 the primitive into ηϊ£ ; as, Xpjtf-^s, Χρυ(Τ-^ίίΤ ; Κάδμος Καδ- 
 
 3. Those in ινη are formed from nominatives of the se- 
 cond declension in ος impure, and of the third form of con- 
 tracts, in the third declension ; as, "ΑδςαάΊος, Άί^αΛίντμ 
 
 Χη?εί^, Νη^ίνη. 
 
Di/ninutires — Adjectives. 
 
 4. Those in ωνη, from nominati\» ; ofthe second, 
 
 and it* ofthe third declension 
 u'ov, 'J 1Λ 
 
 DIMINUTIVE! 
 
 1. Masculine diminutives end in iac, og, 
 ;χνο$, itfxos, &c. ; l :^'a£, a term oi' endearment, from 
 
 tfaf, a father. 
 Feminine diminutives end in ac, <;. 
 ίΟ'χη ; as, χ£ηνί£, a little fountain, from κρήνη, a fountain. 
 
 Ν «liter diminutives end in »v, «jov, not, 
 αχνιον, ctjiov, atfiov, &c. ; as, c7^(3iov, a little sparrow, from 
 αΐξχ&ός, a sparrow, &c. 
 
 1. One primitive has sometimes a variety of derivative 
 as, from χό^η, a girl, is derived κο£ί<Τχη, xofatfiov, xgpiov, 
 i<ov.* 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Signification of the principal terminations. 
 1. Adjectives in avos, io£, and ο\γ,ς, denote the quality of 
 objects from which they are derived ; as, giysiavo's, shud- 
 dering, from Jiyo^. 
 
 Those in χος, aiog, Bo?, ojoc, and pof, denote origin, or 
 •belonging to;" as, ά/οραΓο^, belonging to the market; 
 rarptyV, relating to the father ; ypeupixo's, belonging to paint- 
 ing. 
 
 3. Those in ffif-wtf, αλεο$, oj^, fpos, ηρο£, and sivos, denote 
 fulness ; as, χαρίεις full of grace .»<:, full of trees ; 
 
 ίημαΚ^ς, fearful ; ψαμμώδφ, full of sand ; ίολίρό$, full of 
 cratt. Those ill f pos and ηρο^, sometimes denote propensi- 
 ty ; as, οΐνηρός, given to wine. Others have an active mean- 
 ing ; r<s, νοσηρός, causing disease. 
 
 Those in -ηΧος and uXaf, denote propensity : β 
 given to silence ; ψίυίωλ^^, prone to lying. 
 
 1 ontracted into ic, and ivofc with the accent 
 en the ante-penult, denote the Waiter of winch a thing 
 
 rmiattion*. Itascolinti end 
 
 ιας; IB, τωγωνίας, having Ι λπΪ, from waym . 
 
 :, a full grown Iamb, from Jp, a lamb. 
 
 tofch, (bun fcfc a torch. 
 ond in ίο* ; as, v 1 jjreat stone, from ppp ,\% a afeta 
 
28 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 made ; as, χ^α^ος or χρυοΌυ^, made of gold ; ^λινο^, made 
 of wood. 
 
 6. Those in i/ags, denote chiefly fitness, passive or active ; 
 as, μάχιμος, warlike. 
 
 7. Those in μων -ovos, which are chiefly verbals, denote 
 the active quality of the verb ; as, ελεήμων, compassionate, 
 from ikeio). 
 
 Adjectives of three terminations. 
 The feminine follows the first declension of nouns ; 
 masculines in egj the second ; all other masculines, the 
 third. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Ν κάλ -o's, ή, ov, 
 G καλ-ου, η£, ου, 
 D καλ-ω, y», ψ, 
 Α καλ-όν, ην, όν, 
 V καλ-ε, ή, όν. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Ν. Α. V καλ-ώ 3 ά, ώ, 
 G. D καλ-οΤν, αΓν, οΓν. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Ν καλ•οί, αί, α, 
 G καλ-ών, ων, ων, 
 D καλ-οΓ$, αΐς, οϊς } 
 Α καλ-ο^, α£, ά, 
 V καλ-οί, αί, ά. 
 
 Adjectives in ο£ pure, and pos, have the feminine in α ; 
 
 as, άξιος-α-ον ; μακρός, -κρα, -κρον. 
 
 Except compounds of ττλοο^ and adjectives in εο£, denot- 
 ing matter and color ;* as, χρύΰΒος, η, ov ; φοινίκεο^, η, ov ; 
 also the numeral όγδοος. But the neuter plural of these is 
 in α ; as, χρυ#ά. 
 
 Sing % 
 Ν μακρ-ο£, ά, qv, 
 G μακρ-ου, α£, ου, 
 D μακρ-ζί, α, ξ>, 
 Α μακρ-όν,άν, όν, 
 V μακρ,έ, ct, όν. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Ν.Α.νμακρ-ώ, α, ώ, 
 G.D μακρ-οιν, αΓν,οΓν. 
 
 Plural. 
 Ν μακρ-οί, αί, ά, 
 G μακρ-ών, ojv, ων, 
 D μακρ -οϊς, αΐς, οΐς, 
 Α μακρ-ο^, <*£, ά, 
 V μακρ-οί, αί, ά. 
 
 1. Some adjectives of this form are contracted ; as, 
 
 fflCtfsog-'ug, χρ^εη-ν?, ^p^tfeov-Sv, &c. 
 gWX00£-*£, α^λόη-ν), ά^λόον -Sv, &:c. 
 
 2. The defective adjective <fmg, or <ϋ*, contracted from 
 caog or ffoos, is thus declined : 
 
 Sing. Ν. ό, f ; , ύως, (-/} (Τα) ro tfwv. 
 Α. τον, την y τό, (ίων. 
 
 * Except when ρ precedes $ος ; as, apyvphg, -α-•ν ; also, «pa/uo* and 
 
' 
 
 β 
 
 IM .4o7)tac 
 
 :7of , cotfoil•*, and r*ml*g, have 
 
 ua- 
 αθάνα7<*, »β rooft 
 
 . uof, euo$. i<* ; as, iwu -β in χ•ς, λκ» 
 
 isloaH- 
 
 'ig. Dual. 
 
 ν \ \ 
 
 \ I). 
 
 I 
 
 jv t 
 
 I. The PoeU oft iscu- 
 
 *όρ7ιν, f 
 
 TOpTi. 
 
 
 
 I). 
 
 PloraL 
 
 ral. 
 
 I 
 
 . av7s, h . 
 D.*-c I). r curt, ά<τ; 
 
 ^α, αν. ;, iltfou, α. 
 
 \ 
 
 vad Ci! 
 
m 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 Sing. Dual. 
 
 Ν.χαρί -tts, «JVa, εν, I N. A- V. 
 Ο.χαρί-ενΊος,ύΜγις,ενΊος,Ιχαρί-ενΙε,έΜα 
 
 Ι).χαρί-εν7ι, 6r<ty, gv7i, 
 Α.χαρί-εν7α, sotfav, εν, 
 
 εν7ε, 
 G.D. 
 
 χαρι-ε'ν7οιν, id- 
 tfaiv, sVJqiv. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Ν.χαρί-εν7ε£, stoat, svta, 
 
 G^api-8'v76JV,gtftf3v,g'v76JV, 
 
 Ο.χαρί-ειβΊ, ititfaig, sitfi, 
 Α.χαρί-εν7α$,ενοΌ£, εν7α, 
 
 ν,χαρί-εν7ε$,εοναι, εν7α. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 G.rj^-$jv7o£,^(f<r7)s,7Jv7os, 
 D.rifi.-5jv7i, ήαν?7> 5jv7i, 
 Α.τιμ-τ)ν7α, Sjatfav, ην, 
 y i <πμ-ην,& > 
 
 Sjtftfa^v 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. 
 
 τιμ-ην7ε, SjoWa, 
 
 ην7ε, 
 G.D. 
 <πμ-ήν7οιν, ή<7- 
 
 tfcciv, ήν7οιν. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Ν.*ϊμ,-ην7ε$, Sjtftfai, ην7α, 
 6.τιμ-ήν7ων,ηονων, ήν7ων, 
 Ο.τιμ-ηόΊ, 7}(f(faig, 5jtfi, 
 Α.<πμ-ην7α£, Sjtftfas, ην7α, 
 
 ν.<πμ-ην7$£> r\<f(fat, ψΊα. 
 
 ανζ. 
 Sing. Dual. 
 
 N.ffXax-2s,S<fa'a,Sv, Ν. Α. V. 
 
 G.flrXax-Sv7o5,io'(fijff,Sv7off,WXax-Sv78,ae'. 
 
 D.tfXax-sv7i, stftfy?, Sv7i, 
 A'tfXax-sv7a, stftfav, 2v, 
 
 StftfajSv, 
 
 * r ) *Χακ-2ν, 
 
 it 
 
 tfXax-S, 
 
 tfa 5 £ν7ε, 
 G.D. 
 
 #Xax-£v7oiv, 
 soVaiv,sv7oiv. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Ν.#Χακ-*ν7ε£, Stfefai, 2ν7α, 
 G. orXax-av7wv,s<j'(j'wv i £v7wv, 
 D.tfXax-S<fi, stftfais, Stfi, 
 A.flrXax-8v7a^,itfaO^,Sv7a, 
 
 V .4τΧακ-3ν7ε£,2ο'0'αι, 2v7a. 
 
 Sing. 
 Ν.τερ-ην, εινα, εν, 
 Ο.τερ-ενο^,είνη^,ενο^, 
 D. rip- εν ι, shy, svi, 
 Α.τε'ρ-ενα, ειναν, εν, 
 ν,τερ-εν, εινα, εν. 
 
 ^V. 
 
 Dual. 
 Ν. Α. V. 
 
 τε'ρ-ενε, είνα, ενε, 
 
 G. D. 
 τερ -svwv, είναιν, ενοιν. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N.rs'p-svsg, είναι, ενα. 
 Θ.τερ-δ'νων, sivwv, svwv, 
 ϋ.τε'ρ-εβΊ, είναις, εβΊ, 
 Α.<Γ8ρ-ενα£, είνα$, ενα, 
 ν.<Γϊ'ρ-ενε^, εινα», εν». 
 
 
 EXCEPTION?. 
 
 Ms'Xas and <τάΧα£ borrow their feminine from the obsolete 
 αεΧαίνο^ and «-αλαίνο^ ; 
 
 * Τιμήεις has, in the vocative case, τιμ$ε* and τιμήα* whence we hare 
 τψην and τιμή in the contracted form, 
 t Contracted from πλακΦαν and ττλβκΛτ, the vocative of χ\σκ6ά$ 
 
Adject 
 
 I 
 
 . SlI: 
 
 Ν.μ:'λ-α$, αινα, αν, 
 1 λ-λ-ανο^, αίνη£, ανο;, 
 ϋ.μί'λ-ανι, α»νη, c. 
 Α.μ:λ-ανα, αιναν, αν, 
 ν ^ /.-αν, αινα, αν. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Ν. Λ \. 
 μ/λ-ανβ,αίνα,ανε. 
 
 G. Ι). 
 usX -άνοΐν, αίναιν 
 
 Plural. 
 \.μ/λ-αν££, αιναι, α 
 (ι.μελ-άνων,αινων, ί 
 Ι >. . λ-α*ι, αίναΐ£, 04 
 \ α λ-ανα$, αίνα£, ανα, 
 >.-av:c, atvai, ανα. 
 
 In like mannncr τνΧας. 
 
 Μ-ίγας borrows the feminine gender, with most of the 
 masculine and neuter, from the obsolete μί^άλ-ο^, η, ov. 
 
 Sing. Dual 
 
 Ν. μ*ϊγ~ας, άλη, α, Ν• Α• V. 
 
 G. μ5^άλ-ου, ν\ζ 9 ου, μί^άλ-ω, α, ω, 
 D. με^άλ-ω, ;/j, ω, ' ■ ' ι 
 
 Λ. μ^-αν, άλην, α, 
 λ Γ . μέχ-α, άλη, α. 
 
 G. D. 
 
 μίχάλ-οιν, αιν, οιν, 
 
 Plural. 
 Ν. με/άλ-οι, αι,α, 
 G. με^άλ-ων, ων, ων, 
 D. μβγαλ-νς, ως, οις, 
 Λ. μίχάλ-ους, α$, α, 
 V. μεχάλ-οι, αι, α. 
 
 IloXuV borrows the feminine, and most of the masculine 
 and neuter, from the obsolete *Όλλ-ο'$, ; n, όν. 
 
 Sing. Dual. 
 
 N. toX -ύς, λή, ύ, j N. A. V. 
 
 •G. ττολ-λου, X?j£, λου,,ϊΤολλ-ώ, ά, ω, 
 1>. *ολ-λφ, λ>ί, λω, ι G. D. 
 
 Α. τολ-ίίν, λήν, J, ρΌλλ-οΓν, αΓν, οΓν. 
 
 Plural. 
 Χ. τολλ-οί, αί, ά, 
 G. -τολλ-ων, ων, ων, 
 D. τολλ-οΐ£, ως, οΐς, 
 Α. «τολλ-ο^, α£, ά, 
 V. «τολλ-οί, αί, ά. 
 
 1 . *οΚύς is sometimes declined regularly by the poets, 
 like οξύς; as, tfoX-uV, εΓα, u, &c. Iliad A. 559. 
 
 2. Πολλοί ^ολλή, *ολλόν, is sometimes found regularly 
 declined in all the cases. 
 
 TERMINATIONS PECULIAR TO PARTICIPLES. 
 
 ων, outfa, ouv, 2d Future Active• 
 
 { 1st and 2d Aorist Passive, and 2d 
 ( Conjugation of Verbs in μι. 
 
 :1ς, ει<Τα, εν, 
 
 ου<Τα, ov, 3d ) η c Λ τ , 
 
 -,,.v,4th j Conjugation of Verbs in μ». 
 
 0ς, mo. 
 
 , ω<Τα, ως, 
 
 Perfect Active and Middle- 
 Perfect Middle Ionic. 
 
 ( ntnicted from•-»?, α-νιβ, a-ojr 
 
 5? 
 
 Γ5 . 
 
 r| 
 
 f — I 
 
32 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 ων. 
 
 m Sin g• 
 
 Ν. *w-wv, oOVa, ofy, 
 
 G. rvit'&vvlog , xtfrjg•, ouv7g£, 
 D. *w-ouv7i, &<f/], oOYIi, 
 Α. <rW-ouv7a, outfav, ουν, 
 V. TUtf-WV, ouVoc. ouv. 
 
 Dual. 
 N. A. V. <ri>tf-euv7s, stfa. oOVJs, 
 G* D. *w-&v7oiv, £<faiv^&v7oiv• 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N.Tutf-oOVJss, outfai, 2v7a, 
 G. tW-ouv7wv, outfwv £ν7ων, 
 D. rutf-outfi, ojtfais, ουβΊ, 
 Α. τυ<7Γ-ουν7α£, ovtfag, ouv7a, 
 V. *w-ouv7$£, outfai, ouv7a. 
 ους. 
 
 ? in S•, 
 
 Ν. διδ-οίς, ouVa, όν, 
 
 G. διδ-όν7ο^, oitf^s, όν7ο£, 
 D. διδ-όν7ι, ouofy, 6v7i, 
 A. 5ii-:v7a,outfav, όν, 
 V. διό-ούς. outfa, όν. 
 
 Dual. 
 Ν. Α. V. δ*δ-όν7ε, oitfa, όν7ε, 
 G• D• J*(5-6v7oiv, outfaiv, όν7οιν. 
 
 Plural. 
 N. <5i£-ov7s£, outfai, ov7a, 
 G. διδ-όν7ων, outfwv, όν7ων, 
 D. διδ-ουβΊ, ojtfais, outfi, 
 A. Jii-6v7«£, ojtfas, όν7α, 
 V. διδ-όν7ε$, oucTai, ov7a. 
 
 Si " g ', 
 
 Ν. τετυφ-ώ^, υ Γα, o£, 
 
 G. τε<Γυφ-ό7ο£, υία£, ό7ο£, 
 D. <τετυφ-ό7ι,ι>ία, ό7<, 
 Α. τε«τυφ-ό7α, υΓαν, ο£, 
 V. τετυ<ρ-ώ$, υΓα, ός. 
 
 Dual. 
 Ν• Α. V. τετυφ-ό7ε, υία, ό7ε, 
 G. D. «τε<Γνφ-ό7οιν, υίαιν, o7civ. 
 
 εις. 
 
 Sing. 
 Ν. τυφ&•είς, εϊόα,, εν, 
 G. τυφύ-ένΊος. εία^έ, έντφ, 
 D. τυφ0-ε'ν7ι, sitiji, εν7ι, 
 Α. «τυφό-εν7α, εί^αν, εν, 
 V. <τυφ0-εΐ£, εΓ(Τα, ε'ν. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Ν. Α. V. τυφ$~έν7ε, εί^α, ε'ν7ί, ♦ 
 G. D. rucpd-sVJoiv, iitfatv, εν7ο»ν. 
 
 Plural. 
 Ν. τυφύ-ένΊες, εΐόαι, ε'ν7α, 
 
 , <τυφ0-ε'ν7ων, sitfwv, ε'ν7ων, 
 D. τυφ^-είόΊ, εΓα'αι^, εΓσΊ, 
 Α. τυφ0-ε'ν7α£, εί^α^, ε'ν7α, 
 V. τυφ0-ε'ν7ε£, είβ'αι, εν7α. 
 
 ν*. 
 Sing. 
 Ν. £ευ/ν-0£, utfa, ύν, 
 G. ζευγν-υνΊος, uVr^, ύν7θ£, 
 D. ζειιχν-ύν7ι, UC7J, ύν7ι, 
 Α. £ευχν-ύ*ν7α, Stfav, ύν, 
 V. £ευ^ν-ό$, OVa, όν. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Ν. Α. V. £ευχν-ύν7ε, uVa, όν7ε, 
 G. D. ζευγν-ύνίοιν, uVaiv, ίν7οιν. 
 
 Plural. 
 Ν. £ευ^ν-υν7ε$, utfai, uv7a, 
 G. ^uyv-iiv7wv, utfojv, L'v7wv, 
 D. ζευ^ν-ύβΊ, 0Vai£, dirt, 
 Α. ξευχν-όν7α£, u(fa£, uv7a, 
 V. £ευχν-ίν7ε$, uVa<, ύ"ν7α. 
 
 ω£ contracted. 
 
 Sing ; 
 Ν. ioV-ws, wtfa, ως, 
 G. §(Λγ-&*0£, ώ(Γη£, wro£ 5 
 D. έο'τ-ωτι, «Cry, toVi, 
 Α. ε^τ-ώτα, ώο'αν,ώ^, 
 V. £<jV-w£, wtfa, ως. 
 
 Dual. 
 Ν. Α. V. ε^τ-ώτε, ώ^α, ώ>ε, 
 G. D. έον-ώτων, ώίΤαιν, wtfw. 
 
I I 
 
 Plur 
 
 \. rtruf ό7α, 
 
 Ι τυφ-όοΊ, ι•ίαΐ£, otfj, 
 ! !7ctf, υία£, o7a, 
 
 ό7α. 
 
 I 
 
 Ν. Itfr 
 
 G. έαν-ωτων, ωό 
 
 I 
 
 V. stfr fej, ώ>α. 
 
 IDJ1 •:• T1VE8 OF TWO TSRMINATK 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ο?. 
 
 II. and Γ- 
 
 λ. 
 
 Dual. 
 Μ \\ and Ν. 
 
 Plural. 
 Μ. and Γ. 
 
 — ou• 
 
 D. £v<5og — ω. 
 
 \. \Ί0ζ OV. 
 
 ον. 
 
 Ν. Α. V. 
 
 ένδόξ-ω. 
 
 ο. η. 
 
 ένδόξ-οιν. 
 
 Ν α. 
 
 — ων. 
 1). Ιν&ξ — οι$. 
 
 V. tvoog -οι, α. 
 
 Sing. 
 M.and F. 
 
 Ν. 
 
 ωρ. 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 Μ. and Γ. \. 
 
 λ . j /λήτ-ωρ, op 
 G μΐ^αλήτ — opo£. 
 D. μ^αλήτ — op/. 
 Α. με^αλήτ-ορα, op, 
 V. μ.-^, j.\rr — op. 
 
 λ. Λ. V. 
 
 μ^αλήτ-ορε. 
 
 G. D. 
 
 μ^ αλητ-όροιν• 
 
 Χ.; φφ, ορα. 
 G μεγάλης-—- όρων. 
 D. μι^αλήτ — ορόΊ. 
 
 ορα. 
 V. μ &ρ$$, ορα. 
 
 Sincr. 
 M. and 1 
 
 Ν. 
 
 ας. 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 Μ. and Χ. 
 
 j -ας, 
 
 αν. 
 
 Ν. Α. V. 
 
 αν τα 
 
 I ! ίν — av<ro£. 
 
 
 oUiv-avcff. 
 
 G• < >ν. 
 
 1 > . 
 
 
 
 D. dsh — a(fi. 
 
 Λ . » 
 
 αν. 
 
 G. ':•• 
 
 A, avra 
 
 -αν. 
 
 
 άειν-άντοιν. 
 
 V• < .. avra. 
 
 Μ- and I 
 
 Ν. 
 
 'ν. 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 . and P. 
 
 Ν. Λχαρ-•^ 
 
 ι. 
 
 V Λ. V. 
 
 wa. 
 
 G. \ \τος. 
 
 I>. χάρ — IT». 
 
 Λ. ίυχαρ-ιτα & ιν, ι. 
 
 ευχάρ• 
 (.. Ι). 
 
 ν .p l<Tl. 
 
 ira. 
 
 ^αρ — ι. 
 
 
 
 
34 
 
 Adject 
 
 ives. 
 
 
 
 
 νζ. 
 
 
 
 Sing. ' 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 Ν. 
 
 Μ. F. and Ν. 
 
 Μ. and F. 
 
 Ν. 
 
 Ν. α<5ακρ*υ$, 
 
 Ό. 
 
 Ν. Α. V. 
 
 Ν. άδάχρ-νες, υζ, 
 
 υ«. 
 
 G. άδάκρ — υος. 
 
 
 ά<5άκρ-υε. 
 
 G. ά5ακρ — ύων. 
 
 
 D. άδάχρ — υι• 
 
 
 
 D. άδάκρ — uffi. 
 
 
 Α. αίακρ-υν, 
 
 υ 
 
 G.D. 
 
 Α. άίάκρ-υα^, ιΐ£, 
 
 υα. 
 
 V. αδακρ -u. 
 
 
 ά^ακρ-ύοιν. 
 
 V. ά&χκρ-υε£, υ£, 
 
 υα. 
 
 
 ους* 
 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Ν. 
 
 Μ. and F. 
 
 Ν. 
 
 
 Μ. and F. 
 
 Ν. iwr-ous, 
 
 •υν 
 
 ^ Ν. Α. V. 
 
 Ν. δίιτ-οδες, 
 
 ο5α. 
 
 G. <5iV — οδός. 
 
 
 δίπ-οδε. 
 
 G. oW* — οίων. 
 
 
 D. Hit — oil. 
 
 
 
 D. &V — οοΊ. 
 
 
 A. δίπ-οδα & ow 
 
 >, ουν 
 
 . G.D. 
 
 Α. iiV-oias, 
 
 ο δα* 
 
 V. δίιϊ-ους & ου, 
 
 OUV 
 
 .[ διιτ-οδοιν. IV. iiV -οδε^, 
 
 οδα. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 ην. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 Μ. and F. 
 
 Ν. 
 
 
 Μ. and F. 
 
 Ν. 
 
 Ν. ct^ -ην, 
 
 εν. 
 
 Ν. Α. V. f 
 
 ί. άξενες, . 
 
 ενα. 
 
 G. αϊϊ — svog. 
 
 
 α^-ενε. ( 
 
 τ. a||— -ένων. 
 
 
 D. ά|| — ενι. 
 
 
 Ι 
 
 ). oif| — ε<?ι. 
 
 
 Α. α^|-ενα, 
 V. ά||— εν. 
 
 εν. 
 
 G. D. 
 
 L α||-ενα£ 5 
 
 ενα. 
 
 ι 
 
 ά^-ε'νοιν. Λ 
 
 ιΓ. α|§-ενε$, 
 
 ενα% 
 
 
 ω$4 
 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Ν. 
 
 Μ. and F. 
 
 Ν. 
 
 
 Μ. and F. 
 
 Ν. ευχε-ω£, 
 
 CJV. 
 
 
 Ν. gyyg — ω, 
 
 G. Buys — ω. 
 
 
 Ν. Α. V. έύγε-ω. 
 
 G. syys — ων. 
 
 
 D. ει) γε — ω. 
 
 
 
 D. εΐ'^ε — ως. 
 
 
 Α. ευ^ε — ων. 
 
 
 G. D• έύγε-ων. 
 
 Α. $ye-w£, 
 
 ω. 
 
 V. ευ^ε-ω^, 
 
 ων. 
 
 
 
 V. ε'^ε — ω. 
 
 11 
 
 * After the substantives of which they are compounded. Thus, 
 ννόδας, «ν ; O. -qvtos ; D. -ovrt ; A. -ovra, «v. Contracted compounds 
 ©f nouns of the 2d Declension : thus, ενν-νς w ; G. -* ; D. -φ ; A. -av ; 
 V. -*, «v. In the same manner, those of μνα ; as, δίμννς, &c. 
 
 t The Compounds of έρως, γέλωζ) sometimes those of κέρας, with on- 
 ly one termination ; as, ξνσερ-ως, ως ; G. ωτος. τλέως has three ter- 
 minations, νλέως, πλ*α, πλέων ; sometimes the neuter loses the final » ; 
 as, αγήρω for α^ρων. 
 
I 
 
 
 Μ. and I 
 
 I 1 ky^ — tog, 
 
 A. a\rfi'ia, η, 
 V. ο 
 
 Sing. 
 M. and 
 
 I -0V0£. 
 
 i). vtir — ovi. 
 A. yf*r-ova, 
 V. yfir — ov. 
 
 Ν 
 
 Μ. ι 
 
 Λ- Y. 
 
 (,• I). 
 άλ*}$-£θΐν, 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Ν 
 
 Pin. 
 
 M. : d i • 
 Υ. a/.r,<?-' 
 
 Ν 
 
 N. A. V. 
 
 ev. G• D. ysjt-ovoiv. 
 I 
 
 Plural. 
 
 M. and P. 
 
 | 
 ίτ — όνων. 
 I), yfir — οοΊ. 
 ι'τ-ονα^, 
 Υ. ^5ίτ-ονε$, 
 
 
 •να. 
 ova. 
 
 Comparatives in ων are declined like ysffcw, except in 
 the accusative singular, and the nominative, accusative 
 and vocative plural. 
 
 11 Γ. x. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 ■ '-ov. 
 G. μ 
 
 1). μίίζ-ονι. 
 
 Ι να μ.=Ίζ-ί(χ μ.-.; ^-ov. 
 
 Υ. μίιζ-ον. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 ι S 
 
 L). μ&ζ•ί\ 
 
 Plural. 
 
 ( ί . ι 
 
 1). μβίς -wft. 
 
 ■ 
 
 S>if>.st<infirr* are contracted lik . as, 
 
 \λων, Acc. Άτολ/ 
 
 ba?t a vowel before 
 
36 Comparison of Adjectives. 
 
 Adjectives with two terminations are sometimes declined 
 with three by the Poets ; as, έρημ ος, η, ov. There are a 
 few which commonly take a distinct termination in the fe- 
 minine ; as, τερ-ην, -εινα, εν, αίώνι-ος, -α, ov. 
 
 Compounds in ης, and especially those in της, have only 
 one ending ; as, νεφεληγερέτης, &c. In the ^Eolic and Do- 
 ric dialects, they end in τα ; as, νεφέλης ερέτα. 
 
 ADJECTIVES OF ONE TERMINATION. 
 
 These are mostly of the common gender, wanting the 
 neuter. They are, 1. Adjectives compounded with sub- 
 stantives which remain unchanged ; as, ίτολύχειρ, &x. 2. 
 Those derived from #ατη£ and μήτ*)£ ; as, ά*άτωξ, &c. 3. 
 Adjectives in ης-τρος, ως-ωτος, ας-α£ος, ις-ιδος, ξ and ψ. All 
 these take the form of the third declension of Nouns. 4. 
 Adjectives in ης, and ας, which take the form of the first 
 declension of Psouns ; as* έ^ελοντής -S : these are all mascu- 
 line. 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Comparison is made in rspog, τα7ος, or ιων, κτ7ος. 
 1 . The comparative and superlative are formed by 
 adding τερος and ralog to the positive ; as, 
 
 μάκαρ, μακάρ-7ερος, μακάρ-τα7ος. 
 ά^λ*ς, &.ίΤλέβ'-7ερος, £χ«7Γλ£σ'-τα7ος. 
 -ος drops ς ; as, μάκρος, μακρο-7ερος, μακρο-7α7ος : and if the 
 penult is short, changes ο into ω ;* as, οΌφος, <Τοφώ-7ερος, αΌφώ- 
 7α7ος. 
 
 When the penult is doubtful, i. e. either long or short, it 
 may have ο or ω ; as, ικανός, ικανότερος, ικανότατος, or ικανώτε- 
 ρος, ικανότατος. 
 
 -εις is changed into ες ; as, χαρίεις, χαρ'ιεο"-7ερος, χαρίε<Γ-7α7ο£. 
 -ας, -ης, and -υς, add τερος and τα7ος to the neuter, 
 μέλας, μελάν-7ερος, μελάν-7α7ος. 
 ευρύς, ευρύ-7ερος, εΰρύ-7α7ος. 
 
 -ων and -ην to the nominative plural ; as, 
 σώφρων, (ΤωφρωνέΌ^ερος, (Γωφρων5σ'-7α7ος. 
 
 Τ5ρην, τερενέΌΜερος. τερενί'σ'-7α7ος. 
 
 * Else four short vowels would come together. To avoid three. 
 Homer sometimes lengthens a short one. 
 
Comparison of Λ 
 
 •| turns -S£ of the nominative plural into ifllspo;, ιβ1α7ο£ ; 
 as, cJ£, βλαχ'ίύίερος, /3λαχ- \dlalog. 
 
 Tl• ηρ*Γ6 many adjrctives by ίμερος, \<Α&Ιος ; 
 
 «17fpo£, αι7α7ο$; ^<r7*po£, έ(ήα1οζ ; the last in common with the 
 
 as, 
 
 λάλο£, λαλίονερος λαλι<Ττατο£. 
 
 ς>»λο£, φιλαίτ£ρβ£, φίλαγα τ 
 
 άφθονος, άφ^ονίβ'τίρο^, άφ^ονί'ί'τατο^. 
 
 II. Sonic adjrc tm s in υ, have the comparison in *ων 
 and ιΛ - ι 9fa%& 
 
 I. Boon adjrctivcs in if, derived from substantives, have 
 the comparison in ιων and i(rto^, formed from the original 
 word ; as, 
 
 χαλό?, (from χ&Χλος-εος,) χαλλίων, χάλλι<τ7ο£. 
 
 IpJt, (from fefcf-sii,) £χόίων, εχ0ι<τ7ο$, also regular. 
 
 (from ο~χ7ο£-ου.) oi'x7i(r7o£, do. 
 
 aiV^pocr, (from <χι(ϊχος-£ος,) αι^χιων, dityuflog. do. 
 
 aX^fivo's, (from akjog,) άλ^ίων, αΚγκϊτος^ do. 
 
 "μαχρό<:, (from μώρα>£-£ος,) μάα'ίΤ'ων, μ-/;χι<τ7ο£, do. 
 
 , μιχρό^, (from the verb μίω,ο^) μβΐ'ων. fuSrfat, do 
 
 #Ρ*ι ( ob χ^'ρων,χείρισ: 
 
 So likew 
 
 xaxos, χαχίων. (καχώτερο*:,) χάχκΠος. 
 
 ,.. ( <ριλίων, <piXi<f7oc, 
 
 φίλο?, < r - - ' * y .. - - ' 
 
 χ ^ φ.λ/^ρος*, φιλ'α7ο£. 
 
 βοα&χ ) #P a<5u Vs> βρα&ίταίος, 
 Ρραόνς, J β ?(χδ1ω ^ β ? άδι«Ίος. 
 
 S - If**, ώχ.•7α7ο^, 
 * £ ώχι'ων, ωχκϊίος. 
 
 2. The termination ιων, with the preceding consonant, is 
 often changed into <τ<Των, and by the Attics into m* ; as, 
 
 β Ρ* ύς > \ jstfr™, \ βρΜ«η*ς, also regular. 
 
 Γαχι'ων,Ι ί 
 9ά*<Γων, \ 
 ίάττων,Α. ) 
 
 i <Γα Χ' 
 f«Xfo /0ά*<των, J Γάχις7ο£, do. 
 
 [ όάττων 
 
 Γ ^ίλώτίρβ;, φιλώτατος. 
 
 *2 •» *>y transposition of the breathing ; (Vide 
 
 Metatlieeis, page o\) and thence 0<ί**α*. 
 
 4 
 
38 Comparison of Adjectives. 
 
 έλαχυ£, έΧάόόων* Ιλάχ«τ7ο£, do. 
 
 i xpsiWwv, t ) ,- - 
 
 • χ ρ α ^' !xps.'T^v,A:5 x P a7,tf7os • 
 
 ( με IP ων, } . - 
 
 Με /as, as from μεχύ^, makes regularly μύχιων, μεγώτος. 
 By the rule, μελιών becomes μεόΰων, and, changing tftf into £, 
 μύζων, which was lengthened into μείζων ; so,o\iyog, (όλι- 
 yi'wv, oXi'tftfwv,) 6\{ζων % ohiy\<Srag, also regular. 
 
 3. A letter is sometimes dropped in comparison ; as, 
 
 |αων, ξασιος, S 
 φι'λο£, φΐΚΊερος, φι'λ7α7ο$, for φιλώ7ερο$, φ»λώ7α7ο£. 
 παλαιοί, tfoCkaflspog, #αλα/7α7ο£, for 
 
 #αλαιό7ερο$, #αλαιό7α7ο£. 
 Θε'ρειο£, ΘερεΓΙερο^, ΘεξεΠαΙος, for 
 
 Θερειό7ερο£, ΘερειόΊα,Ίος. 
 tfokig, Ηλείων and #λέων, ^τλεΓαΙοέ, for 
 #ολι'ων, tfoXitflog. 
 One is irregular in the comparative ; 
 «,ya$0£, άμε/νων, άγοώωΙαΊος. 
 βεΧτίων, βε\τί<ίτ^. 
 
 COMPARISONS FROM PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 tfpo, rfporspos, [rfporaros,] nfpQrag. 
 
 εξ, εόχατβς. 
 
 ύ-ττερ, υ^ερτερο^, υπέρτατος, and ϋ#ατο£. 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 *ληβΊ'ον, ΑΤληοΊαιτερο^, «ττληόΊαιτατο^ 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 κέρδος, κεραιών, χέρδιότος. 
 
 βα,αίΚευς, βαόιΧεύτερος, βαόίΚεύτατος. 
 "Αρη£, άρείων, αριότος. 
 
 * For ε\αχίων. t For ?κ£ων, from obsolete fctf*. 
 
 J For κρατί<*ν, changed into κρ«ί*σ«ν, and κρ&σων, and lengthened int• 
 
 κρείσσων. 
 
merals. 
 itive πι use ; ae, χιριότίρος-Φτατος } χαλλιώτΐρ*£• 
 
 Μ MEB M.s. 
 ι thr letter• of the al 
 
 nun. ρ for a l• 
 
 Itm tIm !r left 
 
 ihn ^4 
 
 noted bj die tame Utters 
 •0. 
 
 -. 1. 
 
 1, 
 
 P• ' 
 
 
 
 ll. 
 
 
 
 <r, Ϊ 
 
 Z 3 ,• tJ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 μ, 
 
 
 I |. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ι ι 
 
 γ, I 
 
 Ψ» : 
 
 I 000. 
 
 
 I& 
 
 
 0, 
 
 
 
 
 
 ir, 80. 
 
 ω, : 
 
 
 »η. 
 
 18. 
 
 
 Φ 
 
 j 
 
 
 
 
 ι When letters ι m oblique 
 
 iras some- 
 
 II. 
 D : H. HIK \ It > 
 
 f II. in.i . 
 
 11, I ; AA\l. 
 MMMM 
 • ithiii | 11. 
 
 ■rclmg tO 
 ι ; as, a, 1 ; S, , and so on 
 
40 
 
 Numerals. 
 
 Cardinal Numbers. 
 
 Ordinal Numbers, 
 
 εις, 
 δύο 9 
 
 *ένΊε 9 
 
 S<r7a, 
 Ww, 
 £ννε'α, 
 ίέκα, 
 
 ένδεκα, 
 
 δώδεκα, 
 
 #εκα7ρεί$, 
 
 ^εκο^εία'αρεέ, 
 
 5εκαιτ , έν7ε > 
 
 δεχαεξ 9 
 
 ίεκαε^ά, 
 
 ΰεκαοκ7ώ, 
 
 δεκαεννέα, 
 
 είκοΟΊ, 
 
 =ΙκοαΊεΓ£, &c. 
 
 τρίάκον7α, 
 
 <Γ50'0'αράκον7α, 
 
 #εν7ήκον7α, 
 
 ^ήκον7α, 
 
 Ξ§<$ομήκον7α, 
 
 ο^δοήκον7α, 
 
 3ννενήκον7α, 
 
 §κα7όν, 
 
 one. 
 
 two. 
 
 three. 
 
 four. 
 
 five. 
 
 six. 
 
 seven. 
 
 eight. 
 
 nine. 
 
 ten. 
 
 eleven. 
 
 twelve. 
 
 thirteen. 
 
 fourteen. 
 
 fifteen. 
 
 sixteen. 
 
 seventeen. 
 
 eighteen. 
 
 nineteen. 
 
 twenty. [&c. 
 
 twenty-one, 
 
 thirty. 
 
 forty. 
 
 fifty. 
 
 sixty. 
 
 seventy. 
 
 eighty. 
 
 ninety. 
 
 a hundred. 
 
 &axo<fi-oi,-ai,-a,two hundred, 
 χίλι-οι, -αι, -α, a thousand. 
 jX'Jpi'Oi, -αι, α, ten thousand 
 εκα7ον7ακΐ(Τμύριοι, ) - *β. 
 -αι, a, * 
 
 ρω7ο$, 
 
 δεύΊερος 9 
 
 τρΠος 9 
 
 τε'7αρ7οί, 
 
 *εμ«7τ7ο^, 
 
 έ'κ7ο£, 
 
 26ίομο£, 
 
 Ι'ννα7ο£, 
 δέχαΊος, 
 ενδεχαΊος, 
 δωδεχαίος, 
 ρι<ίχαιδέχαΊο$ 9 
 
 first. 
 
 second. 
 
 third. 
 
 fourth. 
 
 fifth• 
 
 sixth. 
 
 seventh. 
 
 eighth. 
 
 ninth. 
 
 tenth. 
 
 eleventh. 
 
 twelfth. 
 
 thirteenth. 
 
 τεΜαρεόχωδεχαΊος, fourteenth. 
 ίτεν7εκαιδεκα7ο£, fifteenth. 
 εξχαιδέχούος, sixteenth. 
 
 «7τ7ακαιδεκα7ο£, 
 οκ7ωκαιδε'κα7ο£, 
 ε\νεακαι<5ε'κα7ο£, 
 slxotflog. 
 
 seventeenth, 
 eighteenth, 
 nineteenth, 
 twentieth. 
 
 sJxo<r7os,flrp37o$,&c.twenty-first ? 
 
 ion. 
 
 •piaxotrtfe, 
 τεόύαραχοιϊΊός, 
 ΐτενΊνιχοόΊός, 
 
 ■ξτηχούΐός, 
 έβ&>μηκο<τ70£, 
 ογδοΎ\χο<ϊΊος 9 
 εννενηκοσ70£, 
 εχ&Ίο(Α6ς % 
 ίιακοβΊο(τ7ό^ 
 χιλιο$70£, 
 μυριο(Τ7όί, 
 *κα7ον7ακι<ίμυρι- 
 otf70£, 
 
 thirtieth. [&c. 
 
 fortieth. 
 
 fiftieth. 
 
 sixtieth. 
 
 seventieth. 
 
 eightieth. 
 
 ninetieth. 
 
 a hundredth. 
 
 two hundredth 
 
 a thousandth. 
 
 ten thousandth 
 
 > a millionth. 
 
 All the cardinal numbers, from τέόόαρες, four, to εκα7όν, a 
 hundred, are undeclined ; all above a hundred are declin- 
 ed ; as, διαχόοΊ-οι, -αι, α, two hundred. 
 
 All ordinal numbers are adjectives of three endings, 
 and regularly declined, like χαλ -og, -ή, -6v, or agi-os, -a, **v, 
 
Numerals. 
 
 .1 
 
 rnpU* of the Devlen ife, one ; &o, two ; rpfif, 
 
 three ; ψί*ίαψ$ς. Jour. 
 
 Μ ί Μ Ν. 
 
 Ν 
 
 D. Μ• μ 
 
 &C. 
 
 ρ h. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Plor. 
 
 Plur. 
 M. | 1 V 
 
 [ 
 
 N. 
 
 < ι 
 
 rpia, 
 
 1 
 
 yv* > iwoiv and 
 
 l> 
 
 1 
 A. rpeif, rpia. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 M. i\ ud ν 
 
 , rttftfapa, 
 G. rWtfapanr, 
 
 1). r :^(/p<ri, 
 
 A. rstftfapaf, Wtftfapa. 
 
 fc and μ 
 com 
 
 r:;. having bet ι 
 
 II. 
 
 . 
 
 im twelve to twenty, the least < .umbers 
 
 . και between then ; as, rpia 
 ι . the *"i 
 
 *fvc are 
 
 thufl united * it!» 
 
 < 
 
 t &w 16 BUUlclUlK'* 
 
42 
 
 Pronouns. 
 
 ing a participle of the verb δύω) ij3ao7Xsu<fs δυοΐν δέοντα rsotfa- 
 ράχονς-α ε<τεα, he reigned 38 years. 
 
 4. In expressing a mixed number whose fractional part 
 was 1-2 (as 6 1-2) an ordinal, next greater than the whole 
 number, was prefixed in the singular to the coin, weight, 
 &c. with ημι between them ; as, εβδομον ήμιτάλαντον, 6 1-2 
 talents ; τρίτον ήμιδράχμον, 2 1-2 drachma. When the car- 
 dinal number was prefixed in the plural, the sense was dif- 
 ferent ; as, <τρ/α ήμιτάλαντα, three half talents, or a talent 
 and a half. 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 Plural, 
 
 Ν. ίγώ 9 I. 
 
 Ν. Α. νωϊ, νφ, 
 
 Ν. ήμεΪ£, 
 
 G. εμού, or μου, 
 
 
 G. ημών, 
 
 D. £μο/, or μο/, 
 
 G. D. voiv, νφν. 
 
 D. -ημΓν, 
 
 Α. εμε, or με. 
 
 
 Α. ημάς. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 N. <τύ, thou. 
 
 Ν. Α. (Τφωϊ, σ'φω, 
 
 Ν. ύμεΓ$, 
 
 G. οΌυ, 
 
 
 G. υμών, 
 
 D. tfoi, 
 
 G. D. fltywiv, β•φξίν. 
 
 . D. ύμΓν, 
 
 A.Cs. 
 
 
 Α. ύμα£. 
 
 Sing. Dual. Plural. 
 
 N. _ 3 he. 
 
 Ν. Α. ίφωε, (ίφε, 
 
 Ν. (ΤφεΓ^, Ν.ο'φεα, 
 
 G. ού, 
 
 
 G. *φων, 
 
 D. r, 
 
 G. D. οΊρωΙν, όφίν. 
 
 D. (ίφΓΑΊ, 
 
 Α. ε. 
 
 
 
 Α. <fcpa£,N. σ'φε'α. 
 
 Ι. Γε is often annexed to these pronouns for the sake 
 of emphasis ; as, ε^ω/ε, ύύγε. 
 
 II. The pronoun ου, is generally reflexive, in the At- 
 tic prose writers, and means, " himself»" &c. 
 
Awmi 
 
 
 . 
 
 P0SS18SIV1 ι r. 
 
 Th< 
 
 lhirlv d 
 
 in 
 
 tif$ % thine. 
 
 . (or *-*,)*>> V 
 
 • I from the |" rtonal pronouns, and 
 
 ned like *aX&f. 
 
 
 the ι 
 
 Λ 
 
 \ . Λ . 
 
 ( i. I ). ., aiv, oiv, 
 
 Plural. 
 A. 
 
 I ' < • 
 
 be tl* tlic MM 
 
 To k tli•• indefij .dim• *i 
 
 ate the I at, ό'ση^, Irfti 
 
 •e, lip** Ml• 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOi 
 
 I, III 
 
 both numbers and til g 
 
 III I 
 
 be I it; ««ι ;< • ^ wh .-. I \\» nt mj i 
 
 the mm* num. 
 
 •So lougUiol 
 
44 
 
 Pronouns. 
 
 In the oblique cases it also denotes, self, when placed 
 in apposition to a noun ; as, αυτόν τον βασΊλέα, the king him- 
 self. Otherwise it denotes simply the third person ; as, 
 siVsv αυτοΓς, he said to them. In this sense it always follows 
 other words in the same clause. 
 
 Ούτος, αυτή, τούτο, is compounded of the article δ and αυ- 
 το'ς. It is declined, and prefixes τ like the article, thus : 
 
 Sing. 
 
 N. 
 
 ΟυΥος, 
 
 αυτή, 
 
 τούτο, 
 
 G. 
 
 TOUTOU, 
 
 ταύτης, 
 
 τούτου, 
 
 D. 
 
 το'τω, 
 
 ταύτη, 
 
 τούτω, 
 
 A. 
 
 τούτον, 
 Dual. 
 
 ταύτη ν, 
 
 τουτ*. 
 
 N. A. 
 
 τούτω, 
 
 ταύτα, 
 
 τούτω, 
 
 G. D. 
 
 TOJTilV, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 ταύταιν, 
 
 τούτοιν. 
 
 N. 
 
 Ol/TOI, 
 
 αύται, 
 
 ταύτα, 
 
 G. 
 
 τούτων. 
 
 τούτων, 
 
 τούτων, 
 
 D. 
 
 τούτος, 
 
 τα>αις, 
 
 τούτοις, 
 
 A. 
 
 Τούτους, 
 
 ταύτας 
 
 ταύτα. 
 
 1. In the same manner are declined τοιούτος, τηλικουτος, 
 aad τοιούτος. 
 
 2. In the Attic writers, the demonstratives ούτος and 
 εκείνος often assume ι, with the accent, to indicate more for- 
 cibly ; as, ouTotfi, τουτουί, τουτωί : But α or ο at the end of a 
 word is dropped, and ι joined to the letter preceding ; as, 
 ταυτί for ταύτα, instead of ταυταί : εκεινί for έχεινοϊ : ι also 
 follows the enclitic γι ; as, τουτό ys, τουτουί. 
 
 3. Ταΰτα must be carefully distinguished from ταυτά, the 
 same> which is formed by crasis, from τά and αυτά. 
 
 RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 From the personal pronouns and αυτός, are com- 
 pounded, έμαυίου, (Τεαυίου, έαυ7ου, myself, thyself, himselfi 
 
46 
 
 V 
 
 
 Γ 
 
 
 
 Xajv, wv, ων, 
 
 I >. - / / .;. β*, «f, 
 
 ral. 
 
 Ν 
 
 .των, iaycwv, 
 
 A. : HCt 
 
 <se reciprocals, but f^u a>cv, - 
 civ, ι 
 
 < ausc a reciprocity of ac- 
 tion ii the h;m a plural. 
 
 I »und by ( d tfa*• 
 
 τ»; far ι 
 
 LRROGATIVE ANU II. DLFINITL PEQ 
 
 Sing. 
 
 who. 
 
 D. f 
 
 A. c/va, τ/. 
 
 ti. 
 
 G. k D. rivoiv. 
 
 ral. 
 
 D. rta, 
 
 ν of, τι να. 
 
 is Miinlar is 
 the Interrogitive, by 
 
 !n r Cttl I nt on I .lilc. 
 
 <1 without an 
 
 ith ης, are tornu 
 τίς. 
 
 Μ. frwtf» «τη I). 
 
 icMi 
 
 tbe SCT• 
 
 ι -irTct Gem Oou is aU• iscil 
 
46 
 
 Verbs. 
 
 ΔεΓνα. so?ne one, is of all genders, and is thus declined. 
 N. A. (kivot, G. osTvi, Plu. Ν. oltislvsg. It is sometimes un- 
 declined, Aris. Thes 622. 
 
 1. rig, as an Interrogative, lias the responsive odlig ; as, 
 τίς rllo stfoirjtfs ; Who did this ? ουκ oiScn otilig ; 1 know not 
 who. 
 
 2. Anciently there was another Interrogative pronoun, 
 viz. ητός,ιτη.πό, where ? or in what place ? and its respon- 
 sive, oVo£, 6'tf*i, oVo, there, or in that place. They are now 
 used as adverbs, in the genitive and dative sincnilar only. 
 From them are formed in the comparative, •πο'7δρο£-α-ον, 
 which one. (of two,) and its responsive. Mlspog. From 
 them also are derived many adjectives and adverbs now in 
 use. 
 
 Among the pronouns are ranked the gentile adjectives 
 derived from δάτεδον, the soil, and a substantive pronoun : 
 viz. ημε^α^ό^-ή-όν, of our country or people ; «πΌ&χττ'όέ-ή-όν, 
 of what country or people ; ύ^εδα^^-η-όν, of your country 
 or people. 
 
 From the neuter of the Article, Relative B& Interrogative 
 tfO£, and its responsive oVo£, are derived other Adjectives 
 much in use ; as, 
 
 Article. 
 τό, the. 
 
 <roio£, of the kind. 
 rotfog. of the number. 
 rvihixog, of the size. 
 
 Interrogative. 
 #o, what» 
 
 tfoiOs, of what kind. 
 tfotfo's, of what number. 
 ττηλίκο£, of what size. 
 
 Relative. 
 e, which. 
 
 cTos, of which kind. 
 otfog, of which number. 
 ήλίκο£, of which size. 
 
 Responsive. 
 Wo, that. 
 
 btoTog, of that kind. 
 ottoVos, of that number. 
 ο?τηλ/κο£, of that size. 
 
 From these and ου7ο£, are derived romlog. τοια^η, roioulo, 
 of this kind ; «roflWIos, of this number ; <τηλικου7ο£, of this 
 aize. 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 Verbs are divided in Active or Transitive ; Neuter 
 or Intransitive ; and Deponent. 
 
 
hi. 
 
 ινβ an a< 
 
 111 
 
 Paflfive, or 
 
 »n of the 
 et rise to 
 
 act on «omr »reon 
 
 i 
 to 1 1 
 
 • ay be acl 
 aai wasii• the 
 
 ! upon bj f ; as, λουομβί. 
 
 iunj7t,Z % j Ian ! 
 
 an» 1 ea natura it. 
 
 I. I upon 
 
 6a<Hat, to CTOWO cue's μ If ; ft« Of hang 
 
 another ; dr 
 
 an••• stances 
 
 arc few, however, m the Middle is ibm 
 
 I with tin r< 
 
 vapeffraveu, 
 
 :i the ar« 
 Master or In- 
 
 ι»β tfr/XXfrtcu, to tra\ ι Bend « 
 
 d* j. . φοβιΓ*Ααι, t 
 
 /■:. : ^aj, to ba. ι regale 
 
 rfect and Tlupcrfcct Middk % beloaf pre- 
 perl/ to die Act 
 
43 
 
 Verbs. 
 
 one's self ; from #εί4ειν, to persuade, ΐτ$Με<Λ)αι, to persuade 
 one's self, to believe, to obey. In many cases of I his kind, 
 where the original meaning of the Active is obsolete, the 
 peculiar sense of the Middle cannot be ascertained, and 
 the verb is classed among the Neuters. 
 
 In other cases, however, Middle verbs are transitive, and 
 take an accusative after them ; either because in the ac- 
 tive they govern two accusatives ; as, tfspotiSv τίνα τον WJa- 
 μ»όν, to pass one over the river, #εραιχ(Τ0αι τον «ττο7αμόν, to pase 
 (one's self) over a river ; \ov<fa<fQai τήν κεφαλήν, to wash 
 one's head; έν&ία'αβ'θαι χει7ωνα, to put on one's robe, &c. 
 or because the action, though properly intransitive, is con- 
 sidered in relation to some object ; as, φυΚάύΊεύβαϊ τίνα, to 
 guard (one's self) as to some one ; φοβείσαι τους Θεούς, to 
 revere the Gods ; τίλλεσ^αί τίνα, (to pull out one's hair,) 
 to mourn, on account of some one. 
 
 II. By a natural transition, the Middle denotes what we 
 do for ourselves ; as, ττόλεμον tfgiijtfai, is to make war, #όλ- 
 «μον tfonjifa^ai, to make' war in our own defence ; α/ρε?ν, to 
 take, αιρεΓσ^αι, toiake for one's self, to choose ; αΠεΓν, to 
 ask, αΠεΓα^αι, to ask for one's self ; άφαιρεΓν, to take away* 
 άφα/ρεΓβ'θαι, to take away for one's benefit ; τιμωρή^αα^αι, to 
 avenge one's self ; κλαίειν, to weep for another, xXautfatfdai, 
 to weep for one's self; ίτοιεΓα^αι, to make for one's self; 
 καΤαόΙήσ'αα'βαι φύλακας, to place guards for one's own pre- 
 servation. 
 
 III. The Middle denotes what we do among ourselves ; 
 as, #οιήβ'α<Γ'0αι, to make a league between themselves ; 
 βουλεύειν, to counsel, βουλυεσ'θαι, to take counsel between 
 themselves ; διαΧίεη, to reconcile others, Ααλύεβΰαι, to be 
 reconciled among themselves. Verbs of contending, dis- 
 puting, &c. have reference generally to both parties, and 
 are therefore in the Middle ; as, μάχεσαι, pugnare inter se. 
 When the Active is used, the reference is to one of the par- 
 ties ; as, λοιβορεΓν, to revile some one, λοκ^ορεΓαΆαι, to revile 
 each other. 
 
 IV. The Middle denotes that which we cause to be done 
 for ourselves ; as, άττο/ράψα^αι, to cause one's self to be 
 enrolled ; «7Ταρα0εΓναι τρά^εζαν, is to set a table for another ; 
 «τταρα0έό7)αι τράπ'εζαν, to cause a table to be set' for us ; ?'pa- 
 ψαι νόμον, is to propose a law ; ^ρ^ψα^αί τίνα, is to accuse 
 a person, i. e. to cause one's name to be written down as 
 the accuser of another ; ΜοκΤκειν, is to teach, διδάξα^αι, t• 
 
\ 
 
 Ml 1 
 
 I 
 
 are 
 
 ap- 
 
 Ι ό caceos f « 
 
 ich 
 1HOI1 
 
 
 I '! 
 tin : ummI < 
 
 nnd 
 

 
 Verbs — Tenses. 
 
 (and remains,) written ; γεγάμηχα, I have been, (and am,} 
 married. 
 
 In the Historical Tenses, the speaker goes back in im- 
 agination, to the past scene, and gives a relation of the 
 events. In doing this, he may represent an action in 
 three different ways, 
 
 1. Simply as done or accomplished ; as, έγραψα, I wrote: 
 this is the Aorist. 
 
 2. As protracted or continued, during a certain period 
 of past time ; as, έ'/ραφον, I was writing : this is the Imper- 
 fect. 
 
 3. As done previous to a certain time, but extending in- 
 to it, either in itself, or its consequences, or its attendant 
 circumstances ; as, εΊεΊεί-χιόΊο, had been fortified, (and re- 
 mained so :) this is the Pluperfect. 
 
 We shall now consider more particularly, under each of 
 the Tenses, their several uses. 
 
 Present. — The Present, besides its appropriate use, is 
 employed to express general truths ; as, ξώα τρέχει, ani- 
 mals run. In animated narration, it is used for the Aorist ; 
 the reader being transported back, in imagination, to the 
 scene ; as, αναβαίνει ου ν Kupos, Cyrus therefore goes up. In 
 a similar manner, it is sometimes put for the Future. 
 
 Imperfect. — The Imperfect represents an action as 
 continuing, during the whole of the main action related : 
 or during some of its accompanying circumstances, or par- 
 ticular scenes, whether related or implied ; as, BIT εν ο\ς 
 ήμ*(χρ7αναν oi άλλο» xai χαχως εφρο'νουν, αύ70£ παρεόχευάζείο xai 
 κατά πάνΊων εφυεΊο, " Thus while others were committing 
 errors, and forming rash judgments^ he was preparing him- 
 self, and growing strong against them all." Here the sev- 
 eral acts described, continued throughout the whole of the 
 period referred to. Έ#εί <$' εγγύς η<7αν ο! oVXHai, £7powrov7o • 
 xal οι μεν <ελ7αστα/ εύβύς siVov7o, oi δε οιτλΓται έν τάξει είνον7ο> 
 " But when the heavy armed troops were near, they, (the 
 Barbarians,) turned their backs ; and the Peltastae followed 
 on, (a protracted action,) and the heavy armed troops pur- 
 sued, (a protracted action,) in order." Here the action 
 was continued, during the time implied in a particular part 
 of the battle. The Imperfect is used, from its expressing 
 the continuance of an action, to denote that which is done 
 habitually, or even from time to time ; as, ο \<ϊ<τΐοχίμος τον 
 Vcrtfov εΊριβε xal ixlivfy ntbAttz ημέρας, " the groom kept rub- 
 bing the horse every day." α Οό1ις fi 1 αψχνεΤτο rwv *ap& 
 
: ar- 
 id it* lain 
 
 /Jfj*t ά«άν?ων τ,μ^Ιζ ύη*7ίρ*;*Ι, 
 άρ coi *i\s<fiip',j; ml* 
 
 "a Tf&wm 
 
 man; 
 we still ν 
 
 with tin- 
 
 \wtli verbs, ψ Λ of 
 
 Pi ι η in μ r — Τ srs au :. 
 
 it which atill ι hiring a 
 
 rrre «*iV 
 
 \ 
 
 ] 
 
a 
 
 Verbs — Tenses. 
 
 Aorist. — The Preterites hitherto considered, represent 
 an action as continued or protracted in various ways. In 
 distinction from these, the Aorist represents a past action 
 as simply done or accomplished ; without reference to dur- 
 ation of time in doing it, or to its subsequent existence , in 
 Us effects. It does not exclude these, however, and repre- 
 sent an action as momentary and evanescent ; but merely 
 omits all reference to them, and fixes the mind on the sin- 
 gle idea of the accomplishment of the action. In narra- 
 tion, the Aorist is often intermingled with the Imperfect, 
 because the speaker wishes to fix the attention, at one 
 time on the continuance of an action ; at another, barely 
 on its accomplishment ; as, Κλέαρχος δε όυνηγαγεν, (the 
 mere act,) εκκληαΊ'αν, των αυΐου 0Vpa7iw7o3v • κοϋ tfpwJov μ,έν έ$ά- 
 κρυε (continued) tfoXuv χρόνον εόΊως' oi δε ορωνΊες έ0αυμα£ον (con- 
 tinued) χαί sViwtfwv (continued) sircc εΧεξε (the mere act) τοιάδε. 
 fc< But Clearchus collected an assembly of his troops ; and 
 tirst he stood and continued for a long time, weeping. And 
 they looking on remained in amazement, and continued si- 
 lent. Then he spoke these things." In many instances,, 
 the Imperfect is used instead of the Aorist, to denote a 
 thing as permanent at a past time ; as, sVsi δε' εδόχει αυ7& 
 %δη ίτορεόεσ^αι, " when it was now his opinion, that the time 
 had arrived for him to depart." In such cases, as well as 
 in many others, the Imperfect and Aorist are rendered into 
 English by the same word. The Aorist is often rendered 
 into English, by the Perfect or Pluperfect, have or had ; 
 because in our language, these Tenses are less limited than 
 in Greek, and often express merely the accomplishment 
 of a past action, under certain circumstances. Demos- 
 thenes says, for example, u if Eschines had accused me,(*a- 
 Ί-ηγορηόεν) as to those things merely, in respect to which he 
 was conducting the accusation, (εδίωκε, a continued action 
 in the Imperfect,) I should immediately have answered to 
 the indictment. But since he has been wasting (άνάλωκε : 
 here the mind of the speaker remains in the present, and 
 therefore the Perfect is used) much of his speech upon 
 other topics ; and as to almost all of them has belied me; 
 (κα7εψε^α7ο, here the speaker goes back to the action as 
 merely accomplished, and therefore the Aorist is used,) I 
 think it right and necessarv to say a few things on this sub- 
 ject." 
 
 Hie Aorist is sometimes used for the Greek Perfect ano; 
 Pluperfect ; viz. when the idea of continuance is sufficient- 
 
.' 
 
 llip with ίΐ apt to 
 
 dip. uses aga 
 
 All I larger 
 
 nfined in tbetr η but 
 
 tended 
 
 ami ind< ia?e both 
 
 ■ 
 
 and . *• If tin 
 
 OS or li<>\\ ar< irbo 
 
 nd llnr<t ;" (cSiWjtfo^tfi )tai 0*ψή- 
 
 I' \ι 
 
 e, u 1 1 * • 
 
 d l>\ λ/κι// /<< 
 
 i **, 
 ι. *• will r< In 
 
 instant, nit (,/,.ν ;,» | . not th- 
 
 iulo -ροβΐ ι 
 
 marked, in ι ^d, and I 
 
34 Verbs — Mood$i 
 
 In the other Moods, they have sometimes their appropri- 
 ate sense, as in the Indicative. 
 
 In the Perfect, for example, το άγκυριον άνεβΆταοΑω, " let 
 the anchor be weighed," (and remain so ;) την ύύραν κεκλεΓο"-• 
 όαι, " that the door remain shut ;" sW δ υ\ός νενικήκοι, " Oh! 
 may my son have conquered." Thus tootheAorist retains 
 its appropriate sense. Sometimes the peculiar meaning of 
 the Tense is lost, and the time is decided by the Indicative, 
 on which it depends. In these cases, the Aorist denotes 
 an action as merely done or accomplished ; the Present, as 
 passing or continued ; as, Καλε'βΌς δε δ Κύρος ΆράβΆτην Μη- 
 δον, τουΐον εκελευσ'ε διαφυΧάξαι (the mere act) αυ7φ την τε γυναίκα 
 και την ο'κηνήν. "And Cyrus calling Araspes the Median, 
 commanded him to guard the woman, and the tent." But 
 in repeating the words immediately after, the author says, 
 ταό7ην ουν £κύ\ξυ<ί8 δ K£po£ δ ι αφυΧαΙΊ s ιν τον Αράσ^ην, 
 Ιως αν αχίϊΐς \άβτ). " Her, therefore, Cyrus commanded 
 Araspes to guard, until he himself might receive her." Here 
 the action of guarding, was to be continued until, &c. and 
 therefore the Present was used. In many instances, the 
 nature of the case makes this distinction scarcely percep- 
 tible, and then the Present and Aorist are equivalent ; es- 
 pecially in the Imperative. The Perfect Imperative some- 
 times denotes the action more emphatically ; as, <xsrfsipa<f- 
 ίω, " let it have been attempted," i. e. only make the at- 
 tempt. 
 
 The Participle of the Aorist retains its appropriate 
 sense, and is rendered by, " after that," or " having ;" as, 
 καλέοΌ^, "after that he had called." The Participle of 
 the Perfect usually does the same, and denotes the pre- 
 sent, as connected with the past. 
 
 MOODS. 
 
 The Indicative represents a thing, as actually existing, in 
 past, present, or future time. The Subjunctive and Opta- 
 tive united, represent a thing, either as contingent, or in 
 relation to the feelings and conceptions of the mind respect- 
 ing it. The Indicative has, therefore, a greater extent, in 
 Greek than in Latin ; and corresponds more nearly to tbe 
 
.<•.• TbU8, in n» 
 
 Dfl Willi iih-, trig μ.^ 
 
 in Latin, qui Don poasit,) t<> 
 dare equal 1 1 β ( > j *t ri 1 1 \ . 
 
 would denote mere probability; "who ////#/*/ notbe al>l<j, 
 Thui 
 allv ilom ι , what wc an 
 
 we ihall now consider, the use of the Moods, under sev- 
 eral distinct bead 
 
 Narration, 
 
 When a writer, in narration, states not his own views ; 
 but what has been said or thought by another, If what 
 Speaker said is given in his otcn words, (Oratio directa.) the 
 indicative is used : If in the words of the λ r. Ora- 
 
 tio obliqua,) the Optative is used without αν, whether the 
 action be past, present, or future ; as, M that at one mo 
 ment you might hear them, announcing, κακ=Γνο£ 
 
 vv ; χα/ μηί^ν ^χβιό' &f*f«i» *φ0α*ι that he, (Philip,) was 
 within the pass of Thermopyle ; and that you had nothing 
 to do" Dem. de Corona- 
 
 Exception 1. The Indicative is frequently used, (in 
 the Oratio obliqua,) as though the expi were 
 
 those, which were actually used. M The Plateans con- 
 sulted, whether καταχαυόΌυόΊν, they shall (should) 
 burn them, as they were ; or χρήβΌν7αι, shall (should) 
 do something else." 
 
 2. In quoting the language of any one, S7i and ως, are 
 generally followed by the Indicative ; as, '* they having 
 1 before hand, &7ι τήν Ελλάδα έ\ε υβ spot <f ι ν, that 
 they will (would) free Greece." Sometimes these two 
 modes of construction are intermingled ; 
 όερίς 1*7 1, xou fj γίνος ε ϊ η Μιλή<Γιο$, ιτεμ^ aJ7ov 
 
 ΠαοΊ'ων. Μ He said, that he was free, that he was a Mile- 
 sian by birth, and that Pasion sent him/'t 
 
 In the Oratio obliqua, the Indicative may be used in 
 all single propositions or members, not necessarilv 
 ered as uttered in the person of another ; μ 
 
 * It is sometime•, even put where the Subjunctive would be used in 
 English. 
 
 t Thus too, after δπ, when it means "because/' the Indicative and 
 Optative are interchanged. 
 
50 Verbs — Moods. 
 
 έαυ7ου χώρη£ ο/κεΓν, ό'κου /3ούλον7α», "He commanded 
 them to inhabit any part of his country, they will•" 
 
 Dependent Clauses. 
 
 After certain particles ; (as, ίνα, that, &c.) a dependent 
 elause has the sense of the Subjunctive. But, the Sub- 
 junctive in Greek having no Imperfect and Pluperfect, 
 these Tenses are supplied by the Optative. The time of 
 the dependent clause is determined by that of the primary 
 one, and hence the 
 
 Rule. — A Perfect or Future, in the primary clause, is 
 followed, in the dependent one, by the Subjunctive. The 
 Historical Tenses are followed by the Optative.* 
 
 The following are the principal, cases which occur un- 
 der this rule. 
 
 L After ί'να, οφρα, JVws, £>£, the rule particularly applies : 
 as, Subjunctive, £ύύ\εις όφ' αύΊός Βγι\ς γέρας ; Do you wish, 
 that you yourself, may have a reward ? Optative, aWvou 
 εκε'λευε,-ί'να ύως ο'/καδε s\uoi ; " he commanded him to de- 
 part, that he might return home safe." When the Pre- 
 sent is used in narration for the Aorist, it is of course fol- 
 lowed, as the Aorist would be, by the Optative. On the 
 contrary, when the Aorist of the Imperative is used for the 
 Present, it is followed by the Subjunctive. II. A. 119. 
 
 Exception 1. The Optative is frequently put after the 
 Present, instead of the Subjunctive, in cases where there 
 is doubt or uncertainty as to the act ; as, δ.τ^ηα'όμε^α, f, £gr- 
 με'λονται, ως αν βέΧΊ^οι ε/εν ο! tfoXIrai ; " We will relate, by 
 what means they take care, that their citizens should be the 
 best possible." Here the Subjunctive would represent 
 the result with too much confidence. 
 
 2. When the Verb of the dependent clause really denotes 
 a past action, it is put in the Optative, even after the Pre- 
 sent ; as, " Take care, lest what has been spoken should 
 have been (εϊη) mere ostentation." 
 
 3. On the other hand, the Verb is frequently in the Sub- 
 junctive, after the Historical tenses, if the action which it 
 represents, continues to the present time ; as, " I removed 
 
 * Thus the Subjunctive corresponds to the Present, " may ;" the 
 Optative to the Imperfect, might, could, should, &c. of the English 
 Verb. 
 
b€ darkm ι your eyes, that \ 
 
 know both < io<! and mai 
 
 4. The Future ofthe ftufsci iarly put for 
 Subjunctive tfter fauf; as, k *w!i< I 
 
 with danger and disgi 
 
 ftflai ; " that he tAOJi ι DO lorn ι 
 
 brother ; hut if possible, (β α <r ι λ ε ύ c 5 1,) shall (mi 
 in hie stead• 91 So likewise when it follow • 
 
 denoting caution or Λ 
 
 5. , if, arc often found, with an / 
 
 the JMMl ; as, ll the] * ruck with terror, lest thr< 
 
 I light have) lost (έξέσΊηχα) my ρ 
 
 .Many other instances occur, in which the general rule 
 given above, is not observed ; hut the Optative is pat for 
 the Subjunctive, or vice versa. Tbucydides almost uni- 
 formly used the Subjunctive after the Historical 
 Still the general rule is adhered to by most writers, in 
 some peculiar circumstance demands a departure from it. 
 
 II. After certain particles of time, when the disco- 
 relates to a past action, which was not limited to a pre• 
 time, but was frequently repeated by different ι . and 
 
 at different places, the same rule prevails.* The Sub- 
 junctive with /v, follows the Pre- 
 sent and Future. The Optative, with the same adverbs, 
 (dropping the αν,) via krtff, follows the 
 Historical 'i\ Subjunctive. il But 1 return («-ρχο- 
 μαι) to the ships with little, and that dear to me. 
 χάμω; when I am weary with fighting. "-Optative. "For 
 god-like Menelaut entertained him atbishousi 
 ΚρήΤηών i'x ο »7o, when [from time to time] he cam< 
 
 In some instances the Optative is put. with όταν and 
 αν; and the Subjunctive, with .contra- 
 
 ry to the 'j< neral rule. 
 
 After ; which limit a future action, by 
 
 fixing a point before or //// to which, the action takes pfo 
 
 \dV αν, ττρ'ν. μί'χρι •$, itrfxfiv, .Vc. the same rule 
 prei ibjunctive. l< ttut remain, ['.- Jl of 
 
 you, Acl I we take [Ιλωμιν] the 
 
 of Ρ ' : ν • But Minerva rai&ed up ι 
 
 north wind, and Btilled the waves, until he was nun 
 
 <, ] with the Phceaciai 
 
 . the ruU applies, wken there is a• repctnivu gf tiio 
 
«8 Verbs — Moods. 
 
 Thus, in narration, u He commanded them to guard the? 
 horses, until a signal should be given them, [εω$ αν <ri tf/3- 
 μανόε ίη.] Sometimes the Subjunctive is used for the 
 Optative ; as, " Cyrus commanded Araspes to guard her, 
 εως αν αύΊός λά/3 77-, until he himself may [might] take her.* 
 
 When the particles, £'ω$, &c. refer to a past action, they 
 are followed by the Indicative ; as, " The Ambassadors 
 sat down three months, in Macedonia, until Philip return- 
 ed [?λ0ε] from Thrace." 
 
 III. After relatives and particles, used indefinitely; as, 
 o£j o<f7i$, o/os, any person or thing ; oVou, any where ; ό'0εν, 
 from any place, &c, the same rule prevails. The Sub- 
 junctive, with αν, is used for a present or future action ; 
 the Optative without άν, for a past action ; as, Subjunctive. 
 x 'Ihrs<f&8, 0V01 αν τις ηγηΊαι, " follow, where any one may 
 lead." In general propositions, expressing what is common- 
 ly true, the Subjunctive is in like manner, much used. Op- 
 tative. " But whatsoever [ov] man, of the common people, 
 he saw, [ί'δοι* or found, [s φ ε ύ ρ *] crying out, he smote 
 [i\a<fa(fxs] with the sceptre. t From this is to be distin- 
 guished the case of the Relative,in independent propositions, 
 where the Optative has the sense of the English Potential ; 
 as, " what is that knowledge, ήμας s ύδ α ίμο ν ας <κ ο ιή- 
 <?ε \ ε, which can make us happy." 
 
 The Relative ος, has sometimes, like the Latin, qui, the 
 sense of ίνα, that ; as, " but come let us sena 1 chosen men, 
 ei f λί » tfi, that they may go," 
 
 Conditional Proposition s . 
 
 One principle controls all examples of this kind. When 
 a case is taken, as actual, the Indicative is used ; (or in 
 commands, the Imperative;) when as doubtful but proba- 
 ble, the Subjunctive ; when as merely hypothetical, the Op- 
 tative. The following may serve as examples. 
 
 1. When an actual case is supposed, and the result is 
 certain, both Verbs are put in the Indicative ; (or in a 
 command, the second, in the Imperative ;) as, si είβ? βωμοί, 
 
 * Such cases seem to arise from the tendency in Greek narration, 
 to make every thing present to the mind. Thus relating the com- 
 mand of Cyrus as though nearly in the exact words. 
 
 t In some cases, the Optative is used, when the Subjunctive should 
 he, and vice versa. 
 
Moods. 
 
 if there are Altars, there 
 
 I 
 
 • Indicative, with αν, (ιο ; 
 the h 
 Present I 
 
 he would 'jive it. J [ere 1 in- 
 
 perfect ; the first, in th< t." In part 
 
 any thing, lie 
 won! lit. Jl» ally, 
 
 in the Aorist.t In both c made in the 
 
 mind, that the fact supposed is really not 
 
 V future case supposed as probable, though doubtful j 
 with an actual result, (provided the condition takes pla< 
 The Subjunctive Present, in the condition : the Indicative 
 Future, or Imperative in the result ; as, 1ά* CI -^ωμίν, 
 όώ(Τομίν ; if we should have any thing, we will give it. 
 When the supposition refers to a time, previous to another 
 future time, [the English second Future, shall hare,] the 
 Aorist of the Subjunctive is used, in the condition with 
 some phrase, or particle of time, into wh'u h αν enters ; as, 
 xv o.rravla i χ ο υ <f η? S, κρίνα? =, when you shall hare 
 heard all, judge. 
 
 A merely hypothetical case. The Optative, with %l f 
 
 in the condition ; and the Optative, with αν, in the result ; 
 
 ~α<τρά77οι, μίγα |*' α* ώφελήβΊ? if ; **if ary 
 
 .should do this, he would greatly aid me/' In some 
 
 s the Subjunctive, with s put for theOpta- 
 
 in the condition* to mark it as more probable ; as. 
 
 * you would receive [φ{ poi o] splendid crifis from laris, if 
 
 lie should see [«)' x£v Mjj] M< fall by your arrow. 
 
 So also the Subjunctive with αν, in the conclusion ; 
 
 le If you should attempt [- v] to meet the 
 
 or with arms, your bow and multitude of arrows, would 
 
 not avail you;" [ουχ αν χ ρ α ί (Τ μ r, tfi. ] 
 
 Τ omitted, in coi ind •οιο 
 
 Γ tli• 
 Imperfect in lh< 
 
 0t?>,) it if not, (i, e. would ftot Ij ti 
 
 t&kejuc 
 5 
 
 'iQcopevr Ji•,) if I 
 
GO Verbs — Moods. 
 
 Other examples might be given, as an actual case sup- 
 posed, in the condition, and a merely hypothetical conclu- 
 sion ; here the first would have the Indicative with zl ; and 
 the second, the Optative with cev. A merely hypothetical 
 supposition, but a determinate result ; here the first would 
 have the Optative with si, and the second the indicative ; 
 as, wC If these things should seem [<5οκοίη] to be very ag- 
 gravated crimes, none of them are chargeable upon me." 
 All such cases are controlled by the general principles 
 heretofore stated ; though individual instances of irregu- 
 larity may be found. 
 
 All conditional propositions may, in Greek, be turned 
 into the Infinitive or Participle, with «xv ; as, οιονίαι ανάμα- 
 χ i(S&ai αν, (ίυμμά-χους *ιϊρού\ά,ξονΊες ; "they think, they 
 might retrieve their fortune in war, by obtaining allies." 
 
 The Optative and Subjunctive, in Abstract or Indcpend- 
 J ent Propositions. 
 
 The Optative and Subjunctive seem to have been orioin- 
 ally used, only in one clause of a sentence, as connected 
 with another. In the progress of language, the connected 
 clause has often been dropped, in which case it is implied 
 or understood. Thus in English, " I would advise you, to 
 take these measures ;" Here, " if Ϊ might venture to give 
 my advice," is implied. In this hypothetical or softened 
 manner of expressing an opinion, desire, or determination, 
 use is chiefly made of the Optative. 
 
 Optative in Abstract Propositions. 
 
 1. The Optative is used, without αν, to express a wish or 
 prayer ; as, " may the Greeks suffer punishment, \r ί tf ε ι α ν] 
 for my tears, from thine arrows.'* In this case, bMs, si, ως, 
 πως civ, are often used with the Optative.* 
 
 2. In connexion with αν, it denotes doubt, conjecture, 
 bare possibility ; or in expressions of volition, not a fixed 
 resolution, but only an inclination to a thing ; as, «nv.v 
 
 si By νομείς ; " they were perhaps, [probably*] some shep- 
 
 * If the wish relates to any thing' past* the Indicative Aorist is put 
 with ε70ε, without, av : the Imperfect is likewise used, when an action 
 is cvntintted from the past to the present. 
 
Verbs — Moods, 
 
 herds." " On any other day, ουκ αν Sn ^ευ<Ταία7ο, they hardly 
 taste it ;" ϊϊγωγε Υ,δέως civ 6 ε α ϋ α ίμ η ν, " I should see thern 
 with joy/' 
 
 3. It is often used to express the most definite asser- 
 tions, with politeness and modesty ; as, ουχε? αν κ ρύψαι- 
 μι; " I will [would] no longer conceal it from you." 
 βυχ ήκει, ουό' αν ήξοι <$ευρο ; "he has not come, and will 
 not come back." 
 
 4. Sometimes it is used fjr the Imperative ; as, χ ω ρ ο Γ$ 
 άν εί'ίΤω, " you may go out." ΠαΓ<5α <5ε μοι λϋ^αι7ε φίλην, 
 11 but release to me my beloved daughter." So in a nega- 
 tive interrogation for the Imperative ; as, "do not drag 
 away, ojx άν s ρ ύ <f α ι ο, (thou wouldst not drag away ?) this 
 man to the battle." This turn of expression, however, 
 often gives greater emphasis to the command. 
 
 5. It is often used for the Indicative, giving an air of in- 
 determinateness to the circumstances of an action, which 
 is determinate in itself; as, των νέων ας κ α7αδ υ (Γεια ν, "the 
 ships which they may, (or might) have sunk." Ί his form 
 is very common in English, " bring all the books, which 
 you may have with you," i. e. fc< all which it may be the fact 
 that you have," or more directly, " all you have." 
 
 6. It is also used for the Potential Mood, denoting pow- 
 er or volition ; as, ουκ άν δε μ ε ί ν ε ι ας aiTjv ; could you not 
 withstand him ? ε θ ελή<Τει εν άν ; would he be willing? 
 ίς Though you have suffered much evil, it is possible, that 
 you may yet come (άν Sn ί' κ ο ι <f& ε) to Ithaca." ; * The cor- 
 poreal is that, which any one may touch, and see, and drink, 
 and eat." (άν α ψ α ι 7 ο, και ϊ δ οι, κα; tf ί ο ι, και φ ay ο ι.) 
 
 ^ 7. It is used for a past indicative, to denote th< 
 Hon of an action ; έ"«7Τρα77εν ά δ 6 ξ ε ι εν αύΊ'2 ; " he did what 
 (from time to time) seemed right to him." " Those whom 
 he saw, from time to time, (ι δ ο ι) moving in order and si- 
 lently, he praised." In these. cases, no uncertainty should 
 be attributed to the expression. 
 
 Subjunctive in Abstract Propositions. 
 
 1. The Subjunctive is used without άν, in exhortations, 
 or when any thing is to be done, in the first person singu- 
 lar, or plural ; as, μαχώμεόα, " let us right;" ϊίωμ.' aliv 
 T&yxlcu, 'Met me see what has been done." In such a 
 the Optative will generally be used in the second and / 
 persons ; as, ν Ελ#ωμεν <J' ανά ά<ί7υ, βοη δ' &κισ7α γένοιΊ*. 
 
 6 
 
t>2 Verbs— Moods. 
 
 • u Let us go through the city, and let a shout be quickly 
 raised." 
 
 2. in questions of indecision or doubt, without αν; as, ε'/ττωμεν, 
 η <f ιγωμεν ; shall we speak, or be siient ? <τί φ ώ ; what am 
 I to say? <n iroiw; what am I to do ? <τοΓ τράίτωμαι; 
 whither shall (may) I turn myself? in like manner, after 
 βο-ιΧει ;* as, βούΧει λά/ϋωμαι: do you w;sh I should take 
 it ? βουΧει <κ ρ ο tf $ r\ ς ; for #ρο<;ΟεΓναι ; do you wish to add ? 
 So in questions of indignation, when the command of an- 
 other is repeated ; as, Dion, "i command thee, iEschylus y 
 to be silent/ 1 Ms. %i l be silent, (tftoMrw) before this man?" 
 
 3. The Subjunctive with αν or κεν, is often used for the 
 Future Indicative ; as, k4 But I will lead away (δε χ' άγω) 
 the fair cheeked Briseis." This is especially the case, af- 
 ter μή or ου μή ; as, ου γαρ μτ? Wis el'prjg ; " you will never 
 find." The αν is sometimes omitted. 
 
 4. The Subjunctive is frequently used for the Impera- 
 tive. In prohibitions with μή or its compounds, the Sub- 
 junctive used for the imperative is put in the Aorist, not 
 in the Present ; as, αη(5έ φωνην άνά^χη^ε; u do not suf- 
 fer me to speak ;" " Be silent, (d'^a, in the Imper.) and 
 tell to no one (μηδέν/ ε7< tjs, Subj.) this thing." Herod. 
 
 The Indicative, in all its Tenses, is often used with αν, 
 where in Latin and English, the Subjunctive would be 
 used ; as, sir si δια γέ υμάς αυ7ου$, ^τάλαι άν άτολώλαίε ; "since 
 of yourselves, you would long since have perished. "t 
 
 DERIVATION. 
 
 Certain terminations are used in the formation of Verbs, 
 of which the following are worthy of notice. 
 
 1 . έω and εόω. These express chiefly the state or act of 
 the word, from which they are derived ; as, from κοινωνό^, 
 a partaker, κοινωνεΓν, to partake ; from βαόι'Κεύς, a king, /oatf- 
 ιλεύειν, to reign. These terminations are, likewise, used 
 to denote the exercise of the quality ; as, from i*w*, a 
 horse, ktfs^iv, to practice riding. 
 
 * Here ha is understood. 
 
 t On the subject of Moods, see Matthias's Larger Grammar, 
 Vol. II. 740—827 — where the exceptions to these general prin- 
 ciples are considered at large. 
 
Verbs — Verbals. 
 
 2. αω. These denote commonly, the possession of a 
 tiling in a high degree, or else performance ; as, fromjufuf, 
 
 hair, χομσν, to have long hair ; from τιμή, honor, Ψψψ, to 
 hod 
 
 •ω. Those denote. 1. Mttking a thing ; as, from crjXos, 
 clear, δηλ*ν, to make clear. 2. IVorfaVi^ in any thing ; as, 
 fro:i χρυ<Γθ£, gold, χρυσών, to <rild. 3. Furnishing a thing ; 
 as, from <rWq>avos, a crown, <Ττεφαν5ν, to crown. 
 
 ι α£ω αηάιζω. When applied to persons, these denote 
 adopting the manners, language, &c. of some one ; as, Ιλ- 
 λην.^ιν. to act the Greek. 
 
 5 αινώ and υνω. These denote imparting some quality ; 
 as. from '$'ς, sweet, fj&vsiv, to sweeten ; from λευκός, white, 
 λίυκαίνε»ν, to whiten. 
 
 6. Desideratives expressing desire. These are common- 
 ly formed by changing the Future Tense <τω, into a new 
 Present <Τειω ; as, from ^ελά^ω, ^ελοκτείω, I should like to 
 laugh. Desideratives likewise end in αω or αιω ; as, tf7pa- 
 7*jyiav, to desire to be a General. 
 
 7. Frequentatives . These end in ζω ; as, from αΠεΓν, to 
 ask, αΠί^ειν, to ask frequently, to beg. 
 
 8. Inchoatives in (Τκω. Most of these are Neuters ; as, 
 ^ηράα'χειν, to grow old. 
 
 VERBALS. 
 
 Verbals in -τος and -τεος, are formed from the Perfect. 
 Passive Verbals in το£, correspond to the Participle in tus, 
 in Latin, and have the same meaning ; as, γρα^Ιός, scrip- 
 tus, written. Those in εος, correspond to the Latin Parti- 
 ciple in dus ; as, φιλητεό^, amandus, one who is to be 
 loved. 
 
 conjugation. 
 
 There are three Conjugations of Verbs, Barytone, f Con- 
 tract, and Verbs in μι. Contract Verbs end in αω, εω, and 
 •ω, and are contracted according to the rules already given. J 
 
 Inflection. The principal Tenses from which I 
 are formed are the Present, the First Future, and the Per- 
 fect Active, and the First Aorist Passive. 
 
 f So called, because their last syllable has the grave accent, 
 
 %βαρυς τόνος.] 
 
 t Page 17. 
 
,64 
 
 Yerbs — Conjugation, 
 
 The characteristic is the letter, which immediately pre*- 
 cedes ω or ομαι, in the Present -ω in the Future, and α in 
 the Perfect. In #τ, κτ, μν, the former letter is the charac- 
 teristic. 
 
 1. The Pupil should be instructed to mention all these 
 Tenses, in conjugating the Verb, together with the First 
 Future Passive. 
 
 2. The Verb τύπΊω is given as an example of the Tenses 
 belonging to Verbs in all the three Voices. It must not be 
 inferred, however, that τυ4τ7ω, or any other single Verb has 
 all the Tenses in actual use. The Tenses, belonging to 
 «each Verb, must be learnt from observation. The Se- 
 cond Future Active and Middle, particularly, belongs only 
 to a limited class of Verbs, which end in λω, μω, νω, and ρω. 
 
 Table illustrating the Conjugation of Verbs. 
 In the following table, verbs in ω pure, having a short or 
 doubtful penult, are represented as forming the Perfect 
 Passive in <Τμαι : some however omit tf. Nor do all other 
 verbs in ω pure reject the tf, as represented in the table. 
 For these exceptions see the formation of the Perfect Pas- 
 
 sive. 
 
 For the benefit of those, who wish to preserve the old 
 distinction of the Conjugations, by their Characteristics,, 
 the following is added. 
 
 First Conjugation. 
 
 Pres. Fut. 
 
 «ττ,β,φ,Λ ψ. 
 τέρ^ω \ τε'ρψω 
 λεί/3ω f λείψω 
 ^ράφω ( ^ράψω 
 τύττΊω j τύψω 
 
 Perf. 
 
 φ. 
 Ι <τε'7ερφα. 
 
 λε'λειφα. 
 
 ^/ε'^ραφα. 
 Ι τετυφα. 
 
 Second Conjugation. 
 
 Pres. Fut. 
 «ττλεκω ^ *λεξω 
 
 λε'^ω 
 βρέχω 
 βρυα^ω 
 or 
 
 ορυ<τ7ω 
 
 J 
 
 λέξω 
 /3ρε'ξω 
 
 ! ορό|ω 
 
 Third Conjugation. 
 
 Perf. 
 
 χ• 
 
 <κί<κ\ζγα. 
 
 λελεχα. 
 
 /3εβρεχα. 
 
 ώρυχα. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 τ,δ.β,ξ,ω 
 
 άνύτω 
 
 αδω 
 
 πλή^ω 
 
 φράξω 
 
 Fut. 
 <Τ. 
 
 άνύα'ω 
 οίο'ω 
 «πλήσ'ω 
 ( φρά^ω 
 
 pure, ui as | 
 τίω J τί^ω 
 
 Perf. 
 κ. 
 
 ηνυχα. 
 
 «τε^ληκα. 
 
 tficppuxcc. 
 
 Jrfl 
 
 ικα. 
 
 Fourth Conjugation. 
 Pres. Fut. Perf. 
 
 λ,μ,ν,^,μν. λ,μ,ν,£,μ. κ. 
 ψάλλω ν ψάλω . εψαλκα. 
 νέμω ) νέμω ) νενέμηκα. 
 
 φαίνω > φάνω > #εφα^κα. 
 (^ττείρω \ ανερω \ ε^αρκα. 
 τέμνω * Τφ& ' <rs7;>*;xa. 
 
Verb* — Conjugation. 
 
 05 
 
 TABLE ILLUSTRATING THE CONJUGATION OF THE FOLLOWING 
 
 vi:i:i 
 
 Pres. 
 
 1 strut. 
 Act. 
 
 Pref. 
 
 Act. 
 
 PfiRFBCI ΡΛ88Π » . 
 
 IstAor 
 
 Passiv 
 
 . 1st Pot. 
 
 Act. 
 
 lstPer6.,2dPers.|3(ll 
 
 
 -αω 
 
 -α<Τω 
 
 -ακα 
 
 αΟ'μαι -atfai 
 
 x(f7ai 
 
 i -ααΨηβΌμαι 
 
 
 -ηβΌϋ 
 
 -ηχα 
 
 ημαι -ησαι 
 
 η7αι 
 
 •η^ην - 
 
 η$η<7ομαΐ 
 
 -/3ω 
 
 -■φω 
 
 ρφα, ρ. 
 
 -μμαι ίψαΐ 
 
 r7ai 
 
 ■φ£ην - 
 
 φβηΟΌμαι 
 
 
 
 -φα, iiri 
 
 ρ.-μαι 
 
 •ψαι 
 
 r7ai 
 
 ■φ^ην 
 
 φ$η<7Όμαι 
 
 -γω 
 
 -{ω 
 
 . χα 
 
 -χμαι | 
 
 -ξαι 
 
 κ7αι 
 
 χ$την - 
 
 χ^ηΟΌμαι 
 
 -δω 
 
 -όω 
 
 -κα 
 
 -(Γμαι | 
 
 -tfai 
 
 (im 
 
 (Τ^ην - 
 
 <Τ$η<Τομαι 
 
 -ftj 
 
 ζόω 
 
 -εκα 
 
 -£(Τμαι ! 
 
 -stfai 
 
 ε#7αι 
 
 &Λψ - 
 
 εο^ηΟΌμαι 
 
 
 -ηα'ω 
 
 -ηκα 
 
 -ημαι 
 
 -yjtfai 
 
 n7ai 
 
 -η^ην - 
 
 ηβηίΓομαι 
 
 -?« 
 
 -if ω 
 
 -κα 
 
 -ο>αι 
 
 -tfai 
 
 <r7ai 
 
 -Λΐ|¥ - 
 
 <Τί)η0Όμαι 
 
 
 -ξω 
 
 -χ α 
 
 -γμω 
 
 -ξαι 
 
 .κ7αι 
 
 -χ^ην . 
 
 χ#η0Όμαι 
 
 -η ω 
 
 -η(Γω 
 
 ηκα 
 
 -ημαι 
 
 -ηΟ'αι 
 
 -η7αι 
 
 -η^ην . 
 
 •ηόηόΌμαι 
 
 -δω 
 
 -(ίω 
 
 -κα 
 
 -(ίμαι 
 
 -ο"αι 
 
 -σ7αι 
 
 -(Τ£ην 
 
 -βΆηβΌμαι 
 
 -ιω 
 
 -ιόω 
 
 -ικα 
 
 -κίμαι 
 
 -itfai 
 
 -ΐ(Τ7αι 
 
 
 -ιβ'θηβ'ομαι 
 
 -κω 
 
 -λω > 
 -λλω $ 
 
 ■& 
 
 -χα 
 
 -^μαι 
 
 -ξαι 
 
 -κ7αι 
 
 -χ^ην Ι-χόηΟΌμαι 
 
 •Χω 
 
 -λ*α 
 
 -λμαι 
 
 -Xtfai 
 
 -λ7αι 
 
 -λ£ην 
 
 -λβηΟΌμα* 
 
 -μω ί 
 -μμω \ 
 -μνω J 
 -νω 
 
 -μω 
 
 -μηκα 
 
 -μημαί 
 
 -μηα'αι 
 
 -μη7αι 
 
 -μη£ην 
 
 -μη^/^ομο^ 
 
 -νω 
 
 -^κα 
 
 -μμαι 
 
 -vtfai 
 
 -ν7αι 
 
 -ν^ην 
 
 ν^ησΌμαι 
 
 
 
 -κα 
 
 -μαι 
 
 -tfai 
 
 -7αι 
 
 -δην 
 
 -^ηοΌμαι 
 
 -οω 
 
 -ο<Τω 
 
 -οκα 
 
 -οσ'μαι 
 
 -otfai 
 
 -ο#7αι 
 
 -οο^ην 
 
 -ο^>χΓομαι 
 
 
 ~ωόω 
 
 -ωκα 
 
 -ωμαι 
 
 -ω#αι 
 
 -ω7αι 
 
 -ω$ην 
 
 τομαι 
 
 -ηίίω ) 
 
 -ψω | 
 
 -φα, ρ. 
 -φα, im 
 
 -μμαι \ 
 ρ-μαι ί 
 
 -•ψαι 
 
 -cr7ai 
 
 φ^ην 
 
 •φίτϊΟΌμα 
 
 -ρω > 
 -ρρω ^ 
 
 -ρω 
 
 -ρκα 
 
 -ρμαι 
 
 -ptfai 
 
 -ρ7αι 
 
 -ρ^ην 
 
 -ρ^η (Τομαι 
 
 -^ω 
 
 -ο'ω 
 
 -κα 
 
 -#μαι -tfai 
 
 (flat 
 
 -<Τ$ην 
 
 ο^σΌμαι 
 
 -tfo'w 
 
 -α'ω 
 
 κα 
 
 -σμαι -tfai 
 
 -<fiVL\ 
 
 -<Τ$ην 
 
 -Ο'ίϊ'βΌμαι 
 
 
 *Ι 
 
 -χ α 
 
 -/μαι -gai 
 
 ' 
 
 -χ$την 
 
 χ^τ;0Όμαι 
 
 -τω 
 
 -σ'ω 
 
 -κα 
 
 -(Τμαι -tfai 
 
 -cr7ai 
 
 -0*&ην 
 
 ^ησΌμαι 
 
 -υ ω 
 
 -υο"ω 
 
 •υκα 
 
 -υα'μαι ,-ικίαι 
 
 -utflai 
 
 
 :ομ«ι 
 
 -φω 
 
 -ψω 
 
 -φα, ρ 
 
 -μμαι j -ψαι 
 
 -#7αι 
 
 -φ^ην 
 
 'ομαι 
 
 
 
 "φα, im 
 
 ρ. -μαι !-φαι 
 
 -<ττ7αι 
 
 -φ^ην 
 
 lOfUU 
 
 -χω 
 
 *! 
 
 -χα 
 
 -/μαί {-gai 
 
 -κ7αί 
 
 -χδηιι 
 
 χ^ησομαι 
 
 -ψω 
 
 like 
 
 * he pre 
 
 >ceding]in φω 
 
 
 
 
 -ωω J 
 
 -W(fW 
 
 ωκα 
 
 • ωμαί 
 
 l-Gjtfai 
 
 -w7ai 
 
 -ωΞτην 
 
 <ομαι 
 
66 
 
 Verbs. 
 
 [Active 
 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 S. tjthI — ω — εΐ£ — ει 
 D. (1) — ε7ον— ε7ον 
 Ρ — ομεν — ε7ε — ουσι (2) 
 
 <rCirl — ε — ε7ω 
 — ε7ον — ε"7ων 
 — ε7ε — εΊωόα,ν 
 
 lmperf. 
 
 S. ξ%πΊ- — ον — ες — ε 
 D. — ε7ον — ε\ψ 
 Ρ. — ομεν — ε7ε — ον 
 
 
 1st Perf. 
 
 S. τείυφ — α — ας — ε 
 D. — α7ον — α7ον 
 Ρ. — αμεν — α7ε — atfi 
 
 τέΐυφ — ε — ε'7ω 
 — ε7ον — ε'7ων 
 — ε7ε — εΊωόαν 
 
 2d Perf. 
 orPerf.M. 
 
 &.τέ%* — α — ας -ε, &c. 
 declined like the 1st Perf. 
 
 τεΊυιτ — ε — εΊω,&ιο* 
 through all themoods» 
 
 1st Pluper. 
 
 S. ΙτεΊύφ — ειν — εις — ει (7) 
 D. — ε»7ον — εί7ην 
 Ρ. — ειμεν — ει7ε — ει<Γαν 
 
 (ε^αν) 
 
 2d Pluper. 
 or Plup. M. 
 
 S. ένε7ί;<?τ-ειν-εΐ£-ει, &c. 
 declined like the 1st Plu 
 
 perf. 
 
 1st Aorist. 
 
 S. έ'<τυψ — α — ας — ε 
 D. — α7ον — ά7ην 
 Ρ. — αμεν — α7ε — αν 
 
 <τυψ — ον — όΥΙω 
 — α7ον — ά7ων 
 — α7ε — ά7'*κΓαν 
 
 2d Aorist. 
 
 S, hlvtf — ον — ες — ε 
 D. — ε7ον — ε"7ην 
 Ρ. — ομεν — ε7ε — ον 
 
 wit — c — ε*7ω 
 — ε7ον — ίΐων 
 — ε7ε — ε'7ω(Γαν 
 
 1st Fut. 
 
 S. τΰψ — ω — εις — ει 
 D. — ε7ον — ε7ον 
 Ρ. — ομεν — ε7ε — ουοΊ 
 
 wanting. 
 
 2d Fut. 
 
 S. <rw — ω — ε7ς — ει 
 D. — -Πον — εΠον 
 ρ. — ουμεν — εΓ7ε — ουόΊ 
 
 wanting. 
 
 Note. — The numoers refer to the subsequent observations, page 71. 
 
Voice.] 
 
 Verbs. 
 
 67 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Iiiiinit. 
 
 i'artic. 
 
 «rjtfc — οιμι — otg — 01 
 
 — οι7ον — οΓ7ην 
 — οιμεν — οι7ε — οιεν 
 
 τύπΐ — ω — Ύ\ς — j) 
 
 — η7ον — η7ον 
 — ωμεν — η7ε — ωο"ι 
 
 ronrl — ειν 
 (δ) 
 
 <7w7-cdv 
 
 
 
 
 
 τεΤύφ — οιμι — otg — οι . 
 — οίίον — ο»7ην 
 — οιμεν — οι7ε — οιεν 
 
 τε7ύφ — ω — τ\ς — τ\ 
 
 — η7ον — η7ον 
 — ωμεν — η7ε — ωαΊ 
 
 <τε7υφ— εναι 
 
 τείυφ-ως 
 
 <TS%* ΟΙ/ΧΙ ΟΙ£— ΟΙ, &C. 
 
 crrfjjrt — ω — τ\ς— /),&C. 
 
 τε7υίΓ-ίναι 
 
 τε%*•ως 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 τύψ — αιμι — αΐ£ — αι 
 
 — αι7ον — α/7ην 
 — αιμεν -αι7ε -αιεν(6) 
 
 τυψ — ω — τ\ς — τ\ 
 
 — η7ον — ί]7ον 
 — ωμεν — η7ε — ωοΊ 
 
 τύ-^ — αι 
 
 rJ -ψ-α^ 
 
 <τύίΤ — οιμι — οις — οι 
 
 — οι7ον — οι'7ην 
 — οιμεν — oils — οιεν 
 
 τύ* — ω — τ\ς — τ\ 
 
 η7ον η7ον 
 
 — ωμεν — η7ε — ωο"ι 
 
 τυτ — εΓν 
 
 τυιτ-ών 
 
 Γίψ — οιμι — οΐ£ — οι 
 
 — οι7ον — οίΊψ 
 — οιμεν — οι7ε — οιεν 
 
 wanting. 
 
 τυψ — ειν 
 
 τ^ψ -ων 
 
 rut — οΓμι — οϊς — οι 
 
 — οΠον — oi7r,v 
 — οϊμ^ζν — οΓ7ε — οιεν 
 
 wanting. 
 
 cv* — εΓν 
 
 TUT-WV 
 
68 
 
 Verbs. 
 
 [Passive 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 S.wr7-oiu.oci-77 -ε7αι(8) 
 D. -όμε^ον-ε^ον-εο'βον 
 Ρ.(9)-όμδ^α-εσ'<)8-ον7αι 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Tuflr7-a -έο^ω 
 -εσ'βον-εο^ων 
 -εσ^ε -έ<Τ0ω(Ταν 
 
 Perf. 
 
 Pluperf. 
 
 1st Ao- 
 
 rist. 
 
 S^/utf?— όμην-ου — ε7ο 
 D. -όμεθον-εα'θον-έ'σ^ην 
 P. -όμε^ α _ε^ε -ov7o 
 
 β.τε^υ-μμαι— ψα» — flr7c« 
 D. — μμεθον— φύον —φβον 
 Ρ. -μμε^α -φ0ε -μμενοι 
 βΜ(10; 
 
 8.ε7ε7ό-μμην— ψο — πΊο 
 D. — μμε^ον — φ0ον— φβην 
 Ρ. -μμε$α -φ0ε -μμένο» 
 ήσΌ,ν 
 
 S.s7u<pd -ην -Ύ\ς -η 
 D. — η7ον-ή7ην 
 
 Ρ. -ημην~η7ε -η<Ταν 
 
 Opt— 
 
 <τυ#7 -οίμην 
 -οίμε^ον 
 -οίμε$α 
 
 'clu -φο -φόω τε7υμμε'νο^, ε/'ην 
 -φ^ον — φί)ων <τε7υμμενω 
 -φόε -<pdw<fav <Γε7υμμε'νοι,ε'/ημεν 
 
 τύφθ-η7ι -ή7ω 
 -η7ον — ή7ων 
 -η7ε ->?7wtfav 
 
 τυφβ -ε/ην 
 
 -ε^ημεν 
 
 2dAor 
 
 S.^iitf —ην — Ύ\ς —η 
 D. — η7ον —yflmv 
 
 Ρ. — ημεν -η7ε -ηοΌ,ν 
 
 lW -ηθι — ή7ω 
 -η7ον-ή7ων 
 -η7ε —7)Ίω(ϊαν 
 
 TVJt -ειην 
 
 -ειημεν 
 
 IstFut. 
 
 δ.τιιφ^ήσ'-ομαι-;/} -ε7αί 
 D. -ομε^ον -ε^ον— ε^ον 
 Ρ. -όμε$α -ε^ε -ον7αι 
 
 wanting 
 
 τυφίίηΟ' -οίμην 
 -οίμε^ον 
 -ο/με£α 
 
 2dFut. 
 
 β.τυ'ττήο'-ομαί-^ — ε7αι 
 D. -όμε^ον -εα7)ον-εσ$ον 
 Ρ. -ό*με0α -εο^ε -ον7αι 
 
 wanting 
 
 τυηϊτβ -οιμην 
 -ο/με^ον 
 -βίμε^α 
 
 Paulo- 
 post 
 Fut. 
 
 8.<τε7ϋψ-ομαι-/) -ε7αι 
 
 D. -όμε^ον-εα^ον-εο^ον 
 
 Ρ. — όμε0α -εα^ε — ον7αι 
 
 Perf. οί\ 
 pure 
 verbs 
 
 £>.τε7ίμη— or, -όε^ήλω 
 S. —μα» -ifa* — ται 
 D. -με£ον -tfdov -Ό^ον 
 Ρ. -με^α-^ε -ν7αι 
 
 wanting 
 
 τε7υψ -οίμην 
 -οίμε^ον 
 -οίμε$α 
 
 τε7<μη-θΓ)^δ^' 
 -tfo -σ7)ω 
 -ο^ον-σ^ων 
 -tfde -(J^wtfav 
 
 λω>τε7ι 
 
 ιμη-οι\£εβηλώ 
 1 -μην 
 -με^ον 
 -με^α 
 
 Pluperf. 
 ofditto. 
 
 S.s7s7^-(or είεδήλω) -μην -Co -το 
 
 D. -μεόον 
 
Voice.] 
 
 Verbs. 
 
 
 — ative. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 — oio — oi7o 
 — oitfflov— οίβ^ην 
 — οιόύε — οιν7ο 
 
 τύνΊ -ωμαι— /] — η7αι 
 — ώμεΟον-ηο^ον-ηο^ον 
 -ώμε^α-ηοΆε — ων7αι 
 
 rfafl-stftai 
 
 τυιτ7-όμεν&£ 
 
 
 
 
 
 — ξϊτ,ς -ει' η 
 £<'η7ον— είηΊψ 
 
 — εϊη7ε -εί'ησ'αν 
 
 τε7υμμένο£, ώ — jig — γ 
 τετυμμελ/ω,^ — ^7ον-ή7ον 
 τε7υμμε'νοι,ώμεν -η7ε -ώο*Ί 
 
 τε'7υ-φ£αι 
 
 τε7υ-μμένος 
 
 
 
 
 
 — είης -είη 
 — είη7ον— εΐή7ην 
 
 — είη7ε —εί'ησ'αν 
 
 τυφό-ώ — fig —fj 
 
 — >j7ov — η7ον 
 —ωμεν— η7ε -ωδΊ 
 
 τυφθ-ηναι 
 
 τυφ-ύε'^ 
 
 — εί-ης -ει'η 
 
 — είη7ον-ειή7ην 
 — εΐ'ήΊε— ε'ιη^αν 
 
 — η7ον — 5j7ov 
 -ωμεν-η7ε -ωοΊ 
 
 TW -ηναι 
 
 τυ*-είς 
 
 — οιο — οι7ο 
 
 — OI0$OV— οΜην 
 
 — oi^cJs — οιν7ο 
 
 wanting 
 
 τυφθ-ήο ν εο'6αι 
 
 τυφθ-ηίόμενο^ 
 
 — οιο — §ι7ο 
 
 OltfduV ΟΐΌ^ην 
 
 — οι^ε — οιν7ο 
 
 wanting 
 
 τυ^-ν^ε^αι 
 
 τυΑτ-ζ,-τίμενο^ 
 
 — οιο — οι7ο 
 
 Oltf0OV-O!0$>)V 
 
 — oifl'ds — οιν7ο 
 
 wanting 
 
 τβ7ύ•ψ εσί)αι 
 
 τε7υψ-ομενο^ 
 
 — ο —7ο 
 — tfdov -~ΰόψ 
 — αύε -ν7ο 
 
 τε7ιμ — δεδηΚ 
 -ωμαι —η — η7αι 
 — ώμε$ον-η0^ον — y;o"#ov 
 -ώμε0α-η#(3ε-ων7αι( 1 1 ) 
 
 <τε7ιμη— tfttai 
 <5ε(5ηλώ— tftJai 
 
 τείιμημ 
 
 δεδηλωμένος 
 
 — Ctfov -<Τ0™ 
 
 Ρ. μεόα -<Τ0? -ν7β 
 
 
 
/υ 
 
 3 
 
 Vft 
 
 ο 
 
 > 
 
 Ο 
 
 3_ 
 
 
 
 ο 
 S» 
 
 UJ 
 
 d. 
 
 - > 
 to 
 
 d. 
 
 ere ; 
 
 
 fa 
 
 ι 
 
 
 έ 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 ^ -St 
 
 
 
 b 
 
 b 
 
 
 
 b 
 
 e 
 
 φ u 
 
 
 ω 
 
 
 δ 
 
 δ 
 
 δ 
 
 δ 
 
 
 "■*-j 
 
 \3 
 
 \3 
 
 \3 
 
 
 <=t> 
 
 "s? 
 
 (D CU 
 
 
 *S 
 
 δ 
 
 on 
 
 U> 
 
 
 >3 
 
 >3 
 
 J= Φ 
 Λ. QJ 
 
 
 α 
 
 4- 
 
 έ 
 
 b- 
 
 
 
 4- 
 
 
 U- ( 
 
 b 
 
 b 
 
 V f 
 
 
 
 1-1 JD 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 = 
 
 
 
 b jr > 
 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 
 ♦- Ci 
 
 
 Φ 
 
 *=* -I 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 Φ Φ 
 
 
 > 
 
 • > 7 
 
 
 
 φ 
 
 
 Φ »-> 
 
 
 "δ 
 
 bo 
 
 .5 
 
 £. 
 
 
 c3 
 
 5=R 
 
 g 
 
 t— ι φ 
 
 
 s 
 
 'J? 
 
 m 
 
 s ° ^ 
 
 a. w *» 
 3 3-3. 
 
 ce 
 
 δ 
 
 I* 
 
 
 δ 
 3 
 
 G 
 
 ~ Φ *■ 
 
 φ > -a 
 
 -S Ρ3 1> 
 
 φ -3 5 
 
 
 
 
 t 
 
 
 b 
 
 
 ^ S Φ 
 
 g ed ^• 
 
 •Ξ , φ 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ο 
 
 6 
 > 
 
 ο ? £ 
 
 b- i « 
 
 β ? 8 
 
 Ρ v5 b 
 ο ο ο 
 
 ■ i ' 
 
 -P. to 
 
 ,o jb f b 
 
 •J 
 
 ο 
 
 
 Φ 
 
 Φ 
 
 .£ > φ 
 
 >-Η 
 
 ed 
 
 ο ο 5 
 
 ο 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 15 -Β & 
 
 Ο 
 
 Q- 
 
 έ- ο « 
 
 έ * 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 γ ^ ?=*> 
 
 > 
 
 G 
 
 1.^ ^ 
 
 ^ ui to 
 
 d. • 
 
 
 
 ?* 
 
 1 < ^ 
 
 W 
 
 
 Ϊ3 =*■ 4 
 
 ο ο ο 
 
 
 
 
 
 »— ι 
 
 
 b 
 
 b 
 
 b* 
 
 φ 
 
 > 
 
 "til 
 
 τη 
 Λ 
 EX 
 
 (μ 
 
 b 
 
 b• 
 
 ■Sol 
 
 > 
 
 "Zj 
 
 cd 
 
 »-• 
 Φ 
 
 -ill 
 
 ^ ^ v* 
 
 - δ «g 
 
 tJD 
 .5 
 
 3" 
 
 V U3 
 
 φ 
 3" 
 
 c 
 
 c 
 
 λ "ζ: *•» 
 
 ■fie» 
 
 b ςΗ 
 to ,- ** 
 
 G — *-• 
 
 
 α, 
 
 ε 
 
 v-> 
 b 
 
 cd 
 
 b• 
 
 Φ 
 
 a 
 
 b 
 
 
 φ 
 
 3» 
 
 b =» ? 
 
 8 *S to 
 
 > 
 δ *i δ 
 
 ,6 £ ^ 
 
 Φ 
 -Μ 
 
 # s 
 
 φ 
 
 Φ 
 
 Μ 
 
 6 
 
 ex 
 Β 
 
 φ 
 
 orj a: 
 
 
 
 *«• to >- 
 
 £"& 
 
 <$ 
 
 Φ 
 
 φ 
 
 * *^fa 
 1-r ^ 
 
 
 φ 
 ^3 
 
 Τ ' ■ 
 b 
 
 •«3D <T5 
 2 to u> 
 § 3. 3. 
 I5g ι ι 
 
 b 
 
 δ c 
 
 > 
 
 5<Γ 
 
 3 S- 
 
 b Φ ^ 
 
 ^ Ο ^ 
 
 b S δ 
 Φ ο ° 
 
 
 β 
 
 ο t/2 
 
 1 QJ 
 
 6'S. 
 
 b 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 δ 
 
 
 
 4- 
 
 
 
 OQ Ο fa 
 
 m Ο cu 
 
 *-" 
 
 
 b 
 
 b 
 
 
 - 
 
 6 
 
 αϊ «-4 
 
 fa 
 
 m 
 
 φ 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 fa ί 
 3 ί 
 
 5 r| 
 
 « -S 
 
 
 
 in 
 
 (Ν ί 
 
 ^ 
 
 HH 
 
 CN 
 
 
 -C "Ξ 
 
Notes on the Active and Passive Voice. 7 i 
 
 Remarks applicable to all the Voices. 
 
 1. Tenses, whose first person plural endsiri|x?v have no 
 first person Dual viz. all in the Active voice, and the Aoristfl 
 of the Passive. 
 
 2. The Leading Tenses have the second and third Dual 
 in ov ; and the third Plural in <T/, (atfi or atfi.) 
 
 The Historical Tenses have the third Dual in ην, and the 
 third Plural in v, (ov αν, sirfav or rjtfav.) 
 
 3. Tn these respects the Subjunctive follows the inflec- 
 tion of the Leading Tenses ; the Optative, that of (he His- 
 torical Tenses. 
 
 4. To form the Subjunctive, the corresponding Tenses 
 of the Indicative are lengthened, ο and ου into ω, ε and ει in η; 
 
 as, Indie, τύπτ-ω ε\ ει ; -ετον-ετον ; -ομεν-ετε ουόΊ. 
 Sub. τί<κτ-ω-7\ς-7\ ; -ητον-ητον ; -ωμεν-ητε-ωαΊ. 
 
 Remarks on the Active Voice. 
 
 5. The termination ειν of the Infinitive seems to have 
 been originally έμενα» ; as, τυτΓΤί'μεναι, which was retained by 
 the Ionics. The Dorics shortened it into μεν ; as, τ^τεμεν, 
 from which by dropping μ, it became rj«re-sv, τντττειν. 
 
 6. The ^Eolic formation of this tense, «τ^ψει-α-α^-ε. D. 
 τυψεί-ατον-άτην. P. <τυψεί-αμεν-ατε-αν, is most in use. 
 
 7. The primitive form of the Pluperfect, which occurs 
 in Homer and Herodotus, was -εα ; in the third person -εε. 
 Hence arose, on the one hand, the Doric form εια, and on 
 the other, by contraction, the Attic form η-ης-η; as, *)δη-η£-η 
 for ><$ειν-εΐ£-ει. 
 
 Remarks on the Passive. 
 8. The original termination of the 2d person singular was, 
 ε/ίαι,ίη the Ind.; gtfo, Imp.; η<Γαι, Sub. This form occurs only 
 in the New Testament. By rejecting <r they became εαι, Ind.; 
 εο, Imp.; ηαι, Sub.; which were retained by the Ionics. By 
 contraction they received the present form. The Attics 
 sometimes contracted εαι of the Indicative in ει ; as, βί\ει. 
 9 The termination ε0α 1st person Plural, was frequently 
 etioa among the Poets. 
 
 10. The Jd Person Plural of the Perfect, properly ends in vrat; 
 as, (cUpurac. When the termination xrai is preceded by a conson- 
 ant, the Participle and Verb εϊμί areusei to avoid the harsh sound. 
 This a;>piioslikewiseto thePluperfect which regularly ends in-vr*. 
 
 11. Verbs in οω have more commonly ω throughout this 
 tense ; as, S. ίείηλ-ωμαι-ζ), ωται, D. ίεί^λ-ώμε^ον.ώ^ον-ύ^- 
 9r t v. P. δε<$ηλ-£\αεβα-5*05-ών«-αι. 
 
72 
 
 Contract Verb — Active. 
 
 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Imperative 
 
 
 
 FIRST 
 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 S. 
 
 <πμ -άω — άεις — άει* 
 
 S . τ ί μ — αε — αε7ω 
 
 
 
 — ώ — ας — α 
 
 — α — ά7ω 
 
 
 D 
 
 — άε7ον — άε7ον 
 
 — άε7ον — -α&7ων 
 
 
 
 — ά7ον — ά7ον 
 
 — ά7ον — ά7ων 
 
 
 P. 
 
 — άομεν — άείε — άουαΊ 
 
 — άε7ε — as7cw<fav 
 
 
 
 — ώμεν — άΊε — ωσΊ 
 
 — α7ε — αΐω^αν 
 
 Imp. 
 
 8; 
 
 171 μ -αον — αε£ — αε D. — άε7ον — αε'7ην 
 -ων — ας — α — α7ον — <χ7ην 
 
 
 P. 
 
 αωμεν ωμεν. -αετέ, οττε, -αον, -ων 
 
 
 
 SECOND | CONJUGATION. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 s. 
 
 φιλ -έω — £εις — ίε\ 
 
 6. φίλ — εε — εε'7ω 
 
 
 
 — ω — ε;£ — ε; 
 
 — ει — ε Γι ω 
 
 
 D. 
 
 — εε7ον — έε7ον 
 
 D. — s'c7ov — εε/ων 
 
 
 
 — επον — εΊΊον 
 
 — εΓ7ον — έπων 
 
 
 P. 
 
 — ε'ομεν — ύεΊε — ε'ουΟΊ 
 
 Ρ . — isls — εεΊω^αν 
 
 
 
 — ουμεν — εΓ7ε — ουσι 
 
 — ε,Ίε — ειίωσαν 
 
 Imp. 
 
 s. 
 
 εφίλ -εον — εε£ — εε D. — έΥ?ον - — εε7η* 
 
 — ουν — εις — ει — ε>7ον — είΐψ 
 
 
 P. 
 
 ε'ομεν, ουμεν -Is7«, εΓΙε -εον. ouv. 
 
 
 
 THIRD 
 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 s. 
 
 δηλ -ο'ω — όεις — όει 
 
 S. δηλ — οε — οΐ'7ω 
 
 
 
 — ω — ος — οι 
 
 — ου — ού7ω 
 
 
 D. 
 
 — : ε?ον — όε7ον 
 
 D. — οε7ον — οε"7ων ^ 
 
 
 
 — ου7ον — ου7ον 
 
 — ου7ον — ο -'7ων 
 
 
 P. 
 
 — όομεν — οε7ε — όουοΊ 
 
 Ρ. — οε7ε — oi7wCav 
 
 
 
 — ουμεν — ου7ε — ουσΊ 
 
 — ου/ ε — ο,7ω0αν 
 
 Imp. 
 
 s. 
 
 εδη\ — οον — οες — οε D. — ο'ε7ον — οέ'7ην 
 — ουν — ου$ — ου — οϋ7ον — -•ύΊ 
 
 
 P. 
 
 όομεν, ουμεν -όε7ε, ου7ε -οον, ουν 
 
 * ζάω, πεινάω, διψάω, χρίομαι, contract αε and 
 
ffontract Terb — Active. 
 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Infmit. 
 
 i'artic. 
 
 ifl αω. 
 
 τιμ-άοιμι -άοΐ£ — άοι 
 — ωμι -ως — ω 
 
 -άοι7ον-αοί7ην 
 — ω7ον — ω7ην 
 — άοιμεν-άοι7ε — άοιεν 
 — £μεν — ό^7ε — ωεν 
 
 τιμ — άω -άτ,ς -ά*ϊ 
 — ω -υ.ς -ο 
 
 -άη7ον-άη7ον 
 — ά7ον — α7ον 
 — άωμεν-άη7ε -άωόΊ 
 — ωμεν -α7ε -ωαΊ 
 
 τιμ — άειν 
 
 πμ- άων 
 
 -GJV 
 
 
 
 
 
 in εω. 
 φιλ-έοιμι — έοι$ — εΌι 
 — οΓμι — οΤς . — οΓ 
 
 — ^ε'βι7ον — εοΠην 
 — οΠον — οΠην 
 — :οιμεν — έΌι7ε — ε'οιεν 
 — οί'μεν — οΤ7ε — οΓεν 
 
 φιλ-ε'ω -ε',ης -^ 
 — -yfe -^ 
 
 -irflov-urOov 
 — 7;7ον — τ;7ον 
 — εωμεν-εη7ε -ε'ωόΊ 
 — ωμεν -τ,7ε -ωαΊ 
 
 φιλ — εειν 
 — εΓν 
 
 φιλ-εων 
 -ων 
 
 
 
 
 
 // 000. 
 
 ίηλ— όοίμι — όοΐ£ — όοι 
 — οΓμι — ο~£ — οΐ 
 
 — coi7ov — οοί7ην 
 — οΓ7ον — ο<7ην 
 — όοιμεν — οοι7ε — c'cisv 
 — οΓμεν — οΓ7ε — οΓεν 
 
 δηλ — όω —Γ,τ,ς -ryrj 
 — ω — οΐς -οΐ 
 
 — όη7ον— όη7ον 
 
 — ώ7ον — ω7ον 
 — όωμεν-ό/;7ε — όω<ι 
 — ώμεν -ω7ε -ωό ι 
 
 δηΧ — όειν 
 — oCv 
 
 ίηΧ-όω\ 
 
 
 
 
 
 α?* in η and fl. 
 
71 
 
 Contract Verbs. 
 
 [Passive 
 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Opt— 
 
 
 
 
 FIRST 
 
 CONJU- 
 
 Pres. 
 
 β.τιμ-άομαι -kr\ -άε7αι 
 
 <πμ-αου 
 
 -αε'α^ω 
 
 τιμ-αοίμην 
 
 
 -ωμαι -α -ά7αι 
 
 -ω 
 
 -aa'dw 
 
 -ωμην 
 
 
 D. -αόμε^ον-άεβ^ον-άεο^ον 
 
 -άε^ον 
 
 -aecfdwv 
 
 -αοιμε^ον 
 
 
 -ώμεθον -atfflov -atfdov 
 
 -atfdov 
 
 •άα^ων 
 
 -ύμεΰον 
 
 
 Ρ. -αόμεΑα -άε^ε-άον7αι 
 
 -άε^ε 
 
 -αεα'βωα'αν 
 
 -αοίμε$α 
 
 
 -ώμεόα -α<Τ0ε -ών7αι 
 
 -O0US 
 
 -atf^wtfav 
 
 -ω'με^α 
 
 Imp. 
 
 S. ε7ιμ αόμην -άου -άε7ο 
 
 D. ετιμ 
 
 -αήμε^ον 
 
 -άε^ον 
 
 
 -ώμην -ώ -ά7ο 
 
 
 -ώμε$ον 
 
 -atf^ov 
 
 
 
 
 SECOND 
 
 CONJU- 
 
 Pres. 
 
 S. φιλ-εομαι -ii\ -εε7αι 
 
 φιλ-εου 
 
 -εεσ^ω 
 
 φιλ-εοίμην 
 
 
 -χμαι -γι -εΓ7α# 
 
 -* 
 
 -είο^ω 
 
 -οιμην 
 
 
 D. -εόμε^ον -εεα'όον -εεα^ον 
 
 -εεσ^ον 
 
 -εεα^ων 
 
 -εοίμε^ον 
 
 
 -έμε^ον -εΓα^ον -sitf^ov 
 
 -εΓο^ον 
 
 -είσ^ων 
 
 -ο/με^ον 
 
 
 Ρ. -εόμε^α -έεο^ε -εον7αι 
 
 -εε^ε 
 
 -εε^ω^αν 
 
 -εοίμε^α 
 
 
 -χμε^α -εΓσ^ε -*ν7αι 
 
 -εΓ^ε 
 
 εία'^ωσ'αν 
 
 -οίμε^α 
 
 Imp. 
 
 S. ε*φ»λ -εόμην -εου -εε7ο 
 
 D. εφιλ-εόμε^ον - 
 
 εε<7$ον 
 
 
 -οομην -ου -εΓ7ο 
 
 
 -οόμε^ον 
 
 εΓα^ον 
 
 
 
 THIRD 
 
 COJsJU- 
 
 Pres. 
 
 S. ίηλ-όομαι -ό;/} -όε7α» 
 
 £ηλ-οου -osVSw 
 
 #ηΧ-οοίμην 
 
 
 -ουμαι -οΓ -ου7αι 
 
 -ου -ούό^ω 
 
 -οιμην 
 
 
 D. -οόμε^ον-όεο^ον-όε<Τ&ον 
 
 -όεα^ον -οεο^ων 
 
 -οοίμε^ον 
 
 
 -ούμε^ον-ηυΟ^ον-ου^ον 
 
 .outf^ov-o^^wv 
 
 -οψ,ε^ον 
 
 
 Ρ. οόμε^α -όεα^ε -όον7αι 
 
 -οεο^ε -οεΆ^ω^αν 
 
 -οοίμε^α 
 
 
 -οομε^α -ουό^ε -ουν7αι 
 
 -ουσ^ε -o^tfSrwa'av 
 
 -ο'ιμε^α 
 
 Imp. 
 
 S. έ^ηλ-οόμην -όου -όε7ο D. ε<5ηλ-οόμε^ον 
 
 όε&ον 
 
 
 -ούμην -ου -ou7o -ούμε^ον 
 
 oDVSov 
 

 rbi. 
 
 
 -btwo 
 
 ■ 
 
 ~ν7β 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 •an 
 
 
 πα-α u:*.x 
 
 
 ν βω. 
 
 
 
 
 -ίΟΙΟ -f047o 
 
 
 
 " 
 
 -οίο 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -ώμ. 
 
 
 
 ?ην 
 
 -00*', 
 
 • 
 
 :^ου 
 
 χ-νος 
 
 —fivaili 
 
 
* 6 Verb» — Contract. 
 
 Notes on the Contract Verbs. 
 
 1. Verbs declined after the early form are sometimes 
 contracted ; as, «ττεταα'αι from <ετάομαι. 
 
 2. Dissyllables in αω, from which the Attics have exclu- 
 ded i, are not contracted ; such as, κλάω for κλαίω ; κάω 
 for και'ω. 
 
 3. Dissyllables in εω are rarely contracted in the first 
 person singular, or in the first and third persons plural of 
 the Indicative ; or in the Optative and Subjunctive moods, 
 or the Participle ; as, ΑΤλε'ω, «τλέομεν, tfXsWi, πΧίοις, «ττλέη£> 
 #λέων. In the Imperative and Infinitive, they are generally- 
 contracted, but not always. 
 
 4. In the Optative mood, Active Voice, the Attics use, 
 οιην for οιμι, which becomes ωην in verbs from αω ; as, ορωην 
 for ορχοιμ,ι ; τελοίην for τελε'οιμι. In some verbs in αω, they 
 change α into η ; as, ζγς for ζοίς ; ίιψί•ν for &ψαν. 
 
 5. Some Contracts are found in more conjugations than 
 ' one ; as, ^ηράω (or εω) ίηλε'ω (or οω) χνυζάω (εω or οω). 
 
 6. Some are Baryton or Contract ; as, έλκω or έλκέω. 
 
 ON THE REDUPLICATION AND AUGMENT. 
 
 } Verbs are increased in the beginning by reduplica- 
 tion and augment.* 
 
 REDUPLICATION. 
 
 Three tenses, the Perfect, Pluperfect, and Paulo- 
 post Future, have the reduplication, which is retained 
 
 *There is a marked distinction between the increase of the Perfect, 
 and that of the Imperfect and Aorists. The first is found in all the 
 moods, and even in the Participle ; the other, only in the Indicative. 
 The increase of the Perfect is generally formed by prefixing the first 
 letter of the verb with ε : it has hence been called the reduplication. 
 The name is not entirely accurate ; for this increase is not always a re- 
 duplication. It is, however, used here for want of a better ; and by 
 the reduplication is meant the increase or prefix of the Perfect. It has 
 been thought advantageous to treat of this increase separately from 
 the augments, syllabic and temporal, both because it is distinguished 
 from them by its fixed nature, continuing through all the moods, 
 (though it is sometimes the same with them inform ;) and likewise, 
 because the chief difficulty with the young student is to determine, 
 not the increase or prefix of the Imperfect aud Aorists, but of th« 
 Perfect. 
 
Verbs — Augments. 77 
 
 through all the moods ; as, τε-τυφα, re -τυφβ, τε-τύφοιμι, τε- 
 τυφω, &c. 
 
 Rule I. If the verb begins with a consonant, prefix 
 it with ε, for the reduplication ; as, τύ*7ω, τέ-τυφα ; λύω, 
 λε-λυκα ; ypi<pw, γύ-γραφα ; νέμω, νε-νεμηκα. 
 
 Exception 1. When the first letter is a rough mute, 
 change it into its cognate smooth one ;* as, ^ω, τύ-ύυχα, for 
 Sfi'^uxa ; φοέέω, *τεφό€ηκα, for φεφό€ηκα. But ρ changes place 
 with ε, in the reduplication ; as, \ίω ε^ευκα for |φυχα. 
 
 2. When the verb begins with a double consonant, two 
 single ones, of which the second is not a liquid, or yv, pre- 
 fix only ε ;t as, ξάω, ξζ^χα ; ψάλλω, εψαλκα ; ξηραίνω, ε^ή- 
 ρα^κα ; ^νωρι^ω, ε^νώρικα ; <ί7ε'λλω, εβίαλκα ; also, ^ρη^ορεω, 
 ε^ρη^όρηχα. But κτάομα* makes κεκτημαι ; ^τήο'σ'ω, «ϊτε^τηκα, 
 and «7Ττοω. χύπτωχα. A few verbs beginning with liquids, 
 take ει or εί instead of the Reduplication ; as, εϊληφα from 
 λαμ/3άνω for λεληφα. 
 
 Rule II. If the verb begins with a vowel or diph- 
 thong, α and ε are changed into η, and ο into ω accord- 
 ing to the rules for the temporal augment ; as, άδω, 
 ήκα ; δνειόΊζω, ώνε'ιίικα, αιρε'ω, ηρηκα. 
 
 . AUGMENT. 
 
 There are two augments ; the syllabic^ when the 
 verb begins with a consonant ; the temporal, when it 
 begins with the vowels α, ε, o 3 or the diphthongs αυ, οι, 
 οι. 
 
 l.The augment seems originally to have been ε in all cases; 
 as, εέλτετο, in the old Ionic writers. Afterwards, when it 
 preceded a vowel, the ε coalesced with that vowel into a 
 long vowel or diphthong, forming the temporal augment. 
 
 2. In Homer, Hesiod, and the old Poets, the use of the 
 augment is fluctuating. The same word has sometimes 
 the augment and sometimes not. In Herodotus and other 
 prose writers, the augment is generally used, though some- 
 times omitted. The Attics observed it regularly, except 
 among the Poets. 
 
 ♦For the reason of this change, see Rule ii, page 4. 
 
 t The first letter of the verb is dropped, in these instances, to avoid 
 an unpleasant sound ; such a.s,\pi\pa\Ka ; γεγνώρικα. 
 
 f The syllabic is so called because it adds a syllable to the word ; 
 the temporal, because it increases the time or quantity of the syllable. 
 
 7* 
 
78 Verbs — Augments. 
 
 Four tenses, the Imperfect, Pluperfect, and two Ao- 
 rists receive the augment which belongs only to the 
 Indicative mood.* 
 
 The syllabic augment is s prefixed to the augment- 
 ed tenses ; as, τυπΊω, ε-τυ#7ον 9 ε-<τυψα, ε-τυτχον, ε-τετύφειν. 
 
 Ρ in the beginning of a word is doubled ; as, |te7w, 
 
 The Poets, however, do not always double ρ ; as, εραψεν. 
 
 The temporal augment lengthens a and ε into η, and 
 • into w ; as, 
 
 α, άδω, ySov. αυ, αυξάνω, η'^ανον. 
 
 £, εΧεύ&ω, η\ευ&ον. ο, όρύσ^ω, wpufltfov. 
 αι, α/ρω vjpov.f οι, ο/κί£ω, ωκι^ον.]; 
 
 The remaining vowels and diphthongs admit no augment ; 
 
 as, ικάνω, ϊκανον. 
 
 Exceptions Compounds of όϊνος, οιωνός, οϊα|, omit the 
 augment ; as, οίνίζω, οί'νι^ον ; οινοχεω, οινόχεον ;§ οινο«7Τολε'ω, 
 oivoWXsov ; οιακί^ω, οίάκι^ον ; also, οί'ομαι, οίκουρέω, ο/μάω, ojV- 
 τοάω, οίμωζω, ο/ίάνω.|| 
 
 2. Four beginning with α ; αω, ά'ί'ω, oMsVtfw, άηδί^ομαι. 
 Also, άναλόω, (commonly αναλίσκω,) in the older Attic wri- 
 ters ; as, άνάλωκα. 
 
 The augment seems to be omitted in these instances, to 
 avoid an unpleasant succession of long vowels. 
 
 3. Many Verbs beginning with ε are augmented by length- 
 ening ε into ει ; as, ύόίζω, εΐύιζον, εάω, ε&ω, ελία'α'ω, έλκυω, έλ- 
 κω, έπομαι, ε^ω,ΐί εργάζομαι, Ιρ&ύζω, ίοτ&ω, εουω, εόΊιάω, 
 1'χω. 
 
 4. Verbs in εο augment the second vowel, ο, into ω ; as, 
 ϊορΊάζω, εώρ7α£ον. Sometimes, however, ι is inserted, ε<όρ7α- 
 £ ον • 
 
 RULE FOR THE PLUPERFECT. 
 
 When the Perfect begins with a vowel, the Pluper- 
 
 * A few instances may be found, in which the augment is continu- 
 ed through all the moods ; as, άνεωχθήναι, for άνοϊχβήναι. 
 t Here α is lengthened into η, and t subscribed. 
 J Here ο is lengthened into ω, and ι subscribed. 
 § 'ωνόχεον is used. 
 
 Η These six sometimes admit the augment. 
 ; nru retains the augment in all the moods. 
 
Verbs — Augments. 79 
 
 icct receives no additional augment ; as, £ε'ω, έ'^ευκα, 
 έ^εύχεη, not ή|^κειν. 
 
 But l>y exception 4, εολ^α makes έώλιτειν ; sopya, έώρ^ειν, 
 έ'οικα, εωκειν. 
 
 Exceptions by the Attic Dialect. 
 
 1. The syllabic ε is often changed into η, in βο;ίλομαι, 
 άίναμαι, μέλλω. 
 
 2. The diphthongs ει and ευ are augmented ; as, εικάζω, 
 γκαζόν; ειόηκειν, Sync. ε'Μειν, Att. /ίόειν, from είό-ω. 
 
 3. The temporal η is sometimes resolved in εα ; as, άλόω, 
 έάλωκα, for ηλωκα. 
 
 4. In some verbs, the syllabic augment is prefixed to the 
 temporal, and to verbs beginning with an immutable vowel 
 or diphthong ; as, άνδάνω. ηνδανον, έήνύανον ; εϊκω, ο/κα, έοικα. 
 
 This prefix is made to tenses beginning with η, ο, ω, ει, 
 •ι, and s. 
 
 Attic Reduplication. In verbs beginning with α 
 short, ε or o, the two first letters of the Present are prefix- 
 ed to the Perfect ;* as, άκέω, -ζκοα, ακ-ήκοα. 
 
 When the Perfect, thus augmented, has more than three 
 syllables, the third is shortened ; as, άλε/φω, ^λειφα, άλ- 
 ήλιφα. But άγείρω, έρω7άω, and έρείδω, retain the long syl- 
 lable ; as, άγτ,γερχα, ε , ρηρώ7ηκα. 
 
 The Pluperfect of the Attic form admits of a temporal 
 augment ; as, άλ-ήλεκα, ήλ-ηλεκειν Except εληλι^ειν. 
 
 The reduplications λε and με arc changed into ει ; as, 
 λήβω, λε'ληφα, Α. ε/'ληφα ; μείρομαι, ε/'μαρμαι. Most of the 
 Verbs which take this Reduplication retain it, in all the 
 other dialects, as well as the Attic, and lose the common 
 form. 
 
 Exceptions by the Ionic Dialect. 
 
 1 . The second Aorist and other Tenses have a redupli- 
 cation, like the Perfect, which continues through all the 
 moods ; as, εκαμον ; Ionic, κε'καμον, κε'καμε, &c. 
 
 2. The augment and reduplication are entirely omitted ; 
 as, έκάλη<τα, κάλη<Τα ; εδύδεχΊο, δύχΊο. In the Pluperfect, one 
 is sometimes omitted, and the other retained ; as, δείώκει- 
 tfav, for έδεδωχειόαν. 
 
 * And sometimes to the second Aorist ; as, άγω ηγον ; Att, άγηγον ; 
 by Metathesis, ηγαγον. 
 
80 Verbs — Augments. 
 
 3. After the augment is removed from the Aorists, the 
 two first letters of the Present are sometimes prefixed ; as, 
 oj ρω ; 2d Aor. wpov ; Ι. όίρον, άρ-αρον. 
 
 COMPOUND VERBS. 
 
 I. Verbs compounded with a Preposition, take the 
 reduplication and augment between the Preposition 
 and the Verb ; as, #ρο(Τβεβληκα, Ατροίεβαλλον, from tfpoo'- 
 βάλλω. 
 
 1. εκ in composition becomes ε£ before a vowel ; as, ix- 
 
 €άλλω, εξέβαλλον. 
 
 2. εν and tfuv, which lose ν before a consonant, resume it 
 before a vowel ; as, έμμε'νω, ένεμενον. 
 
 Exception 1. Compound verbs of the same signification 
 with their simples, and those whose simples are not in use, 
 take the reduplication and augment in the beginning ; as, 
 άμφιεννυμι, ήμφίενν^μην ; καίομαι, έκα^όμην ; άμφΐ(Τ§η7εω, 
 ήμφκτβήΐεθν, from αμφι and 0€η7εω, obsolete. To these add 
 άμ^εχομαι, and άμτϊίσ'χομαι. To this remark there are 
 some exceptions. 
 
 2. Some verbs have the augment and reduplication in 
 the beginning or middle ; as, άν7ιβολεω, ήν7ι§ολεον, or άν7ε§ό- 
 λεον ; so $γγυάω* άφίημι. 
 
 3. Some in the beginning and middle ; as, ε\οχλε'ω, ήνώ- 
 χλεον, ήνώχληκα ; ανοίγω has it in the beginning, jniddle, or 
 both. 
 
 RULE. 
 
 Prepositions in composition lose their final vowel, 
 if the simple verb begins with a vowel ; as, έ^έχω, for 
 επιύχω ; except •#ερι and tfpo,* and sometimes άμφί. 
 
 1. If the simple begins with an aspirate, the preceding 
 smooth mute of the preposition is changed into its cognate 
 rough one ; as, άφαιρέω, from d/tfo and aipsw.j 
 
 2. £ in the beginning of the simple is usually, but not al- 
 ways, doubled, after a vowel ; as, διαχέω, from όία and |ε'ω. 
 
 * When προ precedes the syllabic augment, the two vowels are of- 
 ten contracted into ου ; as, ΐΓρουτρέπετο, for προετρί-ετο. 
 t Vide rule iii. page 5. 
 
Verbs — Formation of the Tenses in the Active Voice. CI 
 
 II. A r erbs compounded with other parts of speech, 
 take the augment and reduplication in the beginning ; 
 
 as, φιλοαΌφεω, έφιλοαΌ'φεον, πεφιΧούόφνιχοι.. 
 
 When5u£ and ευ precede a mutable vowel or diphthong, 
 the augment and reduplication are between the particle 
 and verb ; as, δυόκρεόΊάω, (W'/jpeVfeov. When they precede 
 an immutable vowel, or consonant, the augment and redu- 
 plication are in the beginning ; as, δυοΊυχε'ω, έδυύΊύγεον ; 
 δνύωιϊέω, £<Wclrctf£ov. 
 
 FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN THE ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 The Imperfect is formed from the Present, by 
 changing ω into ov,and prefixing the augment ; as, τύ*Ίω 9 
 εΐυπίον ; &ίω, sSuov. 
 
 FIRST FUTURE. 
 
 The first Future is formed by inserting <f before ω of 
 the Present, dropping τ, δ, d, <f. ζ* if they precede ; as, 
 
 τύοττω, (ruV-tfoj) τύψω ; χράφω, (^ράφ-ο'ω) ^ράψω ; λε'^ω, (Xs'y- 
 &ω) λέξω ; άδω, atfw.j 
 
 When ν precedes ί, 0, τ, ζ, it is omitted with them, and 
 ι inserted, (by Rule, page 5,) as, βνε'νδω. tftfsioOj. 
 
 In liquid\ verbs <f is not inserted ; the penult of the 
 Present is merely shortened ; as, φαίνω, φανώ. 
 
 The long penult of the Present is shortened by dropping 
 
 the latter of two vowels or consonants ; as, 
 
 (τνείρω, tf-nrspw, Λ - «τέμνω, τεμω, ) , 
 
 ./ Γ ^ „ r ' / t»D λ ~ > dropping ν. 
 
 Τδίνω, τενω f g κάμνω, χάμω, ^ ι ι β 
 
 φαίνω, φανώ £ ϋ (Γΐε'λλω, α^ελώ, ) , . 
 
 μιαίνω, μιανώ, ) J ψάλλω,ψαλώ, $ dro PP in g λ • 
 
 It is probable, from analogy, that the liquid verbs once 
 formed their first Future regularly, in <ϊω. like the others ; 
 and that the <f was afterwards dropped to avoid the harsh 
 sound of the liquids when joined with tf. What renders 
 
 * By Rule iv. page 5. 
 
 t The learner should recollect that ψ and ξ are merely substituted 
 
 for πς, βς, 0f, and «rj, yj, χς. 
 
 ί Liquid Verbs are those which have the liquids λ, μ, y, ρ, in their 
 termination. 
 
82 Verbs — Formation oftheTenses in the Active V 
 
 this more probable is, that the iEolics, who delighted ia 
 harsh sounds, used the d ; as, τε'λλω, τελώ, i£ol. τέ'λβ'ω. 
 
 1. Most verbs in <Τ<Τω and many in £ω, have ξω in the fu- 
 ture, as if from γω. 
 
 πράόόω, η>άξω, as from ιϊρά,γω. 
 
 ορύόΰω, ορ^ξω, ορύγω. 
 
 #7άζω, (τΊάξω, όΊά,γω. 
 
 c7i^cj, σΊίξω, (ϊΊίγω. 
 
 The following in £ω have either <Τω or ξω ; viz. άρ«?τα£ω, 
 
 δΐ(Τ7ά^ω, νυόΊάξω, μερμηρί^ω, βάζω, εγγυαΧιζω, βουχοΚιάζω, 
 
 #αί£ω, 6atf7«/£w. 
 
 Κλά£ω and some others, have γξω $ as, χΚάζω, χΚάγξω, 
 as from κλά^ω. 
 
 2. Polysyllables in ιζω often drop <f of the first Future, 
 and circumflex the last syllable ; as, νομίζω, νομ'^ω. νομιω. 
 
 This belongs properiy to the Attics ; who likewise remove, σ r v om 
 Futures in ασω. ισω, εσω, and οσω, contracting the termination ; as, κα- 
 λί'ω, κα\έσω, Α. καλώ ; όμόσω ; <5/*ώ. 
 
 3. Four verbs, which have lost the rourhbrcaihmgin the 
 present,* resume it in the Future ; as Ιχ«, has 
 
 εξω ; τ^φω. from 0^φω, has 0:φω ; τρέφω, from 0ρε'φω, has 
 0ρε'ψω ; τρ?χω, from 0ρ=χω, has 0ρ:ξω 
 
 Verbs in αω, εω, and οω, lengthen the short vowel be- 
 fore tfw of the Future, α and s into η. τιμάω, ημ-τ^ω ; 
 φιλεω, φιλήσω, ο into ω. 5ηλοω, όη>ώ<?ω. 
 
 Exception 1. οω retains ο in primitives, which are few ; 
 as, άροω, apoVoi. 
 
 2. αω retains a after ε, ι. and λ or ρ pure ;t as, εάω. εά^ω ; 
 ^ελάω. γε\ά#ω ; χοΉιχω. χοΉι&όω ; δράω .'ράοω. But χράω, 
 χράομαι τελαω, τλάω, are excepted ; as, χρήσ'ω. 
 
 Aiso. άκράομαι, -άσομαι; and verbs from which other verbs in αννυ» 
 or ασκώ are formed ; as, πετάω, ^ κρεμάω. 
 
 3. Verbs of two syllables in αω, which do not pass into 
 -ημι, retain α ; as, κλάω, κλάίΤω, because it is never κλήμι ; 
 0^άω, ίΤΏΤασ'ω, because it is never βΆτήμι. Likewise, φ^άνω, 
 φ^ά(Τω though φ$>;μί is used. 
 
 4. The following have either η or α. άράομαι, άλοάω, άνιάω, 
 ά<ράω, ιλάω, κνάω* κρεμάω, μηκάω, μοιράομαι, #ελάω, πεινάω, 
 ίτεφάω, «ττερχω. A few in εω have ε^ω ; as, τελε'ω, τελέσω ; 
 and some η#ω or εο"ω, αινεω, αινήα'ω or cuvstfoj. 
 
 * Because two syllables do not begin successively with an aspirate 
 See rule ii. page 4. 
 
 f By the same rule as in Nouns, see page 13. 
 J The same with πετάξω. 
 
Verbs — Formation of the Tenses in the Active Voice. 
 
 5. The following in εω form their Futures in ε -jCw ; as, 
 θεω, νε'ω, ίτνε'ω, £έω, χε'ω and «ττλέω, also καίω makes Ko&fa), 
 and κλαίω, κλαύίω, from obsolete Presents in ευω and αυω. 
 
 6. Many baryton verbs have their first Future in ή<Τω by 
 the Attic and ionic dialects ; as, νεμή<Τω, μελλή<Τω^. 
 
 FIRST AORIST. 
 
 The first Aorist is formed from the first Future, by 
 changing ω into a, and prefixing the augment; as, 
 
 τύψω, έτυψα. 
 
 The penult of this tense is usually long. Hence in liquid 
 verbs, the short penult of the fir^t Future is lengthened ; α 
 into η, ε into ει ; as, ψάλλω, ψάλω, δψηλα $* σ?ελώ, έστειλα, 
 νεμυ, ε ν ει μα. 
 
 1. The following Aoristsdonot retain the characteristic 
 of the Future ; ε' /tfa, -^νε^κα, είωκα, έ^ηκα, ηκα. The two 
 first take it from the Present : the remainder from the Per- 
 fect, and are rarely found out of the Indicative. 
 
 2. Some verbs drop the <S ; as, άλε^, ήλευο'α, ήλευα ; 
 καίω, εκαυσ'α, έ'καυα, εκεια ; χε'ω, εχευσ'α, and έ'χεα. 
 
 FIRST PERFEC Τ. 
 
 The Perfect is formed from the First Future, by pre- 
 fixing the reduplication, and changing ψω into c«, ξω 
 into χα ; ω and <Γω into κα ; and μω into μηκα ; as, τόψω, 
 
 τε'τυφα ; τεμώ, τετε'μηκα. 
 
 1. Verbs of two syllables in λω and ρω, change ε into a, 
 before κα of the Perfect ; as, (Γ7ελω. δΥ7αλ-κα, σ^ερω, IWap- 
 κα. Polysyllables retain the ε, and those in εινω change the 
 short vowel of the Future into a. 
 
 2. Verbs in εινω, ινω, υνω, drop ν before κα ; as, τείνω, τενω, 
 tflaxa ; κρι'νω, κρίνω, κ-'κρικα ; &ίνω, &υνδ, τε&υχα t Some 
 suffer syncope ; as : κ^'κληκα for κεκάλεκα : and in some verbs 
 the Attic* change s into ο ; as, (Τίρε'φω. έΥϊρο^α 
 
 3. The characteristic of the Perfect is properly κα annex- 
 ed to the Present ; as, λόω, λΐ'λυκα. But for ease in 'pro- 
 nunciation, βκ. τκ, are changed into tiie corresponding 
 rough mute ς>, κ being little else than a breathing ; 
 
 * The Attics rotain a ; as. ϊψα\α. 
 
 t To this rui ; Matthi do exceptions ; rejecting the γ from 
 
 the Perfect of ίτλ«'ι•ω, κτζίνω and κόχννν. 
 
84 Verbs — Formation of the Tenses in the Active Voice. 
 
 rpi§w, τε'7ρι§-κα, «τε/ρίφα ; λείΐπ'ω, λελει#-κα, λε'λειφα. yx, χχ, 
 and χχ, into χ ; as, λε/ω, λελε^-κα, λε'λεχα ; ιτλέκω, irizt'ksx- 
 κα, ιτε'Πίλεχα. ν before x becomes 7 in Verbs in αινώ ; as, 
 φαίνω, «ττεφα^κα. 
 
 4. The Perfect in μηκα is derived from a verb in εω, 
 formed from the Future in μώ ; as, τεμω, τεμεω, τε?ε'μηκα. 
 
 FIRST PLUPERFECT. 
 
 The Pluperfect is formed from the Perfect by chang- 
 ing α into ειν, and prefixing the augment, if the Perfect 
 begins with a consonant ; as, τε'7υφα, ε7ε7<;φειν. 
 
 When the Perfect begins with a vowel, no augment 
 is prefixed ; as, ε'ψαλκα, έψάλκειν. 
 
 SECOND AOKIST. 
 
 The Second Aorist is formed from the Present by 
 changing ω into ov and prefixing the augment ; as, λέγω, 
 
 SASjQV. 
 
 The penult of this tense is in many cases shortened. 
 
 1. In consonants, by dropping <r, and the latter of two 
 
 liquids ; as, τνΉτω, srutfov ; ονε'λλω, IWaXov. 
 
 2. In vowels by changing η, ω, α», and αυ into α ; as, λή- 
 /3ω, Ιλα,βον ;* and dropping the first vowel of ει, and ευ : as, 
 λε/ττω. έ'λκτον ; φείγω, Ι'φυ^ον. But before a liquid, ει is chang- 
 ed into a. in dissyllables ; as, σπείρω, IWapov ; into ε in 
 polysyllables ; as, cfy -ει'ρω, ηγερον. 
 
 In dissyllables, ε before or after a liquid, is changed into 
 α ; as. tXs'xw. §VXaxov, Ατλήίτνχω has sirXayov and IVXr^ov. 
 
 Verbs in αω and εω, change these terminations 'intoov ; as, 
 μυχάω, εμυκον 
 
 Verbs in βντω and £ω, whose Future is in |ω. have their 
 Second Aorist in yov ; as. IVpayov from ^ράσ'ο'ω ; also ε<τ"μυ- 
 γον and εψυ^ον f om <7>-'χω. and ψ^'χω Verbs in £ω, whose 
 Future is in σ'ω, have their Second Aorist in δον ; as, l^pa- 
 iov. Of the latter, very few have this tense. 
 
 1. The penult of this tense is necessarily long in dissyl- 
 lables, which take the temporal augment ; as, άγω. ηγον. So 
 also where the penult is long by position ; as, 2τάλ^ω. ε£αλ- 
 zsov. But in many of these, a transposition takes place, to 
 preserve the analogy • thus, flripSw makes, in poetr 
 
 Except λίγω, /?λ«ίτω, φλέγω. 
 
Verbs — Formation of the Tenses in the Active Ψύία 
 
 Sov ; δερχ^, t'ipaxov. Λ resolution or reduplication prod ι 
 the same effect ; tints, ^5ov, is made εαόον, 
 
 2. In βλάττίω, χαΧίνΊω. and χρύ*7ω the characteristic * is 
 changed into its cognate β ; as, 
 
 nf is changed into the cognate φ in the following wor 
 /3tW7w, g /ίαφον ; tfxatf7w, c<fxa<pov ; £ά-#7ω, ^|αρον ; tfaw7w, 
 ίίαφον ; άτϊ7ω, *ίφον ; giV /ω, έ'^ιφον ; ί)ρ^7ω, έ'θρυφον ; Ι: 
 Παφον ;•$άΈί7ω, Παφον. 
 
 3. The following have no Second Aorist : Polysyllables 
 in ζω and <Τ<Τω : Verbs in αω and sw after a vowel ; Verbs 
 in οω ; Polysyllables in αυω, ευω, ουω,* υω, uw ; and many 
 others. 
 
 SECOND FUTURE. 
 
 The Second Future is formed from the Second A#- 
 rist, by changing ov into wcircumiiexed, and casting ofT 
 the augment ; as, fTircrov, τυ^ώ. 
 
 SECOND PERFECT, OR PERFECT MIDDLE. 
 
 The Second Perfect is formed from the Second Fu- 
 ture, by changing ώ into a, and prefixing the reduplica- 
 tion ; as, <τυ*ω, rirwta. 
 
 Change of the Penult. 
 
 1 . ε of the Second Future passes into ο ; as, XSyS, XiXo- 
 γα. ; so βάλλω, (as from βάλω) βύβϊλα,. 
 
 2. α of the Second Future, from s or ει of the Present, 
 passes into ο ; as, CriXXw, (Γταλύ, έ'ανολα ; xrsived, χ* 
 Ιχτοχα. 
 
 α of the Second Future, from i\ or ai of the Present, ρ 
 ses into η ; as, (ίήτω, Cgmtcj, (Γέ<Γη*α ; δαίω, ΰαώ. oi(Sr;a. 
 &άλλω, χλάζω, and most verbs in which α of the Present is 
 long by position ; except κρά£ω, ^patfCw, φρύζω, βχΚΚω,αδω, 
 αγω. 
 
 ι of t lie Second Future, from ei of the Present, pa- 
 into οι ; ; - >, XjtflS, XiXowra. 
 
 Some are irregular ; as, &w, t)V .5a. 
 
 SEC' PERFECT, OR PLUPERFECT MIDI» 
 
 The Second Pluperfect is formed from the Second 
 
 * Jy*e#v from fciu, ii poetic. 
 
 8 
 
 \ 
 
£6 Verbs — Formation of the Tenses in the Passive Voice. 
 
 Perfect by changing α into 6*v e and prefixing the aug- 
 ment ; as, τέτυπα, ετετύπ . 
 
 FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN THE PASSIVE VOICE. 
 PRESENT. 
 
 The Present is formed from the Present Active by 
 changing ω into ομαι ; as, τύ«7τ7ω, τϋ#7ομαι. 
 
 s and ο are sometimes omitted ; as, οίμαι for οΤομαι ; λ*7αι 
 for λέε7αι. 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 The Imperfect is formed from the Present, by chang- 
 ing μαι into μην, and prefixing the augment ; as, τύπΊομω, 
 εΊυπΊόμψ. 
 
 ε and ο are sometimes omitted ; as, ελ*7ο for ελ£ε7ο ; ωμην 
 for ω ο μην. 
 
 PERFECT. 
 
 The Perfect is formed from the Perfect Active, by 
 changing the last syllable into μαι ; as, <rsVsp<pa, τετερ•μαι. 
 
 The following slight changes are made for the sake of 
 harmony. 
 
 1. When φα is preceded by a vowel, μ is doubled ; as, 
 TsVu -φα, τετυμ-μαι. 
 
 2. When κα is preceded by χ, that letter is changed into 
 μ ; as, «ττε'φαχ-κα, #εφαμ-μαι. 
 
 3. χα of the Active is changed into ^μαι ; as, λ'λε-χα, 
 λελε^-μαι ; unless it is preceded by γ. 
 
 4. Verbs which have tf in the First Future Active, retain 
 the <f before μαι ; as, ?τλή$ω, «ττλήα'ω, «τε^λη-κα, ίτ^νλη-^μαι ; 
 but in verbs in ω pure, if the penult of the Future be long, 
 tf is omitted ; as, #οιεω, ^οιήα'ω, ^ε^το/η-μαι.* 
 
 The following, however, with a long penult retain jthe <j\ 
 ακούω, yvow, Spauw, κελεύω, #εύω, «τταίω, <^ταίω, £αίω, όθ'ιω, 
 χόω. 
 
 5. From verbs in νω, the Attics frequently form the Per- 
 fect in α'μαι ; as, μιαίνω, μεμ/α^μαι. 
 
 6. Dissyllables that have τρε in the penult of the Perfect 
 
 * Also, όρ<ίω, and a number #f • there wheee penult is snort er 
 doubtful. 
 
Verbs — Formation of the Tenses in the Passive Voice. 87 
 
 Active, change ε into α in the Perfect Passive ; as, τ, 
 τ γράμμα ι. 
 
 7. Verbs which in the Perfect Active change β into o, 
 resume the ε in the Perfect Passive j - κεκλοφα, 
 κεκλεμμαι . 
 
 8. Some verbs which have su in the penult of the Per- 
 fect Active, reject the ε ; as> irs'sfcuxo, jrHtixfpaj 
 S(f(f\nuat. 
 
 On the second and third Persons of the Perfect. 
 The second and third persons singular of the Perfect 
 Passive are formed from the Perfect Active, by changing 
 α into <foa and ται ; as, 
 
 τνΰίΐω, <τε'7υφα, «τέΤϋμμοη, τεΊυφ-σΌη, c /Ιυφ-ται, 
 which become τετυψαι, rtfWfcu, 
 
 by placing the double consonant ψ for φο\ and changing the 
 rough mute φ into its cognate smooth one.* 
 
 Xsyw, λελεχ-α, λε'λενμαι, λε'λεχ -tfai, λε'λεχ-τα*. 
 λελεξαι, XsXsxlat. 
 
 Verbs whose Perfect Active ends in χα, drop the κ ; as, 
 λόω, λελυ-κα, λε'λυμαι, λελυ-σ'αι, λελυ-ται. Φαίνω, «ττε'φα^κα, 
 ^φαμμαι, ιτε'φαν-α'αι,ΐ 9τε'φαν-«•αι. But when the first person 
 is in tffjwxi, the third is in dim ; as, ιτλή^ω. ^ε'ζζλτι-κα,'π'ε'δϊληα'- 
 μαι, ΑΤεατλη^αι, tfraXyjtflai. 
 
 The first person dunl and plural is formed from the 
 person singular by changing μαι into με^ον, με$α ; as, 
 «τείιιμμαι, τε^μ-με^ον, τετύμ με^α. 
 
 The second and third persons dual are formed from the 
 
 tlfird person singular, by chan^ino; rai into Sov, and the pre- 
 
 roooth mute into il ate roiurh one ;j as, τβΊυπτ- 
 
 •τα», τιΊοψ-%ο\> ; λε'λεκ ται, λελεχ -Sov. If ται is preceded by a 
 
 vowel, (7 is in before Sov ; as, λελυται, λε'λυ -tfSov. 
 
 The second person plural is formed from the second per- 
 son dual, by changing 0ov into ί)ε ; as, τε'7υφ0ον, . λ£. 
 λεχ-^ον, λελεχ -us. 
 
 The third person plural is regularly formed by inserting 
 ν before ται, of the third ; singular : as, λίλυ-ται, λ*'- 
 
 λυν -cco. Put if a consonant precede the «ται, the Participle 
 with tiie V r erb sfri is used ; as, <ri7;/#-<rai, τε7υμμενοι ε/αΥ. 
 
 * See rule i. jvp 
 
 t In the Perfect Active, ν before * was changed into y ; it is here 
 restored. 
 
83 
 
 Verbs — Formation of the Tenses in the Passive Voice 
 
 The Perfect of the Imperative is formed from that of the 
 Indicative, by changing αι into ο ; as, «τετυψα*, τέτυψο; and 
 ται into ύω, with the preceding smooth mute into its cog- 
 nate rough one ;* as, τέΊυΉ-<ται $ τεΊνφ-ύω. But if a vowel 
 precedes ται, tf is inserted ; as, τετιμήσ^ω. 
 
 When μαι of the Perfect Indicative is preceded by a vow- 
 el, it is changed into μην, to form the Perfect Optative ; 
 and if the preceding vowel be η or ω, ι is subscribed ; if 
 not, it is annexed ; as, ττεφίλημαι, ^εφίΧ^μην ; σ"ε5ήλωμαι, $s- 
 <$^-λωμην ; £έ$ομαι, δεδοίμψ. But when μαι is preceded by 
 a consonant, or a diphthong which has υ in it, the Perfect 
 Participle is used with είην ; as, λέλεχμαι, "Κελεγμενος ε'/ην. 
 
 The Perfect of the Subjunctive is formed from that of 
 the Indicative, when μαι is preceded by a vowel, by chang- 
 ing that vowei into c•* ; as, έΥ7αμαι, Ισούμαι. When μαι is 
 preceded by a consonant, or a diphthong containing υ, the 
 Perfect Participle with the verb ω is used ; as, ΧεΧεγμενος 
 ω, Js, y\. 
 
 Tfte Perfect of the Infinitive is formed from the second 
 person plural of the Indicative Perfect» by changing ε into 
 αι ; as, τέΊυφύε, τε7:-φ^-αι. These changes will be more fully 
 illustrated by the following table. 
 
 SYNOPSIS OF VERBS IN THE PERFECT PASSIVE. 
 
 Part. 
 
 Indie. 
 
 imp. 
 
 Optat. 
 
 Subj. 
 
 Infin 
 
 τενυμμαι ) 
 
 -ψο 
 
 -μμένος, εΤήν 
 
 -μμένος, ω 
 
 -φ$αι 
 
 τε'τερ-μαι $ 
 
 
 -μένος, είην 
 
 •μένος, ώ^ 
 
 
 λελε^-μαι 
 
 -& 
 
 -^με'νος, ε'/ην 
 
 --νμενο^, ώ 
 
 -χΑαι 
 
 *τ4#δΐ-<Τμ«αι 
 
 -Co 
 
 ~ΰ μένος, eiijv 
 
 -0\a='vo£, ώ 
 
 -tf^ai 
 
 «ττε^οΐ-ημαι 
 
 -η0Ό 
 
 -ημην 
 
 -ωμαι 
 
 -ήσ$αι 
 
 δεδηΧ-ωμαι 
 
 -ω<τΌ 
 
 -ωμην 
 
 -ωμαι 
 
 -ώιΤ#αι 
 
 §ν<ταλ-μ«ι ) 
 
 -σΌ 
 
 -μένος, ει'ην 
 
 -μένος, ώ 
 
 -0αι 
 
 sWap -μαι ) 
 
 
 
 
 
 ίτεφα-μμαι 
 
 -vtfo 
 
 -μμενο£, εΊ'ην 
 
 -μμενος, ώ 
 
 -ν0αι 
 
 -μμενος 
 
 -μενΓ£ 
 
 -7με'νο£ 
 
 -ό μένος 
 
 -ημενος 
 
 ■ ωμενος 
 
 -μένος 
 
 -μμενος 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 The Pluperfect is formed from the Perfect by chang- 
 ing μαι into μην, and prefixing the augment, when the 
 Perfect begins with a consonant ; as, τε7υμμαι, ετεΊύμ- 
 
 μην. 
 
 The second and third persons of the Pluperfect are 
 
 ^ The smooth mute is roughened beftre $, by r*le i. page 4. 
 
Verbs — Formation of the Tenses in the Passive Voice. 89 
 
 formed from those of the Perfect, by changing ou into o, and 
 J<Vi into r}<fav. 
 
 3d Sing. 
 
 ετετιτο, 
 
 λελεχται, 
 
 ελελεκτο, 
 
 2d Sing. 
 Perf. rufeUf 
 
 Pluperf. sVs>i<ro, 
 Perf. λ^λεξαι, 
 
 Pluperf. έλέλεξο, 
 
 3d Plur. 
 rirmcu, 
 
 εΥε'τιντο. 
 λελε^μενοι είαϊ. 
 λελε^μενοι ήίίαν. 
 
 PAULO-POST FUTURE. 
 
 The Paulo-post Future is formed from the second 
 person singular of the Perfect Passive, by changing αι 
 into ομαι ; as, τε'τυμμαι,τ^υψ-αι, τε7<;ψ-ομαι. 
 
 FIRST AORIST. 
 
 The First ^Aorist is formed from the third person 
 singular of the Perfect, by changing ται into όψ, and 
 the preceding smooth mute into its cognate rough 
 one ;* dropping the first letter, if it is a consonant; as, 
 
 Exception 1. Those verbs which change ε into α in the 
 Perfect Passive, in this tense resume the ε ; as, Ι'οΐραμμαι, 
 ί<τ7ρέφ$ην. 
 
 2. Those which drop ν in the Perfect, have it restored 
 in this Tense by the Poets ; as, έχλίνβην for ίκλί^ην. 
 
 3. εμνή^ην, from με'μνη7α<, 
 
 έο'ώόην, 
 εύρέόψ, 
 
 έ'||ω7αι, 
 ύέύωύΐαι, 
 
 εί>ρη7αι, 
 
 >ίρη7αι, 
 
 §'(Τχη7αι, 
 
 assume <f. 
 drops α 1 . 
 
 change η into ε. 
 
 FIRST FUTURE. 
 
 The First Future is formed from the third person 
 singular of the First Aorist, by adding οΌμαι, and casting 
 off the augment ; as, έ7ύφ0η, τυφβήοΌμαι. 
 
 * For the reason of this change, sec rule i. page 4* 
 
 8* 
 
90 Verbs — Formation of the Tenses in the Middle Yoicei 
 
 SECOND AORIST. 
 
 The Second Aorist is formed from the Second Ao- 
 rist Active, by changing ov into ψ ; as, s'Wov, ε7ό*ην. 
 
 SECOND FUTURE. φ 
 
 The Second Future is formed from the Second Ao- 
 rist, by changing ην into ήοΌμαι, and rejecting the aug- 
 ment ; as, ε<π;#-ην 5 <Γυ#-ήαΌμ α '• 
 
 FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN THE MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 PRESENT AND IMPERFECT. 
 
 The Present and Imperfect are the same as in the 
 Passive. 
 
 FIRST FUTURE. 
 
 The First Future is formed from the First Future 
 Active, by changing ω into ομαι ; as, <τόψω, τυψομαι ; but 
 in liquid verbs, into *μαι ;* as, (frsku, (Ττελέμαι. 
 
 SECOND FUTURE. 
 
 The Second Future is formed from the Second Fu- 
 ture Active, by changing ώ into 2μαι ; as, τυτω, ru*Sjxoii 
 
 Πίνω. φάγω', and Ιίω, have the Second Future in ομα».| 
 But these are thought to be the Present used for the Fu- 
 ture. To these add the poetic Futures βύομ,Μ and νέομαι 
 by crasis νευμαι. 
 
 FIRST AORIST. 
 
 The First Aorist is formed from the First Aorist Ac- 
 tive, by adding μην ; as, efc -υψα, ίτυψάμην. 
 
 Verbs in ω pure have this tense often syncopated ; as, 
 ζυοόφ,ψ for εύρηα'άμην, ώνάμηνίοΓ ώνησ'άμην. 
 
 * Also those verbs from which c has been dropped fcy the Attics ; 
 
 S, κομιω, κομι$μαί. 
 t Declined thus : φάγ•ομαι, -«σαί, -fret. 
 
I !>$ in μι. 01 
 
 SECOND AORIST. 
 
 The Second Aorist is formed from the Second Ao- 
 rist Active, by changing ov into ομην 
 
 VERBS IN μ». 
 
 Verbs in μι are formed from Verbs in αω, **>, οω, and 
 
 to : 
 
 There are very few Verbs of this class, and th< 
 in most cases, take their peculiar form, only in single Ten- 
 ses. They were chiefly used in the iEolic and Doric dia- 
 lects. 
 
 T. Change ω into μι ; and lengthen the penult in the 
 singular.* 
 
 II. Prefix the Reduplication. 
 
 The Reduplication is proper or improper. 
 
 Proper, when the first consonant of the Present Tense 
 is repeated with ι ; as, <5οω, δίίωμι. If the first consonant 
 is a rough mute, it is changed into its cognate smooth onet; 
 as, dsw, π'βημι. 
 
 Improper, when a rough ι only is prefixed, which hap- 
 pens to Verbs beginning with tfr, Λ, or a vowel ; as. dlau, 
 ;.». Thus, from Λέω, is formed ϊβΐ^μι ; frorr 4έω, is 
 formed rid η μι ; from δόω, is formed όίδωμι ; from ίδικνύω, is 
 formed Ssixvvpd, 
 
 ^erbs in μι have but three Tenses of that form, the Pre- 
 sent, Imperfect, and Second Aorist. They take the other 
 Tenses from Verbs in ω, from which they are derived. 
 
 Many want the Reduplication, particularly all Verbs in 
 υμι ; which want, likewise, the Second Aoristf and the Op- 
 tative and Subjunctive Moods. 
 
 1. The Poets and .Eolics change many Contract verbs 
 into verbs in μι, but without the Reduplication ; as, γ~\άω, 
 μι. Sometimes they repeat the initial letters : as, 
 άλάω, άλάλημι. In the Ionic and Boeotic dialects, the Re- 
 duplication is made by e ; as. _ : σ~ αι. 
 
 To the common Reduplication, μ is sometimes added; 
 
 * In the Second Aorist, the penult of the dual and plural is 
 lengthened, in all verbs, but τίΟημ^ΐημ^ δώωμι. 
 
 f By rule ii. page 4. 
 
 j Dissyllables in υμι have a Second Aorist, but it is the same 
 with the Imperfect. 
 
92 Verbs in μι. 
 
 as. #λάω, 9τίμ*λημι. A syncope sometimes lakes place ; 
 as, τέτλημι from ταλάω. The Reduplication is sometimes 
 in the Middle ; as, όνέω, όνίνημι. 
 
 3. Barytons sometimes become Verbs in μι ; as. /3ρί0ημι 
 from βρίύω. But in such instances, the Verb in μι seemi 
 to be formed from a Contract Verb derived fropi the Bary- 
 ton : thus, βρίύημι is from βριΜω, derived from βρίβω. 
 
 FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN THE ACTIVE VOICE. 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 The Imperfect is formed from the Present, by chang- 
 ing fu into v, and prefixing the augment except when 
 the Verb begins with ι ; as, ς-Μημι, έτί&ψ ; ϊ<τ7ημι, ϊ<τ7ην. 
 
 SECOND AORIST. 
 
 The Second Aorist is formed from the Imperfect, by 
 casting off the Reduplication, and taking the augment ; 
 
 as. ετίί)ην, Ur\v ; ί'ο^ην, |'(Γ7ην. 
 
 When the Verb has no Reduplication, the Second Ao- 
 rist is the same with the Imperfect in the singular number, 
 and in some Verbs in the other numbers. 
 
 FIRST FUTURE. 
 
 The First Future has sometimes a Reduplication ; as, 
 
 FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN THE PASSIVE VOICE. 
 PRESENT. 
 
 The Present is formed from the Present Active, by 
 changing μι into μαι, and shortening the penult ; as, 
 
 ί'(Τ7'/)μι, ϊσίαμαι ; τΜημι, τΜεμαι. 
 
 The following do not shorten the penult, ήμαι, αημα/, 
 άκάχημα;, άλάλημαι, άλαλυκ7ημαι, 5ί£ημαι, ονημαι. The last, 
 however, sometimes shortens the penult. 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 The Imperfect is formed from the Present, by chang- 
 ing μαι into μην, and prefixing the augment, except when 
 
Notes on Verbs in μι 93 
 
 the verb begins with ι ; us, τί^μα», ίηίί'μην ; Μαμω, ί<Λά- 
 μην. 
 
 PERFECT. 
 
 The long penult of the Perfect Active is shortened in 
 the Passive ; as, SiSyxaL, δέομαι ; είμαι and rsusipzi arc ex- 
 ceptions. 
 
 FORMATION OF THE TENSES IN THE MIDDLE VOICE. 
 TRESENT AND IMPERFECT. 
 
 The Present and Imperfect are the same with those 
 of the Passive. 
 
 SECOND AORIST. 
 
 The Second Aorist is formed from the Imperfect by 
 casting otf the Reduplication ; as, fol£f*nv, ε^'μην. 
 
 NOTES ON VERBS IN μ/. 
 
 1. In Ionic and Doric writers, these verbs often 
 occur in the Present and imperfect with the Redupli- 
 cation, and the contracted form ; as, i'tfr-wv ας-α ; gVin- 
 6eig, διόοΐζ, &c. Verbs in υμι are sometimes declined by the 
 Attics as if from υω. 
 
 2. In the third person plural of the Present Active, satf/, 
 ta<fi, and uacfi are frequently used. 
 
 3. In the Active Voice the Optative Present and Second 
 Aorist have more common'y in the plural ειμίν, sits, nsv ; 
 αιμεν, airs, atsv ; οιμεν, οιτε, οιεν. 
 
 4. The verb ί'<Τημι, '/(Γημαι, is frequently found with an 
 epenthesis of τ ; as, sOfi<f<ravro for sVitfavro. 
 
 5. The verb τίόημι, ί'ημ<, <5ίδωμι, have a form of the First 
 Aorist, peculiar to themselves ; as, =0ηκα, ?χα, έΰωκα, which 
 must be distinguished from the Perfect. 
 
 5. "1<τ•τημι, in the Perfect, Pluperfect, and Second Ao- 
 rist, has an intransitive signification, " to stand ;" in the 
 other tenses, a transitive one, "to place. 11 The Passive 
 has throughout, the meaning, *« to be placed,' 1 and the Mid- 
 dle, u to place one's self. 11 
 
 6. Verbs in μι, even in the Present and Imperfect, are 
 frequently declined like Contract Verbs from which they 
 are derived. 
 

 94 
 
 Ο» 
 
 
 ο 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 3_ 
 
 
 -25 
 
 
 fc. 
 
 
 \3 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 <ο 
 
 
 \3 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ο 
 
 ρ 
 
 — -^ 
 
 Γ- 
 
 c— IS 
 
 ι* 
 
 m 
 
 ϊν 
 
 I 
 
 ;> 
 
 
 ' ο 
 
 ω 
 
 ^ 
 
 \3 
 
 Ι ι? 
 
 IS' 
 
 ο ο 
 
 1 
 8 
 
 ^ - 
 
 «3D 
 
 *? = 5 - 
 
 r* 
 
 ί ^ 
 
 -3 
 
 | 
 
 \- • 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 5^ 
 
 
 
 <=: 
 
 
 Ο \3 
 
 .> 
 
 ,c~- - „ 
 
 
 '3 ? 
 
 I 
 
 Ι =* 
 
 
 • ο 
 
 
 *35 
 
 
 -Ο ,\3 
 
 \3 
 
 Τ τ 
 
 8 
 
 | 
 
 => S 
 
 « 
 
 ^" *2j 
 
 <r> 
 
 -*. to 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 ι ? 
 
 8 
 
 t • 
 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 > 
 
 ^ > 
 
 a 
 
 ο 3 
 
 v^ 
 
 
 3 
 
 ο 
 
 ο 
 
 *tf 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 «o 
 
 ~s >D 
 
 <c 
 
 
 te 
 
 b. i 
 
 -8 
 
 * 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 ^ 5=" 
 
 
 9 >3 
 
 c — 
 
 £ 
 
 1 -« 
 
 8 
 
 | 
 
 ο ■> 
 
 
 \3 Ο 
 
 
 «^ 
 
 \3 
 
 1 β 
 
 S 
 
 > : 
 
 1 
 
 5^ £ 
 
 j ° 
 
 8 
 
 <C5 
 
 τ I 
 
 3. 
 
 ί ~* 
 
 ~8 
 
 >=> 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 Λ 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 Ό 
 
 
 
 

 PL, 
 
 
 
 4. 
 
 *— 
 m 
 
 > Ο 
 
 So 
 
 ο 
 
 Β 
 
 ι ι ι 
 
 Χ 1 1 
 
 » 
 
 .? *s ^ 
 
 «■ο Co "/Π 
 
 ι 1 ι 
 
 if & S" 
 
 U» <£ "HO 
 
 
 
 
 -> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ϋ 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 > 
 
 b 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 'λ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ι- 
 
 V- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Μη 
 
 Ι 
 
 | 
 
 
 U 
 
 
 ι- 
 Ο 
 
 -> 
 
 
 
 
 '£ 
 
 
 CX 
 
 
 
 
 
 ζί 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 χ 
 
 
 
 
 ο 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 — 
 
 !- 
 
 ν- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 U» 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 «ο 
 Ι 
 
 tjfa 
 
 Ι 
 
 
 f 
 
 ι.- 
 
 us 
 
 ρ* 
 
 u 
 
 | 
 
 > 
 
 ο 
 J 
 
 
 s- 
 
 > 
 
 •υ 
 
 <.c 
 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 Ι 
 
 
 Γ τ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 « — 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 ι 
 
 > 
 
 Ρ" 
 
 Ι 
 
 
 tn 
 
 i 
 
 
 L 
 
 Q 
 
 Οι 
 
 '/ 
 
 = 
 
 -^— 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 b 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■~ 
 
 
 
 Β 
 
 
 
 
 Ρη 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 u> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *Zj 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 .-» 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 b 
 
 
 'sr. 
 
 
 <S 
 
 
 <o 
 
 
 -i. 
 
 
 
 -^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 «»r. 
 
 »- 
 
 fcr 
 
 
 <R\ 
 
 ,s~ 
 
 ί p. 
 
 
 «Φ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 >3 
 
 
 »a 
 
 
 <x> 
 
 
 «B 
 
 
 
 ■> 
 
 r» 
 
 
 
 v 
 
 Μ 
 
 
 s~ 
 
 
 v- 
 
 
 «JO 
 
 
 P 
 
 
 -«52 
 
 U) 
 
 — 
 
 
 1 
 
 | 
 
 
 
 
 :> 
 
 I 
 
 > 
 
 
 Ο 
 
 b> 
 
 
 :~ 
 
 s• 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 us 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 « 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 
 ± 
 
 
 F- 
 
 
 Ρ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 U3 
 
 
 Uj 
 
 
 *^> 
 
 
 -z. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 tr 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 • 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 ! 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -=o 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^• 
 
 
 
 
 α 
 
 υ< 
 
 
 'Λ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -Ο 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 Ρ 
 
 « 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 b 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 ό 
 
 
 VJi 
 
 ι- 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 'IJ 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 j 
 
 
 a. 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 ο 
 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fe; 
 
 3 3 £ 
 
 «jo to u. 
 
 «; b 
 
 
 55 
 
 C [ ι 
 
 
 
 Β 
 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 Λ 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -» 
 e 
 
 s 
 
 e 
 
 43 
 
 K- 
 
 δ v= 
 
 »3 
 
 
 .>; 
 
 J ? 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 „ 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 Λ 
 
 Λ 
 
 a 
 
 to 
 
 to 
 
 IIS! 
 
 
 
 < r : 
 
 en 
 
 <K 
 
 
 ο 
 
 
 13 
 
 «JO «JU 
 
 1 
 
 :L 
 
 r> 
 
 
 
 <i 
 
 43 
 
 ^; 
 
 Λ 
 
 ρ 
 
 ^ 
 
 E4»JE 
 
 Ο to 
 
 u> ω to 
 
 λ <n ot 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
96 
 
 ! 
 
 «J 
 
 Ρ- 
 
 ε 
 
 S 
 
 3. 
 ft 
 
 η 
 
 
 I 
 
 t^ to 
 J3- l 3 ?3 
 
 I i I 
 
 «3 4. 
 
 4 ' 
 
 Γ τ 
 
 
 s 
 
 §s 
 
 t2 
 
 Τ r Τ 
 
 t5 
 
 x!OQ 
 
 ! *λ 
 
 
 »3-ϊ3 i3 
 
 ^o *o *o 
 
 >3^3 i3 
 
 ?3 
 
 — f^ to 
 
 ο Ό J§ 
 <Ό K3 Ό 
 
 «J 
 
 
 3 , 
 I 
 
 r/) Ο Ph 
 
 J3 
 
 Ξ to 
 3 3 
 
 ai 
 
 F to 
 
 Ο 
 
 < 
 
 3. 
 
 s< 2^ 
 
 *3 13 13 
 
 δ ο 8 
 
 l ? §.3. 
 
 Ό v 3 <3 
 
 Η 
 
 ; if? 8 
 ' to «5 
 
 Ο ο ο•> 
 
 I ? ? 
 
 s_<n <n 
 ο 2 3 
 
 § ! ' 
 
 •χ £- 
 
 
 to >+} d7 
 « v. to 
 
 ζ ό ft 
 
 α, 
 Ε 
 
 8 
 <n 
 
 to 
 
 o 8 
 
 ■CJ} C — 
 
 j u» u> 
 
 *»5 ^-> v -2 
 
 :€cf 
 
 .5 ft ft 
 
 ^~ 
 
 -o 
 
 Ό 
 
 Ο 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 > 
 
 ο 
 
 ^7 
 
 8 
 01 
 
 s 
 
 v- 
 
 U3 
 
 s- 
 
 5. 
 
 Γ^ 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 -c 
 
 1 - 
 
 * 
 
 ID 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 . 8 
 
 • 3 3 "to 
 Id? d? 3 
 
 j to to d7 
 
 !^ό -ο 
 
 GT ^ 
 
 ; *© ^ w 
 
 o"d7 d? 
 >D >= to 
 
 d7 ι 
 
 1 1 1 J 
 
 ο 
 
 c^ & 
 
 to 
 
 to 
 
 to 
 
 ο 
 
 1 
 
 ο 
 ! 
 
 =» 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 p 
 
 
 £ 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 en <n 
 
 in 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 6 
 < 
 
 -3 
 
rOUBTH COIUTOATION 09 VERBS IN μι. 
 
 9.7 
 
 indie. 
 
 Pr. 18. ζίύγν-υμι-υς-ϋΛ 
 
 D. -υτον-υ7ον 
 
 'P. -υμεν-υτε-υ(ΤΊ 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 Imper. 
 
 Tnfin. | Part. 
 
 ■ 
 
 -υ7ον-^7ων 
 -ure-iVw<fav 
 
 ζευ/νύ 
 
 
 Im. IS. ίζε^ν-υν-υ^-υ |ϋ.ε£εύ7ν-υτον-^την[Ρ.ε£ε^ν-υμεν-υτε-υ<ίαν 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 Pr. 
 
 S . ζεΰγ v-ufAai-u(fai-u7ai 
 D.-t^Sov-uO'Sov-ufl'Sov 
 Ρ.-υμώα-ι - 
 
 8.ε£εϋχν-ΐ;μην-υ0Ό-υτο 
 
 ζξίγν-υύο-ίύ&ω ζείγνι*-: .αενο£ 
 
 -υο'^ε-ύα'^ωΰ'αν 
 D.t^Sov-utfSov-utfS'rjvjP ίμεΛα-ι,(?(3ε-υν7* 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS IN μι, FROM ΈΩ, 'ΕΩ, ΊΩ. 
 
 "ίημι, I send, from 'ΕΩ. 
 
 Indicative, 
 
 Pres. Γημί, ίη£, <Vi, 
 Imp. ίην, nrj^, ίη, 
 2dAo.^v, ης, rj, 
 lstF.fyfw, 1st Ao. ψα, 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Pres. Μι, (ίει,) ίε'τω, 
 SdAo.fc, έΥω, 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Pres. 1εί-ην -η£ -η 
 2d Αο.εί'-ην -ης -η 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Pres. ioj, Kip, ivj, 
 2d Ao υ, ifc, if, 
 Infin. Pres. I&ai. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 iV7ov, ϊ'ε7ον, 
 Ί'ε7ον, ιε7ην, 
 ε7ον, ε 7η ν, 
 Ρ erf. είχα, 
 
 ίε7ον, ίε'7ων, 
 έ7ον, έΐων, 
 
 -η7ον -ή7ην 
 -η7ον -ή7ην 
 
 ίηίον, ίη7ον, 
 ή7ον, η7ον, 
 2d Αο. εΓναι. 
 
 Active. 
 
 Plural. 
 ί'εμεν, ί'ετε, ιασΊ, bfift. 
 
 ί'ίμεν, ί'ετε, ίε<Ταν. 
 εμεν, έτε, έ<Ταν. 
 Pluper. εϊχε»ν. 
 
 ιϊΐωΰαν. 
 ε7ε ? εΊωόαν. 
 
 -ημεν -η;ε -η(ΤΌ<ν. 
 -ημεν -η7ε -η<Ταν. 
 
 Ιωμεν, 17,75, ι ω Λ. 
 &μεν, ^"ε, ωόι. 
 Perl, 1'. It/*, JA.fic 
 
98 
 
 Irregular Verbs in μι. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 PASSIVE AND MIDDLE, 
 
 Pres. ϊε-μαι -tfai -rai 
 Perf ε/-μαι -tfai -<rai 
 1 Αθ.(Μ.)?κά-μτ]ν, ηκω, 
 
 [ηκα7ο. 
 1 Αο.Ρ.έ'^ην or εί'&ην. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 -με^ον -tfSov -tfSov 
 -με^ον -tfSov -tfSov 
 
 -με&ον -tfSov -tf&>jv 
 2dAo.(M.) εμην 
 [or εί'μην. 
 
 -με$α -<f%s -via*, 
 -με^α -tfSs -v7a*. 
 
 -με$α -tf&s -v7o. 
 Part, έ'μενο£. 
 
 2Αο.εαΌ or εο, (*) stf&w^j I'tf^ov, £'β$ων, | ό^ε, gtf&wtfav. 
 Si*&;\ 2d Ao. ΰμαι, η jyrai, &c. Jo/fri. 2d Ao. ε<Τ$αι. 
 
 r H>ai, Jsi£, (I place myself,) from εω. 
 
 The radical word "Εω, in the sense of, J' to place," oc- 
 curs in only a few Tenses ; as, 1st Aor. εΤ<7α ; Part, είόας ; 
 in the Fut. Middle, εϊ'σΌμαι ; 1st Aor. ειίάμην. 
 
 τ Ημαι. which was originally the Perfect Passive from εω, 
 has gained the force of the Present, ημαι, Ζ sit. 
 
 Pres. ή-μαι -dan -<roti 
 Imp. rj -μψ " tfo -™ 
 Imper. Pres. rjtfo, ήσ$ω, 
 Infin. Pres. rj^oa. 
 
 -με$ον -tfSrov -tfSov 
 -με^ον -tfSov -#&ην 
 
 -με^α -σ^ε -ν7αι. 
 -με^α-ο^ε -ντο. 
 
 Par£.Pres.r^vo£. 
 
 Compounds ; as, κά^ημαι, κα^ο^αι, &c. There is a dif- 
 ference between this Verb and καίομαι ; κά^ισΌν from the 
 latter, denotes, seat thyself ; κά^ηοΌ, from κά^ημαι, denotes. 
 remain seated. Matthias. 1.328. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Ειμί, J am, from ΈΩ 
 
 P. ειμί, ε% or εί, εντί, 
 
 -f • ή ν > ?£» (ησ^α)η ΟΓ ην, 
 F. εί-ομαι -η or -ε» -εται 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 εανόν, sVrov, 
 ή7ον, >?7ην, 
 -όμε^ον -εο^ον-εα^ον 
 
 εο'μεν.εσ'τε,ε/νίν, ε/ο"/. 
 ήμεν,ήτε,(η(^7ε,)^αν. 
 -όμε^α -εο^ε -ονται. 
 
 Pres. ϊβ$ι or stfo, έΥ7ω, | gtf7ev ; έΥ?ων, | έΥ7ε, s<flunfav or έΥ7ων. 
 
irregular Verbs in μι. 
 
 
 Optative, 
 
 Pie* " 
 
 Fut. έ<7οί-μην -ο -το 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 J/j /ϊ/ί. Pies, είναι. 
 
 εϊη7ον, είή7ην, 
 
 . -6$ov -tfarjv 
 
 I 
 
 -με'.:α -dCii -ντο. 
 
 ξΐον, ηΐ 
 Fut. frerito. 
 
 r,lc, Ο.'ΟΊ. 
 
 Port. Pres. dv.Fut.&tp 
 
 Some Grammarians add ήμην, Imperf. Middle. 
 Ε?μι, 7^ο, from ΤΩ. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Pres. εΓμι, βζτ, (βί ) s&i. 
 
 Πον, Πον, 
 >;5ΐ7ον 5 η Sf7*|V, 
 
 ί aSv , lie, 
 
 JHfav, 
 
 ί^μεν, jj7e, ^'εσαν. 
 
 1 fifty, > * ? 
 
 Imper. v. r > r,;is ; 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Pres. ϊδι, (εί) Πω, | Πον, ί'7ων, j ϊ7δ, Hwrfav, ϊον7ω* 
 
 Optative. 
 
 Pres. ιοιμι, ιοι^, id, 
 Stift/. Pres. ϊω, ιτ£, itj, 
 Jn/£ft. Pres. leva*. 
 
 7οι7ον, ιοΠην, 
 
 ν, ιη/ον, 
 
 Part. Pres. ιών. 
 
 ιοιμεν, ioi/s, ιοιεν. 
 ί'ωμεν, ϊη7$, ϊωΰΊ. 
 
 MIDDLE VOICE. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Pres. ί;-μαι -tfai -ται j -με^ον -cSov -tf^ov 
 I in. ίε'-μην -ΟΌ -το | -με.^ον -σΓιον -(fSrjv 
 
 •ί:: -ν7αι. 
 -C^i -v7o. 
 
 The Present Tense, Ειμί, is used for the Future, / will 
 go. This Verb, in the Middle Voice, signifies, to hasten. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Φημί, / say, from Φάω. 
 
 Pres. φημί, ©;/]£> φ^» 
 
 Imp. ; (-/]<7;}α)-η 
 
 ,φο&ί, <ρά7ω, 
 5 
 
 
 -a-rov, -ατην 
 φάτον, φάτων, 
 
 •», γ;τ••. τ/ι, ^ί*« OV, /-70V, 
 
 Pres. φάναι. 2 Λ. Mid. $arftai.Parf. Pres. φα;. Μ. φα 
 F.Fut.qr/jaV. 1 ΛοΓ.ώφηα'α. Opt.V.yai, 
 
 φαμ: 
 
 -αμεν -are -aflfav. 
 
 φάτε, φάτωο^αν. 
 
100 Anomalous Verbs. 
 
 The Infinitive φάναι, is used in the sense of past time; 
 ?v, r t g, '?,^are often used for εφ-ην, ε'φ-η;, Ι'φ-η ; as, ην δ' ε^ώ, 
 ^αιΤΖ J; η δ' ο£, ««ia* Λβ. ήμι is used for φημί, and #ε'φα#ται$ 
 ■^εφασται, ιϊεφά&ω, occur in the Perfect Passive. 
 
 /ΚεΓμαι, /Zie down, from χεω. 
 
 Pres. κεΓ-μαι -<fai -ται 
 Imp. έκεί-μην -Co -το 
 Imper. Pres. χεΓ-αΌ-σθο 
 Ορ^.ΡΓββ.κεοί-μην-ο-το. 
 /n/in. χεΓ<τ&αι. 
 
 Pi. χεΜαι. j IstFut. κείτομαι -η -εται. 
 
 με^α -tfSr* -ντο. 
 
 -με^ον -tf<3ov -(Γ^ην 
 tfSov -tfSwv 
 Subj. Pres. κε'-ωμαι -η -ηται 
 Pari. Pres. κείμενος. 
 
 Compounds ; κατάκειμαι ; κατακεΓβ^αι,&ο. 
 
 "Εννυμ», I dress myself, from "Εω. 
 
 This Verb is a derivative from εω, I put on, and in its 
 simple form is used in poetry only, and in the following 
 tenses. Fut. i'tfoj, sWoj ; 1st Aor. £Wa ; Mid. Ισ'α'άμην ; /λ- 
 ^m. £'tfai ; Perf. Pas. είμαι and ε'(Τμοα. The compound 
 άμφιεννυμι, occurs in prose writers ; Fut. άμφιεσΌμαι ; Attic, 
 άμφ»ω, (from άμφιέόω ;) 1st Aor. ήμφίειΤα; Perf. Pass, ήμφ/ει- 
 μαι, or ήμφίεα'μαι. 
 
 Ο; δα, J know, from ε/ίω ; J ftnow• 
 Indicative. 
 
 p erf ' £ S.oftk, oftfSra, οΓδε. D.iVtov, "στον. P. ϊ^μεν. [Ion. Ϊ5- 
 res ' * μεν,] fors, ' tfarii. 
 
 T U P' > S. |?δειν, '/]<5εΐ5, γδει&α, ffisi. P. $£ειμεν, or ^μεν, ίίειτε,• 
 
 Ρ* ^ [or ;ίστε. r^ferav, or ijVav. 
 
 Imper. Perf. & Pres. S. i'tfSi, ϊοτω. D. iVtov, ί'<Ττων. P. /'στε, 
 
 ['/flrwtfav. 
 Fut. ε'/οΌμαι or εϊδτ^ω. Opt Perf. & Pres. είίείην. 
 £ta&;°. Pres. .& P. ειίώ. //i/fri. Pres. & P. είδύναι. Part, είδως. 
 
 PEFECTIVE OR ANOMALOUS VERBS. 
 
 A great number of verbs in Greek are used onk in a part 
 •f the Tenses. The Tenses which are wanting are sup- 
 
Anomalous Verbs. 1Θ1 
 
 plied either from similar verba derived from the same root ; 
 or from others of tli(> same signification, though entirely dif- 
 ferent in form.* The cause of these different for 
 be found chiefly in the strict regard to Euphony, which so 
 much controlled the Greek language. The following are 
 among the changes adopted to secure this object. 
 
 I. The radical syllable was lengthened by inserting a 
 consonant, or lengthening the vowel ; as, τέμνω for <r 
 Ια^ομαι for έπομαι ; καίω for κάω ; λή/3ω for λάβω, &c. 
 
 II. The termination was lengthened ; as, 
 
 1. Into αω, εω, οω, υω, εινω ; as, μυκάω from μ^κω ; rwrVu 
 from rotfTu), Lc. 
 
 2. Ιηίοσχω, ανω, α^ω, »^ω, υ$ω ; as, φάα'κω from φάω ; yi- 
 νώο'χω from ^νόω ; λαμβάνω from λάμ/3ω, from λή/3ω ; διωκά- 
 $ω from διώχω. &c. 
 
 III. A reduplication was used ; as, γιγνωύχω, βι,βρώίΤκω, 
 τί^ημι, from γνόω, βρόω, Ss'gj. 
 
 IV. Sometimes new forms of the Present were derived 
 from other Tenses ; as, δεδοίχω from <5ε5οικα from δείδω. 
 
 The verbs thus formed were rarely used except in the 
 Present and Imperfect Tenses. Where other Tenses were 
 supplied, they are given in the following list, with the rooti 
 
 om which they are derived. Those verbs which borrow 
 n o Tenses from other verbs, are not given. 
 
 A. 
 
 Used in Obsolete 
 
 Pres.& Im. Roots. Tenses from Obs. Roots. 
 
 To ad- "Α^αμαι, ά^άω, ay άγομαι, ν^αούμην, τ^α^μαι, 
 . mire % γγάΰότην. 
 
 break, Άγνύω, ) άγω, σ.ξω, η£α, ηχα, ηγον. 
 
 "Α/νυμι, $ εα|α, εαχα, ίαΓον, έά^ην, Ια;, α . 
 
 To lcad> "Αγω, ί 
 
 «£ ω > / άχά^ω, ^'yayov, ή^α^ομην. 
 
 5 χα> Ι 
 
 please, "Αδω, ί άδέω, άδ/^ω, ήδηκα, ηδον and Ι'αδον, 
 Άνδάνω, $ έ'αδα. 
 
 * The same was the case with some Latin Verbs, as fcroi which 
 borrowed its Perfect and Supine from obsolete verbs. 
 
 9* 
 
102 Anomalous Verbs. 
 
 Used in Obsolete 
 
 Pres.& Tm. Roots. Tenses from Obs. Roots. 
 
 take, Αιρεω, ) t/ . «. <_ , ,. « 4 _ „ 
 
 « γ ' ί ε/λάμην. 
 
 perceive, Αίο^άνομαι,αίο^ε'ω, αίοΊήοΌμάι, ^(ΐόημαι, ήσ'όόμην. 
 increase, Ά\δ αινώ. ) ,.*. ,.^, ,,ί 
 
 'Αλί' λ* 4 αλοεω, aAoyjtfcjj ^λοηκα. 
 
 vardoffSAXsfr, ' J **Φ «λε|άμην. 
 
 - •"' b ' $ αλεξεω, αλεξτ^ω. 
 έ /tuft, Άλε'ομαι, άλεύω, -ξλευα'α, ήλευάμην and ήλεάμην, 
 
 by Syncope. 
 roZZ, Άλινδε'ω, αλί ω άλίίΤω, ^λικα. 
 * 2*/» f Αλν• ^ άλοω, άλώ-ίΤω, αΌμαι, ηλωο'α, ηλωκα & 
 ' $ εάλωκα, ηλωμαι, ήλων &, εάλων. 
 
 ^/ΪΛίΖ owi, Άλφαίνω, άλφεω, άλφήό'ω. 
 
 SW, Άμαρτάνω, άμαρτε'ω, αμαρτή-α'ω, βΌμαι, ^μάρτη-^α, 
 
 κα, μαι, ημαρτον, Poet, -ζμβροτον. 
 excite, Άνώ^ω, } 
 
 άνώξω, Γ άνω^εω, Imp. ήνώ^ουν, άνωγηόω. 
 ηνωγα & έ άνώ^ημι ? Imper. άνώ^ηόι, άνωχΑι. 
 άνω^α, } 
 όβ hated, ' Απεχθάνομαι, ά#εχ0εω, άιτεχΑήΑΌμαι, ατήχ^ημαι, owr>;- 
 
 χΜμην 
 please, Άρε'^κω, > άρεω άρε'-β'ω, όΌμαι, 'ζρεο'α, ήρε^άμην, 
 
 "Αρω, $ 'ξρεα'μαι, ήρέο'όην. 
 
 increase, Αυξάνω, } , y , ,*>, . . „- ^ 
 
 ' αφ;-<Τω, (ίομαι, ηυξη-ία, μαι, 
 
 δβ di*- ' Αχ^ομαι, άχ#ε'ω, άχάέαΌμαι, ηγβέύδψ, άχ^εσ'θήσ'β- 
 pleased μαι. 
 
 '.Αυξάνω, ί αΰ|ε . 
 Άίξω, J 
 
 Β. 
 
 ΓΒάω, /3ήβΌμαι, ε'ξηο'α, ε/3η<Ταμην, /3ε- 
 
 βψ%α, μαι, /3s§aa, 2d Fut. /3ε- 
 , ομαι. 
 
 £0, Βαίνω, ^ β^ Part. Pres. /3ι?ών. 
 
 | βίβημ, 2d Α. ε^ν, Subj. /3είω, Part. 
 I Pr. /3ι§ά$. 
 
 * The Passive and the Future Middle, have the sense of •* increase'' 
 as a neuter verb. 
 
I ilhIous \ t 
 
 
 live, 
 
 bud, 
 feed, 
 will, 
 
 cat, 
 
 Biutfxw, 
 
 Use•! Obsolete 
 
 Pn Roote. Tenses from Oli. Roote. 
 
 To cast. Ι) \\\ω, ( /3λεω, /3λή<Τω, /3εβλη-κα, μα», i*Kr$yy, 
 βα. /3λη0ή0Όμαι. 
 
 •λον, J βαλλε'ω, /3αλλή<Τω. 
 
 1 /3λημι, ί/3λην, 2d Α. Opt. Μ. 2d Pers. 
 
 /3λεΓο. 
 Ιβολε'ω, βεβοΚα. 
 { /Stow, /3ιώαΌααι, έ/3ίω<7α, ΙβίΟΗίά 
 1 { βίωμι, with an aoti : »"g>t /8ε- 
 
 βίω-κα, μαι, εβιον, έ£ίων. 
 ΒλαβΥάνω, /3λα$εω, βλαέήό'ω, /3ε€λά<Ττηκα, £§λα£ον. 
 ρ, ί βοόχέω, βοόχη-ύω. #ομαι, /ίεβόβ'κηχα. 
 
 ' { /3όω, /3ώ(Τω, /3έ€ωκα. 
 
 Βούλομαι, βουλεω, βουλήοΌμαι, /3εβούλημαι, ί£ου- 
 λήβην. 
 
 ί/3ρόω, βρύόω, /3ε£ρωκα. 
 /3ρώμι, έ"§ρων. 
 βεξρωΰω, βε£ρώ0ο*μί. 
 
 Βρώ^κω, 
 Βι€ρω<ίκω, 
 
 marry, Γάμω, 
 ε^ημα, 
 
 ε/ημάμην. 
 
 grow 
 old, 
 
 Γηράσκω, 
 
 become, Γένομαι, 
 fee, Γίνομαι,! 
 
 6e 6ο πι, 
 
 know, Γιγνωύχω,} 
 Γινώ^κω, 
 
 γαμ,ύω, γαμήσω, ^αμεοΌμαι, ε^'άμηό'α, 
 ^ε^άμη-κα, μαι, ε^αμή^ην. 
 
 £ γηρό.ω, γν\ ράβομαι, εγηραχία, γεγηραχα,. 
 
 } 7^P Y i< JL, 5 Ρ 1 "• 1°^• 7 γ )Ρ αναι » Part- 7 r 'P^• 
 '^ενέω, ^ενήοΌμαι, ε^ενη^άμην, vfytfn)- 
 μαι, ε^ενήθην, ^ενόμην, v^vohu 
 Ι γεινω, ^είνομαι, ε^εινάμην, ίο beget. 
 γάω, γεγαα. 
 
 γνύ-ύω, ΰΌμαι, έ^νω-κα, ^μαι, 
 syvwtfdrjv, ^νω(ΓΟήβΌμαι. 
 
 To Zeant, Δαίω,ί 
 
 j δαε'ω, δαψύω, 0Όμαι, ίεδάηκα & iiiaa, 
 
 ίείά^μαι, είάην. δε'δτ,α. (2d Aq. 
 Μ. Subj. όαηται, /ο burn.) 
 
 t VideOd. β 46. 
 
 t The mm ujit form was yfyi^ai and 'tyv^v ; which was softea- 
 
 ed into yivo/iat aud yi»(i«« 
 
 J This verb is from <?«* which had a twofold signification, to Jatrn 
 or /eac/i, and /u (hh-ji. 
 
104 
 
 Anomalous Verbs. 
 
 Used in Obsolete 
 
 Pres.& Im. Roots. Tenses from Obs. Roots. 
 
 divide, Δαιω, δαζω, δά-ίΤω, βΌμαι, Ιδα^α, εδοκίάμην, 
 
 δέδα-κα, #μαι. 
 Δάκνω, δήκω, δή-|ω, gofxot* ^ έδηξα, δεδηχα^ 
 
 ^μαι, έδηγύην, εδακον. 
 Δαρ^άνω, δαρ^ε'ω, δαρ0ή0Όμαί, δεδάρύτιχα, £δάρύψ 9 
 εδαρΰον and εδρα^ον. 
 
 δείίΤω ' ' δείδιμί, Imper. δεδιόι and δείδιόι. 
 
 δέδοικα, 
 
 sleep, 
 Fear, 
 
 ask, 
 teach, 
 
 fly, 
 
 think, Δοκε'ω, 
 Poet, δοχηΰω, 
 δεδόκηκα, 
 
 be able, Δόναμαι, 
 
 enter,* Δύνω, 
 
 δίω, εδιον, δε'δια. 
 
 Δέομαι, δεε'ω, δεηόομαι, δεδεημαί, ίδεηύψ, δεη- 
 
 0ήαΌμαι . 
 Διδάσκω, ) 
 
 διδά|ω, J διδαΰχύω, διδαύχηόω. 
 δεδίδαχα, } 
 
 Διδράΰ'κω, ) δράω, δρά-σ'ω. σΌμαι, εδραία, δε'δρακα. 
 διδρα|;ω, $ δρ^μι, εδρην and εδραν. 
 
 δόκω, δόξω, εδοξα, δε'δο-κα, γμ<ω and 
 
 κημαι. 
 δοάω, δοάοΌμαι, έδοασ'άμην, Syn. έδοά- 
 
 μην. 
 δυνάω, δυνήόΌμαι, ε'διινησ'άμην, δεδυνήμαι, 
 
 έδυνήόην 
 δυνά^ω, εδυνάο^ην. 
 δύω, δό-ό'ω, (Τομαι, δεδυ*κα ; (Γμ-αι. 
 
 εδυν, ίο pw* on. 
 
 i δύω, 
 
 excite, Εγείρω, 
 eat, "Εδω, 
 ε^ω, 
 ηχα., 
 
 έπομαι, 
 
 seat 
 
 one's 
 
 self. 
 
 εγρω, 
 
 εδεω, 
 έδόω, 
 
 ε δω, 
 
 Ε. 
 
 ή/ρόμην, lyp^yopa. 
 
 Ιδηκα, εδεο^ην, Ι'δηδα. 
 έδοκα & έδήδοκα, εδήδομα*. 
 
 Ιδχμαι, so καόεδ2μα<. 
 
 $ee, 
 
 or 
 
 Εϊ'δω, 
 ε'/^ω, 
 
 ε/δε'ω, εϊδηόω, εΤδη -tfa, κα, Ρΐιιρ. *ίδειν. 
 know, είδον, ί'δον, £ εϊδημι, Pr. Opt. ε/δείην, Inf. ειδίχω. 
 ο/δα,ί 
 
 * In the Middle, " to enter one's self," and hence " to sink," when 
 entering water ; ■ to dress" in reference to clothes, 
 t όΐδα has the force of the Present, as in Latin novi. 
 
Anomalous Verbs. 
 
 ΙΟβ 
 
 
 Used in 
 
 Obsolete 
 
 
 1 ft Im. 
 
 Root* 
 
 Tenses from Obs. Root*. 
 
 esk, 
 
 ψί ω * 
 
 > l '^ W| 
 
 εΐρήβΌμαι. 
 
 
 ε ρω, 
 έρομαι, 
 
 ι ε ρέω, 
 
 ερηόομ,αι, ε?ρη-κα, μαι, ε/ρε'^ην. 
 
 drive, 
 
 Έλαίνω,* 
 
 έλάω, 
 
 ελά(Γω,| -ζλααΌι, ήλαιΓάμην, -^λα- 
 
 κα &, ήλήλαχα, ελήλαχα, 
 
 μαι, ήλήλαμαι & ^λχκίμαι, ήλά- 
 
 perish 
 
 ι Κ», 
 
 *#&»> 
 
 fltfa. 
 
 make 
 red, 
 
 Έρυδαίνω, 
 
 ( έρυ^ε'ω, 
 f έρύ^ω, 
 
 ερ^ω. 
 
 come, 
 
 "Ερχομαι, 
 
 έλεό^ω, 
 
 ίλεΰβΌμαι, •ξλευο'α, -ζλυ^ον, Syn. 
 ηλ^ον, Pert*. Μ. ήλυ^α & έλή- 
 λυ2τα. 
 
 eat, 
 
 "Ε^ω, 
 
 > είω, 
 
 Fut. εδομαι, εδήδοχα, είηδα. εδή- 
 
 
 ίε<ίμαι, ήοεα^ην, 2d Αο. εφα^ον, 
 
 
 
 
 from φά^ω. 
 
 sleep, 
 
 Εϋίω, 
 
 εύόϊω, 
 
 εύδή^ω. 
 
 find, 
 
 Ευρίσκω, 
 
 βυρίω, 
 
 εύρηόω, ευρη^άμην, εΰρη-κα, μαί, 
 ειφε^ην, ευρε&ήοΌμαι, ευρον, ευρο- 
 μην. 
 
 
 
 ( <0d w > 
 
 ύ'χή-α'ω, βΌμαι, ε^χη-κα, μα», ε<Γ- 
 
 have, 
 
 " E X", 
 
 1 
 
 χεδην, <ίχε$ή<Τομαι, ε<Τχον ; | ?**- 
 
 
 *£ω, 
 
 J 
 
 χόμην. 
 
 
 
 ( <0#f"i 
 
 2d Α. Imper. αΧ(ς. 
 
 cook, 
 
 β Έψω. 
 
 Ιψε'ω, 
 
 έψή^ω, ΙψήοΌμαι. 
 
 W» 
 
 Zfae, Ζάω, > ~ 
 
 gird, Ζωννύω, ? £όω, 
 Ζώννυμι, $ 
 
 εζψ or εζων, ζτ]§ι & ζη. 
 
 ζωόω, εζω<ία, ε^ωίίάμην, ε£ω-κα\ 
 
 Θ. 
 
 be willing,G=\u, £ελε'ω, $ελή(Γ"ω, έ&ε'λη<Γ"α, τε^ε'ληχα. 
 
 i 
 
 * The origin of tliie Verb is, ?λω. Hence three forms are derived : 
 the Bceotic, tXdm ; the £olic, *\Ww ; and the Doric, tXmuvm. 
 t In this Tense σ is frequently dropped, and the Contract form is 
 
 adopted : thus Ad, Alf, Α*. ν Ελσ (Ιι comes from ελλω. 
 
 J From the Aorist c\dv anew Present ίσχν, is formed denoting /# 
 rtts*• to hold, ft 
 
100 
 
 Anomalous Verbs. 
 
 touch, 
 die, 
 
 Θν^κω, 
 
 I'sed in Obsolete 
 
 Pres.& Ini. Roots. Tenses from Ohs. Hoots. 
 
 sharpen, θη/άνω, $ηγω, ^ήξω, έ'&ηξα, ε^τηξάμην, τε^η-χα, 
 
 ^μαι. 
 Θιγγάνω, %'ιγω, δί-ξω,-ξομαι, I'Siyov. 
 
 r ^νάω, τε^νηκα, <τε$ναα, τε^νεικα & rs&- 
 νεια, τε^νεώ^, (wrfa, gen. ωτοςΛ 
 S/jvw, έ'^ανον, 2 F. Μ. ^ανουμαι. 
 τε^ν^κω, τε^νη-ξω, ομαι. 
 τε^νημι, Pr. Imper. τε^να^ι, Opt. <τε$- 
 ναίην. Inf. τε^νάναί, Part. τε£νά$ # 
 2 Α. δ^νην; 
 
 \ ^ορε'ω, §ορή<ϊω, I'Sopov, ^οροϋμαι. 
 
 Ι. 
 
 ί^ρύω, ϊδρύόω, ί'^ρυ^α, ί#ρυ(ίάμην, ί'όριΐ- 
 χα, μαι, ί^ρί&ην & ι^ρυν^ /jv. 
 
 ί'£ω, Vtfw, itfa. 
 
 !( "χω, *'£ομαι, '£άμην, lypcu, Ικόμην. 
 
 ιλάω, ιλάοΌμαι, ίλα^άμην, ΐληκα, iXaC- 
 $ην, ίλαόΊ^βΌμαι. 
 ί'λημι, ί'λα^ι, Pr. Μ. ί'λαμαι. 
 
 leap, 
 
 Θορνίω, 
 Θόρνυμι, 
 θρώ^κω, 
 
 pi ace, 
 
 *Ι^νω, 
 
 • 
 (pause to 
 sit, 
 direc 
 
 Ιςανω, 
 Ι,Ί9ηΜω, 
 
 eome, 
 
 Ίκνεομαι, 
 
 mppease 
 
 ,Ίλάο'κομαι 
 ίλάξομαι, 
 
 β* 
 
 "Ι*τημι, 
 
 burn. 
 
 Καίω, 
 
 
 χαάΐω, 
 
 
 Χβ'καυκα, 
 
 mix, 
 
 Κερανν^ω, 
 Κεράννυμι, 
 Κιρν^μι, 
 
 £<""> 
 
 Κεροαίνω, 
 χέρβανω, 
 
 χεκερδακα, 
 
 f Χ^ι 
 
 Κ. 
 
 εκηα & εκεια, έκηάμην &, έκειά- 
 μην, εκαον, εκάην. 
 
 ' κεράω, κεράσω, ε'κε'ραα'α, εκερα^άμην, κε- 
 κεραέμαι, έκεράα^ν, κερασ^ήαΌ- 
 μαι. 
 κράω, κράίω, κίκρα-κα, μαι, εκρά^ην, 
 κραδ^βΌμαι. 
 
 χερ<5εω, xspo/j-tfw, αΌμαι, έχίρ5η^α, χεχ- 
 ερόηχα. 
 
I yalou* Verb*. 
 
 
 find, 
 
 I 
 
 ( ll.bllll t.« 
 
 I 
 
 Ten**• fr ' xiU. 
 
 / τ)<Γ α t rx iv «y(f euMfL 
 
 ίιαχ 
 
 satisfy, Kopfv 
 
 •«a & 
 fx«v. 
 
 το//. Β 
 
 
 ) xopfa, xopsVij, UipMa, rxopftfofufv, xi- 
 { xpifi j-atfa, 
 
 f Χρ/μημι, χρ.μαμαι. 
 
 Μ. brtipip, Inf. 
 
 χτά<Τ^σί αμενοί. 
 
 hi, XI 
 
 tftfa . 
 
 Λ. 
 
 by lot. '*• 
 
 » j X a 
 
 v« (or λ/λ•χ- 
 
 
 etc U 
 
 r Mfiu, λύομαι, Ιιληφα, ίϊλημμβι. 
 
 λάμ . μα ι. ίλ λ/λαμ- 
 
 μ/ι. 
 
 , *«μαι. 
 ■ 
 ίλα^ον. 
 
 Μ. 
 
 ΛΜΐΠ/Ι, Μι, 
 
108 Anomalous Verbs. 
 
 Used in Obsolete 
 
 Pres. & Im. Roots. Tenses from Obs. Roots. 
 
 fight, Μάχομαί, μάχέω, μαχήαΌμαι & μαχέόΌμαι, εμα- 
 
 χε^άμην & εμαχη(Ταμην, μεμά- 
 χημαι, 2 F. μαχουμα*. 
 about to &β,Μέλλω, μελλε'ω, μελλ*ί<Τω, εμέλλη<Τα. 
 cartf, Με'λω,* μελε'ω, μελησω, έ'μεληο'άμην, μεμε'λη- 
 
 κα, μαι & μέμβλημαι, έμελή^ην, 
 εμελον, μεμηλα. 
 
 * Μ/™, ( 7μ«. / μ3μ.|.μ«., εμ.χν, 2Α. 
 
 remem- Μιμνηα'κω, μνάω, μν^-σΌϋ, σΌμαι, εμνη^α, εμνη(ίά- 
 fer. μην, με'μνημαι, μεμνήόΌμαι, εμ- 
 
 νήο^ην, μνησ^ήσΌμαι. 
 To remain, Μ/μνω, μενε'ω, μεμε'νηκα. 
 wipe Μορχνύω, } 
 ο^*, Μόρ^νυμι, ζ μόρ/^ί μόρ£ ω > ε'μορξάμην. 
 
 ΌμόρΓνυμι, 3 
 bellow, Μόχω, \ 
 
 μεμυκα, £ μυκάω, μυκήο'ω. 
 εμυκον, ) 
 
 Ν. 
 
 inhabit, Ναίω, νάω, νάβΌμαι, Ivatfa, Ιναα'άμην, ένά>- 
 
 « &ην. 
 
 Ο. 
 
 bepained, Όδάξω, οδαξεω, όδαξήο'ω. 
 
 smell, "Οζω, ^ 
 
 otfw, > ο£έω, o£g'<fw & 6£ή<ίω,ω£εα'α 
 
 Perf. Μ. £<k,t ) 
 
 swell, Οιδαίνω, λ 
 
 Οιδανω, ν οίδε'ω, οΚήα'ω, ώδη -tfa, κα. 
 
 Οιδί^κω, 3 
 
 think* Ο'/ομαι, } ,, ,, . » »» ;,* 
 
 9 η τ \ οιεω, ο/^αΌμαι, ωημαι, ωμην, ^^ην. 
 
 go, Ο/χομαι, > ο/χεω, ο/χ^ομαι, ωχη- 
 
 2 Α. ω'χόμην, £ ο/χόω, ωγωχα. 
 
 * This Verb is chiefly used as an Impersonal. 
 + v O<Wa, lias the sense of the Present. 
 
 ι-κα, μαι. 
 
Anomalous Verbs. 
 
 Used in Obsolete 
 
 Pros. Si Im. Roots. Tenses from Obs. Roots. 
 
 slide, Όλια^αίνω, ) αλκτ2τέω, ώλί(Τ$η-<Τα, χα, ώλι<Γ: 
 
 Όλισ^άνω 
 
 destroy* Όλλ^ω, 
 'Όλλυμι, 
 
 :1 
 
 όλε'ω, ο\ύ<ϊω, ωλε^α, ώλε-κα, μα 
 όλώλεκα, ώλεβ^ην, ώλον, 
 ώλόμην, ολουμαι, ώλα &. ολωΧα. 
 ώμο- 
 Μ. 
 
 , Λ , ( όμόω, ομό<7ω, ώμο^α, ώμο<Ταμην, 
 
 sircar. Ομνύω, ι «- > • ι / ο τ? 
 
 ' "Ομνυμ,, J x« _& ομ.μοκα, μα,, 2 F. 
 
 ^ ^ ' ( ομουμαι. 
 
 tmpe ο^νΟμόρ^νυμι, όμόρ/ω, όμόρξω, ώμορξάμην. 
 
 ,, ( ονέω, όν^-ίΤω, βΌμα/, ώνη^α, ojvrjtfaf. 
 
 ' Όν3αι ) & ώνάμην, ώνημαι, ώνα^ην, 
 
 ^ ' ( Αο. ώνάμην. 
 
 ί^αμην 
 
 rise, Όρνύω, ) ο ρω, ορ^ω, ώρ^α, ώρμαι, ορ^ 
 
 "Ορνυμι, $ ωρορα, ώρόμην. 
 
 smell, Όο'φραινομαι, οσ'φρεω, ο#φρ^0Όμαι, ώσ'φρόμην 
 
 owe, 
 
 'Οφείλω, 
 
 "Οφλω, 
 
 ΌφλκΓκάνω. 
 
 Ϊόφειλε'ω, όφειλή^ω, ώφείληκα, ω 
 ωφελον. 
 όφλε'ω, οφλ^ω, ωφληκα. 
 
 ωρα & 
 
 φειλον & 
 
 suffer, Πά^χω, 
 
 pass, 
 
 boil, 
 
 Περνάω, 
 
 Πε'ρνημι, 
 
 Πΐ'ϊΤράσ'κω, 
 
 Πρίαμαι, 
 
 Πεο^ω, 
 
 /ίΐ?/ ορβ/ι,Πεταννύω, 
 
 Πετάννυμι, 
 
 fasten, Πη^νι'ω, 
 Πη^νυμι, 
 
 Π. 
 
 '«ττή^ω, «τειαΌμαι, Bocot. for ?ττ;σομαι, 
 
 - ' ■ . ■ - "τα. 
 
 <ττα$ε'ω, *Ό^η<Γω, £irc&ij<fa, τετο^/,χα. 
 flrivSw, Perf. Μ. «Ατονία, *έ«Ό<&α &; 
 
 1 ττεράω,* Syn. *ράω, fpoufco, *£grpa>xa, 
 μα ι, «τε^ράοΌμαι, έ«*ρο&ην, τρα- 
 Σείομαι. 
 
 «ώττω, *έψω, ?<τεψα, «&Έμμαι, 
 
 ε'φ^ην. 
 
 ' ίτετά^ω, «τε-τάα'ω, =VsVa<fa, τίτίταχα & 
 tfarraxct, π Stfercttf μ*αι η «riVratf- 
 μ«ι λ: Cc'craarti, eVffrouJ^ 
 <χηγω* **}£&), ε^ηξα, ί«^|άμην, « - 
 ^α, /l^** 1 ' ^7Χ^5 ν 3 
 
 * Περαω, to pass into another country ; τίρναω, to pass for the pur- 
 pose of selling ; πρίαμαι, in the Middle Voice, to buy a person or |] 
 brought from another country. 
 
 *!0 
 
no 
 
 Anomalous Verbs. 
 
 Used in 
 Pres. & Im. 
 
 drink, Πίνω, 
 Πωμι, 
 
 Obsolete 
 Roots. 
 
 r tfow, 
 
 tf /'ω, 
 
 ^tf /μι, 
 «•foe £o drink, nwiVxc*), #ίω, 
 
 Tenses from Obs. Roots. 
 tfwtfw, πεητω-χα, μαι & πένο- 
 μαι, ^o^vjv. 
 
 Pres. Μ. *πΊομαι, ΑτίοΌμαι, 
 §Viov, 2 F. Μ. «τιουμαι, 
 Imper. «Ήι. 
 
 fill, ν Πι-τλημι, ί «7Τλάω, 4Τλή(Τω, ένλη<Τα, Ι^ληο'άμην, 
 
 Πίμ«7Τλημι, J #ένλη<ίμαι,ενλή<Τ$ην, flrsVXij&a. 
 
 Πιμτλάνω, ( ^λημι, Imp. Pas. ε^τλημην. 
 
 ίίτ*τοω, ^εντωκα. 
 
 tfsVw, IVscTa, επ^άμην. 
 
 «ττεβ'έω, " firetfov, 2 F. Μ.#ε<Τουμαι. 
 
 sneeze, Πτάρνυμαι, #ταίρω, IWapov. 
 
 inquire, Πυνέάνβμαι, #εϋ$ω, ^τεόσΌμαι, *χί<χυ<ϊμ*αι, ε*κυ%ψψ, 
 
 «ττυ^ουμαι. 
 
 Jo, 
 
 'Ρεω, 
 
 J ε ρ/ω, Att. ερ£ω, ερξω, εργμαι, ε/ρ^-- 
 V μαι & εερ/μαι, Perf. Mid. εορ- 
 
 |υε'ω, |u'//OOj, £υήσΌμαι, εϊΜηχα, ε^- 
 |ϋην. 
 break, 'Ρη/νύω, > ξηόόω, |ή|ω, ε^η£α 5 ε^ηξάμην, εξ'ξηγα 
 
 *Ρή/νυμι, $ 
 ew, 'Ρύννυμι, $ 
 
 & ε^ω/α, ε^ά/ην, ξαγ-ηΰομαι. 
 ξωϋω, ε^ω -tia, χα, μαι &; (Τμαι, 
 ε^ώα^ην ,1m . ε^ωοΌ , farewell. 
 
 quench, Σξεννύω, 
 Σβεννυμι, 
 
 ' ο&ω, d^idu), I'tf&stfa, έν§εκα & έ'α'βη- 
 κα ? έ'ο'βεα'μαι, ενβε'α^ην, tf&tf- 
 ^ήσΌμαι. 
 ίίβημι, ένβην. 
 
 scatter, Σχεδαννόω, ί όχεδάω, όχεδάόω, etfxs'Ja-tfa, σ"μαι, ενκε- 
 Σκείάννυμι, f δάο^ην. 
 
 r rfxXaw, ο'χλήο'ομαι, 1 Α. έ'^κηλα, ί<Λί- 
 dr# «ρ, Σκέλλω, < ληκα 
 
 ( (Τκλημι, Pr. Inf ^κληναι 
 offer li- Σιϊύνδω, βνείω, όπε'ι-ϋω. οΌμαι, IWcitfa, £cfogi- 
 
 bation, <7άμην, εσ'^εια'μαι, εν^είο^ην. 
 
Anomalous Verbs. 1 1 1 
 
 Used in 
 Pres.&Im. Tenses from Obs. Π 
 
 spread, Ιτορενν^'ω, i tfropcui, (fTopitf&j, (Ττορώ, Itiropstfa, £<f<r<>- 
 
 Στορί'ννυμ/, / ρεσάμην, £<7<τορε(Γ$ην. 
 
 Ιτβρνυμι, 3 
 
 Στρωνν,^ω, > (ίτρόω, (Ττρώ^ω, εβνρωό'α, έντρωα'άμην, 
 
 ννυμι, $ ί'στρωμαι. 
 
 ) τλάω, τληόΌμαι, ς-ετληχα. 
 $ τλημι, έτλην. 
 <τάγω, eVayov, <τέταγα. 
 τεμε'ω, τεμ^ω. 
 τμήχω, τμ>;ξω, ετμη|α, τε'τμη-χα, μαι, 
 
 ετμή^ην,ετμα^ον, ετμά^ην,τμα»- 
 
 ^^σΌμαι. 
 τέκω, τε'-ξω, ξομαι, Ιτεχ&ην, ετεκον, 
 ετεκομην, τε'τοκα. 
 τράω, τρήα'ω, έΥρηα'α, τέτρη-κα, μου, 
 
 Ιτρή^ην. 
 πτραίνω, 1 Α. έτίτρηνα. 
 wound, Τιτρώ<ίκω, τρόω, τρώ-^ω, βΌμαι, έτρωγα, τετρω- 
 
 μαι, έτρώ^ην, τρω^ήδΌμαι. 
 δραμ,εω, δεδράμη-κα, μαι. 
 δρε'μω, εδραμον, 2 F. Μ. δραμουμαι, 
 
 δε'δρομα. 
 (payco, φά^ομαι, 2 F. Μ. φα^οιμα/, 
 
 εφα^ον. 
 
 τυχή^ω, εν^χησ'α, τετύχηκα. 
 Ι" τε^ξομωι, τέτευχα, τε'τυ^μαι, 
 
 τετΰξομαι, ετίχ^ην, έΥυχον. 
 
 iear, Ταλάω, 
 
 Τε'τλημι, 
 extend, Τανύω, 
 
 dll, Τέμνω,* 
 
 τεμω, 
 τετέμηκα, 
 
 irmg• Τίκτω, 
 forth, 
 
 bore Τίτράω, 
 through, Τίτρημι, 
 
 run, 
 eat, 
 
 6e, 
 
 £ρεξω, 
 
 Τρώ^ω, 
 sVpayov, 
 
 Τυ/χάνω, 
 
 ίτυχεω, 
 τεύχω,Ι 
 
 promise, % Ύ*ι<ϊγνζομαι, υπούγύω, ύ*Ό<ΤχηοΌμαι, ί^ε'σ'χημαι, faty- 
 
 έ$ην, όμην. 
 
 Φ. 
 
 «*, Φά(Τκω, $ φά ": φΚω,Βφιία. 
 ( φημι, εφην, εφαμην. 
 
 * Tf>vu> and ra>v« arc both found ; the former derived from rty«, the 
 latter from τάμω. Hence the 2d Aorist is t ithor creuov or ϊταμον. 
 t This must be distinguished from the π i<> prtpart. 
 
112 
 
 Anomalous Verbs. 
 
 bear. Φέρω, V 
 
 Used in Obsolete 
 
 Pres.& Im. Roots. Tenses from Obs. Roots. 
 
 ' ο'/ω, οίΰω, ο/'αΌμαί, ο'/σθην, οίΟ^ήοΌμαι. 
 
 ίνέγχύ), 1 A. fjvsyxa, ήνε^κάμην, ήνέχ- 
 
 &ην } ^νε^κον, ήνε^κομην. 
 ενεκω, 1 Α. -^νεικα, ήνεικάμην, ε'νηνε^- 
 
 μαι, ήνε'χ^ην. 
 ε'νέχω, Per. Μ. ε'νήνοχα. 
 φορε'ω, φθρηοΌ), εφόρησ'α, «ττεφόρημαι, 
 Syn. φρέω, φρη(Τω, &c. 
 ^φρημι, Imper. Α. 2. φρε£. 
 
 ί<ρ£άω, φ^ά^ω, φ^ήαΌμαι, έ'φ^α-^α, κα. 
 φ^ημι, έ'φδην. 
 
 φ$1ω, φ^ί -tfw, οΌμαι, έ'φ&κία, έ'φ&ι-κα, 
 μα/. 
 
 awiid^ate^Savw, 
 corrupt, Φ&/νω, 
 
 produce, Φύω* } 
 
 φύΰω, \ φυμι, 
 
 #έφυκα, J 
 
 εφυν. 
 
 Χ. 
 
 rejoice, Χα/'ρω, 
 χαρώ, 
 κε'χαρκα, 
 
 obtain, Χανδάνω, 
 
 gape, Χάσ'κω, 
 
 Χα#κά£ω, 
 
 colour, Χρωννόω, 
 Χρώννυμι, 
 
 bury, "Κωννυω, 
 Χώννυμι, 
 
 ίχαρε'ω, χαρ^ω, χαρηαΌμαι, εχάρην. 
 χαιρεω, χαιρ^ω, εχαίρηία, κεχάρη-κα, 
 
 * Χ ε ' ω > 
 χα /vw, 
 
 χροω, 
 χόω, 
 
 μαι, κεχαρηαΌμαι. 
 
 έ'χαδον, κέχανδα. 
 
 χε/αΌμαι . 
 
 χάνω, χανουμαι, εχανον, κεχανα 
 
 & κε'χηνα. 
 
 χρώσ'ω, κε'χρω-μαι & ο'μαι. 
 
 χώβΌ), έ'χωβ'α, κεχωα'μα*, έχώίί- 
 £ην ; χωΟ^όΌμα*. 
 
 Ω. 
 
 drive. 
 
 εώ^ουν, 
 
 ω^ω, wtfw, ώο'α, ώίίμαι, ω^^ν. 
 
 * Φύω signifies /ο produce ; Φνμι, in the Middle sense, /ο $i/JT<?r <m*f 
 se/f /o 6e produced, or /o 6c 6orn. The Perf. π^νκα, as well as 2 Aor 
 l^w, ^Svat, and φύς, have a passive signification. 
 
Adverbs. 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 1. Of Quality. Those end 
 
 1! In -gj£, formed from Adjectives and Participles by 
 changing ος of the nominative or genitive into ως ; as, ϊδίως, 
 sweetly, &c. 
 
 2. In -δην, from the Perfect of Verbs, dropping the redu- 
 plication ; as, χρύβδψ, secretly, from κέκρυ^ται ; βάδην, by 
 steps, Lc. 
 
 3. In -αδτ,ν or -ινδην, from Nouns ; as, λο^άδην, with choice, 
 from Xo'y-o£ ; «τλ^τινδην, according to wealth, from *\οΰτ-ος. 
 
 4. In ινδά. This denotes kinds of games : as, otfrpaxivda, 
 a game with pieces ofearthern ware, (οατρακον.) 
 
 5. -ηδον, (more rarely -αδον,) corresponding to the Latin 
 -atim ; as, α^ελήδον, in herds ; βοτρυδόν, in clusters. These 
 are formed chiefly from Nouns. 
 
 6. In -ει, -ι or -τι, from Verbs and Nouns ; as, ονομασπ'. 
 by name, ^ανδημεί, with all the people ; i. e. with all force. 
 
 7. In -στι or -wfn, denoting chiefly a peculiarity of nation; 
 as, 'Ελληνιστί, like the Greeks, Lc. 
 
 8. In -ω, formed mostly from prepositions ; as, 3 
 &c. Some others have the same ending ; as, άφνω. 
 
 9. -r) or -a, originally datives of Nouns or Adjectives ; 
 as, κομιδτί, with care; hence, very much ; όκ&δγι, diligently, 
 hardly ; ι<5ια, (οδω,) separately, &c. 
 
 10. So likewise the accusative ; as, tfpoixa, gratis, from 
 wpoig, a gift ; άρχ>;ν, a£ ?Ae beginning ; hence, above all. 
 
 1 1 . Sometimes two words are united ; as, εκποδών, (εκ L• 
 *Ouf,) ou£ of the way ; εμ-ττοδών, in £/*e iray. 
 
 Other adverbs of this class will be learnt by observation. 
 II. Adverbs of Place. These have a three-fold rela- 
 tion. 
 
 1. " Where V These end in ου, οι, 0ι, and <fi ; the last 
 are added chiefly to names of cities ; as, «τανταχοΰ, every 
 where ; ctypoSi, in the country ; Ά^ν,ηοΊ, at Athens. Thus, 
 also, Sjp?7<pi, out of doors. 
 
 2. " Whence ? ' These end in $εν, and are used instead 
 of the preposition ix with the genitive ; as, όυρανό^εν, from 
 heaven ; Gso^ev,from God. 
 
 3. " Whither V* These end in δε or ct, and are added to 
 the accusative ; as, οΓκονδε, home ; Μαρο&ωναύε, to Mnra- 
 thon. After tf the two letters pass into ζ ; as, 'A2ty«gt, to 
 Athens, for Ά^ηναο'δε. Thus, 
 
 10* 
 
114 
 
 Agreement. 
 
 'Ουρανοί, Όυρανό^εν, 
 
 in heaven. from heaven. 
 
 θηβγιίι, Θήβτβεν, 
 
 at Thebes. from Thebes, 
 
 Some adverbs have such an affinity, th 
 a vowel, they are Indefinites ; with zs 9 
 with <r, Redditives. 
 
 Indefinite. Interrogative. 
 
 S which way, 
 by what 
 means, 
 how far, 
 for what rea- 
 son. 
 
 « ' > when, 
 
 γνιχα, ) 
 
 ο$εν, δ^ό &εν, whence. 
 
 oSi, where. 
 
 oVov, how much. 
 
 o/ov, after what man 
 
 ner. 
 
 etfaxis, how often. 
 
 ! which way? 
 by what 
 means ? 
 ί how far ? 
 I for what rea- 
 ( son ? 
 πότε, 
 «πανικά, 
 πό^εν, whence ? 
 <iro$H, where ? 
 irotfov, how much ? 
 ττοΓον, after what 
 
 manner ? 
 tiotiawg, how often 1 
 
 when ? 
 
 Oupavovcte (or (is,) 
 
 to heaven. 
 
 θφκζε, 
 
 to Thebes, 
 at, beginning with 
 Interrogatives ; 
 
 Redditive. 
 rfids, ^ this way, 
 or \ by that 
 raurrj, ) means. 
 
 !sofar, 
 for that rea- 
 son. 
 
 °, ' > then. 
 τονικά, ) 
 
 ro^sv, thence. 
 
 τό§ι, there* 
 
 roVov, so much. 
 
 οίον, after that 
 manner. 
 
 odkxig, so often. 
 
 COMPARISON. 
 
 Adverbs derived from Adjectives in use, from the neuter 
 singular of the comparative, and the neuter plural of the 
 superlative of the Adjective, are commonly used in com- 
 parison ; as, όωφως, ϋωφωτερων, ύωφωτατα. Adverbs in w 
 from prepositions, form their comparison in ω ; as. ανω, 
 ανωτέρω, άνωτάτω. The same is the case with some others ; 
 as, εγγύς, εγγυτερω, έγγυτάτω ; but sometimes εγγύτερον, sy- 
 γιον, syp^iflVa are found. 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 AGREEMENT. 
 
 I. Apposition. Two Substantives, signifying the 
 same thing agree in case ; as, Παύλος ά#όστολο^ Paul, 
 an Apostle, θεω χρπϊ,, to God, the Judge. 
 
I 
 
 
 J. One of ι in times understood ; 
 
 (ξάρηΐ ο το' ν ι the son oi 
 
 A fit] 
 
 rd ως, usually puts I So fol- 
 
 lows it, in the same case with the preceding Sub 
 
 ,.μ ΊΊ<τ<τ<χφίρνην, ως φίλον, taking Tissap heroes, as a 
 friend. 
 
 3. An Infinitive, or part of a sentence may supply 
 place of one of the Substantives ; as, [*ei c/.iro 
 
 ου, λι^ρον ολεόρον, or some of the Greeks will throw you 
 from the tower, a dreadful death. 
 
 I. Sometimes the latter Substantive is put in the Ceni- 
 tive ; as, πόΧις Άόην&ν, for πόλις Ά0ηναι, the city of Athens. 
 
 5. This is always the case after Possessive Pronou 
 as, δαήρ aiV εμος fefxg, κ υ ν ω τ ι δ ο s, he was my brother-in- 
 law 7 ; (of me) shameless. So likewise after Adjer 
 rived from proper names ; as, ΆδηναΓοί «ν, roXicjg rijg \ι*εγί4- 
 τγ\ς, being an Athenian, (i. e. of Athens,) that great city. 
 
 II. An Adjective agrees with its Substantive in gen- 
 der, number, and case ; as, το ά}'ον Πνεύμα, the Holy 
 Spirit. 'Ev ixsiwig τοις ήμέρ«ΐ£, in those d;i 
 
 This rule includes the Article, Pronouns, and Partici- 
 ples. 
 
 1. Substantives are often used adjectively ; as, Έλλα£ 
 φωντ„ the Greek language.* 
 
 Adjectives are often used substantively ; as, S Six 
 the just. So likewise ούτος, εχεΐνος,τίς, αϊτός, & 
 
 3. Adjectives and Demonstrative Pronouns, sometimes 
 agree, not with a Substantive expressed, but with one im- 
 plied and understood ; as, βρέφος φίρονς-α τόξον, a boy bear- 
 ing a bow. το §εΐον αύτοίς, the Gods themselves. 
 
 4. Adjectives at tin ee with the nominative of the 
 Verb, instead of the noun to which the) properly π let ; as, 
 μίόος δε χαρδί-ης με£» gjuvs, he descended into the middle of 
 my heart. 
 
 5. Instead of an Adjective, a noun with a preposition is 
 often used ; as, ήίονή μίτα ύί,χης (i.e. εν<5&£0£,) exalted plea- 
 sure. 
 
 6. Adverbs are frequently used as Adjective- 
 το7ς tot roi£, among the men at that time. 
 
 
 * This is very common in English; as, gold-wat 
 Tho only diffen - a. hyphen in 
 
 lisl), but not in 
 
1 Ιβ Agreement. 
 
 Gender 1. The Adjective, as a predicate, (not as an 
 epithet,) is often put in the neuter singular, (χρήμα, being 
 understood,) while the Substantive is masculine or feminine, 
 or in the plural ; as, ουκ άγο&ον #ολυκοιρανή], a plurality of 
 rulers is not good ; μετα/3ολα/ Xutfrjpov, changes are painful. 
 
 2. When the Adjective thus used is made the Nomina- 
 tive to an auxiliary verb, it is often pat in the plural ; as, 
 αδύνατα εότ* (for ά^νατον,) it is impossible. 
 
 3. The Demonstrative and Relative Pronouns also, are 
 often put in the neuter, when they refer to their Substan- 
 tives generally as a thing ; and are sometimes put even in 
 the plural, when the noun is singular. 
 
 4. ΐίρωτος and πάς, in the neuter plural are frequently ap- 
 plied to persons ; as, Αάμ^ων Άιχινητε'ων τα # ρ ω τ α, Lam- 
 pon, Prince of the iEginetans. 
 
 5. Οίος and oVo£, in the neuter plural, are often put w T ith 
 Substantives in the singular ; as, γράφε χεΓλο£ οι' α Πει^ου£> 
 paint her lip like Persuasion. 
 
 6. In the Dual, a feminine Substantive has often a mas- 
 culine Adjective, especially among the Attics ; as, άμφω τώ 
 «ϊτολεε, both those cities : sometimes also in the singular and 
 plural, when the attention is not directed to a distinction 
 of sex, but generally to the person ; as, Θάτττειν τιν' εν tjj 
 ήμε'ρα μέλλων νεκρον, (of a woman,) being about to bury a 
 dead person that day. 
 
 7. When a woman speaks of herself in the plural, (ημείς,) 
 the masculine Adjective is used ; as, ημείς άτεκνοι, I (we 
 are) am childless. 
 
 8. Sometimes the Adjective agrees in case with one 
 noun, and in gender with another intimately connected with 
 it ; as, ώατ' ορνίθων ^ετεηνων εδνεα ττΌ>λά έν^α και εν$α #οτων- 
 ται, ά^αλλομεναι πτερύγεόόιν, thus many tribes of winged birds 
 fly hither and thither exulting on the wing. 
 
 9. An Infinitive, or part of a sentence often supplies the 
 place of the substantive, and then the Adjective is put in 
 the neuter gender ; as, χαλε^ον το μή φιΧτβαι, it is hard not 
 to love. Anacr. 
 
 Case 1. An Adjective has often its proper Substantive 
 put in the genitive ; as, oi φαύλοι των άν$ρώ#ων, wicked men ; 
 το «ττολλόν του χρόνου, much time. 
 
 2. Such instances as, φίΧος ω Μενέλαε, Iliad Δ. 189, and 
 νεφελη/ερετα Ζευς, Iliad, Α. 560, are not exceptions to this 
 rule ; φίλος, is the Attic vocative, and νεφελ^ερετα, the iEo- 
 lic nominative. 
 
1 
 
 H7 
 
 III. Λ verb nominative in mini! 
 and person ρρ*φω, 1 * ι ; 
 
 l. The nominatives of the first and second persona are 
 rarcl\ iept for the sake of empha 
 
 The infinitive, or part of a sentence, frequently sup- 
 plies the place of the nominative ; as, τ* φιλο<Γο5«Γν <ro ζ>' 
 (supp. s<f7i\) to inquire is the province of philosophy ; rt 
 ταοΓν άρεσαν ^(Τχερε^αΐόν I(f7iv, to please all is very difficult; 
 2<τ1η<Ταν s'ig τίτραχκΤχίλιουί, there stood about 4000 ; this latter 
 form is common to denote numbers in general terras. 
 
 3. In λε^αΊ, they say ; s/wSatfi, they are accustomed, &c. 
 ανέρωτοι, is understood. In βροντά, it thunders ; νίφει, it 
 snows ; βρέχει, it rains ; ζ&υς or αήρ, is understood ; and is 
 sometimes expressed ; as, ζϊύς ε/3ρόν7η<Τε. Horn. Od. ζεύς 
 υει. Theocrit. 
 
 4. The Attics often use the nominative for the vocative ; 
 as, η «αΤς, iysipx, maid, arise! Luke viii. 54. ΧαΓρε, /3ααΊ- 
 Xfffc, Hail King ! John xix. 4. 
 
 "Ηελιο£, ος ητάντ itpopdg χαϊ tfavr itfaxksig, Thou Sun, who 
 seest and nearest all things. Iliad, Γ. 
 
 5. The nominative is sometimes used without a verb ; as, 
 Ό yap Μωϋο% klog — kx οΐ'δα/χεν, <ri yiyovsv α^7ω, 
 
 But this Moses — we know not what has become of him. 
 
 Acts vii. 40. 
 
 IV. Nominatives plural of the neuter gender, have 
 commonly a singular verb ; as, ζωα τρέχει, animals run. 
 
 Sometimes, though rarely, masculines and feminines plu- 
 ral take a verb singular ; as, άχε?7αι <5μφα/ μελεων, the noise 
 of songs resounds ; Find, ην τρεις κεφαλαί. 
 
 V. A word in the dual may agree with another in 
 the plural, signifying two ; as, τώ άμφω χείρας άνε<Τχον, 
 they held up both their hands ; χείμα^οι ποταμοί (Τυδαλλε- 
 7 v ύδωρ, two wintery torrents unite their streams. Iliad. 
 Δ. 453. 
 
 VI. Nouns of multitude in the singular, often ta 
 
 a Verb or Adjective in the plural 'αν αυ7όν 
 
 άφαντο flrXijfros, all the multitude asked him.* 
 
 This rule applies when the noun of multitude is consid- 
 ered as composed of parts. When it is considered as one 
 
 * This rule applies to άλλος and έκαστος άλλος roo> άλλον λίγονπς* 
 speaking to each other 
 
118 Relative. 
 
 whole, the singular Verb and Adjective are used ; as, tfrfsofj 
 £ξετο Χάος, with haste the people sat down. Iliad, B. 99. 
 
 VII. Two or more Substantives singular, coupled 
 by the Conjunctions και, &,c. have a Verb, Adjective, 
 Participle, or Relative plural ; as, σνε'/>μα και καρ#ό$ δια- 
 φέρουν, the fruit and seed differ. 
 
 1. If the Substantives are of different persons, the Verb 
 agrees with the first person in preference to the second, and 
 with the second in preference to the third ; as, εγω και tfO τα 
 δίκαια «ττοιήόΌμεν, I and thou will do right. 
 
 2. If the Substantives denote inanimate objects, the Ad- 
 jective is commonly in the neuter plural ; as, τον αυχένα και' 
 τήν κεφαλήν φαίνει κε χ ρ υ tf ω μ ε'ν α, shows the neck and head 
 gilt. 
 
 3. If animated beings are spoken of, the Adjective is put 
 in the masculine, if one of the Substantives is of that gen- 
 der ; as, ιατροί και μητρδ$ ζχετι μ2 ζαιόντων, my father and 
 mother being no longer alive. 
 
 4. Sometimes the Adjective agrees with only one of the 
 Substantives; as, <υ^όμενο£, Στρομ/3ιχί<5ην xcu τά$ ναΰς 
 άνβληλυ&ότα, having learned that Strombichides and the 
 ships was lost. 
 
 RELATIVE. 
 
 Rule VIII. The Relative k agrees with its antece- 
 dent in gender and number. 
 
 1. Sometimes the antecedent in the singular, is followed 
 by the Relative in the plural, when it refers not to a definite 
 individual, but to the class which it represents ; as, Srjtfau- 
 porfoios άνήρ, ους δή επαινεί rb «7τλη$•£, a money getting man, 
 which class of men. the people praise. 
 
 2. When the antecedent, on the contrary, is a word of 
 general import in the plural, (as tfas,) the Relative is in the 
 singular ; as. άανά^εται ζάντας, ω civ ΐτεριτυ^χάν??, he salutes 
 all, whomsoever, he meets. 
 
 3. The Relative sometimes agrees in gender and number 
 with the noun following ; as, εις \ερχς άφικν£νται toVous, αι καλ- 
 2νται ύυνα,γωγα'ι, they arrive at the holy places, which are 
 called synagogues. Philo. 
 
 IX. When no nominative comes between the Relative 
 
Relative. 
 
 ll l J 
 
 and the Verb, the Relative is the nominative to the 
 Verb ; as, 'Άνδρας όι εΓοΌνται, the men who shall know. 
 But when a nominative cornea between the ftelal 
 and the Verb, the Relative i< governed by some word 
 in the sentence ; as, δ Χόγος ov H*i y the word which he 
 spoke. 
 
 1. When the Relative follows two words, of different 
 persons, it agrees with the first rather than the second, and 
 with the second rather than the third. 
 
 2. Inversion. For the sake ot emphasis, the Relative 
 often precedes at the commencement of a clause, and the 
 antecedent is understood in the clause which follows ; as, 
 r\oc txaffrj) ηλικία irpotfriraxTat, διηγ'ηΰόμε^α (supp. ττρά^ματα,) 
 what is appointed for each age, we will relate. 
 
 When any ambiguity would arise from this construction, 
 the antecedent is introduced after the Relative in the same 
 clause ; as, άδιχεΤ Σωχράτ-ης, ους μ£ν ή <χο\ις νομίζει Sso~ 
 νομίμων, Socrates acts unlawfully, not regarding as Gods, 
 those whom the city does ; ούτος stfnv ov είδες awJpwtfov, this 
 is the man whom you saw. 
 
 3. The antecedent is often implied in a Possessive Pro- 
 noun, or a preceding clause. 
 
 4. When the Relative refers back to a Demonstrative 
 Pronoun, that Pronoun is commonly omitted, and the Re- 
 lative put in the same case ; as, εμ,οι δοχεϊς Χεγειν ουδϊ (ϋμφωνα, 
 oif το πρώτον εΧιγες (for εκείνα <>.,) you seem to say things by 
 no means accordant with what you said at first ; oii ?χ« χρώ- 
 μαι, I use what I have. 
 
 X. Any Verb may have the same case after it as be- 
 fore it, when both words refer to the same thing 
 syu) s /μι διδίΐ(ϊχα\ος, I am a teach» 
 
 1. The Verbs, which have most commonly the same c 
 after them as before them, are substantive and neuter 
 Verbs, with Verba passive» of naming, gesture, c\v. 
 
 The nominative after a Verb Substantia «Be- 
 
 times changed into the genitive plural ; as, KfXMftf , Wli twv 
 tfXstftwv, for rfXicfttf. 
 
 ARTICLE. 
 
 1. The Article is prefixed to nouns which ex| 
 
120 Article. 
 
 not generally any one of a class, bnt definitely some one 
 which is known. A noun may be rendered thus defi- 
 nite in various ways. 
 
 1 . Κατ' έ|οχήν, by distinction, or general notoriety ; as, 
 ο οΌιητ^, the Poet ; i. e. Homer ; ή νόόος ετίεχειτο αμα και δ 
 ^όλεμο^, at the same time were impending the well known 
 plague, and the Peloponnesian war. Theoc. Π 59. 
 
 The Article is thus used κατ' εξοχήν, before the names 
 of the Deity, and of the great objects of nature, the sun, 
 moon, stars, seas, earth, heaven ; and generally before any 
 object which is greatly distinguished or well known. 
 
 2. By a previous mention, either of the same or a synon- 
 ymous word ; as, ετίοαδεΰ^η γε μην εν Περσών νόμοΐ£ ϊτο\ δε δοχχ- 
 C/v, οι^νόμοι άρχεσαι, he was educated according to the Per- 
 sian laws — and those laws seem to begin, &c. Xen. Cyrop. 
 χο~Κσάαντος δε τίνος l<f-%jp£jg άκόλ^ον, ^ρετο τι χαλε^αίνοι τω $ε- 
 ρά -tiovn, and some one beating his attendant severely, he 
 enquired the reason of abusing the servant. 
 
 3. By implication in the context ; as, ούτος vspoSsg ς-οΤς τίο- 
 λεμκ>»£ Νύμφαιον φυγ^ς εγίνετο, την κρίσιν £χ υ^ομείνα^, he hav- 
 ing treacherously surrendered Nymphaeum to the enemy, 
 became a fugitive, not waiting the trial ; i. e. the trial im- 
 plied as the natural consequence of his treachery. 
 
 4. By a description in the context which limits the noun 
 to a single object ; as, η <5ια$ήκη Ίη<Γ"2 XpufrS, the covenant 
 of Jesus Christ. 
 
 5. By being monadic in its nature ; i. e. representing 
 persons or things which exist singly ; or of which only one 
 can possibly be the subject of discourse ; as. εκκόψας τάς 
 S-jpag εϊύηλ&εν εις την ^υναικωνΠιν, having knocked at the gate, 
 he entered the women's apartment. 
 
 II. The Article is prefixed to nouns, when they de" 
 note a class of objects taken as a whole ; as, δ άν^ρωχός 
 ICti £νητο£, man is mortal ; λε^ομε'νον τους Stesg φρχρεΓν, ωόπερ 
 ο) χύνες,τζς άν^ρωπζς, saying that the Gods guard men as 
 dogs do. 
 
 III. The Article is frequently prefixed to abstract 
 Nouns. 
 
 1. When used in their most abstract sense ; as, ij άοίχια 
 καί 'η ακολασία με'} kjtgv των όντων κακόν itfn, injustice, and in- 
 temperance are the greatest of evils. 
 
 2. When the attribute is personified ; as, η Καχ 
 <x/3stfa, ε)#εν, and Malice, interrupting, said. 
 
Article. 
 
 The Article prefixed to a neuter Adjective, is used 
 for an abstract noun ; as, το χαλόν, beauty ; το otfiov, justice. 
 In these cases the abstract noun represents a class of 
 objects. 
 
 IV. The Article is frequently used as a Possessive Pro- 
 ?ioan ; as, £χι τω *τατρ/, κα/ τη μητρί μονόν ys^v/jtr^ai, άλλα 
 κα< ττ; «τατρίίι, that he was born not for his father or his mo- 
 ther only, but for his country. Demos, de cor. § 59. 
 
 V. The Article is sometimes used as a Relative Pro- 
 noun j as, τί δε φεύγεις, τέκνον ; Ιφι. τον 'Αχιλλέα, τον ιδεϊν txl<t- 
 χύνομαι ; what do you flee from, my child ? Iph. Achilles, 
 whom I am ashamed to see. Eurip. Iph. A. 1351. 
 
 When the Article is thus used as a Relative, the Verb to 
 which it belongs is frequently changed into a Participle ; as, 
 ejViv οι λιόντες, for oi λε^ονοΊ, there are those who say. The 
 Participle is often understood and sometimes the Article ; 
 as, ο gv toIs ουρανοί^ ; τ'ις εοτιν έμέ #άταξα£, (supp. ο) who struck 
 me ? 
 
 VI. The Article is sometimes used as a Demonstra- 
 tive Pronoun, especially by the early Poets ; as, rr,v <$* 
 ίγύ £x λάτω, but I will not release her 5 II. A. 29 ; οδε εΐνεν, 
 he said. 
 
 To this head may be referred the use of the Article with 
 μεν and δε, to express contra-distinction ; as. δ μεν, the one ; δ 
 δε, the other. In like manner the Pronoun ος is frequently 
 used with μεν and δε. 
 
 VII. Infinitives, Adjectives, Participles, and Ad- 
 verbs, and members of sentences are frequently used as 
 nouns, and in such cases the Article is generally pre* 
 fixed to them , as, του φι>οαΌφεΓν τό ζητεί*, inquiry is the 
 business of philosophy ; οί θνητοί, mortals ; τά εξω, external 
 things ; οξύς εις τό iravS 1 όρσν, quick at discovering all things ; 
 oi άμφ< Πλάτωνα, the followers of Plato ; and sometimes 
 Plato himself. 
 
 1. In such instances the noun to which the Article be- 
 I s expresses a class of obj< - 
 
 2. Adjectives in ixoj, are used with the Article in 
 two diffi -enses. In the singular they denote 
 generally a whole; as, τί ι . , the citizens taken col- 
 lectively. In the plural they signify some eireumstance de- 
 terminable by the context, or by general ; as, 
 τά Τρωϊκά, the Trojan war ; τά Ελληνικά, Grecian affairs, or 
 history. 
 
 11 
 
1 22 General Principles of Government. 
 
 VIII. A word or phrase added to a Substantive for 
 the purpose of description or definition, has commonly 
 the Article ; as, «τύνειμι άν0ρώ*Όΐ$ «τ ο Τ$ *γο&ύς> I am with 
 good men. 
 
 This is likewise the case after verbs of calling ; as, τόν 
 μόνον ά<$ωρο<5όκη7ον όνομά£ον7ε$, calling him the only incorrupti- 
 ble man. 
 
 1. The Participle must take the Article in this case to 
 distinguish its use, from what is called the participial con- 
 struction. 
 
 2. When the second word is merely in apposition without 
 defining the former, the Article is often omitted. 
 
 3. An Adjective before a Noun has one meaning when it 
 precedes^ and another when it follows the Article ; as, Μ 
 νΧχσίοις τοΐς rfoXiVais, with the citizens being rich, or because 
 they were rich ; i*i τοις flrXstfiois tfoXiVais, with the rich citi- 
 zens ; sV άκροΐ£ τοϊς opstfiv, on the mountains where they are 
 highest, i. e. on the summit of the mountains. 
 
 IX. The noun to which the Article belongs is fre- 
 quently understood ; as, τά μητρός (sc. ^ματα,^ the 
 things of his mother ; to avSpwffos, (sc. |ήμα,) this word, av- 
 §ρωιϊος. 
 
 X. In a proposition, the subject has generally the 
 Article, and the predicate has not ; as, ^τνευμα, δ ΘεΟ£, 
 God is a Spirit. 
 
 XL Proper names are not always subject to these 
 rules. 
 
 GOVERNMENT. 
 
 GENERiX PRINCIPLES OP GOVERNMENT. 
 
 The action of a verb may be considered in reference 
 either, 
 
 1 . To its immediate object ; as, διδόναι Ιμαυτόν, to give 
 myself; or 
 
 2. To a remote object ; as, διδόναι Ιμαυτον <ry #όλει, to 
 give myself to the State ; /3οη$είν τ γ <α«•ρί<5ι, to aid my 
 country ; ά«ταλλάτ<Γε»ν τινά ν ο tf ο υ, to deliver some one from 
 disease ; φείδεσαι των i ρ ίφω ν, to spare the kids. 
 
 The immediate object of an active verb, is that on which 
 thfc action is exerted ; it is properly in the accusative. The 
 
General Principles of Government. 
 
 123 
 
 remote object is not acted upon by the verb ; but is merely 
 an object to which the action tends or is acquired ; or from 
 respect to which the action is exerted, or of which it takes 
 part. 
 
 It is sometimes joined to the immediate object after an 
 active verb ; and still more frequently follows the Neuter 
 or Intransitive verb, as being the object which gave rise to 
 the action of that verb. In either case it may take a pre- 
 position, or may stand alone in dependence on the verb. 
 This distinction between the immediate and remote object, 
 is but little observed in English ; almost every object with 
 reference to which the action takes place, being put in the 
 accusative or objective case. Hence a very large class of 
 words are considered, in Greek, as Intransitive, and govern 
 a genitive or dative of the remote object ; which in English 
 Syntax are ranked among Active or Transitive verbs. To 
 some extent, indeed, the distinction is arbitrary ; and we 
 shall see that the Greeks themselves used certain words 
 sometimes as transitive with the object in the accusative, 
 and sometimes as intransitive with the object in the geni- 
 tive or dative. The following remarks are intended to aid 
 the younger student in tracing the distinction more clearly, 
 between the use of the accusative of an immediate object 
 on the one hand, and the genitive and dative of a remote one 
 •n the other. 
 
 OENITIVt. 
 
 I. The genitive of the remote object may be put after all 
 words expressing the idea of relation, for the purpose of 
 making that relation clear and determinate, 
 
 Verbs. Καλώς εχειν f/iSrjs, to be well off as to liquor, to 
 be drunk ; ευ εχείν φρένων, to be favorable as to his feelings ; 
 &ς «τοίών εϊχον, as they were able in respect to their feet, i. e. 
 as fast as they could run; Herod, vi. 116 ; Ύίλ\ω <rS βίχ 
 sZ Wti, Tellus being advanced (as to) in life ; iirgiyw&ai 
 *ρηο£, to be in haste with respect to the battle ; υφιεναι οργϊ,ς, 
 to cease (in respect to) from anger ; ξυνετριβτ,ν ττ,ς κεφαλή, 
 (I was broken as to my head,) I had my head brok 
 
 1. Sometimes the genitive explains a whole clause ; as, 
 <*άν7ων μα$ημά7ων κυριώ7α7α,*ο υ τον μαν£άνον7α /3ίλ7ίω γίγη(5%οα, 
 τά ιτερι cou£ νόμους κείμενα, the chief of all sciences with res- 
 P< y ct to the improvement of the learner, is that of the laws. 
 
 2. Adjectives, which have an active signification, and 
 
1 &4 Government of Cases. 
 
 are mostly derived from active verbs or correspond to them 
 in meaning, have that object in the genitive, which after 
 the verb would be in the accusative ; as/ ολε&ριοι φίλων, de- 
 structive to friends ; άρΊ^α&ης καχων, lately instructed in 
 misfortune. 
 
 3. Hence words denoting a state or act of the mind " with 
 respect to" any object, and directed towards it, but not act- 
 ing ©n it, are followed by the genitive. This includes all 
 adjectives «and verbs, denoting affections or desires of the 
 mind ; viz. knowledge, ignorance, experience, forgetful- 
 ness, concern, custom, recollection, carelessness, desire, 
 aversion, &c. &c. In all these cases, the emotion or act is 
 put forth " with respect" to some object ; but without so 
 acting upon it, as to affect its state, which would require an 
 accusative. 
 
 4. Words denoting abundance or fulness, and want or 
 emptiness, govern a genitive of the object, "irr respect" to 
 which the abundance or want exists. Adjectives and verbs 
 of plenty and want, separation, filling or depriving ; verbs 
 of bereaving, delivering, hindering, rejecting, making way 
 for, repelling, ceasing and causing to cease, &c. &c. have 
 all the idea of want, or plenty, as the ground of their gov- 
 erning the genitive. Substantives likewise, which are de- 
 rived from these words, are often followed by a genitive of 
 the object "in respect" to which the plenty or want exists?. 
 
 5. The same original sense of the genitive seems to give 
 rise to the construction of the comparative with the geni- 
 tive ; as, μείζων #α7ρο£, greater with respect to ; or in com- 
 parison with his father. Hence all words denoting a com- 
 parison, may be followed by a genitive of the object " in re- 
 spect" to which the comparison is made. To this class be- 
 long verbs derived from the comparative, as, ηΠα<τ^αι, &c, 
 and those which signify to surpass, to rule, to take the lead, 
 to govern, to obey, &c. and adjectives denoting power, 
 ability or control ; as, ΙγχραΊης, &c. Substantives likewise ; 
 as, riTld rS *Όμά7ο£, defeat by means of drinking, i. e. intem- 
 perance in drinking. 
 
 So likewise words which denote comparison in respect 
 to value ; as, άξιος, literally, " equal in value." Hence all 
 words in which there is a determination of value ; as, " to 
 buy, sell, exchange, estimate, &c. govern the genitive : 
 and hence, the general rule, " the price of a thing is put 
 in tha genitive." 
 
 A comparison is likewise implied in words which ex- 
 
Government of Case». 
 
 LSI 
 
 press a difference ; as, διάφορος, ϋερος, αλλο$, άλλ•Γο£, άλ- 
 λό7ριο£. 
 
 That " with respect" to which any thing is done is fre- 
 quently the reason of an action ; hence those words which 
 denote the reason or origin of a thing, or that %i on account" 
 of which any act is performed, are put in the genitive ; as, 
 Δαναών χεχολωμενοι, angry (on account of) w r ith the Greeks. 
 Accordingly verbs of accusing, slandering, condemn- 
 ing, acquitting, and generally those that pertain to judi- 
 cial proceedings all of them govern the genitive. Likewise, 
 verbs of commencing or originating take a genitive after 
 them. Verbs of praying have frequently a genitive of the 
 person or thing • ς in respect" to which the request is made. 
 So likewise have adjectives. After exclamations, the noun 
 which occasions the exclamation is frequently put in the 
 genitive ; as, ώ Ζευ /3αοΊλευ, της λειτ7ο7η7ο£ των φρενών, Ο Ju- 
 piter 1 the acuteness of his mind. 
 
 II. The second principal relation expressed by the geni- 
 tive is that of the proportion of a whole to its parts ; i. e. 
 the genitive is put partitively. This is common to most 
 languages. — The genitive therefore follows verbs of all 
 kinds, even those which govern the accusative, when the 
 action refers, not to the whole object, but only to a part ;* 
 as, της γης Πεμον, they laid waste a part of the country ; £γω 
 οιόα των εμών ήλιχιω7ών, I know some of the same age with 
 myself; Μηύοα χρεών, to roast some of the flesh. This is 
 expressed in French by the article partat if \ and in English 
 by the omission of the article, or by the word "some." 
 After adverbs of time and of place, the same construction 
 often occurs; as, άλλοθι γαίης, in another part of the coun- 
 try ; οψε χ της ημέρας, at a late part of the day. 
 
 Hence many words are followed by the genitive, which 
 signify participation, or at least imply that idea. Among 
 these are verbs which denote to partake, to impart, to enjoy, 
 to obtain, to receive, to take, and the contrary idea, to let 
 go. In these cases there is a reference, more or less dis- 
 tinct to that part of which the action takes place ; as, άφιεναι 
 τχ δόρα7ο£, means to let go of the spear ; άφιε'ναι <ro όορυ, in 
 the accusative is to hurl the spear. In the former instance 
 the action is exerted only "in respect" to the object ; iu 
 the latter, it arts upon the object and chan_ -tate. 
 
 From this idea of part implied in the genitive, the super- 
 
 * This construction is not uncommon in English, e.g. "I o-ive 
 liberally of my property for his relief." 
 
 I 
 
126 Government of Cases. 
 
 lative is followed in the genitive by the noun representing 
 the class of which the Superlative is the chief or best 
 part. Hence too the genitive is put after Verbs, Adjectives, 
 and Adverbs, derived from the Superlative, and those which 
 express a high degree of preferableness. 
 
 III. The genitive is used to denote the person or thing 
 to which any object belongs, whether it be a quality, proper- 
 ty, habit, duty, &c. and those likewise from which any thing 
 arises or proceeds. Hence verbs, denoting possession, pro- 
 perty, duty, custom, power, govern the genitive. Hence, 
 verbs of hearing, smelling, tasting, feeling, are followed by 
 a genitive of the object from which the sensation proceeds ; 
 likewise verbs signifying to learn or experience. 
 
 For the same reason the genitive expresses the material 
 of which any thing is made, with substantives, verbs and 
 adjectives. The dative is also used for the genitive, when 
 the material of which any thing is made may be considered, 
 as the means by which it was made. A genitive is used 
 likewise with substantives of all kinds, to denote the author 
 of the thing implied in the substantive ; as, "Ηρας ahaieicu, 
 wanderings, arising from Juno. 
 
 IV. The genitive follows verbs compounded with prepo- 
 sitions which govern that case ; when the prepositions can 
 be separated from the verbs without altering their signifi- 
 cation. 
 
 V. The genitive is used in determining time or place, 
 when they are parts of a larger duration or extension — 
 — where, when, how long, since, within the space of. 
 
 In many of the cases stated above, particular verbs gov- 
 ern a dative or accusative. Many of these will be specified 
 under the rules to be given hereafter. 
 
 DATIVE. 
 
 The Dative in Greek has two senses ; the one, that of 
 the dative in other languages answering to the question, 
 41 to, or for whom or what ?" the other, that of the Latin 
 ablative. 
 
 1. The dative represents the distant object to which an 
 action tends, (whether transitive or intransitive,) or from a 
 regard to which it was commenced ; as, tfsfcs&at nw, to 
 obey any one ; SiSovai τί τινι, to give to any one. It has, 
 therefore, generally the same construction as in Latin, ex- 
 cept that more verbs are followed by the dative in GreeJt. 
 Some classes of yerbs vary in their construction, being fol- 
 
Government of Cases. 129 
 
 lowed at times by an accusative, and at times by a dative : 
 this is sometime* the case, likewise, with Ihe 
 
 dative. There is also a considerable variety of construc- 
 tion in particular words under the several da — 
 
 II. The dative in Greek also supplies, in a great measure, 
 the place of the ablative in Latin. In this sense it expres- 
 ses the idea of companionship or connection, answering the 
 question u with whom or what ?" of an instrument or me 
 answering to " whereby ?" of an impulse, excitement, or 
 external cause, answering to ''from what f" ^ on what ac- 
 count ?" " for what ?" and of the manner of an action. 
 
 It expresses likewise the relation of measure, decree, &c. 
 with the comparative ; as, £νιαυ7ω «ρεόβοίερος, older by a 
 year. It is put also in definitions of time and place, in an- 
 swer to the question " where ?" and '• when ?!' 
 
 III. The genitive is often used for the dative, or the da- 
 tive for the genitive, as the writer is desirous to fix the at- 
 tention of the reader upon the source, or upon the instru- 
 ment or end of the specified action. 
 
 Thus, when Homer says of Hector, II. viii. 235, he would 
 burn the ships with flaming fire, ντας• sWp/jCfci «rup.• χηλίω, he 
 fixes the mind upon fire, as the instrument by which this is 
 done : but when in another place, II. ix. 242, he writes, 
 αύτάς τ* εμ^ρήό'ειν μαλερου ττυρΟ£, that he would burn them 
 from fire, he directs the attention backward to fire, as that 
 from which their being burnt proceeded. The same obser- 
 \ation applies to the following examples ; άν7/ο$ *&λ&' 'A^iXr//, 
 he went against Achilles, II. xx. 422; άνΐία Πηλε/ωνο; 
 going against the son of Peleus, II. xx. 113 ; οΓνω βε,βαρήο- 
 «£, laden with wine ; λιμοΓο βαρξίας χείρας, his hands heavy 
 from pestilence, i. e. with pestilence ; <5ιχα£ου0Ίν αχαρι<Γτία£, 
 they gave judgment, as to ingratitude ; <5ικάζον7ε$ οώΊοϊς, giv- 
 ing judgment to them. 
 
 ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 The accusative expresses, as in other languages, the per- 
 son or thing which is affected by the action of the accom- 
 panying verb. Some verbs which are not strictly transitive, 
 however, are followed by the accusative ; particularly by 
 nouns which denote not the passive recipient, but the ob- 
 ject of immediate reference ; as, tfs^v, υβρίζειν, άδιχίΐν, 
 αμείβεσαι. τρο^νεΓν, φ^άνειν, ενιτροτεόειν, άποδώράύχειν. In 
 these and similar c;isrs, the object of the action would be 
 more naturally put in the dative 
 
128 Government. 
 
 Many verbs, which signify an emotion or feeling with re- 
 gard to an object, as, to be ashamed, afraid, to compassion- 
 ate, are followed by an accusative which expresses the ob- 
 ject, and at the same time the effective cause of the emo- 
 tion ; as, ακίχόνομαι τον €>εόν, I reverence the Deity. This 
 takes place with some neuter verbs ; as, άΚγεΤν τι, to suffer 
 in respect to something. 
 
 Many verbs have an accusative not only of the immediate 
 object of action, but likewise of the more remote ; i.e. the 
 person or thing which the action respects, and which is more 
 regularly in the dative. 
 
 The accusative may follow all kinds of words by synec- 
 doche, κα7ά, <$ία, &c. being understood.* 
 
 GOVERNMENT. 
 
 Government of Substantives. 
 
 I. One substantive governs another, signifying a dif- 
 ferent thing, in the genitive ; as, <rS Θε5 μαχρο^υμία, the 
 long suffering of God ; /3ημα X&s, a seat of stone. 
 
 1 . The latter substantive generally expresses the class or 
 kind to which the former belongs ; or some relation of ori- 
 gin, cause, possession, or property. 
 
 2. This rule extends to pronouns, and to the article used 
 as a pronoun ; as, κρι^ήν την <rS iWs, the barley of his horse. 
 
 3. The genitive often denotes the noun, in respect to 
 which the preceding neun has its meaning ; as, άχ/ελεία 
 της Χίου, a message in respect to Chios. 
 
 4. The governing noun is often understood ; as, 'Ολυμ- 
 πάς η 'Αλεξάνδρα (supp. μη?ηρ,) Olympia the mother of Al- 
 exander. Efe *δχ, (supp. <5όμον,) to Hades ; iv ais, (supp. 
 δόμω,) in Hades. 
 
 5. A substantive in the genitive is often put for an adjec- 
 tive, to express quality more strongly ; as, βά£ος γης, depth 
 of earth, for βα^εΤα γη ; η irspiMsia της χάριΊος,. abundant 
 grace ; η άύΐούίατα #λέ7*, inconstant riches. 
 
 6. The Attics use a noun in the genitive, preceded by a 
 neuter article, for the noun itself; as, το της τύχης, for tj τύχη, 
 
 * Foi a full exhibition of this subject, see Matthiae's Greek Gram- 
 mar, II. 450—615, from which most of the foregoing observation? 
 have been taken. 
 
Adjectives. 129 
 
 fortune ;" το των νραμμά7ων, for τά ^ράμμα7α, letters ; τά των 
 βαρβάρων αττιύΊά /<rfi, for oi βάρβαροι, barbarians are faitblc 
 Demosth. 
 
 7. Instead of the genitive, a noun with a preposition is 
 often found ; as, αΐυχία η ητερί τ* /3ί«, the evils of life, for 
 ατυχία /3ί*. 
 
 8. The dative is often used for the genitive ; as, oJx 
 Άτρείίη Ά/αμεμνονι ^νδανε όυμψ, it did not please the mind 
 of Agamemnon, the son of Atreus ; Horn. *ττα7ρι τιμωρόν φον*, 
 the avenger of your father's murder. 
 
 9. The noun that should be in the genitive is often, es- 
 pecially by the Poets, put in the accusative, governed by a 
 preposition implied ; as, τί»<ίε φρε'να^ Ί'κε7ο *εν^ο£, for (TS φρε- 
 να$, what grief has invaded your mind ? 
 
 10. The genitive is sometimes put elliptically, ένεκα be- 
 ing understood ; as, ω μελέων ίγώ κακο£, Oh wretched I ! 
 (ένεκα) on account of my misfortunes. 
 
 11. An adjective or article in the neuter gender, 
 without a substantive, governs the genitive ; as, το χρή*- 
 7ov tS Θεού, the kindness of God ; τά της τίίχης, the gifts of 
 fortune. 
 
 1. In these cases a noun is understood, which is really 
 the governing word. 
 
 2. Sometimes a preposition precedes the noun ; as, τά 
 #αρά της τΰχη$, the things of fortune. 
 
 3. The adjective, thus used in the abstract, is often with- 
 out a genitive, and then it has an adverbial sense ; as, το 
 λοιπόν, finally. 
 
 III. If the latter of two substantives expresses 
 some quality or circumstance it is often put in the 
 genitive ; as, άνήρ μεγάλης άρετη$, a man of great virtue ; 
 αυθάδης φρενών, daring of soul ; #ρω7εύειν* της άρη7η$, to be 
 first in virtue. 
 
 The latter substantive is more commonly put in the ac- 
 cusative, by synecdoche, κα7ά, <5ια, &c. being understood ; 
 as, ιουδαίος τον τρόπον, (supp. κα7ά,) of ingenuous disposi- 
 tion. 
 
 GONERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 I. All Adjectives may govern a genitive which more 
 exactly defines the idea contained in the Adjective ; as, 
 
 * ffpcmfov is the same with πμ*τ§ς tlvni. 
 
130 Government, 
 
 όνγγνωμ,ων άν&ρω*ίνων άμαρίημάϋων, forgiving in respect to hu- 
 man errors. 
 
 In this rule is embraced every case, in the subsequent 
 ones, (see Gen. Prin. of Gov. page 122.) 
 
 II. Adjectives signifying any affection of the mind, 
 (as knowledge, ignorance, &c.) plenty, want, power, 
 participation, diversity, and separation, govern a geni- 
 tive. 
 
 The genitive generally denotes the origin or source, or 
 that in respect to which the qualities expressed by the ad- 
 jective exist ; as, epvsstpog τ2 ίυα^υχεΓν, experienced (as to) in 
 misfortunes ; i'sftstoi έΏΓίοΊάμενρι ttfs&'oio, horses acquainted (as 
 to) with the plain ; άδαημΑνες μάχη$, ignorant as to war ; 
 ήίί*7ου 0εάμα7ο£ adea7os,not perceiving (as to)the most pleasant 
 sight ; των χαλιών asttipos, unexperienced (as to) in hard- 
 ships ; άφνεώς /3»ό7οιο, affluent (as to) wealth ; *ρημ•£ ανδρών y 
 deprived of men ; aJos ιτολεμοιο, hungry (as to) for war ; της 
 *πί(ύ%ξ χοΊέων, angry on account of the deception ; iyxpoflfe 
 e/vs, not partaking of wine, i. e. temperate; άλλό'7ριον *% 
 έαυ72 αξίας, far from his dignity ; U<f7epos ουδενδ^ άρε7^, removed 
 from none in virtue, i. e. inferior to none in virtue. 
 
 It is desirable that the student should make himself fa- 
 miliar with this mode of solution, and apply it in his read- 
 ing. 
 
 III. Adjectives denoting dignity and worth, and those 
 which refer to crime, innocence, or price, govern the 
 genitive ; as, άξιος μι<τ$2, worthy of a reward. 
 
 Πάν7α ωνια «rXxfe, all things may be bought for money ; 
 ϊνοχος foXslas, in danger of slavery. 
 
 IV. Compounds of «privative, and verbals which de- 
 note action or capacity, especially those in τος, ιχος and 
 ηριος, govern the genitive ; as, 
 
 'A0s'a7o£ και άνήκοο$ <xtf άν7ων, without sight or hearing from 
 any,i. e. without seeing or hearing any ; <ρυλα7ικο£τ5 <Τώμα- 
 7o£, guarding the body ; ΉαρεχΙνώς των ά^α^ύν, imparting 
 from good things, bestowing benefits ; λυ7ήριο$ δειμ,αΐων, free- 
 ing from terrors. 
 
 Verbals govern the genitive, from the signification of 
 their verbs ; and compounds of α privative, by the force of 
 *νευ, from which the α is derived. 
 
 V. Partitives and words placed partitively, compar- 
 atives, superlatives, interrogatives, indefinites, and 
 
Adjective*. 131 
 
 wme numerate, govern the genitive plural ; as, *ρωΊος 
 Αθηναίων, the first of the Athenians ; εν των πλοίων, one of 
 the ships ; οι παλαιοί των τοιη7ων, the ancient Poets - y oi «rpos- 
 γονΊες των *οιη7ών, the most illustrious Poets. 
 
 1. The genitive expresses, in this case, the class to 
 which the preceding word belongs. Πρω7ο$ Ά&ηναιων de- 
 notes, the first from among the Athenians ; οι προέ-χονΊες των 
 ΉΤοιη7£ν, the most excellent from among the Poets. 
 
 2. The Superlative is frequently followed by a genitive, 
 not of a class of objects, but of the reciprocal Pronouns, 
 ίμαι/7ου, <Τεαυ7ου, eW /ου, and then denotes the highest degree, 
 to which the person or thing can attain ; as, ενεάν δε αρισ7α 
 αύ7η Ι ωϋ 7 >j ς ενείχη, τριηκόοΊα εκφέρει, and when it is the best 
 possible, it bears three hundred ; ίνα αύ7ο£ α υ 7 ο υ τνγγάντ) 
 β ε"ΚΊ ιύΊ ος ων, that he may be the best possible. 
 
 3. Sometimes, instead of the genitive, some other case 
 with a preposition is used ; as, εξ άτία<Γωνή καλλί<τ7η, most 
 beautiful of all ; <Juva7w7cA) εν rfj Ελλάδι, the most powerful 
 in Greece ; #ρω7ο£ ίν τοΤς τΰοΐΥΐΊαΐς, first among Poets. 
 
 4. Instead of the genitive, the case of the partitive is 
 sometimes used ; as, τίς φίΧας τέςμέν ά^ε'κίεινε, τχς δε πέννας 
 ίίζτοίη<Τε, for των φίλων, some of his friends he killed, some 
 he impoverished. 
 
 5. The partitives τις and βΐς are sometimes omitted ; as, 
 φε'ρω <foi <τ7ολήν των καλλ:<τ7ων, (sc. μίαν,) I bring you a very ex- 
 cellent robe. Xen. ; αυ7ό<; ^ελε των μενονΐων εΓναι, (sc. £%,) 
 he desired to be one of those who remained ; Thucyd. ; fi 
 των φίλων (sc. τις or ε7ς.) you are one of my friends. 
 
 6. Partitives, &c. agree in gender with the substantives 
 which follow in the genitive. When the substantives are 
 of different genders, the partitives, &c. commonly agree 
 with the former, sometimes with the latter. 
 
 7. Collective nouns in the genitive singular are govern- 
 ed by partitives, &c. 
 
 8. Adjectives in the positive form, when they express, in 
 a superlative sense, the quality of the subject, govern the 
 genitive plural ; as, ε|οχο£ tfav7cjv, the most excellent of all ; 
 Δία θεάων, the most divine of the Goddesses. 
 
 9. The Article is sometimes used as a partitive, and the 
 Relative with αν, as an Indefinite ; as, εν fid' αν τών φυλών, 
 in whichsoever of the tribes. 
 
 10. *Έχα(ίΙος each, when used as a partitive is sometimes 
 put in the plural ; as, εκαο^ατων σκευών, each of his imple- 
 ments. 
 
f32 Government 
 
 DATIVE. 
 
 VI. Adjectives may govern the dative, which have 
 the sign to or for after them in English. 
 
 This rule includes Adjectives of profit or disprofit, 
 likeness or unlikeness, trust, advantage, obedience, 
 •learness, propriety, facility, attachment, nearness, 
 equality, and their opposites ; (see Gen. Prin. page 122.) 
 as, ίκελο£ Διΐ, like to Jove, i. e, Jove being the object to 
 which he is like ; όφελ/μο$ vy *όλει, profitable to the State, 
 i. e. the State bejng the object to which he is profitable ; 
 τοις ^ενναΓοις το αϊόγρς έχόρ>, to the generous, baseness is 
 odious ; ένοχος τγ κρίνει, obnoxious to the judgment ; ε*μοί 
 tfixpos τε^νηκεν, ε'κείνοκ γλυκύς, αυτζί δε τερ^νό^, he died, bitter 
 to me, sweet to them, welcome to himself. 
 
 Some adjectives of likeness govern the Genitive. 
 
 f O αύΊός, the same, governs the* dative as adjectives of 
 likeness ; as, των αΰ7ών ipw tfoi, I love the same things with 
 you. Luc. ; νόμιζε της αύίης ε/να» ζημίας άξιους *τχς 4\ηχρί , αΊον• 
 lag τοις εξαμαρΐανουόΊ, consider those who conceal, equally 
 worthy of punishment with those who sin. Isoc. 
 
 VII. Compounds of tfuv, δμό$, όμοιος, and verbals in τος 
 used passively, govern the dative ; as, (Τυγγεντ,ς τω ιτα7ρί, 
 related to my father ; όμοο^ιος τω θεω, of the same nature 
 with God ; τάνία δυναΊά Θεώ, all things are possible to God ; 
 ayvcjtrtov τοΐς iroKkolg, unknown to rhe vulgar. 
 
 VIII. Verbals in τεον govern the case of the verb they 
 are derived from, with a native of the doer ; as, flew εμοί. I 
 must go. i.e. there must be going, as to me ; veoTg ζτΧωΙέον 
 ς-ιγύρονΊας, the young should imitate the old, i. e. th er © 
 should bean imitation of the old to the young; Simon.; τοΐςμέν 
 υιτάρχουβΊ νόμοΐ£ χρηΛεον. κα*ν*£ <5s Είχη μή $ε7=ον, we should use 
 the present laws, and not rashly enact new ones. Demosth. 
 
 1. Verbals in τεον express necessity, and answer to ge- 
 runds in the nominative case. The Verb J(f1l is generally 
 understood after them, but is sometimes introduced ; as, 
 ypatfleov MK. The Attics use them in the plural ; as, ypatf- 
 7ε'α Ιμοί ε^ιαίολήν, I must write a letter. 
 
 2. The verbal is sometimes joined with a substantive, 
 like other adjectives ; as, γραπΊέα εμοί'ετϊκΤίολή, 1 must write 
 a letter. 
 
 3. The verbal sometimes governs an accusative of the 
 doer, especially when its verb governs the dative ; as 
 
— m 
 
 Verb — Gcnxt> 
 
 νουν εγονΊαςτοΐς χαχως φρονουβΊ, the prudent on 
 not to obey the unwise. Isoc. ; szwfxfrtliov τυ. », τά 
 
 ;, υναΓκα, for αύ7ώ, yuvaixi, some things are to be looked 
 to by him, some by his wife. 
 
 1. Substantives and verbals often govern the dative by 
 the force of the words from which they are derived ; as, 
 τοΐς zsafiitfiv 'ακολου#η7ικο£ 6 veos, youth follou - ire. 
 
 5. Subxtantires compounded with <fov and ομό$ govern the 
 dative ; as, όυόΊρατιωΊτ,ς αυ7οΪ£, a fellow soldier. 
 
 0. There are many adjectives which govern either the 
 genitive or dative ; as, όμοιος, like ; 7<Γο$, equal; ομώνυμος, of the 
 same name ; όμο*ττά7ριο£, of the same father ; όμομή7ριο$, of the 
 same mother; tfjv7po<pos, educated together ; <Τυνή0η$ familiar ; 
 iflVjj£(Kro£, of the same force ; κοινί^, common ; πλοίόιος, άφ\ 
 rich;' eo-ropos, abundant ; ζνδεης, poor; £νοχο£, ύπόδιχος, ί: 
 £υνο£, exposed, obnoxious; οϊχεΐος, familiar; wvios to be sold ; 
 δούλος, a slave : sKs'Jspog, free ; as, όμοιος του πούρος, or 
 <sa7p», like his father ; ομώνυμος tS Ήούρός } or τϊ craTpi, of the 
 same name with his father. 
 
 GOVERNMENT OF VERBS* 
 * GENITIVE. 
 
 Ι. "Ειμί and χίνομαι, signifying possession, property 
 or duty, govern the genitive ; 
 
 Του κυρίου έ<Γμ£ν, we belong to the master ; των άργβνίων 
 £<f\i τους άρχομϊ'νου^ «ΌϋΓν εΰδαίμονα^, it is the duty of rulers 
 to make their subjects happy. 
 
 1 . The genitive is governed by some noun understood ; 
 as, χρήμα, sspxy^a &c. 
 
 2. To ίίμί, signifying office or convenience, the preposi- 
 tion cpog with the genitive is joined ; as, ίπροςΙαΊρζ (To. 
 
 - not belong to a skilful physician ; kx Strt/Vp Λΐ^ς, 
 
 not proper for the State. 
 
 rbs -~χω. 5ιάχ5ΐμαι, διοιΊίΑ-ημαι, τοιίω. >ίκω. ^'ίΓχω, 
 itfa adverbs of quality, often govern tl 
 
 this is ray opinion, Pint. , 
 . to arrive at great possessions ; Herodot. ; της 
 • ive at great love of learning. In 
 i>es a pre ι is understood. 
 
 For the isative is sometimes found; 
 
 vsxpi>.. the colour of death ; Lucian. 
 
134 Government. 
 
 Π. Verbs often govern the genitive by the force of 
 some noun implied in them ;^ 
 
 BcuftXsJsjv ε^νών, i e. /3atf/Xsa εΓναι idvwv, to be king of the 
 Gentiles ; εν^υμεΓν <nvo£, i. e. $νι0υμίαν <πνο$ εχε*ν, to have a 
 desire for something ; ελα<τ7ω <fs τ2 Srafpa, i. e. νομίζω <fs έλάτ- 
 7ω <rs ΙταΓρ*, I think you inferior to your companion. 
 
 III. When the action of a verb refers not to the 
 whole of a thing, but to a part, that part is often put in 
 the genitive ; 
 
 Kparsiv λύκον τών ώτων, to take a wolf by the ears ; εκρά- 
 Τη^ε ς -Jjg χειρός αυ75 ; he took his hand. 
 
 IV. A noun denoting the matter of which any thing 
 is made, is commonly put in the genitive ; 
 
 Άνίριάν7α sVonjtfav μαρμάρ*. they made a statue οι marble; 
 βΊδήρ* «nwon^vov, made of iron. 
 
 The noun is sometimes put in the dative. 
 
 A largo class of verbs take after them a genitive expres- 
 sing the origin or cause of the action denoted by the verb. 
 These will now be enumerated. 
 
 V. Verbs of sense govern the genitive, except those 
 ©f sight, which govern the accusative. 
 
 AiVdt /.νομα», to perceive ; άκ£ω, άκροάομαι, α'/ω, χλύω, to hear^ 
 ο^φραίνομαι. to smell ; γεύομαι, to taste ; άγομαι, ε^/ψαύω, 
 όιγω, ^lyyavw, to touch ; εκλαμβάνομαι, to take hold of, Lc. 
 
 Aitfdavs7ai της γης, he perceives the ground — the ground be- 
 ing the cause of his perception; yxxtfu rS άν^ρώ^*, I heard 
 the man — the man being the cause of hearing ; κλ£$! μεο 
 hear (from) me ; οζζΐ μόρ*, he smells of myrrh ; μή μ* orafls, 
 touch me not — derive not from me the feeling of touch. 
 
 1. These verbs govern the accusative, among the Attics. 
 Ψηλαφάω, to handle, has always an accusative. Verbs of 
 hearing sometimes govern the accusative of the thing heard, 
 and the genitive of the person or thing from which it is heard ; 
 as, ην YjXoCtfoLTS μου. 
 
 2. ΜανΑάνω, to learn ; (Γυνίημι, to perceive ; ΐίυνόάνομαι, ίο 
 inquire; βάτζΊω, to tinge, εχω, to hold; and some others, often 
 govern the ge litive, from a similarity in signification to the 
 verbs of sense. 
 
 VI. Verbs govern the genitive, which signify any 
 affection of the mind ; as, desire, disgust, regard, neg- 
 lect, admiration, contempt, memory, forgetfulness, &c. 
 
 'Ετηόυμε'ω, ορέγομαι, ^λίχομαι, εφίεμαι, to desire ; εράω to 
 love, (Ιμείρω λ^λαίομαι to desire, Poet.) ; με'λει, it is the care 
 
Verb — (icnltiri. 
 
 «f; φρον7ί£ω, έ*ιμέλομαι, κήδομαι, εΥΙρενομα» * rare of; 
 
 ϋλίγωρέω, to undervalue ; ί\έγω 9 ία ι 
 
 υ-ττεροράω, ύ?Γ6ρφρον;ω, to despise ; μνημονΐ.'ω, μί'μνημ.' 
 member ; λαν^άνομαι, άμνημονε^ω, to ι 
 
 Κ//)ΐ7ο Δαναών, she felt concern f<>r the Greeks — the 
 Greeks being the source of her concern ; / ( ρά<Τ0η rr t g 
 yuvaix's, he loved bis wife ; &<3νεΓων φρον7ίζειν, to taki 
 strangers ; αμελεί των φίλων, you feel no concern 
 friends ; όαυμάζω (fa, I admire you — you being the 
 my admiration ; μή όλι^ωρεΓ Παιδείας, d ».<>t cbas 
 
 ing ; i<p0ovT]<te <rrs ysilviatfsug, he ei ccount of 
 
 the neighbourhood; τον δε έλειπε αυΐβ χωόμενον εΰξώνοιο / 
 χός, she left him there, grieved on account of the well 
 girt woman. Horn. 
 
 1. Πο£έω and ύΉ^οδίω govern the accusative ; and some- 
 times «Έίι^υμέω, ^λίχομαι, μνημονεύω, ε'τϊιλαν^άνομαι• 
 
 2. Verbs signifying to love, (except εράω) admire, regard, 
 neglect, often govern an accusative. 
 
 VII. Verbs of taking, or giving part in a thing, gov- 
 ern the genitive ; 
 
 This includes Verbs signifying to partake, to obtain, 
 to enjoy, to aim at, to communicate, to aid, to try or 
 attempt. 
 
 Τυγχάνω, Ι^Ίυ^χάνω, μείρομαι, λα^χάνω, λαμβάνω, εΈτιλαμ- 
 €άνω, χυρε'ω, to obtain ; κληρονομε'ω, to obtain an inheritance ; 
 κοινωνεω, με7αλαμβάνω, με7εχω, to partake ; με7α<5ίόωμι, to 
 •ommunicate ; 'απολαύω, ονημ,αι, to enjoy, fee. 
 
 Τιμη£ χαϊ χακο£ ων έλαχε, though wicked, he gained hon- 
 or — honor being that from which he partook ; ε*άν λάβωμεν 
 4χο\ης, if we may take of leisure — if we may get leisure ; 
 κακίας £αον με7αλα€εΓν, η 'αρείχ^ με7αδιδουναι , it is easier to par- 
 take from (of) pleasure, than to impart (from) virtue. 
 
 1. Λαμβάνομαι, με7εχω, κληρονομέω, λα^χάνω, τυγχάνω, some- 
 times govern the accusative ; καρ^όομαι always. 
 
 2. Verbs of communicating, aiding, partaking, often gov- 
 ern the dative of the person. Κοινωνώ <ra 'α<5ελφφ ττ { ς παιδείας, 
 I have a share in common with my brother, (of) the in- 
 struction. 
 
 VIII. Verbs of plenty or want, filling or depriving, 
 govern the genitive. 
 
 Πλήόω, τίληρόω, γ*μ*Ίζω } με<τ7όω, ΌΊματλημι, γψν, to fill - 3 
 
*36 Government. 
 
 ευ<Βίορεω, νίψΜεύω, to abound ; ζϊΧχΊέω, to be rich ; χορ7ά£ω, 
 to satiate ; ίαίερίω, ύύίερίζω, to be inferior, to want; 'ελατ- 
 7όομαι, to be inferior ; <τ7ερέω, ^υμνοω, 'αφαιρε'ομαι, to de- 
 prive, &c. 
 
 : _ Msvsoff jpplvfis" #ίμ^λαν7ο, his soul was full (as to) rage; 
 .γεμει κακών, is full of evil ; ηυφορϊνΊο της ηδονής, they satiated 
 themselves (in respect to) with pleasure ; χρυ(Τ5 νηη<τά(Τ$ω 
 νηα, let him fill his ship (from) with gold ; 'εΐζε<τ7Ιψάν7ο τΤό7οιο, 
 they crowned (from) with wine ; εύζίορεΐ or περιάγει χρημ- 
 ά7ων, he abounds as to riches ; 'εμ-ττλεών ευφροσύνης τάς 
 καρδίας ημών, filling our hearts with gladness ; 'ε«ττλερουν7ο 
 χαράς, they were full of joy ; όψου δειΊαι he wants (in respect 
 to) meat ; 'αιΐοόφαΧεις φρένων, deprived (as to) mind ; ο #ο'λεμο£ 
 απάνΊων α^α^ών ψχς άοΚΊΊας 'αχεύΊερηύε, the war deprived the 
 citizens (as to) of all their goods ; 9 αφαιρείσαι τίνα της 9 *ρχηζ 9 
 to cut any one off from his government. 
 
 Δεόμαι, to entreat, which properly denotes, to want, gov- 
 erns the genitive ; as, δέομαι <te, I entreat (from) you. 
 
 Πνέω, to breathe, as it denotes fulness, governs the gen- 
 itive ; as, tv ει κακίας, to breathe hatred. Άφαιρε'ομαι some- 
 times governs the accusative for the genitive ; as, αφαιρείσαι 
 τίνα της 'αρχής, to deprive any one of his government : here 
 κα7ά is understood. Sometimes the noun denoting the per- 
 son, is put in the dative ; as, αφαιρείσαι τινι τήν αρχήν. 
 
 IX. Verbs which signify to rule, to excel, to be infe- 
 rior, to begin, and end, govern the genitive. 
 
 "Αργώ δεύιτ&ζω, δυναστεύω, εξουσιάζω, αυ^εντέω, κα7ακυριε;;ω, 
 to rule ; τιραννευω, βαόιΚευω, 'avatftfw, to reign ; ξέομαι, 
 ή/ημονεύω, to lead ; 9 επίι<ίΊαΊέω, to preside ; «ττερι^ίνομαι, 
 to be over ; άρχομαι, to begin ; παύομαι, \ηγω, to cease, 
 &c. 
 
 Κλέαρχον με'ν τ* δεξιζ κερως ηχείσαι, Με'νωνα δί τον Θετ7αλον 
 ts 'ευωνύμου, Clearchus should lead (be the leader of) the 
 right wing, and Menon the Thessalian, the left ; -τολλων 
 5 fSvc3v μία <χο\ις κρα7εΓ, one city rules many nations ; κα7άρχε<ί- 
 Sai tS \6γα, to begin (from) the discourse ; Χηγε των «τόνων, 
 cease from labor ; ά<χε*αύ(ϊανΊ& tS βίχ, they departed from life ; 
 #ε<τταυμε'νοι της opy%, who have ceased from anger. 
 
 1. Κρα7εω, τυραννεύω, and ΙχιΊροπευω, sometimes govern 
 the accusative ; άρχω, /3α<τΊλέω and άνάο'ο'ω, the dative. 
 Παύω, sometimes governs an accusative. 
 
 2. The genitive, after most verbs of ruling, is governed 
 by a noun implied in the verb ; βασΊλεύω, i. e. βαϋίΚεύς είμι \ 
 «νά(Τ<Τω, i. e. αναξείμί ; εξχόιάζω, i. e. έξχόίαν εχω, &c 
 
V er b — Genitive. 
 
 X. Verbs of accusing, bjx akinc falsely of aequittl• 
 and generally those which pertain to judicial ι 
 ings, govern th$ genitive of Lh< . and 
 
 - u «tunes both of the person and thing. 
 
 Κα7η^ορ5ω, αΠιάομαι, ε^χαλεω, διώχω, γράφομαι, «ττροίΤκο) Ξμαρ 
 to accuse ; olvoXju, άφίημι, άιτοψηφι'ζομαι, to acquit ; rfuy- 
 yivojtfxc*), to pardon ; χα7α^ινώ(Γχω, χα7αόιχά£ω, χα7αχρι 
 ψηφίζομαι, to condemn ; χα7αψεύδ©μαι, to speak fal• 
 
 Διώχω (ίεφον*, γρ•χφομ.αί (Τεφον*, I accu < I of murder, — 
 the murder being the cause of the accusation ; άφίημι or 
 απολύω (Τί ίγχΚΥϊμαΊος, I free you (as to) from the charge ; 
 εγκαΧω <f& «τροδοαΊαν, I make a charge of treachery as to yuu. 
 Verbs compounded with κατά take the person in the gen- 
 itive, and the crime or punishment in the accusative ; as, 
 χού-ηγορχιϊι <f& tflativ, they accuse you of sedition ; χαΐα^ινώ^χω 
 4* 0ava7s, or tf* dava7ov, I condemn you to death. 
 
 Verbs of accusing are sometimes followed by the dative. 
 
 XL Verbs govern the genitive, which denote differ- 
 ence or separation ; 
 
 Among the last may be included those of prohibiting, 
 abstaining, sparing, relieving, preventing, erring, &c. 
 
 Διαλλά77ω, διαφέρω, to differ ; δΓί'<τ7ημι, to be distant ; ορί- 
 ζω, χωρίζω, to separate ; έίργω, to prohibit ; άρχομαι, to ab- 
 stain ; άιταλλά77ω, έλευ^ερόω, £ύομαι, to free ; λ^ω, to loose ; 
 χ*φί£ω, to relieve; φείδομαι, to spare ; υιτοτλανάομαι, άτοτυ^- 
 χανω, άμαρ7άνω, to err ; ψεύδομαι, τ7αι'ω, (Τφάλλομαι ; to de- 
 ceive, to frustrate, &c. 
 
 Ουδέν διαφέρει άρχων αγαθός, άχαρου «ra7pO£, a good ruler 
 does not differ from a good father ; ή άμαρ7ία δινίηοΊν ημάς 
 τ2 Θε*, our sins separate us from God ; εϊρ^ω (fi πυρός χαί 
 ίίδα7ο$, I interdict you from fire and water ; οζϊ ανέχεσαι tgjv 
 χαχών, we ought to restrain ourselves from evil ; έλευ^ρωίΤε 
 τήν τόλιν φόβου, he delivered the city from fear ; ί<?εραιτεύ0η 
 του voVou, he was healed from disease ; παίδων φείδεσαι *α7- 
 ρικος νομοί, it is the law of the country to spare children. 
 
 -mne verbs of differing govern the dative ; as, διαφέρω <Τ•ι, 
 I differ from you. 
 
 XII. Verbs of buying, selling, estimating, &c. gov- 
 ern the genitive of the price. 
 
 ΏνεομαΓ, αγοράζω, τρίαμαι, to buy ; *ιτρά<Τχω, «τωλε'ω, te 
 sell ; αμείβω, to exchange ; άξιοω, to cstim; 
 
 Των «τόνων ^ωλέΓ /3μΓντάν7α τα άγαάά ο θεό$, the Deitv seiJs 
 
 12* 
 
138 Government. 
 
 us all things for toils ; ώνη<Γαμην τουΐο πενΊε ίραχμων, I bought 
 this for five drachmae ; 'αξιοΰΊαι, δι^Χης τιμής, is esteemed 
 worth double ; δος του7ο ίραχμ^, give this for a drachmae. 
 
 The price is put sometimes iu the dative, with the pre- 
 position i*'i expressed or understood ; i*i μι<Τ$ω μεγαΚω 
 3 α#αλλά77ω ΰε των δεινών, for a great reward I release you 
 from evil. Sometimes in the accusative, after προς ; as, 
 πιπράΰχει δ κακο£ #άν7α «η>ο£ 'αρ^ύριον, the wicked sells all 
 things for silver. 
 
 XIII. Incentives* govern genitives, when the includ- 
 ed verb governs the genitive. 
 
 Γεύω, to cause to taste ; π\άζω, to make to wander ; 
 μιμνήό'κω, άναμιμνήα'κω, υΐΓΌμιμνήσ'κω, to cause one to remem- 
 ber. &c. 
 
 "Εγευ(ϊάς με ευδαιμονίας, you have made me taste happi- 
 ness. 
 
 XIV. Most of the active verbs govern an accusa- 
 tive of the immediate object, and the genitive of the 
 remote object ; 
 
 This rule includes especially those of accusing,condem- 
 ning, acquitting, warning, filling, emptying, delivering, 
 separating, disappointing, repelling, forbidding, restrain- 
 ing, changing, valuing, buying, selling, esteeming. 
 
 DATIVE. 
 
 XV. Ε?μί, γίνομαι and υπάρχω taken for εχω, to have, 
 govern the dative ; 
 
 *E(fH μοι χρήμαΐα, I have possessions. 
 
 XVI. Verbs compounded with εν, i*i, *αρά, προς, <^ν, 
 υπό, άν7ι\ ομού, govern the dative ; 
 
 Έμμενειν τοις κα^εαΊύβΊ, to adhere to institutions ; Ιμ&χλ- 
 λειν or επι&εΐναι τινι τάς χε'ρα$, to lay hands on any one; 
 προόφίρειν έαι/7ω τάς χείρας, to lay hands on himself ; πάρα- 
 γζνεο'^αι <rfi έκκληόΊ'α, to be present at the meeting. 
 
 XVII. Any verb may govern the dative, that has the 
 sign to or for after it in English ; 
 
 Εϊκειν κακοΓ$, to yield to misfortune ; πους άνηρ αάΊω πονεΐ, 
 every man labors for himself. 
 
 XVIII. Any verb may govern the dative of the re- 
 
 * Verbs signifying to cause one to do any thing, are called IncmHres. 
 
Verb— Dative. ΐό9 
 
 tfiote object to which the action is directed or acqui 
 or with which it is done. 
 
 Tli, embraces j erbe which govern the dative 
 
 in Latin, and many other 
 
 1. To ord« :hort, admonish, reprove, reproach, 
 
 threaten, and oppose ; to contend and he angry with. 
 
 To obey, please, trust, assent, yield to, help, or give, 
 injure, and the contrary. 
 
 3. To have intercourse with, approach, meet, follow, 
 pray to, adore, fawn upon, use, accommodate to. 
 
 1. Προ<7κϋν5ω, sometimes governs the accusative ; as do 
 λία^ομαι, λι7ανε^ω, ΙχεΊεύω, άν7ι£ολεω ; as, iXitftfslo, or 
 
 Θεόν τυχεΓν άγοώών. he prayed for good. 
 
 2. Many others of the verhs which have been enumera- 
 ted, under this head, sometimes govern the accusative. 
 
 3. Two datives coupled by χα», having the verb ειμί ex- 
 pressed or understood, have the sense of community ; as, 
 <n ipoi xou tfoi, what have I to do with thee ? John ii. 4. ri 
 μά-χαις κα'μοί, what have I to do with battles ? Anac. 
 
 4. The datives of the pronouns, especially μοί and <foi, 
 like mihi in Latin, are often little else than elegant exple- 
 tives ; as, s*5 tfoi γ-ης 'α-είηλ&ε, where has he gone ? ο'/ει (foi — 
 μαχεΓ^αι τον άίώλφον ; do you think your brother will fight ? 
 Xenoph. Anaba. 
 
 XIX. The dative of participles and of some nouns, 
 is often joined to the third person of β/μί or χίνομαι, for 
 the verb itself : 
 
 These are the participles, /3*λόμενο£, ήδόμενο^, 'αχ^όμενο^, 
 «ττροβ^εχόμενο^, άκων, ά^μενο^ ; as, εϊ Co ι β&'Κομ.ύνω £tf7i, for si 
 /3ojXsi, if you will ; .Elian ; si' tfoi ηδομ,ενω εόΊ'ι, it you please ; 
 Plato ; οτω υμών μη 'αχ^ανομένω ε7η, to whom of you would it 
 not be grievous ? Xen ; *5i τύνυ to'j7o ΐϊροόδεχομ,ένοις οώΊοΐς ή ν, 
 this they little expected ; Arrian ; χδε αυϊω αχον7ι ην, nor was 
 he unwilling ; Idem ; τζ) δε 'οαΤμβνω ^ίνεΐαι άνδρας 'αγοώούς 
 $ια<ϊω<ίαι< he willingly saved good men ; Idem ; τχ7ων μ5ν 
 xai πεπειροφ,ένοις αν <ri ye'voi7o ύμΓν, this you may experience. 
 
 XX. Any active verb may govern the accusative and 
 dative, when, together with the object of the action, it 
 expresses the person or thing in relation to which it is 
 exerted ; 
 
 f Τ*ι<Γχν$ομα/ βΌι δέκα τάλαν7α, I promise you ten talents. 
 The noun in the dative is sometimes put in the accusa- 
 
140 Government. 
 
 tive ; a«?, π'αρεκάλεα'ά <τε ταυ7α for rkloi$, I exhorted you to 
 these things. 
 
 ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 XXI Verbs signifying actively, govern an accusa- 
 tive of the object ; as, yv&§t <jW?ov, know thyself. 
 
 1. Some verbs are active in Greek which are neuter in 
 Latin ; as, ομνυμι, to swear ; 'αιΐοδιδρ%<ϊχω. to escape from ; 
 λανθάνω, to lie hid ; «τείθω, to persuade ; ίβρ'ιζω^ to insult ; 
 'α&κεω, to injure ; 'αμείβομαι, to remunerate, &c. 
 
 2. Some neuter verbs are followed by an accusative of 
 the object of immediate reference ; as, δορυφορέω^ (τινά,) to 
 bear arms for some one ; φόάνω, to anticipate ; sVi7p<wri^iv, 
 to be a guardian to any one ; εκλεήτω, to fail ; 'α^τομάχομαι, 
 to fight off. 
 
 3. Some neuter verbs expressing an emotion or feeling 
 with regard to an object, are followed by it, in the accusa- 
 tive ; as, αι<Γχίνομαι τον «ττολύϋμνον Θεόν, I blush before the 
 God distinguished in song. 
 
 4. Neuter verbs govern the accusative of a noun, whose 
 signification is similar to their own ; as, τϊόλεμον ^ολεμίζειν, 
 to make war. The Poets often use neuter verbs in an ac- 
 tive sense ; as, όυρ',ζων φόνον, hissing slaughter ; aXirqyau |ε- 
 ουσΊ^άλα και μέλι, the fountains flow with milk and honey. 
 
 5. The Attics delight in the accusative, and often use it 
 after verbs which govern the genitive or dative ; especially 
 after verbs of sense ; as, 'ακέω ταυία, I hear these things. 
 
 6. A clause or a sentence often expresses the object of 
 a transitive verb ; as, έ*Ί^υμουμεν 'ακ^αι τι *oV iflliv δ μ£&ο£, 
 we wish to know what the fable is. Here τ/ zsqT εΛιν δ μο- 
 Sos is the object of the verb 'axSCai. 
 
 TWO ACCUSATIVES. 
 
 XXII. Verbs of asking and teaching, clothing and 
 concealing, speaking or doing well or ill, and some 
 others, govern two accusatives, the one of the person, 
 the other of the thing ; 
 
 Χρή αΠείν τους Θε&ς 'α/α$ά, we ought to ask good from the 
 Gods ; iEsch, ; εξέδνόαν αΰ7δν την Έίορφύραν, και ένε'ίυο'αν α 
 τα ίμά7ια τα 7δια, they took off from him the purple robe, 
 and put on his own garments ; Mark xv. 20 - 7 την &uya7sp« 
 
ο 
 
 Accusati 141 
 
 εχρυπΊε τον S<xva7ov τ* 'ανδρός, he concealed from his daughter 
 the death of her husband ; Lysias ; fxrjucv είτχτις φλαυρον άν- 
 Jpas osfiojc:, you should speak no ill of worthy men ; Λ 
 toph. ; Λακ£<ϊαιμονίου£, #ολλά την ιτολιν ήοικηκο7α£, και μ8γσ\α 9 
 the Lacedemonians, who have done the city many, and 
 great injuries ; Demosth. 
 
 1. Incentives govern two accusatives, when the included 
 verb governs an accusative ; as, γαΚα υμάς ίπόΊκϊα, I have 
 fed you with milk. 1 Cor. iii. 2 ; ορκίζω υμάς τον Κ^ριον, I 
 bind you by an oath before the Lord ; τα ο^εμν' ύ<κτ\ χόΧαζε 
 χείν&ς, reprove them with chaste words ; Soph. 
 
 Verbs governing the accusative with a genitive, some- 
 times change the genitive into the accusative, and thus 
 govern two accusatives ; as, κα7η^ορυ <ϊε ψεύδος, I accuse 
 you of falsehood. 
 
 3. Verbs governing an accusative of the object, may 
 likewise take an accusative of a noun similar in significa- 
 tion to their own ; as, ΦίΧιΐΡίτος νιχηΰας τχς Άόηνα/^ τν-> i* 
 Χαιρώνεια μαχήν, Philip having conquered the Athenians in 
 the battle of Chaeronea ; Polyb. ; φορΊ'ιζεΊε rsg aw) p. - 
 φορ7ία ίυ<τβά<τ7αχ7α, ye load men with burdens difficult to be 
 fcorne. Luke xi. 4b. 
 
 PASSIV2 VOICE. 
 
 XXIII. The agent or doer is put in the genitive, af- 
 ter passive verbs and those of a passive signification, 
 with the prepositions, ύιτό\ εκ, «'αρά, νρός ; 
 
 Μη νικύυττό τ* καχ5, be not overcome of evil ; *κρΙς Θε3 xai 
 epos άν^ρώ^ων Τδ7ίμη7αί, he was honored by God and man. 
 
 1. The preposition is sometimes omitted ; as, φίλων νι- 
 κων7αι φίλο<, friends are influenced by each other ; Soph. 
 After the Perfect Passive, the preposition is generally omit- 
 ted. 
 
 2. The noun is sometimes put in the dative instead of the 
 genitive ; as, Ccro tfalpanroug (JioixeTtrSai, to be governed by 
 viceroys ; Herodian ; «ctfoirflai μοι, it has been done by me. 
 
 XXIV. When the verb in the active voice governs two 
 cases, in the passive it retains the latter case ; 
 
 Κα7η) ορίομαι κλοπής, I an accused of theft ; δίναό&ε το βά* 
 μα, ό εγώ βασίζομαι, βαΛα-^ναι,* can ye be baptized with the 
 
 * Βαπτίζω, is an incentive, governing two accusatives, because the 
 ineluded verb Βάπτω governs one. See rale , 
 
14S Government. 
 
 baptism with which I am baptized ? Math. xx. 22 ; οί #ά1ί- 
 ζόμενοι το γάλα, who are fed with milk : Καϊν παρά, tS ίια§όλ* 
 τόνφ^όνον χα/ φόνον εδιδάγβη, Cain was taught envy and mur- 
 der by the devil ; Nazian ; 'ενυεδυμένοι χιΊωνΐόχχς, clothed in 
 little tunics. 
 
 1. Sometimes the dative of the remote action is made 
 the nominative of the Passive ; and the accusative of the 
 immediate action is retained after the verb ; as, Δημώναξ 
 'sflrtd^Sty την άργην, for Δημώνακ7ι 'επΊόΊεύ^η ή ' α ρχ^ Demo- 
 nax was entrusted with the government ; Lucian ; τήν δε 'εκ 
 χειρών αργάζομαι, she is snatched from my hands ; dava7ov 
 κα7ακρι^ε'ΐ£, condemned to death. 
 
 2. Passive verbs are often followed by the accusative, a 
 preposition being understood ; as, Προμηθεύς utf' άε7* 'εκεί- 
 p«7o ro rjirap, Prometheus was torn by an eagle as to his 
 liver ; Lucian. 
 
 3. Passive, Mke neuter verbs, take a noun in the accu- 
 sative, of a similar signification to their own ; as, 'εχάρηβ'αν 
 χαράν με^άλην, they were rejoiced with great joy. Alatth. ii. 
 10 ; *Κίτιγας εκα7όν τρ μ,άόΊιγι τυπΊέ(ϊόω> let him be beaten a 
 hundred stripes with the whip ; Plat. 
 
 IMPERSONAL TERBS. 
 
 I. Impersonal verbs govern the dative ; 
 
 Miyitflov εδοξεν αυ7ω, it seemed to him a very great thing. 
 Χρή more commonly governs the accusative. 
 
 II. Xp^, tfpgVgi and &Γ, it behoveth, govern the accusa- 
 tive, with the infinitive ; 
 
 χρή <rs7o «τοιεΓν, this must be done. 
 
 III. ΔεΓ, μ£ , 7εβ'7ι, and some others, frequently govern 
 the dative of the person, and the genitive of the thing ; 
 
 ΔεΓ κολλών tfoi, you have need cf much ; μ.εΊε<ΑΊ μοι rxlx, I 
 have a share of this ; των «τέκνων τω «αϊρι με^ει, children are 
 the care of parents. The dative of the person is not al- 
 ways expressed. 
 
 The nominative is often used instead of the genitive of 
 the thing ; as, διαφέρει τ'ι <foi <r£7o or <rs7x, how does this con- 
 eern you ? 
 
 Δει sometimes takes an accusative of the person with « 
 genitive of the thing. 
 
■ '■ 
 
 Infinitive and Participles. 143 
 
 General principles respecting the Infinitive and Parti- 
 cipl 
 
 When a Verb is dependent on a preceding Verb or Ad- 
 jective, that Verb or Adjective may either, 
 
 I. Convey (with their adjuncts) a complete and independ- 
 ent idea ; as, 'αλλ' 1 β ι μ,η μ' y s ο i & ι ζ ε , <Γαώ<τερο£ ως χε vi- 
 qcu, but gO, offend me not, that you may depart safe : or 
 
 II. May be incomplete, and require one or more words to 
 complete the sense ; as, ηλ0ον Ιδεϊν tis I came to see you ; 
 -ηδύ 'ακο'ειν, pleasing to hear.* 
 
 In tiie first case, i. e. when the Leading clause makes 
 complete sense, the object immediately in view (in the de- 
 pendent clause) is expressed by means of conjunctions with 
 afinite Verb, (ϊνα οφρα, ο*ως, ως Ike.) asirapaivoj do\ μα^εΓν γράμ- 
 ματα, ί'ναοΌφ> :τζρςγ ε ν rj ί exhort you to the study of literature 
 thai you maybe more wise. An incidental object not direct- 
 I view, is put in thelnfinitive with ωϋτε ; as, φιλοημότατο^ 
 ην, ω <f τ ε πάντα, ύ'ΤομεΓναι του επαινεΐόύοι ένεκα, he was 
 very desirous of honor, so as to endure every thing for the 
 sake of being applauded. This takes place especially after 
 Adjectives of comparison, and rotfoJros, τοιούτος, ούτως. 
 
 Verbs denoting to say, to announce to mean, to think 
 and to hope, constitute a regular exception to this rule, and 
 are followed by the Infinitive : Those of the first class how- 
 ever [to say) often take the finite Verb with on or 
 Individual exceptions are also to be found occasionally ; as 
 &γων ios πάντα παρεόγεΐν adsum ut omnia prcbeam^ I am here 
 to furnish all. 
 
 When the sen.^e of the Leading Verb or Adjective is 
 incomplete, and supposes, of course, a farther object of 
 reference, 
 
 1. That object may involve another Verb as part of it ; 
 and then that Verb is in the Infinitive without a 
 
 v -xto Xiysiv, he began to say; υ.ρκϊτος ακοντ, 
 very ut at darting. This is accordant to the I 
 
 li^h idiom ; while in Latin, the same idea would more com- 
 monly 1>< <»d by ti: motive with tit, or some 
 other conjunction. Thus oro te ut rcnias, hortor fc vt 
 scribnSy impedivii me quominus scribcrem, are all rend< 
 
 * It is important in this case to deride clearly whether tbi 
 the leadin ; σου ίΧθαν, 
 
 1 entreat, you to come ; the words u Entreat you" maki 
 by themselves; but not the sense intended ; which is, 1 entreat your 
 eOmtitg. 
 
144 Government. 
 
 in Greek by the Infinitive, osofjwxi <fou έ>ύε"ν; βαραίνω 4*ι 
 γρ&φεη ; #αρώ|;υνεν εμέ μαν^άνειν ; ε'κώλυσ'εν με γράφει (or μή 
 
 This rule embraces Verbs denoting '* to say" and all 
 included in that idea; as, to assert, deny, mention, announce, 
 shew, also to give, think, mean, hope, seemi and verbs of 
 motion. These are followed by the infinitive, though verbs 
 of the class first mentioned are sometimes followed 
 by the finite Verb with on or ως, as, Χέγουβι τον ετα- 
 Γρον τεύνάναι, or Xs'youtfi 0V1 (or ως) ό kraipog Γένηκε, they 
 say that our companion is dead. Sometimes the conjunc- 
 tion and a finite Verb are used in other cases ; and this is 
 always done after έαΐμελςιΜαι, to take care.* 
 
 The Infinitive is likewise put after words which express 
 a quality, and shows the respect in which that quality ex- 
 ists ; as, δεινός 'εΰη λέγειν, he is powerful in speaking ; ΐίοΚις 
 χαλεπή λαβείν a city difficult to take. Here it corresponds to 
 the Gerund in do or the Supine in u of the Latin language. 
 
 2. The complete leading V"erb may have some person or 
 thing as its object, complete in itself, but qualified by 
 some farther description ; and then the verb expressing 
 that qualification is put in the participle ; as ορω <τε γράφοντα 
 I see you writing. This use of the participle, which is 
 common to all language?, is extended in Greek much far- 
 ther than in Latin ; and embraces many cases where the 
 Subjunctive with ut, or the Infinitive would be used ; as, 
 αίσ -J Ινομαι tfe χαλε^αίνοντα, sentio te iratvm esse, \ perceive 
 that you are angry. In this it accords with the English 
 idiom, but goes much farther ; a λήξω χαίρων, I will not 
 cease from rejoicing, (or to rejoicej έώρων τους ότρατΊωτας 
 άχόο μεν ους they saw that the soldiers were angry ; γνωτε 
 άνα^κβΜον ts ov υμΓν ccc, know that it is necessary for you 
 &c. If the subject of the participle, be the same with that 
 of the Leading verb, it is put in the nominative ; as, ορώ 
 'εξαμαρτανων, video me err are ^ I perceive myself to err. 
 Otherwise it is in the case which the leading verb governs ; 
 
 * The distinction here made between the use of the ^finite verb with 
 conjunctions, and the infinitive without them, according as the sense 
 of the leading ■ adjective is complete or incomplete, must 
 
 taken onh revailing usage ; from which a departure is ad- 
 
 missible in cases of necessity. Thus in English the regular and nat- 
 ural form would be, %k I gave it to him to keep."" But we may say, M I 
 gave it to bim, that he might keep it." Stiii there must in this case, 
 be a reason for the departure from common usage. In other cases, 
 either for.'u is admissible, The same is the case in Groek. especially 
 ail* r Verbs which* may, without in propriety, be considered either as 
 complete or incomplete. Such as λ^ουσι, and many others. 
 
Infinitive and PtHicipU i 
 
 10, χ,^όμην αΰτων ο ίο μένων ε/ναι όΌφωτάτων I pel 
 them to think themselves wise ; afolafjivof & * j.irpoxXia, 
 
 *rpo£ τ /iv μητέρα χαλειτα ίν ο ν τ α perceiving Larnprocies to 
 be angry with his mother. 'ΟΚυρος&αμνημοιεν,'εταιεχων, (vrus 
 is represented to hare had\ from the active construct 
 o< Περ<ται ίιαμνημονε>*οΊ τον Κυρον έχοντα &,c. the Persians 
 represent Cyrus to have had &c. 
 
 The Verbs thus followed by an object complete in itself, 
 but qualified by a subsequent participle having the force of 
 the Infinitive, are those of persevering, ceasing, showing, 
 bearing, enduring, overlooking, verbs of sense, and those 
 signifying any act or feeling of the mind : also άρχομαι, and 
 some others, in some cases, however, they are followed 
 by the finite Verb with a conjunction. 
 
 THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 I. The infinitive, with or without an article, is used 
 as a noun in any case ; and the subject or agent of 
 the verb is in the accusative ; 
 
 Nom. χαλεπ'ον το μή φιλη^αι, (supp. 'εβίί,) it is hard not 
 to love. Anac. 
 
 Gen. *ολλάκΐ£ SoxsT το φυλάξαι τ'α^α^ά, του χ7ή<Γα07)αι χαλε- 
 *ώ7ερον ε/ναι, to preserve good, seems often more difficult 
 than to gain it; Plut. ; φιλο<Τοφο$ άνευ τ* *ράτ7ειν, a philoso- 
 pher without action ; μέχρι tS λένειν, at the word. 
 
 Dat. τω φιλεΓν 'axaipwg ί'αΌν l<fli τω μκΓεΓν, to love out of 
 reason is the same as to hate. 
 
 Ace. τυρλοίς ητοΚΚοΤς Ιχαρί<Τα7ο το βλέτειν, he gave sight to 
 many blind. 
 
 I. Sometimes the infinitive is preceded by its subject or 
 agent } and the clause used as a noun ; as, τρό ts dz Φίλι-- 
 
 before Philip called you ; «ττρό^ το V. nxtiou, 
 
 to appear good. Here Φίλπτ<7Τον φων^αι, and 'ayados φαίνεα'- 
 dai, are taken as nouns, and governed by the preceding 
 preposition. 
 
 The infinitive supplies the place of gerunds and >u- 
 pines, whicl are only verbal nouns: as, χακως i«t<na 
 
 Ι ' equitaodi ; ovx ηλ4ον ,οαλεΓν ε/ρ^νην, 
 
 non v jura pacem. 
 
 ι infinitive is some! ad of the imper- 
 
 sonal part . Ιμοι ίοχεΓν for 'εμοι <5oxSv, as it appeared 
 
 to me ; δεΓν for δέον, when it ought. 
 
 II. One verb governs another in the infinitive, (ichrt> 
 
 13 
 
I4i Government. 
 
 the second denotes the object to which the action of the first 
 is directed ;) 
 
 "Ηρ£α7ο λέγειν, he began to say. 
 
 Many adjectives, especially those which denote fitness, 
 will or potcer, govern the infinitive ; as, αρκήος 'ακον7*£ειν, 
 excellent in darting. 'Οξύς όράν, sharp-sighted. 
 
 III. The infinitive mood has the accusative before 
 it, (nihen its subject or agent is different from that of the 
 preceding verb $) 
 
 Τί βροΊονς φρονεΓν Xfystfi ; why do they say that mortals 
 are wise? 
 
 Sometimes the noun before the infinitive is governed by 
 a preceding verb. 
 
 IV. When the subject or agent of the infinitive is the 
 same with that of the preceding verb, it is put in the 
 same case ; 
 
 Φηα7ν ού7ο£ 'αμείνων γεγενηό&αι όΊραΙηγος 'εμχ, he says 
 he was a better general than Ι; και ουκ 'ενόώόΌμεν ίτρό- 
 φαοΊν ου£εν/ κακω γζνέυύοα, and we will not give to any one a 
 pretence of being bad. 
 
 1. When the subject of the infinitive is the subject also 
 of the preceding^wite verb, then it is omitted in the infini- 
 tive, except when an emphasis is laid upon it ; as, έ'φη ε/ναι 
 (τρανηγός, he said he was general ; but εφη αύ<τος εΓναι οτρα- 
 «"*7os, '*κ εκείνο», he said that he and not they. &c. 
 
 2. If all things in the sentence refer to the same person, 
 ως or wVte, or a preposition may be joined, even with a nom- 
 inative, to the infinitive ; as, 01 Πέρο^αι ενο'μιο'αν, ει «ταρακαλχ- 
 μενοι, u<f\z τα όμοια <πΌΐουν7ε£ των σύΊών τυγγάνειν the Persians 
 supposed that, if called, they should obtain the same re- 
 ward, doing the same things ; Jia το μη οΌφοι' ε/ναι, because 
 they are not wise ; tfpos τό άγαΰοι φαίνεσαι, to appear good. 
 
 3. A few instances may be found in which the accusative 
 precedes 4 he infinitive, though both veibs refer to the 
 same person ; as, Xs'ysi έ"αυ7ον έτερον yeyovsvai, he said that he 
 was become another. 
 
 V. The infinitive is often used for the impera- 
 tive ; 
 
 Χαίρειν με7α χαιρόν7ων, κλαίειν με7ά κλαιόν7ων, rejoice wit/j 
 them that do rejoice, and weep with those that weep; 
 δε ύωζειν μεν <:~&ς Μ.εΰ<ίψΐχζ, οτώ^ειν jo και <Τ£αυ7&ν, save the 
 Messenians and yourself. 
 
' 
 
 
 >[ "i 
 
 φ' <*ω, cpi*, cop<*, ici#4*j f μ/χρι or μέχρς, md J* 
 
 tvlpucov. Tor νς ΐό«ν airfpwctc, « *«w ; 
 
 cpi 'αλΐ«7ορα φ•*'/ 
 
 ι . 
 
 PARTICIPLE! 
 
 I Pmrttcipfofl govern tl»<' case of their own 
 
 J\lp\X cwauJa ^ea caiif-'ov7ff , ii, .ng- 
 
 II I 
 
 Ο) ^ραφόμίνοι 2. itcs ; • f\ 
 
 1 
 
 deeci Ο 5βΰλκ 
 
 at t! lltilling t] of a slave. 
 
 III. l\irti< nhnitiw 
 
 be. 
 
 These are ι sense, and tl ν act or 
 
 rig of the mind, ι 
 
 as, oj *α.'<Τομ«υ γράφων, I \wll 
 cea*• 
 
 ,αινίται c*Cco cic 
 
 \λίω col .at I have seen a 
 
 e beaulif ^ cscwipul* I will show di 
 
 Λ ροκτβς ii\ are 
 
 a man ; iftffovc• 6s oi cgXXoj cf^fu^ertf Άντ 
 
 οφομβί <r• μ*τ* ολίγον όα- 
 *ρυϊ<7 I 
 I 1 
 
 xGipcavw. 
 >s ; as &jX*f ι? *υχ•φα. plainly a sycopl. | 
 
148 Government. 
 
 3. A participle, with the verbs ε/μί, υπάρχω, 7^ομαι,έ'χω,ηκω, 
 is often put for its own verb ; as, η>ο§ε€ηκό7ε£ V av > for #ροε§εβή- 
 κε/σαν ; άντεχΊαχως tdli τον αν^ρω^ον, he has killed the man, for 
 «Ατεκίακε ; έχεις τάραξ α£ for ύΐάραξας, you have disturbed. 
 
 4. When the participle is joined with λανόάνω, φβάνω, τυγ- 
 χάνω, 5ια7ελέω, &a^fyvojxai and διά^ω in any tense, it is 
 rendered by that tense, and the verb by an adverb ; as, 
 $λα$ε βόόχων, he secretly fed ; έ'λα^όν τίνες ξενίό ανίες τους άγ- 
 γέλχς, entertained angels unawares ; οι ίίύγχανον ονΊες, who 
 were there by chance ; Ι7υχχάνομεν ntspiirarkvlsg, we hap- 
 pened to be walking. 
 
 5. In some instances, the participle has a real and per- 
 tinent signification, though apparently redundant ; as, φανε- 
 ρός ήν και δημοτικός καΓ φιλάνθρωπος ων, he being sympathetic 
 and humane, was manifest — being really humane, he, in 
 consequence, so manifested himself; aycrafojtfas αυ/όν Ιχω, 
 having loved him, I so have him — having loved him, I still 
 hold him dear. 
 
 6. Participles are often used for the sake of emphasis; 
 as, ιίών ί'ίον, seeing I have seen. 
 
 7. Participles have sometimes the adverb μη7αξύ* before 
 them in whatever case the construction requires, and thus 
 Used have the sense of the Latin gerund in dum ; as μεταξύ 
 ©puaWwv, in the midst of digging. 
 
 CONSTRUCTION OF CIKCUMSTANCES. 
 
 I. A noun expressing some quality or circumstance 
 is put in the genitive ; 
 
 Άνδρίας δωδεχα ττηχε'ων, a statue of twelve Cubits. 
 
 II The cause, origin and part affected, are put in the 
 genitive ; 
 
 Μακάριος *% τόχηέ, happy from his fortune ; or fortunate ; 
 φιλεΓ αυτόν της αρετής, he loves him for his virtue ; λυκον κρα- 
 τεΊν ώτων, to take a wolf by the ears. 
 
 The cause, source, origin, and part affected, are very 
 frequently put in the accusative by synecdoche, κα7ά, δία, 
 &c. being understood. 
 
 III. The manner, instrument, means, and end, are 
 put in the dative ; 
 
 ΚρατεΓ μηχανάις, he conquers by stratagems; άργυραΐς 
 λό^χαιαΊ μάχ*. χαϊ πάντα χρατ^εχς, fight with silver weapons, 
 and you will conquer all things ; τταραμυόητικόν δ φίλος xal τγ 
 όψει και τω λό^ω, a friend gives consolation by his looks and 
 words. Arist. 
 
]\/r' 
 
 inn and end, arc often put 
 
 ; an, conip tf 
 
 I which ι 
 
 υ the geoitn 
 
 id. 
 V. The pi to l>o put in the g< ι 
 
 ι 
 - , I ' it for ir 
 
 ι 
 r it in tin 
 ><L 
 In 
 
 and 
 
 χαλχ 
 
 the ground of • 
 
 ; as, χ> 
 
 Id. 
 
 VI : π |>ut in tli ,:h 
 
 out a [" 
 
 <»n. 
 
 out in t; a.s, 
 
 \ 
 \ Γ 
 
 \ 1 1 1 I 
 in t 
 
 an. 
 
 th• 
 
150 Government. 
 
 The time when is put in the accusative when duration is 
 expressed ; as, ην διδάϋχων τάς ήμ ε 'ρ α £> τάςδε ννχίας ηυΧίζεΊο εις 
 το ορός, he taught by day, and by night tarried in the moun- 
 tain ; Luke xxi. 37. Here some preposition, as δία, is un- 
 derstood. The time how long is put in the genitive when 
 it denotes " a portion of time since ;" as, #ολλ2 αάΎχς *χ* 
 εώρακα χρο'ν*, I have not seen them for a long time ; in the 
 dative, when it reaches to a fixed time 3 as, k ΐτοΚΚαΐς ημέρας 
 υύίερον. not many days after. 
 
 CASE OP THE SYNECDOCHE. 
 
 X. Substantives are very often put in the accusative 
 by synecdoche, κατά, Λά, &c. being understood ; 
 
 Τία1τ}ξ (foi την ήλικίαν, μάλλον δε ευνοιαν, a father to you in 
 respect of years, more so in respect of kindness ; <ί**δαϊος 
 τον TpoVov, of ingenuous disposition. 
 
 Nouns signifying the form, manner, distinction, object, 
 measure, number, or part affected, after substantives and 
 adjectives ; and those denoting the cause, instrument, or 
 manner, after adjectives and verbs ; are commonly put in 
 the accusative by synecdoche. 
 
 CASE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 XI. A substantive and participle are put in the geni- 
 tive, when their case depends on no other word ; 
 
 Θεϊ διδόνίος, χδεν Ιύχύβι φόόνος, when God gives, envy avails 
 nothing. 
 
 1. The genitive is not, in such cases, really absolute or 
 independent ; it expresses the origin of some circumstance 
 mentioned in the preceding or subsequent clause ; as, Θε- 
 άγν-ης εοΛ] xai όωζεΊαι, Θέων 0ελόν7ων, Theagnes exists and is 
 preserved^/rom the Gods willing it. 
 
 2. The participles of ειμί and γίνομαι; and some others, 
 are often omitted ; as, φ<τ7ι φωνεΓν, ί)ς έμ2 μόνη£, (sc. χ4ν\ς) Ι 
 may speak when alone. The genitive, especially of pro- 
 nouns, is sometimes omitted 5 as, κληρωμένων, (sc. αυϊων,) 
 they choosing by lot. 
 
 3. The infinitive, or part of a sentence, seems sometimes 
 to supply the place of the noun ; as, #υρ <m?v τχς ταύρας, μυ&ο- 
 λογφνΊος, that bulls breathe fire, being circulated as a 
 story. 
 
 4. The accusative and sometimes the nominative^ are 
 
("omptiratirr. 
 u-ril ibtOllltrly ; a*. *i, raZ~* fi ;θ>ί>ι t >; τ!;, .'f%ir. 
 
 rtd tln^r thli na prop* 
 
 *7* 
 ire• 
 
 ι 
 
 .«•ar hav. 
 
 7ά.) 
 
 absolute; a> ^necessary; όιαψίρον, there b• 
 
 >aion of ^ *i conduct b gta 
 
 -;or Ζάτίρ with the genitive <>r a< 
 absolute; as, tViJ^ra, £* cav7af 5i6o7a; 
 
 with it. 
 
 [1 COM PA Κ 
 
 \II Tl the genhhra 
 
 \s\\ d 
 
 ; ca7po( aaf,. 
 <7ιρμών φ&νο*. 
 
 a in rasp 
 ι takes place ; as. 
 
 in the da- 
 
 ti it. 
 
152 Government. 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 I. Adverbs are often used as substantives or adjec- 
 tives ; 
 
 'Atfo το7ε, from that time ; owr' ap7i, from this time ; εως 
 αρ7ι. till now ; το «7τε'ραν της βαΧάόύης, the farther part of the 
 stea ; δ εξω σ.νόρωιτος, the outward man. 
 
 II. Derivative adverbs govern the case of their prim- 
 itives ; 
 
 Άξ'ιως τχ Xo'ys, agreeable to reason ; το <Γωμα ψοϊως τοις 
 εαρινοί avfatfi μαραίνε7αι, the body, like vernal flowers, de- 
 cays ; άρεσχόνΊως μοί, pleasing to me ; because άρεόχω governs 
 the native ; σ7α£εΓα'α τω τεκνω^τληοΊον, standing near the child; 
 because <κ\ηϋΐος governs the dative ; ire ριξ το τείχος, around 
 the wall ; because περί governs the accusative ; ιτάρεχ νηα 9 
 without the ship ; because #αρά governs the accusative ; 
 εγγύς τω τε/χει, near the wall. 
 
 'Εγγύς, «τληοΊον, ζίεριξ and τΰάρεχ, govern the genitive like- 
 wise. 
 
 III. Adverbs having the force of prepositions gov- 
 ern the same cases ; 
 
 Όμ*, άμα, together, (tfi/'v, with,) ένεκα, on account of, (<5ιά,) 
 
 IV. Adverbs of place, time, order, quantity, conceal- 
 ment, separation, number, exception, exclamation, and 
 some others, with adverbial nouns, have a genitive af- 
 ter them. 
 
 "Ανευ, ά7ερ. δίγα, χωρίς, without ; άν7ικρύ 'ανΊιχρίς, 'awav7ixpj r 
 against, opposite ; άχρ»,* με'χρ»,* to, even to ; ένεκα, ένεκεν, 
 on account of ; εγγύς, «π-ληδΊΌν. οίγχι % atftfov. near ; ύχΊός, εζω, 
 εχΊοΰόεν, without ; έν7ό$, ε4ω, εϊόω, εν7ο07*εν, within ; #λήν, *α- 
 ρεχΊός, except, but ; μεΊαξύ, among ; oVitfw, ο*κϊ&εν, behind ; 
 «rpoCdcv, before ; *-εραν, ε^'κεινα, beyond, kc. 
 
 "Αχρι της σήμερον ημέρας, to this day ; ένεκα τ? βεΧΙί&Ίχ, for 
 the best ; εχομενω$ τ&7ων, after those things; λά£ρα τϋαΐρ'ς, 
 without his father's knowledge ; άνευ κάμα7χ, without labour; 
 τοι£7ων αδψ. abundance of such ; ά^αξ της ημέρας, once a day; 
 χωρίς των ε/ρημενων, beside what has been said ; ω τϊ 'αόική- 
 μα7ο$, Oh, the injustice ! ώμοι των κ7ημά7ων, alas ! my posses- 
 sions ! της τίχης, for ω της τίγρης, what an incident ! τίνος χά- 
 
 **χρις, /ίίχρκ, before a vowel. 
 
Adverbs. 1 53 
 
 ριν, for whose sake ; <5!κην «ο7αμων, like rivers ; ένά,τιον r* 
 θίί, before God. 
 
 The adverbs enumerated above, and many others, have 
 very much the nature of prepositions. 
 
 Adverbs of the final cause are sometimes omitted ; as, 
 ι^ραψα rS μή τίνας £η7η<Γαι vifiz, (supp. ένΐκα,) I have written 
 for this reason, lest any should happen to enquire. Thucyd. 
 
 V. Adverbs of accompanying are followed by the da- 
 tive ; 
 
 ' Λ μα rfi ημέρ α > at day break ; ομ2 *ύς άλλοις, together 
 witli the rest. 
 
 VI. Adverbs of swearing are followed by the accu- 
 sative ; 
 
 Νη Δία, by Jupiter ; νή Πλ*7ωνα, by Pluto ; μά ro δε cfx^ir"- 
 7pov, by this sceptre. 
 
 VII. Adverbs of showing govern the nominative ; 
 
 'lis & υιός <f*, behold thy son ; ISi δ άν$ρω#ο£, behold the 
 man ! 
 
 VIII. Two or more negatives strengthen the nega- 
 tion, if they belong to the same verb ; 
 
 Oix/h £ μή φάγω εξ αυ72, I will by no means eat of it any 
 more ; Luke xxii. 16 ; ου sx ήν χδειτω &δείς κείμενος, in which 
 no one had ever been placed. Luke xxiii. 53. 
 
 1. The several adverbs deny of different things. Thus, 
 in the second instance, ax denies of the fact ; ϊδε'ζίω, of 
 time ; χδείς, of person. 
 
 2. When the negatives belong to different verbs, each 
 qualifies its own verb, and they generally affirm ; as, i Suva- 
 μαι μή μεμνη<Τ()αι αυ7ου, I cannot avoid remembering him. 
 Xenoph. 
 
 3. Ου and μή are often placed, not before the verb which 
 they qualify, bu: before some other one in the sentence ; 
 as, ax εφη ά^δλόεΓν, he said he would not depart. 
 
 VARIOUS CASES AFTER ADVERBS OF TLACE. 
 GENITIVE OK DATIVE. 
 
 "Αμμι^α, άμμί^δην, ^ev, πάρεγγυς, όόνεγγνς, Ιξτ,ς. 
 
 ίφζήζ, όχίδόν^ ύγεδΛεν, αυϊςσχείβν. 
 
154 Government. 
 
 Oftener a Genitive. 
 
 <*7X*> «yX°'0'> εκποδών, #λεοΊ'ον, sVi'-cipefl'dsv. 
 
 Oftener a Dative. 
 
 άνάΐζίαλιν, 5μ•#αλιν. 
 
 GENITIVE OR ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 0Ϊ<Γ«, με'^φα, «ττάρεκ or πάρίξ, *έριξ. 
 
 BATIVE OR ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 όευρο. 
 
 GENITIVE, DATIVE, OR ACCUSATIVE. 
 
 *X? l > *XP*> m*xp*> &X?*• 
 
 MOODS. 
 
 1. Adverbs of likeness, manner and interrogation, have 
 commonly an indicative ; of doubting, an indicative or op- 
 tative ;. of exhorting or encouraging, an imperative, and 
 sometimes a subjunctive or indicative. Other adverbs have 
 various moods. 
 
 2. Αϊ, α/$ε, ει, ε/0ε, ως, joined to the imperfect ώφειλβν or 
 βφειλον, or the second aorist ώφελον or οφελον, are placed be- 
 fore an infinitive, in the sense of the optative ; as, εΓθ' οφε- 
 λον άγαμος τι μενειν, amoves <rs γενέύβαι, I wish I had remained 
 unmarried, or had been childless. 
 
 3. "Ωφελον or οφελον, without the preceding particle, is 
 placed before other moods ; as, οφελον ψυχρός ε7η£, I would 
 thou wert cold. 
 
 4. Είδε precedes an optative in the present and future 
 tenses ; an indicative in the perfect, and ^sometimes an in- 
 finitive ; as, εΓ^ε τράφοιμι, I wish I wrote; sihs χέχραφα, I wish 
 1 had written ; ε/δε di μη ^νητοίοΊ ^ενέο^αι -ττημα *ο$εινόν, I 
 Λvish thou wert not a desirable evil to mankind. 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 Conjunctions couple together the same cases, moods 
 and tenses ; 
 
Particles. 
 
 Hi 
 
 ν Ηρ£ατο ο Ίη<τ*£ xtjpJmiv xcu λέγειν, Jesus began to preach 
 and to say. 
 
 MOODS. 
 
 The following conjunctions govern an 
 
 Indicative and 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 > when. 
 
 orf, 
 ενεχα, 
 
 Indicative and 
 Optative. 
 
 εί, if. 
 Ιτε, that. 
 
 *w'i Σ when. 
 
 Indicative, Optative, and 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 jf v ' ί if. '{ να > ) 
 
 sav, $ οφρα, \ that. 
 
 x<xv, although, ομω$, ) 
 eVav, when. 
 
 izS2 ιόαν, after. 
 
 Indicative and 
 
 Infinitive.* 
 fcrsi, ) after, 
 επειδή, $ since. 
 
 ώΛ, that. 
 
 Indicat. Opt. 
 Sub. and Intin. 
 
 ώ$, that. 
 εω£, until. 
 
 CORRESPONDING PARTICLES. 
 
 Έδιδαν, when ; 
 KaSatfip, as ; 
 Μεν, indeed ; 
 Mi*, both ; 
 'Ομοίως, like ; 
 ' 'Otfou, where ; 
 ''Oofou, where ; 
 Ούτως, so ; 
 ΠαραζζΓλήόΊον, so ; 
 Πρ/ν, before ; 
 Πρίν, before ; 
 Toh, then ; 
 
 , then ; 
 Τό7•, then ; 
 Τό7ε, then ; 
 Ή*, as ; 
 Ω$, as ; 
 "ntfei, as 
 
 -=p, as; 
 "QrfOty, as ; 
 'ΏαΉερ, as ; 
 
 τηνιχαυτα, then. 
 οί)7ω, so. 
 5ε, but. 
 <$£, and. 
 ijtfcrep, as. 
 εχεΓ, there. 
 εν7αυ£α, there. 
 ώ$, as. 
 ώο'α'ερ, as. 
 ί, that. 
 'Sipi'v, that. 
 οτε, when, 
 ccav, when. 
 izziiuav, when. 
 ry\xct, when. 
 οί)7ω, so. 
 wtfawVw^, thus. 
 ου7ω, so. 
 . 
 
 xa/, so. 
 dMfailwg, thus.* 
 
 * Whenever a conjunction or adverh nfocs before an infinitive, there 
 is an ellipMi 
 
 tunc of the ponding particles is frequently omitted: ae, 
 
 •lilv h η} β(ω ταχίστη γηράσκίΐ άς f) χάοις. £ 
 
156 Government. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 I. "A*o, άν7ί, εκ (έξ) and tfpo, govern the genitive only 
 5 Ev and tfiiv, the dative. 
 
 Έις (&) the accusative. 
 Δια, the genitive and accusative. 
 
 Άμφι, άνά, ε#ί, κατά, με7ά, -ττερ/, «τταρά, #ρο£, (Att. ώ$,) 
 ύ#ε'ρ, OW, govern the genitive, dative, or accusative. 
 
 II. Prepositions in composition often govern the 
 «ame case, as when they stand by themselves ; 
 
 Έξηλ0ε της οιχι'ας, he went out from the house. 
 
 The principal relations of things to each other are ex- 
 pressed in Greek by three cases 5 origin and possession, by 
 the genitive ; acquisition and communication, by the dative; 
 and action, by the accusative. But these cases being alto- 
 gether insufficient to express all the varieties of these rela- 
 tions, prepositions are used to denote many relations of 
 place, time, cause and effect ; motion and rest ; connexion 
 and opposition. Every preposition has one primary mean- 
 ing, to which all the other significations, arising from figura- 
 tive or analogical relations, may be referred. The meaning 
 of the prepositions is generally adapted to the use of the 
 case. The primary signification of ΐ><χό, is under. The 
 genitive, when joined with it, expresses influence or origin ; 
 as, teo καυμα7ο£, under the influence of heat : the daiive ex- 
 presses the instrument or manner ; as. χερ(τ7ν ύφ' ^με7έρηαΊν 
 cxXStfa, taken under, by our hands ; the accusative, motion; 
 as, teo "Ιλιον ηλ$ε, he came under the walls of Troy. 
 
 The primary sense of the several prepositions will be 
 first given ; and under each, the more distant and figura- 
 tive significations will be ranged in perpendicular columns. 
 
 I. Four Prepositions govern the genitive, άν7/, aero, έκ, tfp&. 
 
 ΑΝΤΙ' 
 
 Denotes originally , facing, fronting, set over against, an- 
 swering to. Hence its common signification is against, in- 
 stead of 
 
 For. Όφ£αλμδν άντι οφθαλμού, an eye for an eye. 
 
 Before. *Av7. χρημά7ων eXs'tfoai τψ όοξάν χρή, we ought to 
 
 choose glory before (instead of) wealth. 
 Against. \Av7/ ανδρός 'Πω, go against the man. 
 
Prepositions. 
 
 By a slight chang< aification >me- 
 
 timea denotes in addition fo, or */;*>//. 
 Upon. * Ανίας άχΊΙ άνι'ων, sorrows (corresponding to, in ad- 
 dition to) upon sorro 
 
 ΆΠΟ 
 
 Denotes from, and expresses separation or distance from, 
 beginning, cause or motive. \\< signification is ofl 
 pressed by the word of, which is derived from άφ' or 'ατζό. 
 From. 'Ωρμαϊο aoro Σαργών, he marched from Sardis. 
 About. 'A-ffo τρΠ-ηζ υρας, about (i. e. from) the third hour. 
 After. Άτϊο Ssitfvov, from (the time of) supper, i. e. after 
 
 supper. 
 Against. 'Asfo yvl:py\g, aside from (i. e. against) his opinion. 
 For. 'A^irr7£u.'v7wv αυ7ων 'οτετό τΐ,ς χαρα^, as they disbe- 
 
 lieved from (for) joy. 
 Of. Ά^ό των (ίων 'αλ/σχω, I spend from (of) thine. 
 
 Of. Oi 'cwro της βου\γ { ς, persons of the council, coun- 
 
 sellors. 
 Of. Oi 'atfo <j% φιλο0Όφία£, persons of (belonging to) 
 
 philosophy, i. e. philosophe 
 With. Ή 'uixo του ξίφους /χάχη, the battle (commencing) 
 
 from swords i. e. a battle ord in hand. 
 
 Without. Ή W 'avfyos S(Ta, she being without (separated 
 from) a husband. 
 
 >EK, or >ES 
 
 Denotes out of It is used to express a change from one 
 state, place, or time, to another ; and likewise the com 
 materials of any thin 
 Out of. 'E§ Αιγί-ΰτχ bcakstfa τον υίον μχ, out of Egypt I have 
 
 called my son. 
 From. ; Πίρ^νης, ατολεμίΓν, out of (from) peace to make 
 
 Of. Ilorij ιόν bt χρ -jflO-j, a cup (made out) ο 
 
 Prom. •ι nut of (from) til 
 
 By. Ό ί/καιο£, 'ex τί-- just shall live by 
 
 faith, (as th< 
 After. ,rr (the time - 
 
 With. »«£, (out of) λ 
 
 ΠΡΟ 
 
 Denotes priority either in />/i7ff, fine, or estimation. 
 
 l\ 
 
158 
 
 Government 
 
 For. 
 
 Place. Προ §ύρων, before the door* 
 ttefore <? ^ ime ' Π Ρ^ r ™ *°^μου, before the war. 
 
 Preference. Πόλε/χον zsph ειρήνης, war in prefer- 
 ence to (before) peace. 
 We generally stand before what we de- 
 fend; hence 
 In defence of. Μάχεσαι -srpo των παίδων xolI 
 τατρδ γυναικών, to fight (before, in defence 
 of) for wives and children. 
 Instead of. Προ τΰαιδος &ανεΓν, to die for his child. 
 II. Two prepositions govern the dative only, εν and tfuv. 
 
 ΈΝ 
 Denotes in, contained within, either in time or place. 
 In. Έν λιμένι βίλεΓν, to sail in harbour. 
 
 Within. Έν sirfa ημέρας 'α'ΰ3'β$νήί7'κ*αΊν 3 they die within seven 
 
 days. 
 After. Έν τοολλω χρόνω, (within) after a long time. 
 Against. Έν εμοι Spa<fJ£. bold (in case of) against me. 
 Among. "Ovo£ 'εν μελίτ7αΐ£, the ass among (within) the 
 
 bees. 
 At. Έν Μαντινεία τγτΊημύνος, conquered (in) at Manti- 
 
 nea. 
 Before. Έν μάρτυαΊ των Ελλήνων «τλεον η τριόμ,υρΐοις, before 
 
 (in the midst of) more than three thousand wit- 
 nesses of the Greeks. 
 Sometimes it denotes within one's power, or 
 
 sphere of operation ; as, fyslo iv χνύυμα,Ίι, was 
 
 led in the operation of the Spirit ; by the 
 
 Spirit. 
 By. Έν τζΊοις το7ς νομο^άταις μή ^^(?^ε νόμον μηδε'να make 
 
 no law by (the operation of) these lawgivers. 
 For. Έν τοις δύο ό§ολοΓν έ^εώρχν αν, εϊ μή τχτ έχράφη, they 
 
 might have seen for the price of two oboli, had 
 
 not this been decreed. 
 Into. Έλ^εΓν 'εν Ελλάδι, to come into (within) Greece. 
 Upon . Κα/ 'εν 'ελεοΓαΊν ε^ηκε, and he put (the roasted pieces) 
 
 (within) upon the tables. 
 With. Έν 4τελταΐ£ και ακοντίου, (in the w T ay of) with 
 
 shields and darts. 
 
 With. 
 
 2TN 
 
 Denotes with, junction with. 
 Έξηλ^ε Ίηό^ Cuv τοις μα$η7αΓ$, Jesus went out 
 with his disciples. 
 
Prepositions. 
 
 At. Συν τω δειτνειν, at supper. 
 
 Beside. Συν roif, (together with) besides all these 
 
 things. 
 With. Συν θεω*ειρά<Τω, with God (with the aid of Gi 
 
 I will attempt it. 
 During. Συν τω tiiTv, at the same time with, during the 
 
 drinking. 
 To. Πορεύομαι (fuv 'ayuvi, I will go in junction with 
 
 (to) the contest. 
 
 III. One preposition governs the accusative. 
 
 ΕΓΣ 
 
 Denotes at; and motion, tendency or direction at, or 
 
 towards, and then it is rendered by into. 
 
 At. "ΕίΤτηκε είς την Si'pav, he stood at the door. 
 
 Into. Εκ «rupos sfc φ\όγα, out of the frying-pan into the 
 fire. 
 
 About. E/s έαΉί'ραν, at, about, evening. 
 
 Against. Efe τον Θεον άμαρτάνειν to offend against (the of- 
 fence being directed at) God. 
 
 Among. Εις rkg ήρωας κατελε^, he was reckoned (at the 
 place of) among the heroes. 
 
 Because { 'Επαινείται 6Ϊς το κάλλος he is praised because 
 j. < of his beauty — the praise being directed to 
 ( his beauty. 
 
 For. Εϊς ελάχιστον fcffe, it is reckoned (at) for a very 
 
 small thing. 
 
 In. Είς 'εκκληΤίαν καίομαι, 1 sit (at the place of) in 
 
 the assembly. 
 
 Of. Efe Xpiertov Χϊγω, I speak of Christ. 
 
 To. τ Ύς λκβΤχμενη εις κ^λκΤμα /3opSops, the sow that was 
 
 washed, to her wallowing in the mire. 
 
 Toward. EiV εμέ εύνοια, good will toward me. 
 
 Until. Εις );έλιον καταύ.'ν7α ίαίνυν7αι, they feast (till they ar- 
 rive at) until sun-set. 
 
 IV. One preposition governs the genitive or ac< 
 eative. 
 
 ΔΙΑ, Through, 
 Denotes the medium, instrument, or agent ; the mat, 
 als of which any tiling is made ; the distance measured b\ 
 any thing in motion, and governs the genitive. 
 
160- Government. 
 
 f *Etff>$'uis χα,ϊ δια ζΐάντων, he excelled (through- 
 out) among them all. 
 A mong. ^ Eur' αν πράτα φυγής όλοά£ διά τϊίτρας, as soon as 
 thou hast passed secure (through the place 
 L of) among the tremendous rocks. 
 Into. Δια μάχης thai, to go (through) into the battle. 
 
 Of. Β ρωμαία δια γάΧαχΊος και μέλι7ο£ γινόμενα, food made 
 
 of milk and honey. 
 Through. Δια ιτνείμαΊος, through the Spirit. 
 To. Κατεδιχίε δια τριάδων, he descended (among) to 
 
 the tripods. 
 Until. Δια τέλ*£, until the end. 
 With. Ού $έλω δια μέλανας και καλάμχ tfoi ypa -ψαι, I will 
 
 not write with pen and ink unto thee. 
 At. Κώμαι δια ττολλ2, (supp. χώρ*) villages at a great 
 
 distance. 
 After. Δια δυεΓν ήμερων, after two days — two days being 
 the distance. 
 Δια has that, on which it terminates, i. e. the end 
 ox final cause, in the accusative. 
 For. To' tfa§^a7ov δια τον άνύρωπον ε^ε'νείο, the sabbath 
 
 was made for man. 
 
 Sometimes, though rarely, the means. 
 Through. Ένίκη(Ταν αυτόν δια το α/μα <rS αρνί* they conquered 
 him through the blood of the Lamb. 
 
 V. Ten prepositions govern three cases. 
 
 ΑΜΦΙ 
 Denotes round about, in all directions, near about, or 
 beside, about, concerning. 
 
 ( 'Αμφ/ «τόΧηο£ olxhtfi, they dwell about the city. 
 
 Αμφ; δ' σ.ρ ωμοκίίν /3άλε7ο ξ'ιφος, and he hung 
 About. 1 the sword about his shoulders. 
 
 J Ά7ρόμενοι Ίορδάνχ 'αμφι 'ρε'ε^ρα, collected about 
 ^ the stream of Jordan. 
 After. Αμφί δ' αρ αύ7ω άλλοι §Vov7o, others followed (near 
 
 about) after him. 
 Anions Αμφ* σφΓαΊ τχύνβος ορωρε, sorrow rose (round about) 
 
 among them. 
 Beside. "HpizSi δ' αμφ' α;37ύ, he fell beside him. 
 Near. Αμφ; δε καυλο ν ν cpotfyavov ε^αίο^^η, the sword was 
 
 broken near the hilt. 
 Upon. Κά§£αλεν 'ανδρά κα7ά χ^ονός, 'αμφί δ' αξ airu $ζΰο ; 
 
Prepositions* 
 
 he threw the man upon the ground and 
 down upon him. 
 cerning. Μάχεσ^ον τχΐύαχος 'αμφ' όΧίγγς, they 6ght about 
 a Miiall fountain. 
 0£ Αμ*φί 'αγέρων γραφ-η a description of the stars: lit- 
 
 erally, a writing about the stars. 
 
 ANA 
 
 Denotes to move up or back, and refers to the line of 
 direction traced backwards. Hence it denotes back along, 
 against, up, upon, up and down, or among. 
 Against. '£νά το7αμον έιεκόμια'αν, they bore them back along 
 
 the river, i. e. against the stream. 
 About. "Αγεν <$' Όρυ^άονα δΤον, 'ανά χροΐάφοιο w/rrfctg he 
 
 took the noble Orythaon about the temple. 
 A C 'Ανά rov αυΐον λό^ον, according to the same 
 
 ,. " I word, q. d. tracing the same course of speech 
 
 ° * ( back again. 
 Over. Άνάτά ορη, up over the mountains. 
 Through. Έ<Τκ5δ<χ(Γ0η<7αν ανά <r7pa7ov, they were scattered up 
 
 and down, or through the army. 
 Among. 'Ανά <τά ορεα 4rXava<rSai, to wander up and down [a- 
 
 mong] the mountains. 
 Α -piece. Χωρ2(Ται 'ανά μέίρτ/ΐας δύο ή τρεις, containing two or 
 
 three firkins a-piece, [i. e. up to two or three 
 
 firkins, no farther.] 
 
 By the Poets. 
 Γροη. Είδε ζϊαΊτιρ 'ανά Γαρ} άρω αχρω, the father slept 
 
 upon the top of mount Gargarus. 
 in. Άνά χίρβϊν έλουζα, taking it up in her hands. 
 
 With. Χρυσεω 'ανά <Γχή*7ρω, with a golden sceptre. 
 
 ΈΠΙ 
 
 Signifies upon, in different modes. With the genitive it 
 • les action or situation upon. 
 I pon. ΊΙ (ΤφαΓρα χυλίνίεΐαι ίνά iifo Γραβέζφ, the ball roll* 
 
 upon the table. 
 Through. Έ*Τι Θράκης έχώρει, he marched through [upon] 
 Tin a 
 
 Of. I *iywv, epeaking upon [of] the child. 
 
 At ( I r fc, 
 
 Within. %vtl νύΜτς :<r7av εχαΛι, they fach stood [cl . 
 
 on] within the goal. 
 
 : 
 
162 
 
 Government. 
 
 oj on 
 
 S'Etfi « 
 Προφι 
 peo] 
 
 Beside. ΈφανερωίΓεν έαυ7όν star/ της SaXaiftfys της Τι§εριάδο£, 
 showed himself just upon, fi. e. at, beside] the 
 sea of Tiberias. 
 Ύχς vrfatfrfufloig (5ια§α'ινειν ϊκύΧευόε, και Μ τ£7ων τάς 
 τάξεις των Μακεδόνων, he ordered the shield-men 
 to descend, and after [close upon] them the 
 Macedonian ranks. 
 'Etfi Κρόνου, during the life of Saturn. 
 
 With the dative, £zrti generally denotes junction 
 of one thing upon another. 
 
 τοις φίλοΐ£, joined with, or among, his friends. 
 ροφη7εόειν ίιτίΧαοΤς και ε^νηοΊ, to prophesy among 
 people and nations. • 
 
 Following upon in the way of dependence, ad- 
 dition to, or in pursuit of. 
 'E^ri τούτοις, in addition to [with] these things. 
 Έττ/ τύ\ τ&ιοΑει, in consequence of [from] faith. 
 'Eflfi τύ\ κερίει, in pursuit of, for the sake of gain. 
 Νεκρό/ τριακόσιοι ivsl χιλίοις, three hundred upon 
 [above] a thousand dead. 
 
 With the accusative, it denotes an action di- 
 rected upon. 
 Α'&ος fiirlft Μ την γην, a stone falls upon, or to- 
 wards the ground. 
 Κα^ήμενον tei το τελώνιον, sitting upon the business 
 
 of [at] the receipt of custom. 
 Κύων ίιάκΑρέ^ας επίι το ϊίιον έξε'ραμα, the dog return- 
 ed to his vomit. 
 Towards. Έατ' αναΙοΧην, towards the east. 
 Against. Βασιλεία εφ' εαυ7ήν διαμεριστείς a kingdom divided 
 against itself. 
 
 After. 
 
 During. 
 
 Among 
 
 With. 
 From. 
 For. 
 Above. 
 
 Upon. 
 At. 
 
 To. 
 
 ΚΑΤΑ 
 
 Denotes along, against, according to, down, and refers 
 to the line of direction along which a thing tends, or is sit- 
 uated. 
 
 Along. Κα7ά την δίόν, or κα7ά της οίου, along the road. 
 
 Through. KaV οΧης rife 'IxSaiag, through all Jewry. 
 
 in. Κα7' οναρ, in a dream. 
 
 To. "Ηκον7ο κα7ά #7ρα7όν, they came to the army. 
 
 Toward. Κα7ά βορεαν εαΊηχως, standing toward the north. 
 
 Against. Κα7ά Xpitfft, against Christ. 
 
 Over. Eiirt κα7' *ρεο£, goes against [over] the mountain. 
 
Prepositions. 163 
 
 Under. * Eiu κα7ά ^αι'ης, lie «rent against [under] the earth. 
 Upon. Kald γης eiarttiv, to fall against [upon] the ground. 
 At. Κα7ά Cxozsl «rogsJsiv, to shout against [or at] a mark. 
 
 About. Κα7' οφθαλμών χίχυΤ αχΚίς, a mist was spread 
 
 about his ey< 
 Of. '07/ εμαρ7υρν)<Ταμεν χα7ά τ2 θε*, because we have 
 
 testified in regard [of] God. 
 Down. "Ωρμηο'ε χα7ά τ£ κρημνέ f *V ^ SaXotftfav, rushed 
 
 down the precipice into the sea. 
 Among. Κα7ά <7υφεοΓο*Ίν εϊρ^ει, she confines them along the 
 
 line of [i. e. anions] the sties. 
 From. Κα7α δζ (ΤφΓβΊ xsXocjvov α7μ' άατελεΙβεΤ 1 , the black blood 
 
 flowed along [from] them. 
 According to. Kald Ματθαίον, according to Matthew. 
 By. Κα7ά φυλά και κα7ά φρή7ρα^, according to [i. e. by] 
 
 tribes and wards. 
 So far as.Ka7a ίυνάμιν, according to his strength, so far as 
 
 he could. 
 After. Κατ' ε<κόνα τ* x7»<fav7o£, according to, or after, the 
 
 image of him who created. 
 Before. Κατ' όφ$άλμ*<; tfoi λε^ει, he speaks to thee before 
 
 thy face. 
 Near. Κορίνθιοι κα7ά τχς Ά&ηναίκς νανς ε/χον, the Corinthi- 
 ans had their ships near the Athenians. 
 
 ΜΕΤΑ 
 
 Denotes connexion or concomitancy, and is rendered by 
 
 with, among, between, after. 
 
 With. Eupov το παιδίον μετά <τ~ης μη7ρο$ αυ7ου, they found the 
 young child with his mother. 
 
 Among. Με7ά rwv νεκρών, in the same place w f ith (or among) 
 the dead. 
 
 With. Ό Θεός εατοίη^ε με7' αυ7ων, God wrought with them. 
 
 By. Χαί7αι ε^ώον7ο με7ά ιτνοι>&, their manes were blown 
 
 with (by) the wind. 
 
 With. Με7ά του άρν/ου ττολεμήσΌυσΊ, they shall fight with the 
 Lamb. 
 
 On. Ό ποιηόας το κλέος με7" αι37ου, he that showed mercy 
 
 on him, i. e. with him as the object of it. 
 
 In. Με7ά χερ&ν ?χων, having between (in) his hands. 
 
 Among. ?.ίε7ά ^ρω7οΓ<Τι *ονει7ο, lie was busy among the fore- 
 most. 
 
164 
 
 Government. 
 
 To. Με7ά <5μω>ίαΊν IWsv, he spoke among (to) the female 
 
 attendants. 
 
 Within. Με7ά αφΐόι #ημα r'ihsvlsg, placing their destruction 
 among (within) them. 
 
 After. Με7ά <njv έλίψιν των ήμερων τουΊων. after the tribu- 
 lation of these days. 
 
 By. Ν'κ7ωρ rsxai με^' ημεραν, by night and by day. 
 
 Into. Β/§λον με7ά χ^ρας ειληφώ^, having taken the book 
 between [into] his hands. 
 
 Among. 9 TSn νυν με7ά λαόν, go now among the people. 
 
 ΠΑΡΑ 
 
 Signifies at, beside, or near. With the geniti ve,/rom at, 
 or from beside, from .* 
 From. Παρά Κυρίου η βοηβεια μου, [from beside] from the 
 
 Lord is my help. 
 With. Ίη(Γου£ κα/ οι #αρ' αυ7ου, Jesus, and those who were 
 
 from beside [withj him. 
 Of. Έ'7Γ'υν^άνε7ο παρ αύΊων, he inquired from [of] them. 
 
 Above. ' Εχει ην' ογχον "Αργός Ελλήνων τίαρα, Argos has 
 
 something to boast from among [above] the 
 
 Grecians. 
 After. Παρ' ήδονί^λύνη, from [after] pleasure, pain. 
 Near. Παρά κρο7άφων <τε «τταρείαι, the cheeks from beside 
 
 [near] the temples. 
 
 With the dative close beside, i. e. at or with. 
 W T ith. Mitfdov βύκ εχε7ε nrapa τφ cra7pi, ye have not a reward 
 
 [laid up] beside, or with, your father. 
 Among. Διελο^'ί£ον7ο crap' εαυ7ο~£, they reasoned [aside] 
 
 among themselves. 
 With. Παρά τω Κυρίω έλεος, [beside] with the Lord is 
 
 mercy. 
 To. Ίε'ναι #αρά τω Τι^αφερνει, to go to Tissaphernes. 
 
 With the Accusative beside, for the sake of 
 comparison, or contrast, or as a reason. 
 In com- } ' Ωραίος «τταρά τχς υ'ϊζς «των av^pwcrwv, thou art fair* 
 parison. S when set beside or compared with the sons of 
 
 ) men, i. e. fairer than the sons of men. 
 Beneath. Ήλά77ωβ'α£ αυ7όν βραχύ τι *αρ' άγγύλχς, thou hast 
 
 lowered him a little, when set beside or com- 
 
 * The Genitive in Greek has frequently the force of tendency 
 
 from'. 
 
Prepositions. 
 
 
 pared with the angels; i. e. hast lowered bin 
 
 beneath the ;m;_ r • 
 
 For. Ilaga riJo sx kiv εχ ν* όωμαΊος, [for tl. .i) it 
 
 is not out of the body. 
 
 For. Θεός έ<5όκ*ν era ρ ά το μ,έγε&ος tojv tfftrpayfiii ν, Ι μ rul- 
 
 ed a God by reason of [for] the greatness of my 
 actions. 
 
 From. Ήν•5μ«Ι τζαρά τΤία <Γω7ηρίαν ε/ναι, I tliink that safe- 
 ty is from this. 
 
 Save. Tcfltfapaxov7a -rapa μίαν, forty save one. 
 
 ι >nd. Παρά τον #ό7αμον fyuyov, they fled to the farther side 
 of [i. e. over, beyond] the river. 
 
 Against. Παρά <rov νόμον, beyond, against the law, 
 
 ΠΕΡΙ 
 
 Signifies about, round about, concerning. 
 
 ίΠερι βωμοΐς, round or about the altar. 
 Ζύ;νη -aspl την oCqjJv, a girdle about his loins. 
 Περ/ μεαν,μβρίαν, about noon. 
 Concerning. Έγόγγυζον ο! ΊχίαΓοι rspi αυΐου, the Jews mur- 
 mured concerning him. 
 For. Περί tfcufji ττόλει δείιεναι, to be in fear concerning 
 
 [for] the whole city. 
 C &8δίύς ιχή τ\ xai περί aJ75 νεω7ερί<τειε, fearing lebt 
 Against. < he should make a new attempt against him. 
 
 ( Περί τχς Θεχς ά<Τεβήμα7α, impieties against the 
 Gods. 
 Towards. Περί <ruv αδικημένων, concerning [towards] those 
 
 who are injured. 
 In re- i Περί τίς γονείς <τοι2Ίος yiv*, be such in respect to 
 spect to. ( [toward] thy parents. 
 
 It sometimes denotes superiority : what is 
 round another is of course greater. 
 Over. ΈξχαΊ'αν έχει <xsfl <rS ί<5ι'ϋ 0ελ*,μα7ο£, has power over 
 his own will. 
 
 ίΠερι *άν7ων ίμμεν /xi άλλων, to be above all others. 
 Περί vouv/3po7wv, above the comprehension of mor- 
 tals. 
 
 ΠΡΟΣ 
 
 Signifies before, towards, facing for the purpose of acting, 
 or being acted upon. 
 
166 
 
 (Government* 
 
 Before. 
 With. 
 
 About. < 
 Between 
 
 By. 
 
 Near. 
 Of. 
 
 Through 
 
 For. 
 Towards 
 
 Against. 
 
 In addi- 
 tion. 
 
 On ac- 
 count of. 
 
 For the 
 jsake of. 
 
 During. 
 
 Ό is Πείρος si'tf7r}xs» προς ijj Ουρά, but Peter stood 
 
 before the door. 
 Ό Χόγος ην #ρο£ τον Θεο'ν, the Word was with (be- 
 fore the presence of) God. 
 Προ£ τω τέλει τ£ί /3/a, about the end of life. 
 Προ£ itftfs'pav εΥΙι, it is about evening. 
 Τεκμήριον της προς ημάς φιλίας, a proof of the friend- 
 ship that is between us. 
 Προς τ* Διο§ ικετεύω, ύμα$, I beseech you (in pres- 
 ence of) by Jupiter. 
 Προ£ μεν άλος Κάρες, the Carians near the sea. 
 Xprjtfli Έίρο£ ανδρός μηδέν ύ-ττονοεΓ κακόν, suspect no evil 
 
 of a good man. 
 Φυ#ων ttfpds |ινα^ α/μα, blowing out the blood through 
 the nostrils. 
 
 It often denotes tendency towards or against, 
 Tou7o yap ΈΤρο£ ύμε'7ερας ομηρίας υπάρχει, for this is 
 
 tending to (for) your health. 
 .'AstfjXdov -crpds εα,υίίς, they went away towards their 
 own homes. 
 Προς ανδρός εχθρού εΈίιφε'ρων τον ψηφον, giving his 
 
 vote against an enemy. 
 Ν~]ας -crpog οΉιλάδεσσΊν έ'αξαν, dashed the ships a- 
 
 gainst the rocks. 
 Προς κέν7ρα λακ7ί£ειν, to kick against the pricks. 
 { Προς τοϊς ε/ρημενοις, in addition to the things that 
 £ have been said. 
 
 With the Accusative only, according to; i. e. 
 so far in the presence, or under the inspection 
 of; as, 
 μηδέ ΧΜτβας «είρός το θέλημα, neither doing according 
 to his will. 
 
 On account of, pointed towards as a cause. 
 { Προς την σ'κλτϊροκαρϋαν υμών ί^ραψεν, on account 
 { of your hardness of heart, he wrote. 
 i Προς την ε'λεημοο'ύνην καθήμενος, sitting for the 
 I ,-ake of alms. 
 
 Έ#ι<τ7ολή εκείνη, ει xotl *ρός ώραν, ελυττησ'εν υμάς, that 
 epistle made you sad. though but for a season. 
 ΆπίοΰπαόύενΊζς ^ρός καιρο'ν ώρας, separated during 
 an hour. 
 
Prepositions. 167 
 
 ■ΤΠΕΡ 
 
 Signifies over, in defence of. Over, in respect of place 
 or position. 
 Above, lift 5* ύνίΐρ χεφα\ης, he stood over [above] his 
 
 head. 
 Over. *Xzsip άργυρω οχ^νίαι, they make their progress 
 
 over the silver ocean. 
 Upon. Τέρας uVsp κεφαλή, old age upon the head. 
 
 With the Genitive, it denotes beyond; what is 
 over another, is beyond it. 
 Beyond. Έξ Αϊόιο&ίας της υζϊέρ ΑίγυπΊου, out of Ethiopia, 
 which is beyond Egypt. 
 
 In (h fence of; what we would defend, we 
 stand over ; on the part, or behalf, or for the 
 sake of 
 { Ει δ Θεός ύ*ερ ημών, τίς χαΡ ημών, if God be for us, 
 ρ 1 [on our part] who can be against us ? 
 
 \ 'Etrt^psWIai tfoi ύιζερ <ftau7S λέχζιν, it is permitted to 
 \ thee to speak in defence of thyself. 
 By• Λι'αΌΌμ' υνϊρ Μαχάρων, I pray by [for the sake of] 
 
 the Gods. 
 In the room of; as, 
 Instead. ΧριαΊό^ toip ημών α-αε^ανε. Christ died in our stead. 
 Of or concerning, as it were to go over in 
 thought. 
 Concerning. Ή i\*ig ημών βεζαΐα υ-ΰερ υμών, our hope is 
 stedfast concerning you. 
 
 With the Accusative only, above, in any- 
 way ; as. 
 Above. Τά υτΰϊρ ήμα£ i££v tfpos ημ>ας, what is above is noth- 
 ing to us. 
 More than. f O φιλών tfalspa η μη7ερα υπϊρ ips, he who loves 
 father or mother above [more than] me. 
 
 'ΤΠΟ, by, under. 
 
 1. With the Genitive, Dative, and Accusative indiscrimin- 
 ately. 
 Fiulcr ; whether in place, time, power, or any other 
 mode of being under ; as, 
 
 l Xv(o χδονός, uuder the earth. 
 After. 'Tzj' αυ?φ Ζήνων χα7εχλίνε7ο, Zono Btt under [after] 
 him. 
 
168 
 
 Government* 
 
 At. 'Ttfo νυκίί, under [at] night. 
 
 About. *ΎτΧο τον opApov, under [or about] day-break. 
 
 Under. Αύγω ως too Θεφ, I speak as under [the direction 
 
 of] God. 
 Behind. Km μίν xot7axpto7si too την όι'ραν, and he conceals 
 
 him behind the door. 
 C *Ύ•ττό Τροιτ} ^yofxsv., we led [under] to Troy. 
 To. < Α?(Τχκτ7ο^ άνηρ too "ίλιον ?λίδ, he was the most ab- 
 
 { ject wretch that came to Troy. 
 With. Κα7α§αίνον7ι too λαμπάδων, coming down [under 
 
 the guidance of] with torches. 
 2. With the genitive, by, as a cause or an in• 
 
 strument. 
 By. To prMv too του Κυρίου, what was spoken by the 
 
 Lord. 
 Of. ΈνδΑΤαίχ^η too των μάγων, was mocked by [or of] 
 
 the wise men. 
 For. c T<p' ηδονής δαχρύεη,ίο weep for joy. 
 
 
APPENDIX— I. 
 
 From Valpy'a Grammar.) 
 
 DIGAMMA. 
 
 The original Pelasgic, and the old Dialects of Grcec/?, 
 admitted frw, or no Aspirates. The Digamma was early 
 adopted to prevent the hiatus, which the concurrence of 
 vowels would produce.* Aspirates were afterwards intro- 
 
 * It cannot be ascertained with precision, what was the pronuncia- 
 tion of the Digamma, which in its origin had something of the gut- 
 tural. The general opinion is, that it resembled our W. — I>ut the 
 frequent recurrence of this sound must have produced an effect so 
 harsh and inelegant, that our V appears a more natural pronuncia- 
 tion of the latter Digamma. This is more congenial to the sound of 
 the figure F, which it assumed. It was expressed in Latin by V ; and 
 the Italians, with the other nations, whose language is derived from 
 the Latin, pronounce that letter in vino, vento, &c. like our V. It 
 must have been nearly similar to the sound of B, which was frequent- 
 ly substituted for it, as in /erreo, ferbui, as it is still in the Southern 
 Provinces of Franco. The Latin V was frequently expressed in 
 
 k by B, as, Βά^ων for Varro ; and the Greek Β was changed ID 
 Latin into V, as, βάίω, vado. V was indeed sometimes changed into 
 
 . Ούελ/α for VifgiUus was written in Greek Βι»γ(\ 10 ς and 
 
 Ονιργϊλίος, Λ not and Nrpovioi ; but tli not pronounced 
 
 like \\\ bnt like V ; and Vossius and other eminent Crit 
 the preference to Β in those words. To this it should be added, 
 
 en pronounced V, and some modern ' pronounce) 
 
 ου\ημίνηνΛ τ ^ομίνην. In the Lacedemonian Dialect, «ι branch of thi A 
 
 ras always pronounced, and generally τ ke Β. 
 
 As this letter is so nearly allied to V in sound, and η \Y, 
 
 iy !)c considered as some argument in favor ofth» 
 • principle! 
 or bet' pronoun nr F, and rowel 
 
 ■ ,r V. I» ha^ 
 
 is in Fren 
 But our pronunciatl 
 so different fro π what it ι that it is ι 
 
 unu η tnd of the Digan 
 
 which pro 
 
 una revei 1 of a 
 
 whence it derh es its nan I !. α ι 
 
 hoi; Π0ίΐ . Άο\. for?vr..])o- 
 
 16 
 
170 Appendix-*— Digarnma . 
 
 duced into all Dialects except the jEolic, which adhered to 
 the Digarnma. Hence it has preserved the name of the 
 iEolic. It has also with great propriety been called the Ho- 
 meric Digarnma. That great Poet adopted the original 
 forms of the iEolic and Ionic Dialects,* which threw a ma- 
 jestic air of antiquity on his poetry. This ancient form 
 Homer dignifies by the appellation of the language of the 
 Gods. Virgil, and among the moderns, Tasso and Milton, 
 successfully imitated that practice by the introduction of 
 antiquated expressions, which removed their language from 
 the common idiom, and cast a venerable gloom of solemni- 
 ty on their style. To that principle may in a great measure, 
 be attributed the frequent use of the Digarnma by Homer. 
 
 The use of the Digarnma having been insensibly abolish- 
 ed by the introduction of Aspirates, the transcribers of the 
 works of Homur neglected to mark it, and at length the ves- 
 tiges of its existence were confined to a few ancient Inscrip- 
 tions. The harmonious ear of the Poet had led him sedu- 
 lously to avoid every hiatus of vowels ; but the absence of 
 the Digarnma made him inharmonious and defective. To 
 remove in some degree this difficulty, his Commentators in- 
 terposed the final v|, or the Particles y\ δ\ r ; but these 
 
 for l\ro, from ελο ; Χα6ίω, gaudeO) for Fa<5u>, &c. It hus frequently been 
 expressed by Β ; and sometimes too by Μ, Π, Φ, K, X. 
 
 Used for the original Digarnma, Γ had not the sound of our G, but 
 a soft guttural sound, like the German g final in Wenig. Indeed the 
 ancient form of Γ was a curve thus, (,) which became afterwards a 
 mark of the rough breathing. 
 
 The German g, commonly expressed hygh'm the English language, 
 has shared, in South Britain, the fate which the Digarnma experien- 
 ced in many parts of Greece, and has been disused. The few in- 
 stances, in which it is sounded, follow the principle of the Digarnma 
 F,iis, cough, enough, rough, tough. 
 
 It is not improbable that this guttural sound of Γ, softened by com- 
 mon use, may have given rise to the opinion that the Digarnma was 
 pronounced like our W. The difference of the two sounds maybe 
 exemplified in the modern word alyov, an egg, which the Greeks pro- 
 nounce of one, gutturalizing one. 
 
 * It is not to be imagined that Homer adopted arbitrarily the dif- 
 ferent Dialects. His was the pure, appropriate diction of Verse, the 
 classical language of ancient Greece, the source of all that wus sub- 
 lime and beautiful in Poetry, and the model of all succeeding Poets. 
 
 t They have even, by the addition of v, altered the case, and con- 
 gequently the sense, of some words. An instance of this appears in 
 the last Book of the Odyssey, 312, where vohv iukxti has been put for 
 v<3t fefw>ir£i. 
 
Appendix — IHgamma. 
 be partially adopt• 
 
 arian» ai d ( 
 
 I 
 
 The qu 
 
 assert tliat 5 Wit 
 
 Hut there \\< re paeea 
 was made bj the 
 
 uiiia 
 has at length fin( 
 
 Bfl of Ins or 
 
 lean in through these inti 
 
 an alpha! Ided of the word- ίο Homer, wjiich 
 
 ntly or generally, admit th< ι amainth< 
 itial 
 
 Λ. 
 
 | to 
 
 ) break. 
 
 atfcv, 
 
 ίΓχίλβς, 
 
 λο£, 
 
 
 l ?y 
 
 
 
 
 • -Ρ*, 
 
 B. 
 
 tl> 
 
 
 r, 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 foi s 
 
 iXj'dtfw, 
 
 
 «W, 
 
 iXcif, 
 
 *Sfipa, 
 
 4m 
 
 ίλτω, 
 
 tefv, 
 
 *t 
 
 
 ^vK, 
 
 i 
 
 f>- 
 
 
 b :^ίν, 
 
 ίλωοιβν, 
 
 ίϊόω, 
 
 ■ <** 
 
 
 ίΓχο^ι, 
 
 Λίι 
 
 
 aAif, 
 
 αλί^ 
 ava|, 
 
 aviavcj, 
 
 apou y 
 ap»(f7ov, 
 
 Π*». terra take a double Digamma, on• 
 
 before the au^ Lbe tarfe, at, i**ri fifeu 
 
 £ffeXwj. 
 
 as, »##fWi«* I simple w 
 
 . 
 
 . and » wei 
 
 iamn ι y>fr#f. 
 
 'hut» «u, Jtw mado *tVi# in iho future, changed iuto «<«» , y J*, i^^f* 
 
Appendix — Digamma . 
 
 Ης, 
 
 εω, to put on. 
 
 "Spiff, 
 
 ΐ*ος, 
 
 
 ί'εμαι, 
 
 Srw, 
 
 H. 
 
 ϊκελο£, 
 
 έρ^ον, 
 
 i%, 
 
 "Ιλιο*, 
 
 ipyu, 
 
 ^(k), 
 
 Τνες, 
 
 Ζρδω, 
 
 iW, 
 
 ινίον, 
 
 εί'ρω, 
 
 ψος, 
 
 Γον, 
 
 ψηρ-ης, 
 
 ηκα, adv. 
 
 /ovSas, 
 
 Ρ|ω, 
 
 -ζνοψ, 
 
 T If*j 
 
 ερύω, to draw, 
 
 fpi 
 
 if' 
 
 sVSfe, 
 
 ?pa, 
 
 /tfOff, 
 
 itf•*, 
 
 "Ηρη, 
 
 fotyftf, 
 
 έ<7νερο£, 
 
 fa*• 
 
 /Vxw, 
 
 ε(Τ7ίη, 
 
 
 ι'σ7ίη, 
 
 snjff, 
 
 I; 
 
 i'tf7wp, 
 
 ?Γ0£, 
 
 ιαχή, 
 
 Ιτέα, 
 
 STWtflOff, 
 
 Ιάχω, 
 
 ffUi, 
 
 ιφι, 
 
 •ψ, 
 
 Ο. 
 
 ο/#μα, 
 ο/κο$, 
 
 0IV0£, 
 
 ου, 
 
 οΰλαμο£, 
 ουρον. 
 
 Ω. 
 
 ωλξ. 
 
 The Latin Dialect naturally adopted the ^Eolic Digamma, 
 which it expressed generally by V, as will be seen in the 
 following list : 
 
 Jtftfspa, vespera ; 
 £tf7ia, Vesta ; 
 ε7ο$, vetus ; 
 } ^p, ver ; 
 i£o£, viscus ; 
 iov f viola ; 
 fc, vis ; 
 ι ω, ivi ; 
 κάω, cavo; 
 κεραο$, cervus ; 
 κλε£, clavis ; 
 κόρο£, corvus ; 
 λαιο'ί, Isbvus ; 
 λαρή, larva ; 
 λεΓο£, levis ; 
 λούω, lavo ; 
 λυω, solvo ; 
 μάω, rnoveo ; 
 μάλη, malva ; 
 μάορο£, Mavors ; 
 
 άγομαι, vagor ; 
 αιών, aevum ; 
 άλώ#ηξ, vulpes ; 
 aopvos, avernus ; 
 αχαιός, achivus ; 
 αω, vapor ; 
 /3ιόω, vivo ; 
 βόες, boves ; 
 δΐος> divinus ; 
 είδέω, video ; 
 ει'κα7ι, viginti ; 
 ελω, volvo ; 
 Ιμω, vomo ; 
 ένδίκω, vindico ; 
 ενε7οι, veneti ; 
 έ'ν7ερο^, venter ; 
 ε'ρχω, vergo ; 
 I'poff, servus ; 
 ερω, verto ; 
 εο^η^, vestis ; 
 
 ναιο£, ncevus ; 
 ναυς, navis ;* 
 νε'ο$, novus ; 
 νικώ, vinco ; 
 οΓκο$, vicus ; 
 ofvos, vinum ; 
 οίς, ovis ; 
 ολω, volvo ι 
 οχ\ος, vulgus; 
 οω, voveo ; 
 craiJpos, parvus ; 
 sJpiw, privo ; 
 Jico, rivus ; 
 <7καιΟ£ ? saevus ; 
 ταώ^, pavo ; 
 υλη, sylva ; 
 ΰω, uvesco ; 
 ώόν, ovum, &c. 
 
 * Nai-s was probably pronounced nafs ; hence navis. Thus ΠαΕροί ; 
 pafros. was transposed into parvus* 
 

 
 ! 
 
 ;, biltrif , μ 
 mur• η*ς, nurue, ll 
 
 In :ι.;ι.:ι ha* be• J Μ, Wof, DCW ; 
 
 iv I ..,iu the 
 
 \ j te, Va 
 
 II. 
 THE si BBC&IPT 
 
 ί ι 
 
 II. Tin D 
 
 III. 
 
 bs 
 IV. I a*, 
 
 and 
 
 .- . • 
 
 
 una wan a principal affnt 
 
 
 
 oin am> % avun, \v;i* lernnJ .• ir < 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 hav»• din ώο % Iron ttiour», monrfm 1 . ••. 
 
 ι anal 
 
 
 
 
 their 
 
 i long TO*. anti mb« 
 
 • I .v; th.v 
 
 
 
 
 
 ic. rim ti_ cm «ι * if*» ir*» * *■«•« »•-» «*i. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
174 
 
 Appendix — Article. 
 
 
 
 V. In other contracted terminations of Verbs in αω without 
 distinction of Voices where ι occured before contraction j 
 as, βο-άεις-άς, βο-άοις-ως. 
 
 VI. In the 2d Singular of Tenses of the Indicative Mood 
 in ομα», and of the Subjunctive in ωμαι, Passive and Middle 
 Voices ; as, τύ*7-ομαι- # η, τι^-ωμαι-τ; : and retained after Con- 
 traction by Verbs in aw and εω ; as, τιμ-ά^-α, φιλ-ε^-τ). 
 
 VII. In the 2d Sing, of Tenses in the Subjunctive Passive 
 and Middle of Verbs in μι ; as, 
 
 Present.^ 2d Aorist. 
 
 (Τ7&μαι 5 (fry tf<rw, fay 
 
 «π^ώμαι, Tiby Βω, ύη 
 
 διδώμαι, δίδω 5ω, δω 
 
 In the Subjunctive in the three Voices corresponding with 
 that of the contracted form of Verbs in αω, εω, and •», un- 
 der the exceptions already noticed. 
 
 
 III. 
 
 ARTICLE. 
 
 The article was originally a relative pronoun, and as such 
 was used by Homer and others in the sense οι αύΊός or εκεί- 
 νος. *0 yap βασΊληϊ γοΚωύεις vitfov ανά tf7parov ωρ4ε κακήν, he 
 being enraged with the king, raised a destructive pestilence 
 among the people. Iliad, A. 9. Ό γαρ ί)\όε, for he came. 
 11. ΤΉΝ δε εγω & \ύ4ω, but I will not release her. 29. 
 
 When the antecedent is so situated, that the relation of 
 the pronoun to it is obscure, the antecedent is repeated after 
 the pronoun, to remove the obscurity : in this case the pro- 
 noun takes the name of the article. Thus, Iliad, A. 33, 
 ως εφατ\ εδδεκτεν 'Ο — Here it would be doubtful whether the 
 pronoun Ό referred to the person who spake, or to some 
 one mentioned before. To remove this ambiguity, the 
 Poet goes on, εδδεκϊεν Ό γέρων, the old men feared, viz. 
 Chryses, who had been before introduced ; line 11. 
 
 The article ο differs from the relative og in two respects 
 only. 
 
 φ ; which is indeed a more natural contraction of ©p*, 03, than ©7$, ©7, 
 used by verbs in aw ; and that the 2d aorist varies from the present, 
 and consequently from the contracted form in verbs derived from e«, 
 by assuming η instead of β. 
 
Appt ndis — Art I 
 1 . It has ν it, t* to 
 
 r Π petit 
 
 « ir- 
 i part, arises the obacti 
 
 toy ili 1 1 j f«ae 
 
 iliar to the mind, nth >ned bc- 
 
 or implied m 1 hat has I 
 
 In the case of the arti• 
 lative If, 
 noun, bul Mow• it. 
 
 noon, there ie always 
 1 the participle • 
 
 . be that is k 
 Th iple is ι irf& 
 
 ONTE: ι τλιτίίΓι, the ROft worth} are ι 
 
 )v the least wealthy. 
 
 A participle di rb by assuming what * 
 
 γ» rb asserts. In the proposition, Ό αγα&>ς l 
 •ίοφιΓ, the go 9 ά^α<?&£ \- 
 
 lent to Ό ών άγαέός, lie \ 
 
 11< re it i< lir-t axsumtd that BoCTatOI and 
 
 ι an aaai ι ning him. Hut : 
 
 asserts tl 1 man ; the thing 
 
 assvnud wh( rticle wtf 
 
 with the word which Ibllowi 
 
 trticle may h 
 termine when we :»π• authorized to make this <w- 
 sumptive proposition. May we alway* aatome that the 
 
 ■ II. »U fl t" 
 
 <r ti.t u the article Dlighf tbOQt 
 
 ning. Hut when may tins assiun r 
 fi we are about to η 
 has d to the mind ; lot we are author- 
 
 has 
 If in diace 
 is occasion to mention bin jam, 
 
 tang, a hone 
 
 ied t•» !•• It 
 
 ι 
 
 ■lent Dree, for tbii won aauroe tl. 
 
 I 
 
 in what assumption 
 
 ma\ • i.•. 
 

 
 176 Appendix — Article. 
 
 I. Renewed Mention. 
 
 1. When a person or thing, recently mentioned, is spoken 
 of again, the article is inserted, whether the same word is 
 used, or a synonymous one. Xen. Cyrop. Έ#α/£εύ$η γε 
 f^v εν Περσών νόμοΐ£ — ου7οι Si foxSCi ΟΊ ΝΟΜΟΙ αρχεία», he 
 was educated according to the Persian laws — and those 
 laws seem to begin, kc. Xen. Mem. III. 13. Κολα<?αν- 
 τος ti τίνος ιόχυρως ΆΚΟ'ΛΟΤΘΟΝ, %ε7ο <π χαλεταίνοι ΤΩι 
 4ερά«πΌν7ί, and some one beating his attendant severely, he 
 inquired the reason of abusing the servant. 
 
 2. The article is inserted before a word specifying the 
 known state or qualities of some thing just mentioned ; as, 
 Σωκράτης Ό Ά$ηναίο£, Socrates the Athenian ; ε'^ώ *0 άμαρ- 
 7ωλο£, I confessedly a sinner. 
 
 It is not always supposed, that the state or qualities de- 
 scribed are known to the person addressed, but only that 
 they may be generally known. 
 
 3. The article is inserted before a noun, when the exis- 
 tence of that, which the noun denotes, has been implied in 
 the preceding part of the sentence, though not expressed in 
 form. 
 
 iEschin. cont. Ctes. § 56. ΟυΊος ΠΡΟΔΟΤΣ τοις *ολε- 
 μίοις Νόμφαιον φυγάς εγενεΊο, ΤΉΝ κρίσιν έχ' υττομείνα^, he hav- 
 ing treacherously surrendered Nymphaeum to the enemy, 
 became a fugitive, not waiting the trial. Here τήν κρίσιν is 
 the trial, implied as the necessary consequence of the 
 treachery. 
 
 Ibid. § 34. "θ7αν «π ΨΕΤ'ΔΩΝΤΑΙ, aopurfa xai άα'αφη «ττει- 
 ρων7αι λέγειν, φοβέμενοι ΤΟ έ'λε^χον, when they lie, they seek 
 indefinite and obscure expressions, to avoid the reproach. 
 TO εΚεγγον refers here to the reproach implied as the neces- 
 sary consequence of their falsehood. 
 
 The clearness of the implication will be very different in 
 different cases. In many instances it exists only in the 
 mind of the speaker : and is authorized, only because it 
 will appear just, when the sentence is concluded. 
 
 II. ΚΑΤ' ΈΗΟΧΗ'Ν. For Distinction. 
 
 There is a multitude of ideas dormant in the mind, which 
 are perfectly familiar to it, though not constantly the sub- 
 jects of its contemplation. Λ reference may be made to 
 these, with the same certainty that the relation will be per- 
 ceived, as if it were to something recently mentioned, or 
 actually presented to the mind. 
 
is so well ki 
 
 I). 
 
 from t|j« 
 
 it the g*( 
 
 i). \ \i\ ■: 
 
 I 
 
 Assembly. 
 
 noun ι 
 . <»r with what \ 
 
 hut 
 
 it. 
 
 e teeom] 
 
 •i. 
 
 w bich the ti poe- 
 
 nil. 
 l> . ψαΊρί χα. 
 
 y :• ; :'.',". •>η. iX> ά χα, Τ I li carpfii tl.it ii.• is hum, QOt tor his 
 
 • lit tor | 
 
 I \ Ν 
 
 Un- 
 it ) 
 
278 
 
 Appendix — Article. 
 
 
 
 No ideas are more familiar to the mind than these. 
 
 In cases where the article is used xaV φχήν, its reference 
 is sometimes more obscure than in instances of renewed 
 mention ; yet its insertion is explicable on the same princi- 
 ples. 
 
 III. Correlatives. 
 
 Correlatives are words between which there exists a mu- 
 tual relation. 
 
 1. When words are in regimen, if the governing noun has 
 the article, the one governed has it likewise. 
 
 Plat. Thraet. p. 71. η ΤΩΝ <Τω,αά7ων έξις, the state of bo* 
 dies. 
 
 To this rule there are some exceptions, but these are 
 chiefly cases where the article is omitted, according to the 
 rules for omission to be given afterwards. 
 
 2. When a partitive governs a genitive, the article is 
 prefixed to that genitive. 
 
 Πολλο/ ΤΩΝ βΌφων, many of the wise. 
 
 The genitive following the partitive, denotes the class to 
 which the partitive belongs. 
 
 The rule is sometimes violated, especially in the case of 
 άν^ρώ^ων. Some partitives, as <r?s, S<fo$, cannot from their 
 nature admit the article ; and some only in particular cases, 
 as πολλοί, εϊς. They will be noticed hereafter. 
 
 3. The article is used with μεν and £έ, when things are 
 opposed to each other, so as to have a mutual relation. 
 
 l O μεν, the one ; δ δε, the other. 
 
 To με ν ν άνοή7ον, το δε μανικο'ν ; the one foolish, the other 
 mad. 
 
 In the same manner, εΊς and έτερος. 
 Ό ε /f, the one ; i έτερος, the other. 
 
 hypothesis. 
 
 In the preceding cases, the article with its predicate re- 
 calls some familiar idea. In this, it is used for no purpose, 
 but merely for the sake of assumption. The article used 
 hypotJietically denotes that every individual is intended, to 
 whom the predicate can be applied. 
 
 Demosth. de Cor. §71. Πονηρον Ό ύυχοφύντγις άεί, the 
 sycophant is always evil. This is equivalent to Ό ών «Τυκο- 
 φάν7η$, whoever is a sycophant. 
 
 Xen. Mem. 3. 1. Ά ίεΓτον ευ (ήραΊηγ^ύονΊα εχειν, which 
 h becomes a good General to have, i.e. every good General. 
 
Appendix — Art• ITS 
 
 Hi 
 
 ι (]. \\« should π.: .*οφάν7η( wan 
 
 mrniioH , bot II ' ' Kat 
 
 ran l•• 
 
 In < <1 with the plural, 
 
 ngs. 
 
 rrp (• Ιι guard 
 
 t to two purposes, reiinc- 
 
 ^d m< fit inn, and f*. 
 
 • «licate is familiar 
 
 tix- 
 claes to 
 
 • some one of hove mention* 
 
 ever» 
 
 OM! PTII Λ Κ 
 
 / 
 000 the ι -//.τ of t: 
 
 *ill i.ision*, 
 
 and I the 
 
 prim t in all cases 
 
 arli- 
 
 1 . In ι i«y, 
 
 m affiim- 
 ihoul lh< 
 
 Pielin tut. I. 
 
 In time 
 
 n&tUml 
 
 t raM (ta Ν o«\ iV/, for hart the •τ- 
 
 4 ΐϋ «srumrd. 
 
1 80 Appendix — Article. 
 
 Demosth. de Cor. § 23. ΑΙ'ΤΙΟΣ ΕΓΜΊ του ιϋοΧψου, I 
 am guilt) of the war. 
 
 iEsch. cont. Ctes. § 52. ΠΡΟΔΟ'ΤΑΣ <των Ελλήνων ψ*ς 
 βοιωτάρ-χας sxakstis, he called the leaders of the Boeotians the 
 betrayers of Greece. 
 
 Ibid. 43. Ό τολμών εν ταΐς itfitilokcug -χράφειν, ό'7ι ΔΕΣΠΟ'- 
 ΤΉΣ 'ΕΣΤΊΝ ά^άνΙων ανθρώπων, who dared to write in his 
 Letters, that he is King of all men. 
 
 In these instances, the words in capitals would have the 
 article xaV εξοχήν, were it not forbidden by the verb, which 
 is used to indicate, as hitherto unknown, the very truth, 
 which the presence of the article would imply as known or 
 supposed already. Hence, in the passage from iEschines, 
 had the Persian Monarch written bV» Ό δεύποίης ctfli, the 
 sense would have been, that he was the person recognized, 
 (for here hypothesis has no place,) to be the lord of man- 
 kind. But he knew the Greeks had not thus recognized 
 him. 
 
 3. After verbs of appointing, creating, choosing -, ore. the 
 noun expressive of the appointment, choice, ore. is without 
 the article. 
 
 Demosth. de Cor. § 59. ΉΓΕΜΩΝ χα; ΚΤ'ΡΙΟΣ ΉΡΕ'- 
 ΘΗ Φίλιακττο£ ά•5ίάν7ων, Philip was chosen ruler and governor 
 of all. 
 
 Isai. v. 20. o\ ΊΤ'ΘΕΝΤΕΣ -ro όχόΊος ΦΩΣ,κοο το φω^ΣΚΟ'- 
 ΤΟΣ, who put darkness for light, and light for darkness. 
 
 The article could not be prefixed to any of these nouns, 
 because the existence of the appointment, &c. is not of a 
 nature to be recognized, being now first declared ; and hy- 
 pothesis, as before, being out of the question. 
 
 4. Nouns in apposition, not explanatory of the essence 
 of the preceding noun, but of the end to which the person 
 or thing intended is affirmed to be subservient, are without 
 the article. 
 
 Demos, de Cor. § 15. Τω irpoSirji ΣΤΜΒΟΤΛΩι χρ^7αι, 
 he uses the traitor as the counsellor. 
 
 In such cases, εΓναι or ων may be supplied. 
 
 5. In exclusive propositions, where it is intended to ex- 
 clude universally every individual, the article is omitted. 
 
 Demosth. de Cor. § 28. Ου ΧΑΤΣ, έ ΤΕΙΧΗ *%*όλ*ω$ 
 κεχτημένηέ, the city possessing no ships, no walls. 
 
 If the article had been inserted, it would have implied 
 that the existence of ships and walls was either recognized 
 or conditionally admitted ; both of which are inconsistent 
 with the nature of the proposition. 
 
pmtlix — Arii 
 
 λομ^τρον, the skin of mm is tit tnd 
 II• 
 
 'γύ*ι cannot 
 • 
 
 I be sai « will explain v. 
 
 without the article.• 
 
 Platl 1. Διίά^χαλον ΜΟΥΣΙΚΗΣ, a teacher 
 
 Plot pige 99. ΨΤΧΙΪΣ γαρ oft avovco σώμα, for the body 
 
 ι instrti Dent of the mind. 
 In ; would have the ar- 
 
 - he indefu d precede 
 
 Insertions and ()mi.ss : ons combiiud. 
 
 I red the principal insertions and the prin- 
 
 r.?, it will be proper to notice one or two ι 
 ertion and omission comb, 
 I. The subject of a proposition is generally found with 
 
 the pn tlicatc without 
 
 1 Ου χάρ iirti TO ftftoiff 1\H 
 
 Μ \. το<7χ>μα 'ΕΠΙ ΠΕΛΟΝ. - 
 
 Pint. He And. Poet, ρ It. ΖΩΓΡΛ 1 1 \ 
 ι I ; • f«.. ΠΟΙΗ ΣΙΙΝ Eton th 
 
 that i and pan 
 
 Will- tit. 
 
 in i. l . Km and the word 1 1 »d. 
 
 ΤΙ ι 
 
 I 
 thrr word m 
 
 m ill have the article, <>r ι 
 
 ail preccd n- r 
 
\&: 
 
 Appendix — Article. 
 
 Plato, vol. xi. p. 38. TO ώφελιμον soixsv ήμΓν είναι TO 
 καλόν, it interests us, that utility should be the great good, 
 or, that the preat good should be utility. 
 
 Arist. de'lnter. c. G. ΚΑΤΑΦΑΣΙΣ ΙβΉν 'ΑΠΟ'ΦΑΣΙΣ 
 τίνος xclIol τινός. 
 
 2.* When two or more attributes,! joined by a copula- 
 tive, are assumed of the same person or thing, before the 
 lirst attribute the article is inserted ; before the others it is 
 omitted, 
 
 Plut. Vit. Cic. p. 68. ^άχϊχιος <0 υΓος ΚΑΊ κληρονόμος τ£ 
 <rs4vr)xoVo£ ή^ανάκ7ει, Roscius, the son and heir of the deceas- 
 ed, was grieved. 
 
 Demosth. de Coro. § 27. Ύ'ις f O <rrj ^όλει λε^ων, ΚΑΊ 
 γράφων ΚΑ ν Ι ΉράΊΊων ΚΑΊ Ιαυ7όν δχς, he who says, and writes, 
 and acts, and gives himself to the State. 
 
 Ibid. § 61. Ό όύμβαΧος ΚΑΊ |^τωρ 8γω } I, the adviser 
 and orator. 
 
 Philo. 309. - β Ο κύριος ΚΑΊ Θεός ευερ/είης ΙΛίν, the Lord 
 God is a benefactor. 
 
 The article Ό, which precedes the first attributive, is a 
 representative of the person to whom all the attributes be- 
 long. 
 
 Were it inserted before the remainder, the persons, rep- 
 resented by the article thus inserted, must be the same or 
 different. Different they cannot be by the supposition. If 
 the persons denoted by the article be the same, we have the 
 absurdity of coupling a being to himself. 
 
 When the article is repeated before the several words, 
 they denote different persons. 
 
 Demosth. de Cor. 57. Ό σόμβχΚος xou Ό <Γυκοφάν7η£— -δια- 
 φ='ρ*0Ί, the adviser and the sycophant differ. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Three classes of nouns are exceptions to this rule. 
 
 1. Names of substances, considered as substances; as,, 
 Ό ΧΜος ΚΑΊ χρνόός, stone and gold. 
 
 2. Proper names ; as, TON Άλέξανδρον, ΚΑΊ Φίλι*ίΤον, 
 Alexander and Philip. 
 
 * This is the celebrated Rule of Granville Sharp, Esq. 
 
 t By attributives are meant adjectives, participles, and nouns sig- 
 nificant of cfiaracttr,rtlatieri) or dignity; such nouns are often inter- 
 changed with adjectives or participles ; as, Ό Βο»λ«*ωρ for Ό ββλευτΚ. 
 and are therefore similar to them in nature. 
 

 ν 
 
 ι always 
 
 ιι- 
 
 'licso it? 
 
 and yp.'^'-'fc w ill both l»«* ifMiiiH ab- 
 
 ^ • ' l>at any 
 
 maw. 
 
 Bt» mtn, my friends, and recall your martial spirit, II. Z. 
 
 attributive. 
 
 t at 
 nea 
 
 nal. It «"ase cw \ 
 
 •p•* • ; ινόρ•Λ on/ ν 
 
 nld haprx 
 
 η a r 111*1» not wholly dun» 
 
 * ■ 
 

 > 6 4 Appendix — Article. 
 
 It would, therefore, be as contradictory to assume that any 
 quality represented by Ή was at once cwrsipia and aVai<kuaYa, 
 as that the same person was both Alexander and Philip ; 
 whence it is immediately evident, that such an assumption 
 could not be intended. Under this head we may class 
 Verbs in the infinitive mood, which differ not in their nature 
 from the names of the corresponding abstract ideas. Thus 
 we read in Plato, vol. xi. p. 43, ΤΩι ISsw τε ΚΑΊ axStfai : in 
 the next page we have ΤΗι όψει rs ΚΑΊ axojj. The two 
 «cses evidently require the same explanation. Infinitive 
 moods, so coupled together, are extremely common. 
 
 The rule likewise is true conversely. 
 
 If two or more attributives, coupled by χα/, have the arti- 
 cle prefixed to the first, and not to the others, they all be- 
 long to the same subject. 
 
 This is plainly the case in all the instances cited above. 
 The only exception, in addition to those mentioned before,! 
 is with regard to plurals. 
 
 A single individual may stand in various relations, and 
 act in divers capacities ; and, consequently, if two such re- 
 lations or characters be connected by a copulative, and the 
 first be preceded by a pronoun, the reader will reasonably 
 understand them both of the person represented by that 
 pronoun ; because such is the general usage, and the com- 
 pliance with it will not involve any contradiction. But this 
 does not happen in the same degree with respect to plurals. 
 Though one individual may act, and frequently does act, in 
 several capacities, it is not likely that a multitude of indi- 
 viduals should all of them act in the same several capaci- 
 ties : and, by the extreme improbability that they should be 
 represented as so acting, we may be forbidden to under- 
 stand the second plural attributive of the persons designed 
 in the article prefixed to the first, however the usage in the 
 singular might seem to countenance the construction. The 
 meaning may be illustrated by a familiar example. An indi- 
 vidual is at once a member of parliament and the colonel of 
 a regiment. Speaking of such an one. and having occasion 
 to advert to these two characters, we might say in Greek, 
 Ό βχ\5υτΎ)ς Κ ΑΊ λοχαγός ; and if, by such a phrase, we 
 meant to indicate two different persons, we should speak in 
 a manner not authorized by the Greek idiom. But suppose 
 we should say, speaking of several persons, 0*1 βχΚευταί 
 ΚΑΊ λοχαγοί ; the inference would be, either that the per- 
 
 t Pa$e 182. 
 
I pcndis— ' 
 iKj in parliam• 
 
 I distinct 
 
 • li.tt DO 
 
 tho bi pottibilitj 
 
 PROPER NAMES AM) ABSTRACT NOI λ 
 
 ! h have I" ■ ii tor tli• a, do not 
 
 al\\j)< apply to prop* r mums and abstract noun*. 
 
 The pr- .k writer- - r name*, 
 
 ally with the ru!< wn. 
 
 W hen prop ur, they are 
 
 out t I d b] tl•• 
 
 ι intended. I red ment 
 
 article is usually inserted Tl \>en- 
 
 sabh ben tin• nan.• rally 
 
 to the person aln 
 lid not 1>< & to mark that r« :> 
 
 appellatives, from frequent u§< na- 
 
 tUN . and follow the Bam 
 
 kind is Xpiffrcf, β 
 
 • 
 1 
 
 ι και Ή ( -r»v 
 
 cwv I 
 
 • 
 
 Ther( 
 
 and I 
 will 
 
 2. When t! .. 
 
 Ν 
 

 186 Appendix — Article. 
 
 Aristoph. Av. 1536. Και ΤΗΝ βα(Τι\είαν <So\ γυναΐχ* εγ$& 
 δώω. And I give you the kingdom as a wife. 
 
 Xen. Mem. Π. Ι. Ή Κακία ύτολαβ^α slvsv, And Malice, 
 interrupting, said. 
 
 The article is not always inserted, as in the case of proper 
 names, to which this is analogous. 
 
 3. Abstract nouns, according to the rule already given, 
 take the article when it has the sense of a possessive pro- 
 noun. 
 
 Aris. Ran. 45. 'Αλλ' ο•3χ οίος τ 1 ειμ 1 άχούοβτ,όοα ΤΌΝ 
 χέλων, But I cannot restrain my laughter. 
 
 4. These nouns take the article when they have reference 
 of any kind. 
 
 Plato, vol. iv. 31. Έάν μη «7rpoSK$>j «rep* tstcjv T'HN άλ^- 
 dsiav, Unless he foresee the truth concerning these things. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 It was not to be expected, that the rules now given for the 
 article should be entirely without exceptions. The first 
 are in the case of 
 
 rHEPOSITIONS. 
 
 Words which would take the article by the preceding 
 rules, often lose it after prepositions. 
 
 Plato, κα7ά IIp'AIN, the city (Athens.) κατ' 'ΑΓΟΡΑ X, 
 the Forum. 
 
 Arist. His. II. 2. *A έξηραίνε/ο wre KT'NA, which were 
 withered by the dog-star. Πλησίον Θ^ΛΑ'ΣΣΗΣ, near the 
 sea. IIpos ΉΛΓΟΤ δόνοντος, at sunset 
 
 Hence it is evident, that the absence of the article, in 
 such instances, affords no presumption, that the nouns are 
 used indefinitely. Their deiiniteness or indefiniteness, 
 when they are used after prepositions, must be determined 
 ήι other grounds. 
 
 ENUMERATION. 
 
 When several nouns are coupled together by conjunc- 
 tions, or, what is equivalent, the conjunctions are omitted 
 by the figure Asyndeton, they frequently all drop the article^ 
 though each taken singly would require it. 
 
 JEach. cont Ctes. §38. Κα/ΧΕΙΡΊκα» ΙΊΟΔΊ xccj ΦΩ- 
 
~'xCV4 0*,. 
 
 •veil wb< 
 
 itO. II. 1 I 
 
 
 OJM 
 
 - 
 'irst, 
 
 in affinity to the ordin 
 
 g ir< I 
 
 Mill M1IN 
 
 '< 1 1 \ 1 . 
 
 I 
 
 ΠΑ2. 
 
 ■ 
 
 UN 
 \ - u 1 I I ι -. ι . : . ::.r λ hoi• 
 
 ι I - 
 
 I 
 
 . jjv^v ηλίον, tbey 
 
 art ai 
 
 ii.M ;i!..l "An \i are ueed in iho plural, the 
 
1 88 Append χ — Article. 
 
 article is inserted where there is reference ; where there is 
 not, the usage is various. 
 
 "ΟΛΟΣ. 
 
 The construction of "Ολο$ resembles that of πάς. When 
 the substantive is without reference, it wants the article ; 
 and vice versa. Ένιαυ7όν όλον, a whole year. "Ολην 
 ΤΗΝ βτόλιν, the whole city. 
 
 When ά'λο£ is used in the sense of wholly or altogether, 
 the article is omitted. 
 
 Demosth. Πλάσμα "ΟΛΟΝ itfliv ή διαθήκη. 
 
 O r TT02. 
 
 A noun, when joined with the pronoun oSVos, always has 
 the article prefixed. TON tfo'vov tStov, this labour ; αι)7η Ή 
 μάχη, this battle ; ταυ7α ΤΑ ^ηρι'α, these beasts. 
 
 This rule is not observed by Homer. 
 
 Proper names usually take the article, but not always. 
 
 *ΌΔΕ. 
 
 What has been said of O r TT02, will, for the most part, 
 apply to οδε. 
 
 Ύηόδε ΤΗΣ ήμερα^, this day : TON νόμον «τόνδβ, this law. 
 
 There are, however, instances in which the article is 
 emitted, when the noun precedes, especially if it be a pro- 
 per name». 
 
 'ΕΚΕΙΝΟΣ. 
 
 Nouns joined with this word, have the article in both 
 numbers, like ou7o£. 'Εκείνης ΤΗΣ ημέρας, that day. Έκε/- 
 νβι^ΤΟΙΣ χρόνος, at those times. 
 
 W hen this word is associated with a proper name, the 
 article is sometimes omitted, at least when the proper name 
 precedes. 
 
 On the Position of the Article, in the Concord of Substan- 
 tives and Adjectives. 
 
 1. When an adjective is preceded by the article, a sub- 
 stantive is understood, which, together with the adjective, 
 is the predicate to the article. 
 
 Ό δίκαιη is equivalent to Ό δ/καιο$ άνηρ ; and the article 
 
. ■. • 
 
 1 1 * 
 
 I 
 
 I 111 K< »l Mil <f ομηρία 
 
 ι 
 
 Μ I to 
 
 r, it [>n 
 
 ! Κ 1 I II ■ ' ■ 
 
 \ 1 I i ' - αοΓ;*ραν „. 
 
 .ltd 
 Ο τα7»;ρ, 
 
 It will be remarked, from ■ u 
 rules, that th< 
 
 • ■ > τα?ήρ. Ιι. 
 
 ;i. But Ιμ%ς l is a prepo 
 
 When the eubsti ar- 
 
 with us an 
 
 την οι'χίαν ψτ § * ίμι$ν, going to 
 bou 
 
 with- 
 in all (in -ι k writers, w ben Ihc 
 ally 
 
 ■ 
 wJn 
 
1 9β Appendix — Dialects. 
 
 ef to mark an emphasis or opposition. Of the first kind, an 
 instance may be found in Eph. i. 13. εν <ί χα/ «κΠεύιϊανΊες stf- 
 φραγ ludrfls ΤΩι ιτνίϋμβΛ *% =παγγί\ιας ΤΩι ά^ίω. In whom 
 believing, ye have been sealed with the spirit of promise — 
 *Ae //o/^ O/je. Here τ£ «τν£υμ,ά7ι could not be easily misun- 
 derstood ; yet the addition of τω &γίω absolutely limits the 
 sense. Of the second kind, an instance may be taken from 
 Demosth. (de Cor. § 27.) who exulting in having saved the 
 Chersonesus and Byzantium, exclaims emphatically, "These 
 successes ή vpoaipsoig Ή ' Ε ΜΉ διε*ρ 6.ξα!ο 9 my counsel, mine, 
 has produced/' 
 
 An instance where the article is repeated before the ad- 
 jective, for the sake of marking opposition, may be found, 
 John x. 11. gyw ειμί δ *οιμήν Ό ΚΑΛΟΣ, ϊ am the good 
 Shepherd : as opposed to θ j*irt«7o$, the hireling, v. 12, 
 
 IV. 
 DIALECTS. 
 
 The first settlers of Greece spoke a common language, 
 with probably but little diversity of pronunciation or inflec- 
 tion. Gradually, however, as the nation was divided by 
 government and local situation into different tribes, certain 
 peculiarities of dialect sprung up, both with respect to the 
 use of single letters and of particular words, forms of words, 
 inflections, and idiomatical expressions. The Greek nation 
 was first divided into two parts, the Doric and the Ionic, giv- 
 ing rise to the two fundamental dialects of the language. The 
 Dorians were more numerous, but their dialect was rough. 
 A part of this tribe, however, the iEolians, polished the lan- 
 guage considerably, especially in the colonies situated in 
 Asia Minor. Thus the original Doric was divided into two 
 branches, the Doric and the ^Eolic. There were slight pe- 
 culiarities, also, in different portions of these tribes, which 
 are called the Bceotic and Macedonian dialects, &c. 
 
 The Tonians originally inhabited Attica. Colonies went 
 out from this people and settled on the shores of Asia Mi- 
 nor, where their language was very greatly softened and im- 
 proved. Those who remained at home were called the At- 
 fics ; and, after the establishment of free institutions, tbetr 
 
I Ion 
 
 I 
 retail 
 
 rail 
 that 
 in ϋ 
 
 III II 
 
 llir ι 
 
 η all 
 
 - 
 • ral 
 
 -al, but 
 
 ΑΤΊΊ« 
 
 iar 
 
1*2 
 
 Appendix — Dialects — Attic . 
 
 PROPERTIES. 
 
 1. Contraction 
 
 Of syllables in the same word ; as, 
 
 ™ I into a. See Obs. 19. 
 
 aaj \ 
 
 SCLl ( 1Λ 
 
 .. > . . . tj 10. 
 
 7]0CI J 
 
 αει . . . j] 9. 
 
 ao into ω. See Obs. 11, 
 
 acd ... ω 19. 
 
 S a 4, 6. 
 
 *" • • Κ 6.20. 
 
 £S ... η 6, 20. 
 
 εο } 
 
 ηο \ . . . s 11. 
 
 no J 
 
 εω ... ω 5. 
 
 To this Dialect properly belong all contract nouns and 
 
 verbs. 
 
 
 
 
 2. Of Syllables in 
 
 different words ] 
 
 ty Synaloepha, of which 
 
 there are six speciei 
 
 5 ; viz. 
 
 
 
 
 " Apocope, as 
 
 τό άρ^ύριον * 
 τ2 avopos 
 
 tS ήμε7ερ* 
 
 ! 
 
 ' τ 5 apyupjov. 
 τ' αν£ρό$. 
 τ' άγα6ψ> 
 ^ημετε'ρϊ. 
 
 >* 
 
 
 τη ημέρα 
 
 
 ^ημήρα. 
 
 ed 
 
 Aphaeresis, as 
 
 ή άγγχ/ία 
 
 
 %γχ**α* 
 
 
 
 τά spy a 
 
 
 τ' άρχα. 
 
 J ' 
 
 
 tw avrpCiJ 
 
 \ Attic ■ 
 
 τ* ών7ρω. 
 
 s 
 
 
 ου ένεκα 
 
 
 ουνεκα. 
 
 S3 
 >-• 
 
 Synsoresis, as 
 
 το ιμάτιον 
 
 
 0οιμάτιον. 
 
 r f* 
 
 Crasis, as 
 
 τό £\σ.•χΐ(ϊΊον 
 
 
 τ^λάχιό^ον. 
 
 
 Apocope L• \ 
 μ / as 
 Synaeresis, ) 
 
 εμο; ιτο^νει 
 
 
 εμ**Ό&;νει. 
 
 
 Apocope &, i 
 ^ Oasis, £ 
 
 ( oi ΙμοΓ 
 ) τ* σΧγζος 
 
 
 ( οόμοί. 
 
 
 
 ^ Ι τάλγεηζ. 
 

 
 ί 
 
 το 
 
 
 
 
 μ 
 
 
 
 ί 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' 4 
 
 V / 
 
 
 -*»• 
 
 
 
 
 
 s W* 
 
 
 
 
 ft 7 ό •λα>μ*ο£ 
 
 
 jlT•^. 
 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 τω ? 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 i >.>j0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 f ' ;μα 
 
 
 χα. 
 
 
 τω ciaroXXAjvof 
 
 
 r^»' 
 
 
 
 
 ίαΤίρ* . 
 
 
 
 
 ) \ 
 
 
 
 > Attic. < 
 
 
 
 «> 
 
 ' ifv. 
 
 
 
 
 
 > into χα { 
 
 s / 
 
 ο 
 in 
 
 
 XOti ( ν 
 
 Attn*. 
 
 
 
 ; χ ί<Γα ) 
 
 
 c niakf* ». 
 
 J β ; I irtfw . I'tfi . 
 
194 
 
 Appendix — Dialects — Attic 
 
 Πρό 
 
 
 Before 
 
 ω, 
 
 s, προωφεΐΚες, 
 
 #ρ£φδΐλε£. 
 
 
 
 
 
 αυ, 
 
 ωυ, -τροαυδ 
 
 ? ν > 
 
 tfpwu&xv. 
 
 
 
 II. 
 
 Change of Letter or 
 
 Syllable ; as, 
 
 
 7 
 
 into 
 
 fc 
 
 as 
 
 7 λ ^χων, 
 
 
 βλήχων. 
 
 
 λ 
 
 
 S 7 ' 
 
 - 
 
 μόλΐ£, 
 
 
 μόγις. 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 χΚίβανος, 
 
 
 κρ//3ανο£. 
 
 
 f* 
 
 - - 
 
 *, 
 
 ~ 
 
 ίτεφαμμαι, 
 
 
 «π'ε'φαό'μαι. 
 
 
 ν 
 
 - - 
 
 λ, 
 
 — 
 
 ?τνεύμων, 
 
 
 #λεόμων. 
 
 
 
 
 Λ 
 
 — 
 
 cr{7£T, 
 
 
 %. 
 
 
 
 
 \ί 
 
 - 
 
 tfuv, 
 
 
 guv. 
 
 
 tf 
 
 - - 
 
 i p ' 
 
 -- 
 
 0ap<fen/,* 
 
 
 ^α^εΓν. 
 
 
 
 
 ( τ > 
 
 -- 
 
 ( σήμερον, 
 
 
 •τήμερον. 
 #ρά77ω. 
 
 
 a 
 
 - - 
 
 ♦ι 
 
 — 
 
 λαο£, 
 
 
 λεώ$. . . 
 
 . 2 0bs 
 
 :\ 
 
 
 
 
 £ ί'λαα, 
 
 
 ί'λεω. . . 
 
 . 2. 
 
 - - 
 
 ω, 
 
 — 
 
 <<τά, Fern. 
 
 Art. 
 
 τώ.| 
 
 
 
 
 
 ( λαο£, 
 
 
 λεώ^. . 
 
 . 2. 5. 
 
 ε 
 
 - - 
 
 ο? 
 
 - 
 
 τί^δμφα, 
 
 
 ^έΈίομφα. . 
 
 . 15. 
 
 
 
 ία, 
 
 — 
 
 ευφυή, 
 
 
 ευφυα. • 
 
 . 4. 
 
 η 
 
 - - 
 
 {«, 
 
 -- 
 
 •έπομαι, 
 
 
 ^εινομαι.| 
 
 
 
 
 to, 
 
 ~ 
 
 tfsVi^a, 
 
 
 «te'tfovfla. 
 
 . 16. 
 
 ι 
 
 - - 
 
 ω, 
 
 — 
 
 είχα, 
 
 
 έωκα. 
 
 . 17. 
 
 αεί 
 
 αι 
 
 ει 
 
 into 
 
 
 
 Diphthong. 
 
 page 18, 
 
 — κλαίειν, κλα'ειν, 
 
 — κλείδας, κλτ$α£. 
 
 ί κλοιός, κλωο£, 
 
 ηρωίνη, ίρωνη. 
 
 λα», λεώ. . 
 
 6. 
 2. 
 
 Syllable. 
 
 τυψά7ωσ'αν ) τυψάντων. . .22. 
 
 /3οφμι, βούψ. . . 24. 
 
 yvoirjo'av, yvoisv. . . 27. 
 
 ' Busby, after Joh. Grammaticus, reverses this instance, making 
 θαρσέΐν θαβρέίν ; but greater authorities are against the^n. 
 t See Article. 
 ± In common with the Bceotic. 
 
 τω^αν 
 
 - 
 
 - 
 
 ν7ων 
 
 μι 
 
 ' 
 
 - 
 
 ην, 
 
 1f\<fOL 
 
 
 
 ε> 
 
Ill / 
 
 til *μ*χρό>* for μ»' 
 
 I >be. 
 
 An' 
 
 rid with 
 
 Ob•. 
 
 .1 plural 
 
 tin λ Ι οΓομαι. 
 
 \ I 
 
 unci Ad> 
 
 ι ia 
 
 D tl 
 
 '. 
 
 VII 
 
 lit! .en• 
 
 1 • ma- 
 
 ; and \\ • . aof % 
 
 ^ Ρ 
 
J 9G Appendix — Dialects— Attic. 
 
 Contracts. 
 
 4. In the first form of contracts, the accusative singular 
 of Adjectives in ης pure is contracted into α ; as, ένδεέα, sV 
 SsSi. Page 19. 
 
 Proper names of this declension, it forms after the 1st de- 
 clension ; and one appellative άχινάχ-ης. Page 19. 
 
 5. In the 2d and 3d, it makes the genitive singular in ως, 
 contracting that from ευς pure ; as, χοεως, χοως. Page 20. 
 
 6. In the 3d, it contracts the accusative singular into η, 
 and the N. A. V. plural into -ης ; but ευς pure has both accu- 
 satives in α ; as, χοε'α, χοά ; χοεας, χοοίς. Τροφας also occurs. 
 
 Adjectives. 
 
 7. It forms comparisons by -ίϋΊερος, -ΐόΊαΊος ; -α/7ερο£, -αι7α- 
 fcg ; and, in common with the Ionic ; -sV7spos -ε'<τ7α7ο£. 
 
 Pronouns. 
 
 8. See Rule V. (Syncope.) 
 
 It uses §αυ7ω in the 2d person, and ίανίχς for άλλήλχ^. 
 Verbs. 
 
 9. In contracts ζάω, ϋιψάω, πεινάω, ^τεριψάω, and χράομσ.ι, 
 after the Doric manner. 
 
 10. It contracts ααι, εαι, ηαι, made by the Jonic Syncope, 
 into j) in the second person singular of the Present Indica- 
 tive passive and middle of Verbs in μι ; as, iVWai, r^stfa/, 
 κάόηίαι, 'My, τ\&ύ\, χάότ). And sometimes in that of the Per- 
 fect Passive of Barytons ; as, μδ'μνηα'αι, μεμν, 7 ?• 
 
 11. It contracts the Ionic αω into ω ; so, ηο, oo, into s, in 
 the second person singular of the Imperfect Indicative ; and 
 of the Present and Second Aorist Imperative passive and 
 middle of Verbs in μι ; as, iV/w, εΤιοχ, εκά&ί, εδι'δ*. 
 
 12. In the first Future of polysyllables in ι£ω, it drops tf ; 
 as, ελαίιώ ; Middle, έλαΊκμαι. It does the same by those in 
 onto, ε«Τω, otfoj, which are afterwards contracted ; as, /3ιβω. 
 But εκχε'ω, uncontracted occurs, Joel ii. 28. 
 
 13. It affects the augment 6 different ways. 
 
 14. It syncopates the 1st Aorist ; as, εύροίΐο for ευρτ^αίο ; 
 ίγαμα for ε'/άμηο'α. By the Ionic it is made ε^ημα, which is 
 most in use. 
 
 15. In dissyllable perfects in φα, χα, it changes ε into o. 
 
 16. It changes η into o, according to some grammarians, 
 in the Perfect Active of obsolete verbs ; as, λήχω. λελο^χα, 
 irirfiw , τίγ&ονβα. inserting ν But they are better derived as 
 in the table of anomalous Verbs. 
 
d Passive nu ; 
 
 **» 
 
 άφίωχΛ, άφέωμαί, (νέα, in which tin as, 
 
 ιιωία. Acc« 
 
 ι sluSa seems to smi 
 
 rts 
 
 opateex in ti ve, 
 
 VOW- 
 
 \ 'αν. 
 
 / IS — ffav. 
 
 -η. 
 
 se ; as, 
 
 . τ αν. 
 
 »n [mperi itive of Verbs in 
 
 Viiodi, όίυω. 
 
 lural of 
 ' ;ι 1 1 1 1 1 1 υ t n the 
 
 din 
 
 as, 
 
 Barytons. 
 
 τυψ .— av7wv. 
 
 Per \φ J -floxfav, 
 
 Vor. r*r 
 
 'lit 
 
 ts. 
 lst*Conj./3o ι -a 
 
 Hoi ) -n, ewtfeev, 
 
 
 »atn 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •hie place beco 
 
 M*rson, though u«ual!y hunted 
 I'd, bi vorbs 
 
 • ' • «<ϊ ti«» Λ II 1 1 1 
 
 
198 
 
 Appendix — Dialects. — Attic 
 
 
 Pres. 
 
 2d A. 
 
 Verbs in μι. 
 
 -rwtfav,- 
 
 •ν7ων. 
 
 23. In the 3d plural of the Imperative passive and mid- 
 dle, it syncopates (fa ; as, 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 Pres.*Wte<rt)cj , 
 Pei f. τεΤύφ&ω 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 1st Α .τυψάο^ω- 
 
 -tiOtXy- 
 
 a,s, 
 
 5 -&i 
 
 24. In the Optative active of Barytons and Contracts, μ* 
 is changed into *jv ; as, 
 
 τύπΊοι 
 
 βοω 
 
 tfoioT* 
 
 The persons are varied in all the tenses, as in the Aorists 
 passive of this mood : 
 
 - ην? ης, η. 
 
 η7ον, ή7ην. 
 
 -ημεν, t]7s, ηόΊχν. 
 
 25. It uses the 2d and 3d singular, and the 3d plural of 
 the iEolic Aorists. 
 
 26. It changes οι, the penultima of the Optative active of 
 verbs in μι,. from οω into ω ; as, <5«£οίην, διδύψ. 
 
 27. It syncopates η in ειημεν, styfls, of the Aorists passive 
 Optative of Barytons,and peculiar tenses of verbs in μι of the 
 same mood ; also in αιημεν, οιημεν, of the latter ; and, in 
 both, changes η<Τα in the 3d plural into ε ; as, 
 
 e oi mis ι 
 
 τυ#7οί } • 
 βοω \ 
 tfo/oi'* ) 
 
 1st Aor 
 2d Aor. 
 Pres. 
 2d Aor 
 Pres. 
 2d Aor. 
 Pres. 
 2d Aor. 
 
 <τυφ&εί " 
 
 i<r7ai 
 <fla\ 
 διίοί 
 δοί 
 
 > -ημεν, -η7ε, -ηίΤαν. Attic, -μεν, -τε,-εν. 
 
 * The Doric moreover changes οι of the penultima into + ; as, f ώφ» 
 
IKaltcls— 
 
 
 (!λ\ Plai J.urus, Isorr 
 
 ■ ' 
 
 \ristophn λ as di?i< 
 
 1 and Ar> 
 
 \es used I 
 
 IUV 
 
 iliar to the colonies of 
 Athenians ar IB Asia Minor, and the adjacent Is- 
 
 land 
 
 tUSi ι 
 
 Ι ίι\ but u. 
 
 the / 
 
 PRO! 
 
 It | confluent e ofvc <nce it if di>• 
 
 ' by 
 1. 1 ':.' Bsistorio* of Diphtl .<i Contractions. 
 
 
 into 
 
 si- 
 
 ίυ — 
 
 ?> — 
 
 η 
 
 JLOt. 
 
 £s'f&pov. 
 
 ■#1. 
 
 αι. 
 
 φο'δί•. 
 
 λό^οιο, co?•. 
 r Ι ω. 
 θι6οα(Τι. 
 
 xalra^voj. 
 ifrgas. 
 
 
 II Syncope of 
 3 and r m oblique cases. 
 
 larly those in f« ; as, ipc, of 
 
200 
 
 Appendix — Dialects — Ionic. 
 
 ι in many words ; as, τελεον, -ζζλέων, μέ£ων, έών for ε'/ων, im- 
 perf. of εάω. 
 
 tf in second persons of Verbs. 
 κ in the Perfect active. 
 
 
 III. Epenthesis of 
 α before terminations of Verbs. 
 
 ε before terminations of Nouns and Verbs, of some in all 
 cases ; as, ά£ελφεο£, κενεο^ καινεό^ 1. 4. 
 
 ι in dual cases and many Nouns \ as, (flsmg, sfo /η for iroa. 5. 
 υ ; as, πτουΚύς. 
 αι before α and η ; as, (ίελεναία, Άβηναίη, άνα^καίη. 
 
 IV. Prosthesis of 
 
 ε before many words ; as, εεις, εών. 
 Reduplication in many tenses. 
 
 V. Aphceresis of 
 
 s ; as, όρ7ή, κεΓνο£. 
 
 (Τ ; as, κε&χζω, μίλαξ. 
 
 •τ ; as, vjyavov. 
 
 λ ; as, ε'ϊβεται, or λε//3εται. 
 
 Augment. 
 
 12. 
 
 12. 
 
 VI. Paragoge of 
 α in the Perfect middle ; as, γάω, γέγγ,χα, P. Μ. /έ/α. L 
 
 yiy aa 
 
 <fi in the third persons of verbs. 
 VII. Change of letter or syllable. 
 
 
 ν ι 
 
 ίβάρα&ρον 
 τ^εφυ/ώ^ 
 δορκάίε^ 
 
 ΪνοεΓν 
 ποίος 
 χδέΐΐοίε 
 οάμψ 
 $27ερο£ 
 άφίκομεν 
 
 ί δέχομαι 
 ουχί 
 
 — fltf 
 
 — δ 
 
 — <r 
 
 — <χ 
 
 Ionic. 
 
 ζέρεβρον* 
 
 πεφυζως. 
 
 ζορχάδες. 
 
 βυϋϋόζ. 
 
 κοεΓν. 
 
 χοΐος. 
 
 χδέχοΊε. 
 
 οδμήν. 
 
 τχΊερος. 
 
 αΉιχομεν* 
 
 δέχομαι 
 
 kxu 
 
 * Change of Towel and consonant. 
 The rough into the smooth. 
 
ι 
 ο 
 
 α 
 
 α υ 
 
 «ν 
 
 Λ? — /υ 
 
 
 !1\ : Μ 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ι 
 
 
 — 
 
 < η 
 
 j Ι 
 
 
 
 \ U 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 ω 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 ?7 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 «•ρα! 
 
 — 
 
 η 
 
 
 
 
 *ν 
 
 ) ^ 
 
 \ 
 
 - ~~~ 
 
 
 Ι- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ''ς. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 I cX. 
 
 
 
 
 y*•* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 V ! ! I . I 
 
 OB 
 
 i. I 
 
 dN. ν \ . plai 
 

 202 Appendix — Dialects — Ionic . 
 
 subjunctive vowel ; χ of the genitive into εω, αν and ην of 
 the accusative sing, into εα, and ας of the plural into sag — 
 N. G. D. A. G. D. 
 
 I. Sing, pops -η£, -έω,* -#, ην or -εα. PL εων, -;/)£, or -ijVi or 
 -αΙσΊ. Α. έα£. 
 
 5. In the 2d, it changes * of the genitive sing, into ojo, 
 (and in the Article, which is of this declension, into εω, 
 whose dative also is in εω,) and οι of the dual into οιϊ, 
 
 G. G. D. G. D. G. D. 
 
 Sing, λόχ-ο/ο. Du. -onv. PI. -εων, -oitfi. Sing. τοΓο and τεω,τεω. 
 
 6. In the 3d, by syncopating δ and τ it makes -ις, -ιδο£, 
 -α$, -α7ο$, of the 2d and 5th of the contracts. Θέτιδος, -ιος. 
 
 Contracts. 
 
 7. In the 1st and 2d form of contracts, the genitive and 
 dative sing, and in the 3d, all cases have ε of the penultima 
 
 G. D. G. D. 
 
 changed into η. 1. Sing. "Ap-ros, ηι. 2. #όλ-ηο£, -ηι. In 
 
 G. D. A. 
 the 3d form of contracts : Sing. /3ααΊλ-ηο£, -ηι, ηα. Dual, 
 Ν. A. G. D. Ν. V. G. D. A. 
 
 -ηε, -ojoiv. Plur. -ηε£, -ήων, -η<Γι, -ηα£. 
 ■8* In the 4th, it makes the accusative in xv ; as, Αητίν. 
 
 G. 
 9. In the 5th, it changes α of the penultima into ε. xip -εος, 
 D. 
 -ει, &x. 
 
 Adjectives. 
 1 10. In the feminine sia from υ£, ι is syncopated in every 
 N. G. 
 
 case ; as, όξ-εα or -έη, -έ«£ or εη£. 
 
 Pronouns. 
 
 I I . It inserts ε before every termination of ou7os, and αυ- 
 <ro's with its compounds ; G. <rs7s'x, D. αΰΐέω. Less frequent- 
 ly when au is changed into <m ;| Ν. ώϋ7ό^, Α. ώϋ7ον, particu- 
 larly in the compounds ; D. (tewu7w, εωϋτω ; but έωϋ7&, and 
 its contracted form ώδΐίυ for au75, also occur. 
 
 12. it removes the augment syllabic and temporal. — Βε- 
 £ρώκει, axxtfs, £ω#α,{ Herodot. Sometimes the reduplication 
 only ; as, Ικτημαι ; sometimes both ; as, τεχνέα7αι for τε7ε- 
 χνν ί ν7αι ί and from the Pluperf. both augments ; as, λύ7ο for 
 
 * Βορεω in Hesiod, by Syncope, for βορεεω. 
 t See Rule I. Example 1st. 
 
 J On the supposition that ω is an insertion, and not a change oft. 
 The augment of this verb is ι. 
 

 1 
 
 DJhi 
 
 and I»-•! 1 fkmtk % CMriJij- 
 
 <Γω. Ν «κρατήρα 
 
 ! iir. 
 
 «a lingular r< 
 Ike Bubji 
 
 l 1 in \ * rl>- in μι. 
 
 
 •11. 
 
 ΙοίΐΐΓ. 
 
 lmp< 
 
 
 
 
 
 faflN 
 
 
 a*, 
 
 ^XP 
 
 
 
 -ε* 
 
 
 £rv^ 
 
 
 Vor. 
 
 Du<if, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■-*, 
 
 
 lluncc in tin d middle - 
 
 π. In the First Future [ndi 
 
 and the '2d future of all \ 
 
 SlBg. and Λά lMur. ; also m the Infinitive and 
 Participle, r< tb Dual and IMur. 
 
 except in the 9d Plur. and the Pa: 
 
 "ov, -{slov ; -A|M» 9 «Mf, -AreY Inf. | Port. 
 
 -a, -fov. In the Midd 
 a and :i : the latter in th< s dicative into nu, fi 
 
 junctir* into ηαι ; as, τυτ 
 
 . in the Perfect aeti 
 
 •r*7e, f(rt^a7e ; rffapcaf, τεόνηά*. 
 In the IMn }•• ictive and middle, it chin 
 
 uq % n, into to 
 
 ι r and * in • erson of and 
 
 middle lenaee into sen, to; in the Subjuncti 
 
 To th< Ί^τ. of all tern 
 
 middle, and ' 
 annexes <Ti ; as, 
 
 -rat retain• the a ugra< 
 us form ia mon j found without the augment ; aa 9 ι 
 
204 
 
 Appendix — Dialects — Ionic. 
 
 Active. 
 Pres. tfrtflygu 
 
 Perf. rs%<pji<fi. 
 1st Aor. τυψ;/]σΊ. 
 2d Aor. Tuflr/jtfi. 
 
 Passive. 
 
 1st Aor. <τΰφ0η0Ί. # 
 2d Aor. τύ^ηβΊ.* 
 Middle. 
 Perf. r&fayfii. 
 
 Sometimes in the Indicative ; as, φορεηόΊίοΓ φόρεει. 
 
 19. In the 2d Sing, of the 1st Aorist middle, it resolves 
 ω into cto ; as, έτύψ-ω, αο. 
 
 20. In all tenses of the Indicative and Optative, whose 
 3d ^ing. ends in ται or το, it forms the 3d Plur. by inserting 
 a before those terminations respectively, and, of the next 
 preceding letters, shortening the long vowel, dropping the 
 Subjunctive of the diphthong, (except in the Optative,) 
 changing the smooth mute into the rough, and <S into the 
 characteristic of the 2d Aorists δ or έ \ as, 
 
 Imp. & Plup. Plur. 
 
 εΊυπΊε 
 i&scpiki 
 ετίζ^ρνόό 
 h$ 
 
 εκεκολό 
 ι έψάλ 
 
 εΙεΤύφ 
 ελελεχ 
 ειϊεφράδ 
 ε<ϊτε#Χό\& ) 
 
 When α precedes those terminations, instead of inserting 
 another a after it, this dialect inserts an ε before it ; as, 
 3 Sing. 3 Plur. 3 Sing. 3 Plur. 
 
 δύν J εδύν } 
 
 -oticu, εα7αι έμηχάν \ -ατο, -ε οίο. 
 
 Pres. & Peri 
 
 '. Sing. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Τ'υίΓ /S 
 
 
 τυ-πΊε 
 
 
 ίτεφίλη 
 
 
 Ατεφιλε 
 
 
 κεχρυ#ω 
 
 
 κεχρυα'ό 
 
 
 χεΐ 
 
 
 κε 
 
 
 κεκόλχ 
 
 
 κεκολό 
 
 
 Ι'ψαλ 
 
 > -ται 
 
 ε'ψάλ 
 
 ► * 
 
 τε'7υ«7Τ 
 
 
 τείϋφ 
 
 
 λελεκ 
 
 
 λελ^χ 
 
 
 «π'εφραο' 
 
 
 «3Τήφρά5 
 
 
 ΑΤενΧηο 1 
 
 
 crs«7rXad 
 
 
 μηχαν 
 
 avowry? 
 
 οΜεΐίεχτ 
 
 21. In common with the Doric, it contracts Verbs in αω 
 into τ? ; as, opijs, δρίί, δρην. 
 
 22. In the contract tenses of Verbs in αω, it inserts ε after 
 contraction : as, χρεωμαι, εψηχανεώμην ; Imperat. χρεω ;| 
 but oftener changes α into ε ; as, χρε'ομαι, ορεομαι. Some- 
 times in the Present Subjunctive passive of Barytons ; as, 
 
 * Also τνφθίησι, τνφίησι. See Observatiou 21 . 
 
 t Xpi» occurs in Hippocrates, the Ionic of χρν^ imperative of χρίομαι 
 for χράομαι. 
 
l»lural ο! 
 αω, and ' 111 and tl 
 
 r.. and loi m tli" active 
 
 nee in tin 
 
 ι I petsoni and rni 
 
 of \ αι. 
 
 Inral of the Pres< 
 
 liph- 
 thonj 
 
 [| ι if] from ιαω, 
 
 - of xsijuuxi and άνεΓμαι. it 
 1 primiti 
 
 h makes λαμ& as if from λα€/« and 
 
 Χάμ€ω. Κα7αλ£λά£ηκε,Χάμ-^:μ.αι, ΧαμφόεΊχ. u - II» 
 
 rodol 
 
 in Verbe in μι, the Ionics used ε in the reduplication . 
 
 //' / brio*, Lucian, Arctav ll• 
 
 v, Anocn 
 
 DORK 
 
 This Dialect was fir | non and .4γ£ύ>* ; 
 
 η Epiru*, Mag 
 Rkc 
 
 Ionic writers and the Ρ 
 
 ΡΚΟΓΕΗΤΠ 
 
 I. Contraction of J and χα I, when pr< and 
 
 diphthongs. 
 
 union. 
 
 '"α, i7a. 
 
 ω\αφ*ς. 
 
 h η \ος. 
 
 ώτόλοι. 
 
 rS fuC&Mtj • it. 
 
 18 
 
■— - 
 
 206 
 
 Appendix — Dialects— Doric. 
 
 Common. 
 
 Doric. 
 
 
 τά ayxuflpa, 
 τά otf7sa, 
 
 τώγχιόΐρα. 
 τώο^ε'α. 
 
 
 xai εξα<πΊνΎ\ς, 
 
 χ'/ίξαιΐ'ινης. 
 
 
 XSU ε?7Τε, 
 
 xai ο "Α#ωνΐ£, 
 
 κ^ε. 
 
 
 xai δ εκ, 
 
 Χ' ώ ' κ • 
 
 
 χολ έμε' 
 
 κήμε. 
 
 
 Other contractions ; 
 
 
 
 as into η έϋρης. } 
 
 
 tz. 
 
 asi — γι τΊργίζ• S 
 εα — η κρ??£, φρή7ί. 
 
 so — r• ευ 0ευ£, "Αρευ£, β 
 
 WiXgfe, Gen. 
 
 5. 
 
 οα — ω βωχας. 
 
 
 7 
 δ 
 
 ζ ~ 
 
 ν 
 Ρ 
 
 II. Change of Letter or Syllable ; as, 
 into δ ία, ίάν.* 
 
 $ 6 -^ΰΰος* ένιμηβης, δάύος. 
 
 0εμι7ο£, Άρ7έμι7ο£. 
 
 tfupitfiw, μαόδός. 
 
 γυμ*νάδω< |ε'ίω, by Metathesis, ερίω. 
 
 μάίία, χργιδδω, also JEolic. 
 τ ορί7ων, 
 
 ττ tfupiV7w, φράτ7ω, /3ριμάτ7ω. 
 5 ανίηρα, Δύμ£ρΐ£. 
 
 £όμ§ραιο£. 
 
 tfapte'vos, μ,νύίδδω,* (frig. 
 
 άνη7ον. κλαΓΛρον.* 
 
 φήρ, φλίβομα*. 
 
 wye'vog, έ'οι^μεν for εοίκαμεν. 
 
 τεΓνο£, ttjvos,*' for gxsivos. 
 
 (ρίν7ι$, ήν^ον, κε'ν7ο for κε'λε7ο.| 
 
 φαυρο£. 
 
 /3υρβ7νη, βύρμ,σξ.* 
 
 τΰ#7ομε£, χα\άς* μεί$, also^oZic. 
 
 εμβολή, άμβλακία. 
 
 μικκο£ for μικρός. 
 
 τ 
 
 Ι* 
 
 ' τ 
 
 'Φ 
 
 \7 
 
 
 * Words to which the asterism is affixed, undergo some change of 
 another letter. 
 
 t When τ or follows. 
 % See γίντο in the JEolic, 
 
Jmxndu— I 
 
 
 It 
 
 \ 
 
 
 U f 
 
 αι μ.αΚ(ΐ' 
 
 a 
 I 
 
 ί 
 
 s 
 
 ! 
 
 
 
 
 ill. s 
 
 β MufS 
 
 
 . 
 
 
SOfc Appendix — Dialects — Doric . 
 
 ι ru^lsg, τύπΊεν, rlk$*%* 
 
 υ δίδονΊι* 
 
 ω ^ράν for #ρώην.* 
 
 <f JViSsv for otftu&v. 
 
 IV. Epenthesis of 
 
 α ναυά7αι. 
 
 / τυψεί-τον, -ts ; τυψεί-<ται ; <τύψαΐ£. 
 <5 rwtilo^stfSa. 
 
 V. Apharesis of 
 
 $ε in λο5, λ>#, λη. 
 
 VI. Παρ for #αρά ? αν for avdu 
 
 15, 17 
 17* 
 
 16. 
 
 20 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 M.F. 
 
 1. It makes the nominative plural of the Article rot, rat. 
 
 Declensions. 
 
 2. In the 1st, it changes a of the Gen. singular, ω of the 
 Gen. plural, and η of every termination, into a. Sometimes 
 also the Gen. plural of the 2d and 3d ; as, 
 
 N.G. D.A.V. G. 
 
 τελων-ας -α, ) ^, 
 
 ' „ ' ~ ? -α, -αν, α. Plur. -αν.. 
 
 αρετ -α, -ας, ) • ' 
 
 3. Proper names in αος have ο syncopated, and are de~ 
 
 N. G. D. 
 cliried after the 1st ; as, for MsvsX-aog, -a, &c. Μενελ-α£, -α, -α. 
 Α. V. 
 -αν, -α. 
 
 In this declension, it changes a into ω ; that of the accu- 
 sative plural sometimes into o, and rejects the ι subscript of 
 the dative ; as, 
 
 G. D. 
 
 Sing. Xoy -ω, -ω Fiur. -αν, τ -ως or -ος. 
 
 It also changes a into ω in the Nom. and Accu. Sing• and 
 Norn Ace. Voc. Plur. contracted of the 3d; as, Ν• /3ω$, 
 Ace /3ων. Plur N. A. V. /3w$. 
 
 4. It changes δ into τ in Nouns in »c, -ιδος ; as, 
 
 Gen. $εμ/7ο£, μερί7ο£, 'Λρ7έμι7ο£» 
 
 G. Α. 
 
 -Plur. -av,t -cos or 
 
 * Τ! ird singular, 1st future middle. 
 t This infrequent. 
 
'Λ>0 
 
 I I 
 
 or χ 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
 Pro 
 
 nto 
 the 
 
 H86i tin* 
 
 into - 
 
 I 
 
 
2 1 Appendix — Dialects — Doric. 
 
 12. It changes a in the penultima of the 1st Future and 
 1st Aorists of verbs in ω pure, into οι ; as, axoicTco, cocoitfov. 
 
 13. It changes η in the penultima of the 1st Future and 
 1st Aorists Perfect and Pluperfect into a ; as, φιλά^ω, ε7ίμα- 
 (fa, τε^ναχα, μεμναμάι, εμεμνάμην. 
 
 14. It changes ει the augment, formed by annexing *, into 
 η without a subscript ; as, ηχον, ^λκον. 
 
 Ιδ. It syncopates ι in the 2d and 3d persons singular of 
 the Present Indicative active, and in every tense of the In- 
 finitive ending in ειν ; as, <τϋ#7-ε£, -ε, wrlsv, τΰψεν, τύ#εν. 
 
 16. It circumflexes the 1st Future active and middle, and 
 forms it like the 2d ; as, 
 
 Act. τύψω, -ει$, -εΓ. -εΠον, -εΓτον, ~ > μεν,| -είτε, -S \ ν7ι. 
 
 ^ -ευ ) 
 
 Mid. τυψ-χμαι, -r h -εΓται. -έμε^ον, -είίΤ^ον, -εία^ον, he. 
 
 17. It changes ν into <t in the 1st person plural of all ten- 
 ses Indicative and Subjunctive active, and of the 2d Aorists 
 Subjunctive passive : also <S into vr in the 3d plural, drop- 
 ping the subjunctive vowel of the preceding diphthong, ex- 
 cept in the 2d future ; as, ΤϋκΊομες, ΓιύπΊομες, τόψομε^, έ7ύψα- 
 με£. &c. <ruir7ov7i,J τύψοκ?ι ? | τε7ύφαν7ι,| <nnrsv7i 9 ;{; <π^εν7ί,| (5/oov7j,J 
 τν*Ίων7ι, τύψων7ι, Pass• *ίφ&ων7ι, rar"wv7i. 
 
 18. It changes οι into ω in the penultima of Barytons and 
 Contracts of the Optative active, whose termination μι, the 
 Attic had before changed into ψ ; as, Attic, τυττ7οί^ν, ποιο'ιψ, 
 ^ρυοΌι'ην ; Doric, τυιήψφ, ^οίωην,χρυα'ωην- 
 
 It also often changes a of the penultima both of Con- 
 tracts and Barytons into ευ, sometimes into οι ; as, Active, 
 φιλ-ευμε$, -ευν7ι. Imp. εφιλευν, τυψευμε^, -ευν7ι ? τυ^τ-ευμε^, -Sv7i§ 
 or -ευνΊι or -ον7ι. Part. τυ&Ίεΰΰα, φιλευν. Pass, and Mid. φίλευ- 
 μαι. 1st Fut. άλευμαι. Imperat. φιλευ — Also <ri5cr7©i<fi, 1st 
 Fut. τΰψοιαΊ. Particip. ritfloiflfa. ε is sometimes inserted in 
 the Subjunctive ; as, /tfojgoi'-wo'i, -εωνίι ; tfuv7i0 totfi, -εων7ι. ^lr- 
 rjiimedes. 
 
 19. It changes ?? into α in most tenses of the Indicative 
 and Optative passive and middle : also of Verbs in μι end- 
 
 * See Obs. 18, and Note to the same. 
 
 tSeeObs. 18. 
 
 \ This person is like the dative plural cf the Participle of the same 
 tense ; but the Doric Dialect makes it like the dative singular. 
 
 \ The 2d future commonly retains the υ, if the penultima be not 
 changed into ευ or οι but not always. 
 

 J passive ; u t rvr- 
 
 . αΰμαι, κ;χαόμ α • 
 as. rfivo. 
 
 • a, air! 
 as, 
 
 
 
 j 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
 H#, Pythagoras, I .'m. 
 
 >«<, a: 
 ivo Towrl - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 

 Appendix — Dialects — JEolic. 
 
 Β ion, Moschus, Callimachus, and the Tragedians jn the 
 Choruses. 
 
 iEOLIC. 
 
 This Dialect was used in Bwotia* Lesbos, and JEolia in 
 Asia Minor. It is a branch of the Doric, and has some 
 changes in common with it. 
 
 PROPERTIES. 
 
 I. Change of the rough into the smooth breathing ; as, 
 
 To compensate the loss of the aspirate, it sometimes pre- 
 fixes β to ρ when the next syllable begins with ζ, χ, δ, or τ ; 
 as, βρίζα, βράχος, βρόδον, βρηΊωρ. It sometimes prefixes γ 
 to a vowel ; as, γένΊο for εν7ο, Doric for εΧ7ο, by Syncope for 
 s'Xs7o, which is by the Ionic Dialect for sfkslo. 
 
 II. Change of Letter or Syllable : 
 ^ . i γ yaXotvos, -vXsWpos. 
 
 < βΐη1 ° {μ. )3&ρμ.7ον/ 
 £ — β. /3λήρ,* βs\φkς, βεΧφΐνες. 
 y — tfo j rpasjfctfSa, όδεύς. 
 $ — φ φΧίΙω. 
 1 — ^ #8ρ|οχο£ for περίοδος. 
 α — έτ irs7<x, outziaia, άΧι-π-ύα for άΧειμα. See 
 
 Rule IV. 
 ν — (Τ μ,ξί$, ^λάϊ^4 υψο*54 
 | — tfxj ύχένος, tfxicpo^. 
 μα7ε/£, |Xa$S(fa. 
 φερα'εφόνα. 
 
 ^7 tftf i^icftfw, oeftfw, viWw. 
 
 C ν τε7υφών. 
 
 ^ ρ *7op, ViJijop,.flritffp,J ttfap, tfiopjj for 
 
 T — «τ βΈΤολήν, όΉοιΧείς, πίπιζε. 
 y — φ αυφ^να. 
 
 <g 
 
 -Α* 
 
 * For δέλεαρ. 
 
 f '// — πσ ) ) στ 
 
 J Words that undergo a complicated change 
 
 ι ίσ ) ) tr3 
 
 t An iEolic resolution of Ζ ξ - κ σ > by Metathesis J• <™ 
 
, ι \ty ομΐ3ίν, ψΐρόμ4^τν, ν addi 
 α/μορ£αι, Ip&j 
 
 \ <*. 
 
 Λαι?, r4X«|f j iienco μέλαινα, r&XiU 
 
 -α. 
 
 -w, μιμναιο**;*;, /8\fl 
 Άτι 
 — η νηλχ^ής, άχ"ήν, Καφή^ιος. 
 
 ~ if• 'J 
 
 ■;')Ί\ϊα % 
 
 — \ s Υ 
 
 ' s /j^spav, ί *β. 
 
 ( ι Γ,αρ. 
 
 ία 6ι«5ΐινόψ 
 Ο £ΡΟ£, G. *. 
 
 α — α ι ρ <'*£. 
 
 (οι μοί<ΓΛ, Κρίθινα, Miioitfa, tj 
 — ζά, ζα€ολ#£, ζ 
 μ*7α— Weoa, *έδ* Άχιλλίά, aaj, *6ίάμ*ιψαν, «κ5/- 
 
 III. Prosthesis of 
 
 β before p, instead of 
 
 J for t. 
 
 I 
 
 III. 
 
 l\ / 'v. It t r 
 
 - 
 υ after f when Γ..ΙΙ,, 
 
 ! h*MffAI»Of 
 
214 
 
 Appendix — Dialects — JEolic. 
 
 A consonant to compensate ι he loss of the aspirate ; as, 
 άμμε$. ϋμμε$. 
 
 A consonant when the vowel or diphthong preceding is 
 shortened ; as, κ7εννω, φ^ε^ω, εμμα, έμμί, tfsvSstftfi^, τί^εμμι, 
 
 (S in Futures in λω, ρω. 
 
 β in άλιβ&^ειν, έ'λαβον. 
 
 V. Syncope of 
 
 y in όλίο£, ιυ|, φόρμιξ. 
 
 (f - — μωα, tfcioL. 
 
 • — άχαό$, <χα\αός ; also ι Subscript ; as, τυι/Ιης. 
 
 ο — μύ(Γα, /3υλή, "Ιλα. 
 
 υ — Όρανό^, Συρίχοόόαι. 
 
 VI. Par ago ge of 
 
 ν to the accusative singular of the 4th of the Contracts ; 
 
 as, Λη7ών. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. It changes ης in the nominative of the 1st declension 
 into α ; as, #οιη7ά, κομη7ά ; and s of the genitive singular 
 into «o ; as. Έρμε/αο. It inserts oc in the genitive plural of 
 the first declension ; as, μ*0*άων, αιχμ*]7άων ; and ι in the 
 accusative of those ending in α and η. 
 
 2. In the dative singular of the 2d, it omits the subscript ; 
 as, Xoyw ; and changes ας of the accusative plural into oi£. 
 
 3- In the 1st form of Contracts, it rejects ς from the vo- 
 cative singular in ες ; as, Σωκρά7ε, ΔεμόίΤ^ενε. 
 
 4. In the 4th, it makes the genitive singular in wg ; and 
 the accusative in ων ; as, G. αιό-ως, Α. -ων. 
 
 It makes of genitive cases ajiew nominative of another 
 declension, from which it forms its cases ; as, of /έρον7ο£, 
 the genitive, it makes a nominative, from which γερόνίοις is 
 the dative plural. So μελάνη from μέλανος, and τιος, G. <ns, 
 D. τίω, kc. from the genitive τίνος, which has'sometimes the 
 ν syncopated. 
 
 It change's tf into p in the Genitive Singular and Accusa- 
 tive of Nouns in αυη of the 1st declension, the Nominative 
 Singular of the £d, the Nominative and Genitive Singular of 
 the :3d, the cusative Singular of the 1st, 
 
 Genitive of the 2Λ fo Contracts, and the Accusa- 
 
 tive Plural of all the five declensions ; as, 2d G. άρε7άρ, Αι 
 
I 
 
 ι ι nee r I futures •>, ρω ; \β, rfXto, 
 
 8. ' 
 
 cue and o*£ ; u 
 
 ifal 
 
 no 
 
 an lies : 
 
 — β /ίάνβ* ft) 
 
 «lo^« not 
 . ami, on ( v, whftl \U* Baottr 
 
216 
 
 Appendix — Dialects — Bmotic. 
 
 « - I 
 
 ίξον, ε/£ααΊ,| Perf. Active. 
 
 g — ξ 
 
 ά#έκει|α. 
 
 .-j: 
 
 λε^όμε^εν, ν added. 
 
 τρΓδίεζα. 
 
 ε — ι 
 
 ιων. 
 
 η — ε» 
 
 μεί<τ,* Θεί§α0εν, <π'0ειμι, εί'ρωε^•* 
 
 ω — οι 
 
 ήροίο£. 
 
 αν — αόΊ 
 
 ειξαβΊ,Ι 1st Aor. Act. 
 
 atfi — αν 
 
 τε"7υφαν 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. It inserts tfa in the 3d plural of the Imperfect and both 
 Aorists Indicative active. 
 
 Common. 
 είυνΊο ) 
 
 ίτυψα 
 
 Bceotic. 
 
 -tfav. 
 
 And in the Imperfect of Contracts ; as, 
 Common Bceotic. 
 
 ίδοω ι 
 
 εφιλχ V -v 3 tfav. 
 
 έχρυσ^ ) 
 
 2. It sometimes makes the 3d plural of the 1st Aorist in 
 art» ; as, έΥύψαοΊ. 
 
 3. Tt sometimes makes the 3d plural of the Perfect in αν ; 
 as, τείυφαν, -πτεφρικαν. 
 
 4. It makes the 2d Aorist Imperative active in ov like the 
 1st ; as, Ti/ztfov, -a7o. 
 
 5. In ttoe Optative active, it changes ε of the 3d plural 
 into <fa ; as, 
 
 Common. Bceotic. 
 
 τύψαι > -εν, - -tfav. 
 
 C. In the 3d plural of both the Aorists passive, and of the 
 Imperfect and 2d Aorist active of verbs in μι, it syncopates 
 (Τα, shortening the preceding long vowel ; as, 
 
 See note on the preceding page, 
 t Some grammarians make this the perfect by changing κ into ξ ; 
 Others, the 1st aorist, by changing av into an. 
 

 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
1 ' 
 
 218 Appendix — Dialects of the Pronouns. 
 
 parisyllabics, rejecting ν and d from the terminations ; as, 
 αυτόφι, ^ακρυόφι, κοτυληδονόφι, for αι)7 ς, ^ακρύον. κοτυΛή<$-ων, 
 -ονο$7 Neuters of the 1st of the contracts reject ο only from 
 the genitive ; as, ορεος, ορεΰφι. To the Attic genitive in ω 
 they add ο ; Gen. Εύγέωο for Euysw. 
 
 7. They form the dative plural from the singular, by 
 changing » into εσΊ or εσΌΊ ; as, ηρωι, ήρώεσΊ or ήρώεοΌΊ, and 
 change oiv into οιϊν in the dative dual. 
 
 8.* The termination of the 2d declension is often given to 
 nouns in the 3d ; and that of the 3d to Nouns of the 1st and 
 2d, especially in the dative ; as, γερόνΊοις for yspatfi ; #α0η- 
 μάτοις for «τα^μαοΊ ; άλκί for akxrj ; {«Τμίνι for ύσμ/ιντ? ; παρ- 
 δενι for παρόένω ; κλά^εσΊ for χΚάδοις. 
 
 9. They change Barytons into Verbs in μι ; as, εχημι, 
 ,βρί^ημι, from Ι'χω, /3ρι0ω. 
 
 10. From regular Verbs in ω are formed, by the "Poets, 
 Verbs defective in αύω. ε0ω, ειω, ησ'σ'ω, ηω, οιαω, *ω. |ω, (Γ/ω, 
 β^ω, (ίκω, rf'SJ'w, tfw, υ#ω, υο^ω, ojtfw, ωσνω, ω$ω, ωω. These 
 are often formed from the Future ; as, o/'tf7s, imper. from 
 βϊ tfw. Fut. of φε'ρω. Verbs are sometimes formed in ωω ; as, 
 δρωω for ^ράω. 
 
 11. The termination iWaiis changed intor^ai ; as, μ,εδψ 
 (fai for μεδιάώχι, from με<5ιάω. 
 
 DIALECTS OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 'Eyw. 
 
 Ionic. 
 
 Sing. G. εμοΓο, έμέο. Pi. Ν. ημέες, G. ήμέων, Α. ημε'α£. 
 
 Doric. 
 * Sing. Ν. έ/ών, έγωγα, ίγωνγα, ε/ώνη. G. Ιμευ, μευ, D. Ιμ/ν, 
 Α. άμε, άμμε. Dual, Ν. Α. άμμε. Ρΐ. Ν. αμε$, αμμες, G. 
 άμων, άμε'ων, D. άμίν, Α. αμα$, άμε, άμμε. 
 
 iEolic. 
 ' Sing. Ν. Ινών. '/ω, ίωνα, ιώνχα, G. ε'μευ. Dual. Ν. Α. άμμε. 
 Ρΐ. Ν. άμε£.-άμμε£, G. άμμων, άμμέων, D. άμμιν, άμμ», Α. αμ- 
 μα$, «με, άμμε. 
 
 Poetic. 
 Sing. G. £μΑ, έμε'οίεν, έμέόεν. Dual. Ν. Α. νόϊ. G. D. 
 
 voftv. Pi. G. ήμείων. 
 
■ ' 
 
 ι 
 
 ι /α*. 
 
 I > - .. 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ν 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 D<•: 
 
 
 
 D. 
 
 
 
 A. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • >• 
 
 
 A!' 
 
 Ι). rtSft,mS< 
 
 ttg. G. cap. Pi, ( . 
 
 Id ihe particle• ii*i. 
 alio > iqi i y * % «- 
 
Appendix — Dialects of the \ erb Substantive s /μί. 
 
 The Dialects, which by some are annexed to the relative 
 by others to the relative h<fli$ belong properly to οίος, used 
 for offiig. 
 
 From οίος come regularly the genitive ors, Ι. δ7ε'ώ, D. ό'7ευ, 
 
 ), Ρ οτ?ευ ; Dat. ο7φ, L &7εω, P. ΌτΊί'Λ ; Piur. Gen. οίων, I. 
 
 •7εων ; Dat. ό'7οΐ£, Ι. δ7ε'οΐ£, o7sWi. "Aiftfaand άοΊα are used 
 
 by the Attics for ct7iva. 
 
 DIALECTS OF THE VERB SUBSTANTIVE e;,u. 
 
 Judicative Mood. 
 * Present Tense. 
 Sing. ^ Dual. Plural. 
 
 1 ^2 3 2 3 12 3 
 
 _ ί sarft. 
 
 Io. ----- _ - ----;- <μ*ν - - j ^ 
 
 tx , , , «, < εϊμ,ε'ί $ εν7ί. 
 
 Do. εμμι εν7ι - < x * { u*. 
 
 rr- ^ ; μ 5ν - - ^ εον/ι. 
 
 Poet. ierci εα**'• 
 
 Imperfect Tense. 
 
 At. ? --^VSa r,v |σ7ον qtrfqv - - ή<?7ε 
 
 f Cla r ί εην » « β $ ^ αν • 
 
 1ο• < » ε>χ < ν — — — — — — sals { „. 
 
 .JgVxov * {fete < stfxov.. 
 
 Do. * jv^. 
 
 Poet.^a ξφα Ιην I'tftfav. 
 
 Future- 
 
 At. foei 
 
 Io. — - etfsoej -— _ _ _ — ____— — 
 
 ^ , «. ι llsllui ς 5σ<?όμε<Τ$τα, sV5v7ai. 
 
 Do. _ _ ^ ^ tfd5T7aj - - - - ^ψ.^ &tfgv7ai. 
 
 c Icftf 71 ε<Τ<Τε7αι έο*<Γομε$α, I(ftfov7ai. 
 
 Poet. \ »• 
 
 ( sotfsai 
 
 Imperative Mood. 
 
 Present Tense- 
 
 c έν?αν•^. 
 At. -_- *~ : ~\ΜΜω* 
 
 Do. - - 97&J -- --■'-- ------ 
 
 Poet. ---- 
 
 led in the Attic Dialect. Obp 
 
I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 : 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 — _ 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 1 
 

 V. 
 
 ACCENTS. 
 
 The Greek Accents are useful chiefly in two respects. 
 They serve to distinguish between words which are spelled 
 alike, but have different significations ; as, βίος, life, βιός, 
 a bow ; άλλα, other things, αλλά, but.* They also indi- 
 cate in mmy cases, the quantity of one or more syllables of 
 a word. 
 
 Only two accents will be here considered, the acute (') 
 and the circumflex ("), since the grave is not expressed in 
 writing. The character ( v ) called the grave accent, is ne- 
 ver used except in a single case, viz. : to denote the acute 
 accent occurring on the last syllable of a word in continued 
 discourse ; as, bslg γαο ήμ,Γν tfpoutf^a^vs. Hence this char- 
 acter has received from many, 'the name of the Final 
 Acute, which exactly denotes its office. Before a period 
 or colon, (some say a comma,) the regular acute is used ; 
 as, son ί)εο£.| 
 
 Every vowel not marked with an acute or a circumflex, 
 ι? considered as grave. 
 
 The circumflex is founded on the acute, since it consists 
 of first an acute, then a grave ("), (never a grave first, ){ uni- 
 ted on one syllable. Hence it supposes two vowels to have 
 been contracted into one syllable ; or at least, that the vow- 
 
 * Scapula has ofiven, at the end of his Lexicon, a list ©f more than 
 Jour hundred words which are thus distinguished. Among them are 
 f he following : 
 
 ;, yet ; όμ,ω£, together. sxirv, thus then ; kV.sv. not then, 
 slifi, he goes; £itf)',there are. 0sa, a sight ; 0εά, a Goddess. 
 . then ; αρα, an interro- ] οίων, running; 0εων, of the Gods. 
 
 [gation. 
 is, too, a distinction is made between a proper aad a common 
 name ; as, "Αργός, a ma», or city ; αργός, white. 
 
 t The only exception to this remark is the Pronoun «j, which used 
 ,ίΐι Indefinite, has always the grave accent [Vis], to distinguish it 
 from the same word, used as an Interrogative [τίς]. 
 
 φ if, therefore, the former of two vowels which suffer contraction, 
 has not the acute accent, the contracted syllable is not marked with 
 rircumilex; ΙψίΧεον, εφάονι; except contract Adjectives in εος; as. 
 χρύσεος* χρυσοί^ 
 
ι 
 
 bag 
 
 II. 
 I \ 
 
 rb.) 
 which f 
 
 these rules do 
 and 
 
' 
 
 Appendix — Accents . 
 
 III. \ inal syllable short. In polysyllables, the acute ac- 
 cent is placed on the antepenult ; as, ιίνόρωπος. Exieptfl.) 
 Perfect passive participles ; as, <τε7υμμένο£. (2.) Verbals in 
 εος, έ'ον ; as, γραπτέον. (3 ) Increasing cases of oxytones ; 
 as, Χαμπύδος from λαμπάς. (4.) Many derivatives ; as, <xoa- 
 δίον from παιδός. (5.) Compounds of βάλλω, *ο\έω. χ&•, if 
 not with a preposition ; as, £χαβό\ος. (6.) Compounds of* 
 Perfect Middles, with nouns and Adjectives ; as, ά(Τ7ρολό/ο£. 
 (7.) Compounds of τ/κτω, κτείνω, τρέφω, with a noun, if they 
 have an active signification ; as, ττρωτοτόκοέ, she who 2?r0- 
 duces the first child. If they have a passive signification, 
 they follow the general rule ; as, πρωτότοκος, a first born. 
 
 IV. Final syllable short: If, in this case, a penult long 
 by nature has the accent, that accent is the circumflex ; as, 
 gfyxa, βω\α% (οίκος,) Except words into which an Enclitic 
 enters ; as, τούΰδε ; and words formed from εϊ and ναι ; as, 
 ε'/0ε, Oh that ! ναίχι, yes. 
 
 Ν. B. The terminations αι and oi, though long, are con- 
 sidered as short in applying these rules ; hence we find civ- 
 όρωποι, #αλαι, *irow t tfou. But in words compounded with en- 
 clitics, they are long ; as, ο/'μοι, Oh me ! So in οίκοι, at home, 
 as distinguished from ο/κοι, houses. Also in the Optative, 
 ■ in all infinitives in ναι, in the Perfect passive, and 2d Aorist 
 »Midd ! e ; as, Opt. φιλ^αι, τετνφοι ; Infin. itf-ravoci. τετυφύναι 9 
 τΒτύφέαι, rvxitf&au, (vide Inflection of Verbs.) - 
 
 From these Rules and Observations, we learn the follow- 
 ing things as to quantity. 
 
 1. When a syllable is circumflexed, we know it to be 
 long by nature ; as,, the υ in ψυχο£. 
 
 2. There being no acute on the penult of such a word 
 as apoupa, shows the final vowel to be short. Rule II. 
 
 3. A circumflex on the penult, shows the final syllable to 
 be short, as in ίτεΓρα, εριβωΧαξ (ακο£.) Rule III. 
 
 4. The acute on the penult of such words as ήμερα, φιλία, 
 dwpag (άκο£,) shows the final vowel to be long by nature. 
 Rule II. 
 
 Change of accent in the infection of words. 
 When the quantity of the final syllable is changed in in- 
 flection, the accent will of course be changed, in accord- 
 ance to the preceding rules. Hence arise most changes 
 of the accent from" its original seat ; as, N. fxoutfa, G, μάντης, 
 Ν, ανύρωνος, G. avdpwrfs.by Rule Π. Ν, tfw>a, G. *ώμα7ο£, 
 by Obs. III. φεύγω, φεύγε, by Rule IV. 
 

 on tin- 
 
 
 nil 
 
 mil 
 
 I II 
 
 W 1 1 
 
^6 Appendix — Accents. 
 
 Real exceptions. 
 
 I. Accent on the last syllable : 1. The c 2d Aorist, (to 
 distinguish it from the Present,) in the Infinitive and Par- 
 ticiple active, and in the Imperative 2d person singular Mid- 
 dle ; as, gjVsiv, eiVwv, ysvS, (but tfpooysvou . ) So also in siV£, 
 δλΛί, εύρε, (λαβε, Ιδε\ Attic.) 2. Participles in ώ$ and tig ; 
 and those in είς, kg, kg, vg, from verbs in μι, ; as, τετυφως, 
 Twxsig, διδ&$, &c. 
 
 II. Accent on the Penult. 1. All Infinitives in ναι ; as, 
 τυ^ναι, τετυφε'ναι, except those in ε'μεναι of the Doric form. 
 2. infinitive and Participle of the Perfect passive; as, τε- 
 τίφβαι, τετυμμενο^, (but if a letter of the Participle has been 
 dropped, the accent is thrown back ; as,, δεμένος for δεδε- 
 ypivog.) 3. The Infinitive of the 2d Aorist Middle ; as, rutfsV- 
 6on. 4. Infinitive of the 1st Aorist active, and the Optative 
 terminations in αι and οι ; as, φυλάξαι, φυλάττοι.* 
 
 Change of place in the accent, from so?ne change or pecu- 
 liarity in the tvord. 
 
 1* When an accent is cut off by Apostrophe, the last syl- 
 lable which remains, receives the acute accent, except in 
 Prepositions and the Conjunction άλλα ; as, τα ieiV IVtj, for 
 τα δεινά £Vtj. 
 
 2. Prepositions placed after the words which they gov- 
 ern, throw back the accent ; as, 0ε* ομγό. .Except άνα and 
 δια, to distinguish them from άνα, the vocative of άναξ ; and 
 διά the accusative of Ζευς. 
 
 3. Prepositions used for Verbs compounded of them with 
 ειμί, throw back the accent ; as, evi for uystf7i. So άνα for 
 άνάατηώ. 
 
 4. On the contrary, when a verb loses its first syllable, 
 the acute is removed from the syllable dropped to the next 
 following ; as,s<pav (from έφαγαν,) φάν. If the syllable which 
 remains be long by nature, it receives the circumflex ; as, 
 
 Ιβΐ, βϊ• 
 
 The preceding Rules and Observations decide the ac- 
 cent of most words except particles, and the nominatives of 
 Nouns and Adjectives. As to these, the following rules 
 will be useful. 
 
 * When the penult in this case is long, it receives the circumflex in. 
 the infinitive. Thus we distinguish between παιδενσαι of the Infin., 
 παιδεύσαι of the Opt., and τταίΰενσαι of the Imperative Middle. 
 
l/j. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 throw 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 as, cc 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 L'-'T' " 
 
 
 
Appendix— Accents. 
 
 7. Verbals in τ u jrwp, κτ^τωρ. 
 
 a ειέ-ειοΰα-εν ; as, χαρίεις. 
 
 9. Adjectives in ω£η$ ; as, 'λιπώδη;. * 
 
 10. Verl rs in εος ; as, γρα^ττεος. 
 
 11. ( ο pi itives in ιων : πων, 
 
 12. quantity in axis ; as, fpitfaxif, -ττολλάκι^. 
 
 13. bs in όην ; as, Συλλήβδην. 
 
 To these are added the exceptions to Rule III. page 224. 
 
 Composition- 
 
 Compound word> in many instances, especially in adverbs, 
 retain the accent on the syllable where it stood in the sim- 
 ple ; as, αύτοφι, ουρανό^εν. In the following cases, however, 
 the accent is drawn back to the antipenult 
 
 ords compounded of ;, a, ευ, δυς, ίι, ομο, άρ7ι, 
 
 αντί, περί, tapa, ύ^ό, &:c ; as, αιίιΰΊας from *ιΐκϊΊός 9 δι'ψυχο^ from 
 ψυχή. 
 
 . ords compounded of two Adjectives ; as, φιλόοΌφο^ ; 
 of two Substantives ; as, ναυκΧηρο^; of Adjectives and Sub- 
 stantives ; as, (piXotf-op;; o£. 
 
 ENCLITICS. 
 
 - Certain words calie cs. throw back (iyxkivsuk, rest) 
 
 their accent on the preceding word. These are 
 
 1. Pronouns μου, μοι,' μ? : οΌυ, tfoi, (Τε ; ο£, οι, ε ; ο*φε, 
 -(Τφιν ; (Τφώε, (τφιβΊ, <Γφεα£ ; «π£, π. Indefinite in all its cases, 
 
 and in all the Dialects ; as, rs, τευ, tw. 
 
 2. Verbs ειμί and φημί, in the Present Indicative, except 
 the 2d person. 
 
 3. Adverbs, <ϊως. tfrj, rfoi, ττω, <πΌ#εν, πΌ<τε, unless used in- 
 terrogatively, when they receive the accent ; as, crw^ bow ? 
 
 4. Conjunctions,^, τε, κε. κεν, $ην, νυ, νυν, <ττερ, |α, το», and 
 5ε, inseparable ; as, <rk<fds y άλαίε, to the sea. 
 
 KVLES. 
 
 I. Enclitics throw back their accent on to the last syllable 
 of the preceding word, v. tepenult has the acute ac- 
 
 cent, or whose penult has the circumflex ; as, 
 rfkbi μοι. 
 
 II If the ord has any accent on the la 
 
 lable, or an penult, this serves for the enclitic; 
 
 as, uyar >ut if in t b be a 
 
 word of two ■ precedii iot sufficient, 
 
λρι» mlix - V Bfl 
 
 : as, λό- ; also 
 
 a*, coX- 
 λββ 6' tlfl 
 
 lll.ll last only υ 
 
 IV. 1 [H>- 
 
 \ . Λ!: '!,< 
 
 \ I 
 
 ,il, or follows ά>.> 
 
 PROSODY.• 
 
 \ ii prooui 
 
 ' It. 
 
 will 
 
 .a t »1«* in the '. 
 II and U λ\< and o, - . doubt- 
 
 ful. 
 
 I \ 
 
 . nature. 
 
 another 
 
 ν 
 
 rtt\dip%l 
 
 ■ 
 
 | ^ηχ? μ u I «fteva | <)r.;. 
 
 
όΟ Appendix — Prosody. 
 
 vowel or diphthong is sometimes, though rarely, shortened 
 before a consonant, especially a liquid ; as, Ει δε κεν | οίκαδ' » j 
 κωμαΓ φι | λην ες | «ττατρι&χ | γαιαν. 
 
 But 1. Csesural syllables, and monosyllables, begin- 
 ning a foot, remain long ; as, Κλέπτε νοω sirsr £ ΑταρελευβΈαΓ £δε 
 
 με flT£l(fel£. 
 
 2. The vowel remains long, when by being shortened, it 
 would require a subsequent long vowel or diphthong to be 
 short ; as, Σμιν^ευ sjVots τοι, &c. In this case, if the diph- 
 thong ευ were made short the subsequent diphthong ει like- 
 wise must be shortened to complete the foot. 
 
 3. When by apostrophe, a long vowel or diphthong is 
 made to end a word, it is not shortened. 
 
 II. Position. A short or doubtful vowel before two sin- 
 gle consonants, or a double consonant, is generally long by 
 position ; as, gsgas, rarov. #ολλα, κατά φρένα. 
 
 The vowel often continues long, though one of the con- 
 sonants has been dropped ; as, γίνομαι, which is for γιγνο- 
 μαι ; γϊνωΰχω, wjiich is for γιγνωΰχω ; τυψα£ for τυψαν$ ; μαρ- 
 τϋρ for μαρτυρά ; Αίας for Αιαν?£. 
 
 So where the Digamma* has been omitted ; as, μέλανος 
 oha for μέλανος Foiva. 
 
 Exception 1. A short vowel before a mute and a liquid, 
 or tf<r, xr, μν, is common ; as, 
 
 Μέτρα δε \ Τευγε 0e|oitfi. το|χαρ μετρον|ε^7ιν a|pitf7ov. 
 
 But a short vowel before a middle mute, (/:>, 7, or δ) fol- 
 lowed by λ, μ, ν, is long. 
 
 2. The vowel is not always long before <f and a conson- 
 ant, or λλ ; as, με7άλλα£. 
 
 ΏρΎ)\εόιΐερ\Ύ) κρω|£ει <7ΓΌλυ|φυνδ£ κο|ρωνη. 
 
 III. In hexameter verse, a short or doubtful vowel is 
 sometimes made long before a single consonant, par- 
 ticularly before a liquid ; as, tfapa ρη^μινι. tfprv έλθειν. 
 δφιν. 
 
 A vowel is sometimes made long before the digamma ; as, 
 Sffe h for *Fxs. 
 
 IV. When three short vowels come together, one must 
 be made long in heroic verse, for the sake of measure ; as, 
 
 'ά0ανατο£ ; Πρίαμι£η£ ; δια μεν. 
 
 V. When the article takes the apostrophe, or occasions 
 it in the beginning of the succeeding word, the remaining 
 
 * See Appendix No. I. 
 
ως τι όιι ts". 
 
 ά* «ν το λοιτον f Jtff^iiv. 
 
 \ ι 
 
 ι 
 
 \ 11 1 ιν \< ΓΜ 
 
 DOI L0. 
 
 are 
 
 «cl ίχρίνον, χρΓνομ£νο£, ft . , χίχρίχα, (χρίόην. 
 
 α ρ χος. 
 
 . £d4io£. 
 
 LRS. 
 
 ι 
 
 or *ιη<;1« ant, 
 
 1. a is made long in the p< mill , -αονος ; 
 
 -^aovo^. 
 tli. ;i -ωνος ; as, lU<sn6uv\ % ΤΙοόίώ & ω ν ς. 
 
 πι ι -*rr£ ; as, 
 
 jpArrtf, < 
 
 -αρος ; as, ΨΒοοβαμ&ν, ά^Λνωρ, 
 
 'ιοί ; as, iidxotfiof. 
 
 .>«y ; as, 
 Νίβομαι. 
 χ:ρα^ χρας % χαρ, ρα{, χ•ρόα£, tsaf^ag, 
 
 ■ 
 
 >•*•? ; aa, ΊϊρΓ^ν, 
 'Opiwtf. We have altio Ώ. . ? Hut \\e must 
 
 exc< 
 >" tl r-, -in*, -ilif ; as. 
 
 ο<$Γΐη, «noXiciK, coXTcj^. 
 
 % Bj mm fraMUjiiaiMi U ii a?* » c dl< J ι oootrt< ■ * 
 
£32 Appendix — Pros ody. 
 
 in diminutives in -i&ov, from pure genitives ; as from 
 ίμα7ιου, ίμα7Γ&ον. 
 
 in the penult of verbs in -ιω, -ιβω, -ινω ; as, τΓω, <rpr/3w, 
 «τνω ; as also irvsw, κίνεω. But the Attic tragic wri- 
 ters have -Γω, -Γνω ; as, 
 
 ΓΙ ι ι i 
 
 Νέων φ0Γνον7ων μείζον άρνυμαι κλεο£.. Iamb. Trim. 
 
 3. ι is common (i. e. either short or long) in the penult of 
 
 nouns in -/a, -iy\ ; as, καλία, or καλΓα. 
 
 4. υ is long in verbal nouns in -υμα, -υμο$, -u<njp, ~υ<τος, 
 
 -υ7ωρ ; as, λύμα. 
 in pronouns ; as, 'ΰμεις, 
 
 in the penult of verbs in -ιινω, -υρω, -υχω, -υμ» ; as, #λΰνω. 
 in adverbs in -υδον ; as, βοτρΰδον. 
 
 5. υ is common in the penult of verbs in -u«. 
 
 OF THE DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN FINAL SYLLABLES. 
 
 II. -α, -ι, u, in the end of a word, are for the most parfe 
 shortened j as, μουο*α, μελΓ, γ\νχϋ. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 1 . -α final is long in nouns in -εα, -δα, Sa ; as, &εα, Αη<5&, 
 
 Μαρ0α. Except άκανθα. 
 in the dual number ; as, #ροφη7α. 
 in polysyllables in -αια ; as, Σεληναια. 
 in -εια, from verbs in -ευω ; as, βασίλεια, a kingdom, but 
 
 βασίλεια, a queen. 
 in -ια ; as, κάλια. Except verbals in -τρία ; aSj-^aXrpia, 
 
 and δια, μια, tforvia. 
 in the vocative of nouns of the first declension from -ας: 
 
 as, Αινεία, from Αινείας. 
 in the feminines of adjectives in -ος $ as, δμοίά. 
 % in nouns in -pa, when a diphthong does not precede ; as, 
 
 ήμεροι. Except 'αχκυρά, γέφυρα, Κέρκυρα, ολλυρα, (Γκο- 
 
 λο-τενίρα, <7φυρα\ τανα^ρά ; and compounds from με- 
 
 7ρον*; as, ^εωμε7ρά. 
 in poetic vocatives ; as, Παλλα for Παλλάς. 
 
 2. -ι final is long in the names of letters ; as, *T, 
 
 3. -u final is long in names of letters ; as, μο. 
 in verbs in -υμι ; as, ίφο. 
 
 in με7αξύ and yptJ. 
 
follow• 
 il, are (ι \ M, 
 
 μιλάν, «oXJv, — μβ/ 
 
 long in masculine! ; a<, Ti7d* ; and «rdv, wl 
 nol 
 .. Datives are long ; as, 
 
 :is, dvdv. 
 
 Of in χΑρ, ψ*ρ is long short. 
 
 -ας. 
 
 in noun < nsion ; as, μ*υ#Α{ . 
 
 Ι, π/ψΛ$, cv4o 
 
 III ra(«:. Cif. 
 
 8. 1*τ/μ**ς> 
 
 in ι 
 
 ; a». λί£• But U 
 finite 
 
 -dof ; a> 
 Χνημίδ* ; ό W'X" 
 
 the 
 last ; η ας. 
 
^34 
 
 Appendix — Prosody. 
 
 10. -υν is long in nouns in-uv, -υνος ; as, μο0 , σ'θν,μοσ , 0'υνο£. 
 
 in nouns which have two terminations in the nomina- 
 tive ; as, φορκον, or φορκυ£. 
 
 in accusatives in -υν, from -υς ; as, οφρΰν from όφρΰ£. 
 
 in the ultimate of verbs in -υμ» ; as, £φΰν. 
 in vjv, now. But the enclitic vuv is short. 
 
 11. -us is long in monosyllables ; as, μϋς. 
 in nouns which have two terminations in the nomina- 
 tive ; as, φορκΰ£, or φορκυν. 
 in nouns which have -uv7o£, or -ος pure in the genitive ; 
 
 as, δειχνΌς, δειχνυνΊος ; όφρΰ£, οφρύος. 
 in κωμθ£, χωμυΰος. 
 in the ultimate of verbs in -υμι ; as, ίφνς. 
 
 OF THE DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN THE OBLIQUE CASES OF NOUNS 
 THAT INCREASE. 
 
 1. The quantity of the nominative remains in the ob- 
 lique cases ; as, Ti7&v, Tiravos ; ζευγνϋς, ζευγνΰΜ j κνημΓ£, κνη- 
 ΐμδος. 
 
 Except -up ; as, μαρτΰρ, μαρ7υρο£. 
 
 2. Those nouns, which are long by position in the nom- 
 inative, are shortened in the oblique cases ; as, αύ\αξ, αύ- 
 λακο£. 
 
 Except nouns in -αξ pure ; as, νεαξ, νε&χος. 
 
 also SwpajJ, ιερα|, κνωία|, κορδα|, λα/οραξ, ο»α|, £αξ, Cup- 
 φαξ, φεναξ ; with most in -ιψ, -irfog ; as, |ιψ, £rtfo£ ; 
 and -ιξ, -lyos, or -ικο$, as, μα<Λξ, μαότϊγος, φοίνιξ, φοινΓ- 
 κο£ ; to which add /ρυψ, ^υψ. 
 
 3. A pure genitive from a «long nominative is varied ; as 
 Jpu£, £ρϋο£, or £ρΰο£. 
 
 4. The penult of the dative plural, in nouns which are 
 contracted, is short ; as, οτατραβΊ. 
 
 OF THE DOUBTFUL VOWELS IN THE FLEXIONS OF VERBS. 
 
 a and u, before -Cot in participles, and before -Ci every- 
 where, are long ; as, τυψαο'α, ieixvotfa, ίεικνΟΟΊ.* 
 
 * It is to be understood that a, <, v, arc short in verbs ; unless it be 
 otherwise specified in the rules. 
 
Appendix — Prosody . ■ I 
 
 pau 'ζω, 
 
 ;— άρταζω, αρ*α ' 
 
 as, rf|MPw y 
 
 Tin sb•. 
 
 A doobifi has tin in the 
 
 d, Μ in tht> prittik as, 
 
 \ - jv, cGci|- 
 
 the 
 id puiddb 
 null, when long on io ih 
 
 Λ^ω. βίθ\άφα. l.\ 
 £ΐψω, ^ji^a. 
 
 |x nult Ion ;le ; as, 
 
 ι a Ί of an argument, are ma» as, 
 
 ΒΡΕ* ι ν ι κιίι« ( at. 
 
 nnles> 
 
 ; as, 
 
 as, oil*. 
 
 of, jupoj. 
 
 >Titra 
 Ml. 
 
 r Mr. 
 Tin λ!/ 
 
236 Appendix — Prosody. 
 
 and adverbs, is long ; as, oirwfr, vuvr, (contrary to Rule II.) 
 but, dative plural, τοι/Ιοιατ. 
 
 IONIC. 
 
 The comparative neuter ~jov, which the Attic makes long, 
 is shortened ; as, καλλΓον, Ion. καλλΓον, Attic. 
 
 In adjectives which signify time, t is made long ; as, oVw- 
 
 pTV0£. 
 
 In verbs, α Ionic, where -<ft does not follow, is shortened ; 
 as, έάται for >jv7ai. 
 
 DORIC AND iEOLIC. 
 
 a Doric is made long : α iEolic is shortened ; as, A/- 
 
 νεια, D. for Αίνειου ; — 'irftfola* Mo\. for \**ο]ν\ς • α/χμηταων, 
 D. for α/χμητων ; — νυμφα, iEol. for νύμφη ; έτυφάσ'αν, iEol. for 
 ε7νψαν ; νυμφά$, iEol. for νυμφα£, accu, plur. 
 
 POETIC LICENSE. 
 
 A short and a long vowel, forming two syllables, fre- 
 quently coalesce, and are pronounced as one syllable. In 
 Homer this takes place only in the same word, especially 
 in the genitive of the first declension in -εω, regularly ; as 
 Πηληϊαδ?ω Άχιληο£ ; as also in the genitive plural of the 
 first declension in -εων ; as Θετις δ ουληβετ' εφετμέων. Thus 
 also §εος ι as υμιν μεν $?ο» δοιεν. Χρι>(Τ?ο3 άνα (Τκη^τρω, II. ά, 
 15, χρυο^ον (Γκη^τρον έχοντα, Od.X', 568. νεικ?α και ^ηριν 
 δφελλοι^, Hes. "Εργ. 33. Thus also, #ελεκ?α£, II. ψ, 114. 
 /βαβΊλη^, H«s. "Epy. 263. <τοκη?£, Horn. Η. in Cer. 137. 
 Here the syllable which is contracted from two sylla- 
 bles, is long, as Πηληιαδεω, — νεικεα, — <ττε\εχεας. Likewise 
 the following after Ιω£,Ιω$ 'ο ταιΛΓ ώρμαινε, II. α'. 193. 
 ίως τ ε~*ε\ύον, Od. η, 280. ίως Ίγω <ττερι κείνα, Od. δ', 90. In 
 Attic writers this takes place sometimes in certain words, 
 as in Ssos, which is generally a monosyllable ; in θώρακα, 
 which is commonly a trisyllable . Sometimes, however, 
 two words are thus contracted ; as, εγώ ου, two syllables ; 
 μή αλλά, two syllables ; μή ου, a monosyllable. 
 
 The 'aptfis makes a short syllable long ; as,* 
 
 ,. I I i I . I 
 
 Αιδοιος τε μοι εόιϊι φιλ£ εκυρ£ οεινο^ τε. 
 
 * Arsis means the elevation of voice, which in Hexameter verse is 
 always upon the first syllable of a foot. We find, but very rarely, a 
 short syllable lengthened at the end of a foot ; as, 
 
 I I I I, I 
 
 Τη <$' m μεν Γορ/ω β\ο4υρΜϊς εανεφανωτο". 
 
I 
 
 is, Mm 
 
 , if \*μαί , 
 . Ί*ρα6ον ,^ον. 
 
 II ϋ f a 
 
 ill 
 ι di| 
 
 for 
 
 l\ I -ie; 
 
 :"re ; 
 I 
 
 ΟΓ ι 
 
 three, and 
 
 The Dissyllables arc four. 
 
 to*. 
 
 Trod.• " *ωμα. 
 
 ι JViisyll 
 Tribrach, . " *•λιμο*. 
 
 στα. 
 
 t> • 
 
 |M9riNfl 
 
 Λ in; " $αλα**α. 
 
 TAr Tvtrat rem. 
 
 
238 
 
 Appendix — Prosody , 
 
 Antipastic, 
 Ionic a majore, 
 Ionic a nnnore 
 Paeon first, 
 Paeon second, 
 Paeon third, 
 Paeon fourth, 
 Epitrite first, 
 Epitrite second 
 Epitrite third, 
 Epetrite fourth 
 
 αμάρτημα. 
 
 κοσμήτορα. 
 
 πτκΒονΒχψν,ς. 
 
 atfrpo> o/o£. 
 
 άνα|ιο£. 
 
 ανάθημα. 
 
 αμαρτωλή* 
 ανδρ%φοντης. 
 ευρύ•? . : 
 λωρητηρα. 
 
 OF METRES. 
 
 A metre consists properly of two feet, because in beating 
 time, the foot was raised once in two feet. But by metres 
 is generally understood a verse, a stanza, or a system of 
 verses. 
 
 Of metres there are nine species, 
 
 Composed of simple feet, that is feet of two or three 
 syllables. 
 
 1. Dactylic, 3. Tambic, 
 
 2. Anapestic, 4. Trochaic. 
 Composed of compound feet, that is feet of four syllables. 
 
 5. Ionic a majore, 8. Antipastic, 
 
 6. Ionic a minore, 9. Paeonic. 
 
 7. Choriambic, m 
 
 These metres take their names from the feet, of which 
 they are principally composed. 
 
 The final syllable of every verse is in different, or may be 
 reckoned doubtful. 
 
 DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERSE. 
 
 Hexameter. 
 The hexameter, or heroic verse, consists of six feet. Of 
 these, the fifth is a dactyle, and the sixth a spondee ; all 
 the rest may be either dactyles or spondees ; as, 
 
 Λυ3Όμε|νο$ τε 6υ\γαίροί φε|ρων τ' ά#ε jpsirfi α|*Όΐνα. 
 A spondee is frequently found in the fifth place ; whence, 
 the verse is called spondaic ; as, 
 
 Σ7εμμα? έ|χων εν|χερ<ην ||κηοολ*| Άτολλ|ωνο£. 
 The spondaic is used when any thing grave, slow, large, 
 or sad, is expressed. It has commonly, though not always 
 
Appendix — Prosody, 
 
 λΟ Court! Mei 
 
 «it t: 
 
 \\ ! 
 I 
 
 in the word to 
 
 Casunt ; 
 
 Τον (Γ aca|u 
 
 Hen tl 
 
 When a no iturc of 
 
 the caesura, and is ol ug, 
 
 Thi 
 
 the form• 
 
 ra ; the latter, a! 
 
 another ea-suia : 
 
 I h νο\δων a.ps\Tqg |*7e ^a|Xai<ffirO<ri 
 
 ANACK1. 
 
 Tli eontic, or Iambic D r with a caesura, t 
 
 sists of three Ian 
 
 The first foot may be a Spon lead of an Iaml» 
 
 θωρττχΊόΗτως |'Αχιλλ|ευς. 
 
 measure are tin . 7th, Mb, 10th, 1 1 
 
 on, in the < JoUecfc 
 Tl•• totber β • which if \na- 
 
 ting of a pyrrhic, two Jee : 
 
 th, I lth, [4th 
 
 oo, 
 
 .v a|Slis^c|a Πη|λτ. ryg^\ 
 
 I a fuller ft 
 
VII. 
 PARTICLES. 
 
 The particles may be conveniently distributed into the 
 following classes, viz : Those which denote, 
 
 1 . Certainty or confirmation ; Jj, certainly, truly ; μεν7οι, 
 assuredly, indeed ; η'ε'ρ, altogether ; δη, μήν, and ys, which 
 are thus distinguished. Δή strongly asserts what the speak- 
 er considers as already established ; μήν goes on to press 
 the assertion, without relaxing as to what has preceded ; 
 ys asserts with & limit at ι on, yielding as to the past or other 
 things, but insisting upon this. Hence it is applied to an 
 individual object or part, when considered in reference to 
 a whole, or to a greater number ; as, εγωγζ, I for my part, 
 or at least. Thus Plato says, "every where, cert inly, 
 [δη] men will maintain peace by means of laws." The 
 other replies, «ττολλήν γ ε 4ί much at least." Plato proceeds, 
 41 there being no contests among them, there certainly [μήν] 
 is no danger, lest, Sic." After interrogations following a 
 negative reply of the opposite party, μ^ν signifies then ; as, 
 τ (ς μ?; ν, who then ? 
 
 To δη is joined tfs, [δγ**] denoting certainly, to wit ; but in 
 some cases the που which marks uncertainty, diminishes the 
 force οΐδ-η, and the sense is perhaps. 
 
 2. Negation. This is expressed by oJ and μή with their 
 derivatives, but with this distinction in their use, that oa 
 conveys a direct, independent negation ; as, sx Οε'λω, i will 
 not ; οί>χ itfri ; is it not? thus representing things in their 
 actual relations. Μή is joined to hypothetical and depend- 
 ent propositions ; as, χκ λήψομαι. εϊ μ?) tfC xs\s'sig, 1 will not 
 receive it, unless you command me. It is, therefore, al- 
 ways used after ει, ψ. εάν, δ7άν, έτειναν, ξως^ and other words, 
 which represent a thing not as actual, but conditional. To 
 ενεί and stfsiOr.. since, after that, ου is joined, because an ac- 
 tual state of things is denoted by those words. 
 £g, οφρα, oVw£, ώ<τ7ε, which denote design, and are condi- 
 tional, μή is used. 
 
 In sentences expressing a wish, prayer, intention, pro- 
 hibition, &c. some preceding clause may generaUv be sup- 
 plied, which shows their dependent character : and so like- 
 
Appendix— i\i rt ι< / 
 
 se Participles. The strength of a negate 
 
 «we, and ούίε^τώ^ε, the former extefiding the m gation 
 to all time, both past and future ; the latter lion 
 gation to past time, by the force of the includ 
 
 Specification, ale, to wit, as, for example ; 
 και, especially ; μάλι<τ7α is, above all. 
 
 4. Hypothesis or Condition, ei, and sV 
 ference between these words may be thus stated. 1 
 to a condition which is merely conceived of as sup 
 εάν looks forward to the supposed case, as about to 
 ded by the result. Thus ei eitfi βωμοί, fief/ y.oj θεοί, if 1 
 are altars, there are also Gods. Here the case is m 
 supposed, without assuming any thing as to the fact, wheth- 
 er there are altars or not. 'Εάν ώοΊ βωμοί, would denote. 
 ;ς if it should prove that there are altars," Lc. \. 
 
 vslai denotes, ' h 1 make this supposition — whether it be true 
 or false, I do not assert ; 5> εάν <r*7o γίνηται denotes, k * 1 make 
 this supposition — the result will show, whether it be correct 
 or not." Ει, therefore, relates wholly to the intellectual 
 conception, and εάν to our experience of the event. 
 
 5. Desire, eUs, Oh that ! πως αν, would that ! 
 
 6. Interrogation, αρα, is it that ? r n whether is it .' 
 losing its negative force, becomes a strong interrogation; as, 
 μή 0/51, dost thou suppose ? μων compounded of μή and £v, re- 
 tains the force of both particles ; "is it then ?" *o7s, whin : 
 wg, how ? sxSv, is it not then ? The latter word frequently 
 loses its interrogative character and denotes tfc therefore." 
 To interrogations, the enclitic irors gives an air of surprize 
 or admiration ; as, tig «tots sVtjv οΖτος, who can this be? 
 
 7. Correspondence, μεν — όε, on the one side —on the 
 other ; as, συ μεν άκουες, ου όυνί^ς οϊ, on the one hand you 
 hear, but on the other you do not understand. In many 
 cases μεν stands alone, without δε, or Si without μ;ν ; but in 
 such cases there seems to be an implied reference to the 
 corresponding particle. In such cases, μεν is commonly 
 rendered by indeed, and 5s by but. 
 
 8- Conjunction, χα/, and -ε, have the same relatio; 
 each other, as ct and qu<> in Latin; ri — χαί, signifies ," not on- 
 ly — but also." 
 
 9. Difference or Contrast, αλλά, but. In ma ι 
 the idea to which αλλά is opposed, is not expressed in form, 
 but is implied or anticipated : us exp pposition less 
 
 strongly than αλλά, and is often used merely 
 of transition, where no other particle could be introdt] 
 to avoid the entire want of connexion betw( 
 sentences. !ti^ then rendered by and or 
 
Appendix — Partkl• 
 
 10. Uncertainty. An uncertain event may be either pos 
 «iblc, or dependent on some other event, or likely to take 
 place, or highly probable. Possibility is expressed by ϊ<ϊως, 
 dependence by αν, (Poetic xs or κεν), verisimilitude by ατού, 
 probability by ts. Each of these words might have its place, 
 ibr example, in the following line. 
 
 tfJv TS 5ϋ' ερχβμενω, και Η <S ω ς tfpo ο του ίνοηο'εν. 
 * - When two are associated, one perchance sees more than 
 the other/' Here possibility alone is asserted, without 
 any opinion as to the fact. Had it been stated as a fact, 
 no particle would have been used, but simply the word:- *rpo 
 ο του gvo'/jtfsv. 
 
 (SOv ts δύ* έρχομΞνω, και' κ ε ν tfpo ο του ενοηίεν, 
 signifies that one ?nay or might, (as some event shall turn,) 
 see more than the other. If that condition were taken 
 away, and the event decided, the speaker would say, ττάν- 
 τως «ττρό ο του ένόη^εν, one, beyond all question, sees more 
 than the other, tf-jv τε <5u' έρχομένω, και ^ου tfpo ο του ivorrfsv 
 nines " it is Z/Ax'Zy that one, &c." ; the mind of the speak 
 er inclines to that belief. Had the fact been certain, he 
 would have said, η £η «rpo ο του £vorjtfsv, one certainly sees 
 more than the other. Finally the words actually used by the 
 Poet, Cjv τε <5j' ερχομένω, και τ ε tfpo ο του ένόηα'εν, signify that 
 when two are associated, one most probably sees more than 
 the other ; though not that the fact is necessarily so, which 
 would be expressed by άναγχαίως tfpo ο τον ένόηο'εν.* 
 
 11. Disjunction of particulars, vj — η 4 either — or ; αλλ' η 
 — τ η but either — or : hypothetical disjunction, εΠε — είτε, 
 whether this — or that : negative disjunction, kVs — i' -τε, nei- 
 ther — nor. 
 
 12. Exception, *τλήν, except ; ει μή, εάν μή, unless ; άλλ' 
 mdess ; καί εί, καν unless, even if. 
 
 13. Comparison, ου7ω£, thus ; sots, as ; ως, [Ad•] as, so as, 
 as if; oVojs, as : ως gives strength to the superlative and 
 sometimes to the positive ; as, ω£τάχι<τ7α, as soon as possi- 
 ble ; ωςά'Κγ,έάς, certainly. In some instances, ως is render- 
 ed by "about. ;" as, ώ^τεα'σ'εράκοντα, about, i. e. [as it were] 
 forty : ofc, [with the accent] is used by the Poets for ουΊως, 
 thus, and by prose writers in the phrases κα; cjs, and thus, 
 
 2g nor liius. 
 11. Reason or Cause of a thing ; άτε from its appropriate 
 iee οι specif cation, is often used to specify the cause oi 
 . thing ; a?, υ.τΐ ου0ενο£ έ<7πβάλλον7ο£, since or because [β* 
 it was the fact that] no one raised the price. 
 
 rmann de particula &v 
 

 
 I 
 
 ■ 
 
 nil 
 
 ', And 
 
 It bi 
 
 ill ciu*« ι 
 
14 i Ippendix — Particles. 
 
 ίνα τί, denotes, wherefore, i. e. in order that what I [should 
 take place] 'Ίνα is sometimes used in the sense of wtfrs, 
 so that, denoting the result, but not an intention ; as, r t v tfa- 
 ρακεκαλυμμί'νον άττ' αύ7ω, ϊν α μή αίύόωνΊαι αυ7ό, it was cover- 
 ed from them, so that [not, in order that] they could not see 
 it. 'Ίνα is often an adverb of place, where. "Οφρα, that, 
 is used only by the Poets. 
 
 'ίΐς, that, in order that, is prefixed to the Subjunctive, 
 Optative, or Future Indicative ; and hence ως ri, why, i. e. 
 that what ? [may be done] ως is likewise used in the sense of 
 ftfrs, so that, and has sometimes,though more rarely, the cau- 
 sal signification^/br or since. With the Optative, it has the 
 sense of, would God, or I could wish. ι 'Ονως, that, in order 
 that ; όπως τι, why ? 
 
 "Ωανε has rarely the sense of the final cause, [in order 
 that,] but denotes the result, so that, and hence is frequent- 
 ly rendered by "therefore," and corresponds nearly to ouv. 
 
 16. Inference or Conclusion. "Αρα, therefore, conse- 
 quently, is used in the successive steps of a train of reason- 
 ing, in the rapidity of thought, the inference is sometimes 
 made before the reason has been given. Its other uses will 
 be given below. 
 
 Ouv, wherefore, differs from άρα, in drawing the final con- 
 clusion, and bringing the subject to a close, in view of all 
 that has been said. Its other uses will be given below. 
 
 Ouxeuv is properly a negative inference, iC is it not there- 
 fore so?" but often loses its character of negation, and de- 
 notes, " therefore." 
 
 Toi signifies the same as τούτω, for this thing, for this rea- 
 son, therefore. Ύοιγάρ is compounded of to», ys, and άρα, 
 the first of which assigns a reason, the second considers it 
 individually,* and the third draws the inference ; when sv 
 is add [rotyapouv] the ouv brings the whole to a conclusion, 
 and applies it to the case in hand ; " wherefore, since these 
 things, then, are so." 
 
 Nu or νυν, like now in English, properly denotes time, 
 and is used, chiefly by the Poets, as a particle of inference. 
 
 Toivuv, therefore, noro therefore, much the same with ouv. 
 
 17. Indefiniteness- TLots joined to indefinites, either 
 adds, like ennque in Latin, to their indefinite character ; as 
 hrtiia ίοτ' itfrlvavrr) of what kind soever it may be•; or in 
 case of doubt shows the interest and Bnxiety of the speak- 
 er ; as sWs μοι, τίνος *r ο τέ \ tell me, whose then is it ? 
 
 1 As in εγωγε, I for my part. 
 
w 
 
 hi 
 
 I 
 
 With t 
 
 / 
 ■ 
 
 US* of 
 
Appendix — Pc r 'cles. 
 
 6. Denoting hesitation or modesty. The most positive 
 statements often take αν, expressing hesitation or modesty, 
 by the contingent turn given to the sentence; as, ουκ αν 
 ο/δα, I [should] hardly know ; ως αν μοι δόκη, as it seems 
 [would seem] to me• When αν is repeated it may be 
 used in different senses, or it may be repeated to impress 
 more strongly the sense of contingency. 
 
 "Αρα properly signifies 4i in the nature, or regular course 
 of things."' Hence it is used, 
 
 1. In drawing inferences; " consequently," " therefore." 
 
 2. To express certainty, as ως άρα εφλυάρουμεν how truly 
 did we trifle. Sometimes ironically ; as ως άρ&εγω, as if I 
 forsooth, &c. 
 
 3. To denote what naturally follows in the order of time 
 or events ; as, " when the tenth day appeared, toV ά £ 
 έ£έφ$ρον, then they of course bore away the body of Hector 
 with tears." 
 
 4. In making transitions to what naturally follows in the 
 progress of thought ; ως εφατ', οι δ'άρα<τάντε£ 'ε^/αχον, thus 
 he spoke, and they all then shouted applause. Hence άρα 
 often begins a sentence with the signification of μ£ν ουν or 
 μέν δη wherefore, with reference to something which has 
 gone before. 
 
 5. With ει, εάν &c- to express a conjecture ; as, ει 'άρα 
 δύνονται, if indeed (i. e. in the course of things) they can. In 
 such cases 'άρα retains its appropriate meaning. 
 
 Γε, which confirms or urges the particular object in view, 
 (" at least," " certainly," •'' truly,") has sometimes the 
 sense of μάλιστα, chiefly ; and is used in interrogations, ex- 
 pressions of admiration, kc. to increase their force. 
 
 Γουν (ys ουν) at least, even, for., yet. 
 
 Δη from ηδγι\ as, an adverb signifies now. When join- 
 ed to vCv it denotes, in respect to present time " this very 
 moment ;" as, vCv ηδ% μαχητεον we must fight this moment. 
 In connection with verbs in the preterite, it denotes "just 
 now ;" as tfspi £5v νυν ηδη Σωκράτης ε\εγε, of which Socrates 
 was just now speaking. As a Conjunction, it retains the 
 sense of now, 
 
 1 . In exhorting, r.s \iyi δή, come now, read. 
 
 2. In question:-, indicating the earnestness of the speak- 
 er, and his desire of an immediate answer,<n δη ; Why, now ? 
 τα τοΓα δη ταύτα ; What, now, are these ? 
 
 3. in expressing admiration, when joined with #οτε, as 
 τί δ /jcor; τούτων ; why, now, these ? 
 
 4 In commencing a subject ; as 'Ωδε δ) σ^οττωμεν owrt 
 Now, let us consider it in this way. 
 

 ms 
 
 3ΠΙΟ 
 
 ι Dnwfl 
 ( 
 
 or 
 
 : as 
 
 ill. 
 Μ 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Orthography, • page 1 to 7 
 
 Etymology.— Article, -• - ' - 8 
 
 Noun, ..... 9—23 
 
 Irregular Nouns, - 23 — 26 
 
 Patronymics. — Diminutives, - - 26, 27 
 
 Adjectives, - - 27—38 
 
 Numerals, ..... 39 — 4] 
 
 Pronouns, .... 49 — 46 
 
 Verbs ; — Tenses, &c. - - - 46 — 54 
 
 Moods, .... 54—62 
 
 Barytone Verbs — Conjugation, &c. - 63 — 71 
 
 Contract Verbs — Conjugation, &c. - - 72 — 76 
 
 Reduplication and Argument, - - 76 — 80 
 
 Formation of the Tenses, - - 81 — 9i 
 
 Verbs in μι, ... - 91 — 97 
 
 Irregular Verbs in μι, - - -97 — 100 
 
 Defective or Anomalous Verbs, - - 100 — 112 
 
 Adverbs, - - - - 113, 114 
 
 Syntax — Agreement, - - - 114 — 118 
 
 Relative and Article, - - 118—122 
 
 Government of Genitive, - - 122 — 126 
 
 of Dative, - - 126, 127 
 
 of Accusative, - - - . 127, 128 
 
 of Substantives, - - 128,129 
 
 of Adjectives, - . - 129—132 
 
 of Verbs Genitive, - 133—138 
 
 ofDative, - - 138—140 
 
 of Accusative, - 140,141 
 
 of Passive Voice, - - 141, 142 
 
 of impersonal Verbs, - 142 
 
 of Infinitive and Participle, - 143 — 148 
 
 Construction of Circumstances; - 148 — 150 
 
 Synecdoche and Case Absolute, - - 150, 151 
 
 Case of Comparative, - - , 151 
 
 Government of Adverbs — Place, &c. - 152 — 154 
 
 Conjunction — Particles — Preposition, - 154 — 168 
 
 Appendix I. Digamma, - - 169 — 173 
 
 IT. Subscript lota. - - 173, 174 
 
 III. Article, - - - 174— 100 
 
 IV. Dialer - - 190- 
 
 V. Accents, 
 
 VI. Prosody, - - —239 
 
 VII. Particles, - - - 240—247 
 

IS 
 
LlBRftRV OF CONGRESS 
 
 003 038 377 1